diff options
Diffstat (limited to '23074.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 23074.txt | 12709 |
1 files changed, 12709 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/23074.txt b/23074.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9495bd --- /dev/null +++ b/23074.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12709 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Voyage round the World, by W.H.G. Kingston + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: A Voyage round the World + A book for boys + +Author: W.H.G. Kingston + +Release Date: October 17, 2007 [EBook #23074] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +A Voyage round the World, A book for boys, by W.H.G. Kingston. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +Here is a sort of compendium of all the excitements that befall +Kingston's young heroes. Swimming episodes of various kinds, serpents, +unfriendly savages, and unexpected coincidences, have all been put +together here, to make a well-written book, that you will find quite +amusing and interesting. Recommended. + +Makes a good audiobook, too. + +________________________________________________________________________ + +A VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, A BOOK FOR BOYS, BY W.H.G. KINGSTON. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +MY HOME, AND HOW I LEFT IT. + +The day arrived. A post-chaise stood in front of the old grey +manor-house. I have it all before me. The pointed gables--the +high-pitched, dark weather; stained roof--the numberless latticed +windows--the moat, now dry, which had once served to keep out a body of +Cromwell's horse--the tall elms, which had nestled many a generation of +rooks--the clump of beech trees, and the venerable wide-spreading oak-- +the broad gravelled court on one side, and the velvety lawn on the +other, sloping away down to the fine, large, deep fish-pond, whose +waters, on which I had obtained my first nautical experiences, as seen +through the green foliage, were sparkling brighter than ever under the +deep blue of the summer sky. + +At the hall door were assembled all those I loved on earth--and dearly, +too, I loved them. My mother, as good and kind a mother as ever nursed +a somewhat numerous and noisy progeny; my sisters, dear, sweet, good +girls; and half-a-dozen brothers, honest, generous, capital fellows; our +father, too--such a father!--we always agreed that no one could come up +to him. Other fellows might have very good fathers, but they were not +equal to him! He could be just like one of us at cricket, or out +fishing, or shooting, and yet he was always right, and there was not a +finer-looking gentleman in the county, and that every one said. We were +all at home for the Midsummer holidays--that is to say, we boys; our +mother was not a person to let her girls go to school. Who could say +that we were not met for the last time in our lives? + +I was the third of the boys. Two of our sisters were older than any of +us. I loved them, and they all loved me. Not that we ever talked about +that; I knew it and felt it, and yet I was going to leave them by my own +express wish. + +I was not what is called a studious boy. I was fond of reading, and I +read all the books of voyages and travels I could lay hands on, and +before long began to wish to go and see with my own eyes what I had read +about. My brothers were fond of shooting and fishing and rowing, and so +was I; but I thought shooting tigers and lions and elephants, and +fishing for whales, and sailing over the salt ocean, would be much +grander work than killing partridges, catching perch, or rowing about +our pond in a punt. I do not know that my imaginings and wishes, ardent +as they grew, would ever have produced any definite form of action, had +not an old schoolfellow of our father's, called Captain Frankland, about +a year before the day I speak of, come to our house. As soon as I knew +he was coming I was very eager to see him, for I heard our father tell +our mother that there was scarcely a part of the world he had not +visited, and that he was looked upon as a first-rate navigator, and a +most scientific seaman. He had been in the navy during the war-time, +but peace came before he was made a lieutenant; and believing that he +should not there find sufficient employment for his energies, he had +quitted it and entered the merchant-service. While in command of a +whaler, he had been far towards the north pole. He had traversed the +Antarctic seas, and had often visited India and China, and the islands +of the Pacific. Still, as money-making or idleness had never been his +aim, and his strength was unabated, he kept at sea when many men would +have sought for rest on shore. Such was the account my father gave of +him. + +How eagerly I waited for his coming! He had chosen the holidays on +purpose that he might see our father's young tribe, he wrote him word. +He was the very sort of person I longed to talk to; still it was with no +little awe that I thought of actually breakfasting, and dining, and +speaking day after day with one who had seen so much of the world, and +met with so many adventures. At last he arrived. I was not +disappointed in his appearance. He was a tall, thin, spare man, all +bone and muscle. His hair was almost white, and his features, which +were not a little weather-beaten, had, I thought, a most pleasant +expression. While, however, my brothers ran eagerly forward to meet +him, I hung back, watching him at a distance, like a bashful child. Had +he been one of England's greatest heroes, I could not have looked at him +with greater respect. "And that is the man," I thought, "who has sailed +over thousands and thousands of miles of water, and has seen Indians +dressed in feathers and shells, and negroes running wild in their native +woods, and Hottentots, and Esquimaux, and Chinese, and I do not know +what other strange people!" I saw my father look round for me, so at +last I went forward in time to be presented in my turn with the rest of +my brothers. Very soon the feeling of awe wore off, and I became the +most constant of his attendants wherever he wished to go. With the +greatest eagerness I used to listen to the accounts he gave our father +of his various adventures in the distant countries he had visited. My +brothers listened also; but while they would at length betake themselves +to other occupations, I remained his ever-attentive auditor. The +interest I exhibited in what he was saying attracted his attention, and +much pleased him, so that when I ventured to ask him questions, he both +answered them willingly and encouraged me to ask more. Thus we before +long became very great friends. + +"Should you like to go to sea, Harry?" said he to me one day, when he +had begun to talk of taking his departure. + +"With you, sir, indeed I should; there's nothing in the world I should +like so much," I answered. The tone of my voice and the expression of +my countenance showed him how much I was in earnest. + +"Very well, my boy. You are rather young just yet to rough it at sea, +and you will be the better for another year's schooling; but when I come +back from my next voyage, if you are in the same mind, and your father +is willing to let you go, I will take you to sea with me. I'll talk to +him about it if I have an opportunity." + +"Thank you, sir--thank you!" I exclaimed, almost choking with the +vehemence of my feelings; "it is what I have been longing for above all +things. Do, pray, tell my father, or he may suppose it is only a +passing fancy of mine, and may wish me to go into some other profession. +Still, he'll let me go with you--I know he will." + +Captain Frankland smiled at my eagerness, but he said not a word to +dissuade me from my wish. Perhaps he remembered his own feelings at my +age. Grown-up people are apt to forget how they thought and felt when +they were boys, which is the reason so few men win the confidence of the +young and manage them properly. The captain, on the contrary, seemed to +understand me thoroughly, and thus gained a complete influence over me. + +"I'll be ready to go when you come back," I added. + +"Don't be too sure of yourself, Harry," he answered. "I've seen many +people completely change their opinions in a year's time, and I shall +not be absent less than that. If you remain constant to your wish, +remember my promise; but if your fancy changes, you are free to follow +it as far as I am concerned." + +I thanked Captain Frankland over and over again for his kindness, and +certainly did not think that there was a possibility of my changing my +inclinations. So he went away, much to my regret, and I fancied that he +had not mentioned our conversation to my father. We all returned to +school, except our eldest brother, who went to college. I no longer +enjoyed school as I once did--I was looked upon as having become very +idle. My mind, however, was not idle, I know, for I was continually +thinking over the idea which had got possession of it. By allowing my +thoughts to rest on that idea, and that alone, the desire increased till +I persuaded myself that the only life I could possibly lead with +satisfaction was that of a life at sea. All this time the curious thing +was, that of the sea itself I practically knew nothing. Born and bred +in an inland county, my eyes had actually never rested on the wide +ocean. Still, I had formed a notion of what it was like; and I fancied +that a sailor was always wandering about from one wild country to +another, and going through a rapid succession of wonderful adventures. +I forgot all about those long voyages when ships are weeks and weeks +together out of sight of land, and the many weary and often anxious +hours which a seaman has to pass away; nor did I consider that he has +frequently the same voyage to make over and over again, the same lands +to visit, and the same people to see. However, though I looked with no +little pleasure on the idea of becoming a sailor, I had still greater +satisfaction in the anticipation of visiting strange and far-distant +lands, in meeting with adventures, and in becoming acquainted with the +various tribes of the human race. + +With the absorbing passion which now possessed me ruling every thought, +I could no longer properly fix my attention on my Latin and Greek books +and usual school-lessons; and as for nonsense, and even sense verses, I +abandoned all attempts at making them. I am ashamed to say that I +allowed others to do the work which passed as mine; and even though I +managed to present the required written exercises, I was constantly in +richly-deserved disgrace for the neglect of those tasks which no one +else could perform for me. I was decidedly wrong; I ought to have had +the right feeling and manliness to perform to the best of my power those +lessons which it was the master's duty to set me, and then I might with +a clear conscience have indulged freely in my own peculiar tastes. As +it was, when the Christmas holidays arrived, I was sent home with a +letter from the master containing severe complaints of my inattention +and negligence of my duties, while my brothers were complimented on the +progress they had made in their studies. The master told me he should +write, but our father received us all in the same affectionate way; and +as he said nothing on the matter, I hoped that he was not going to take +notice of it. + +The first joyous days of getting home had passed over, and New-Year's +Day come and gone, before he broached the subject. From his love and +kind heart, he would not before mar my boyish happiness. He then, +summoning me into his study, spoke seriously to me about my past +conduct. I frankly owned my fault, and confessed to him the true cause +of my idleness. From his answer I found, to my very great satisfaction, +that Captain Frankland had already talked to him about my wish to go to +sea, and had expressed his readiness to take me. + +"I cannot, however, allow you, my dear Harry, to leave school under the +present circumstances," said my father. "You must learn to obey your +superiors, and to command yourself, before you will be fit to go into +the world. Whatever course of life you pursue, you will have many +things to do which you will dislike, or in which you may from +inclination take no interest; but this will afford you but a poor excuse +for not doing your duty. What do you think the captain of a ship would +say to an officer who had not obeyed his orders, should the latter +remark to him, `Really, sir, I felt so little interest in the matter, or +I disliked it so very much, that I could not bring myself to perform the +work?' Yet this is what you have been doing, my boy. I will say no +more on the subject. You will go back to school at the end of the +holidays; and if I find that, from a sense of duty, you are attending, +to the best of your power, to the studies your master may select for +you, I will take your wishes into my very earnest consideration, and see +how I can best carry them out for your advantage." + +I felt how just, and kind, and considerate my father was, and I resolved +to the utmost to follow his advice. I shall never forget those +Christmas holidays. They were very, very happy ones. Our eldest +brother Jack, who was at college, was a very clever fellow, and put us +up to all sorts of fun. In doors and out of doors there was nothing he +did not think of. He never bullied, and wasn't a bit spoiled. He was +going to study at the bar, that he might better look after the family +property. James, the next, was the quiet one; he was preparing for the +Church. Then came our third sister, Mary. Julia and Isabella were +older than any of us. Mary was my favourite. There was nothing she +wouldn't do for me--or, for that matter, for any of us. She did not +like baiting our hooks when we were fishing, but still she did it when +we asked her; and I do really believe that the worms didn't feel half +the pain they otherwise would when handled by her fingers. She'd go out +with us rat-catching and badger-hunting, and yet, to see her in the +drawing-room, there wasn't a sweeter, softer, more feminine girl in the +county. When we were at school, she wrote us twice as many letters as +anybody else, and told us how the pony and the dogs were getting on; and +how old Martin had found a wasp's nest, which he was keeping for us to +blow up--and all that sort of thing. Willie and Georgie were at school +with me, and Herbert was going the next half, and after him were two +more girls, so that Mary had no companions of her own age, and that made +her, I suppose, stick so much more to us than the older ones did, who +were now young ladies--old enough to go to balls, and to talk when any +gentlemen called. + +I cannot stop to describe our amusements. I went to school with a more +hopeful, manly spirit than I ever did before, and to the astonishment of +Dr Summers, set to with a will at everything he gave me to do, and +before long was nearly up at the head of my class. I wished to please +my father, and to follow his advice, that I am sure of; but I confess +that I was powerfully influenced by another motive. From what he had +said, I saw that this was the surest way of obtaining the accomplishment +of my wishes. + +Hoops and driving had gone out, and cricket and marbles were in, and the +days were getting long and warm, when I received a letter from Mary, +saying that Captain Frankland had come home, and had written to our +father, but she did not know what had passed between them. I always +told Mary all I thought and wished; and though she cried very much at +the thoughts of my going away, yet she promised to help me as best she +could. How she was to help, I did not exactly know. I tried to console +her by promising to bring her back parrots without end from Africa, and +shawls from India, and fans and carved ivory bones from China, and +poisoned arrows, and darts, and tomahawks, and all sorts of dreadful +weapons, from America and the islands of the Pacific. Indeed, had I +fulfilled my promises to the letter, I could pretty well have loaded a +ship with my intended gifts. My father said nothing, and we all went +home together at the usual time. At the end of this half, a very +complimentary letter had preceded me. + +"I am glad to hear that Dr Summers is pleased with you, my dear boy," +said my father, and I thought his countenance wore a graver expression +than usual. "Tell me, are your wishes the same as when you last left +home?" + +I replied that I was as anxious as ever to go to sea. + +"I will not, then, thwart your inclination, Harry," he answered. "Your +mother and I would rather you had selected a profession which would have +kept you nearer to us. But you have chosen a fine line of life, and may +Heaven protect you in your career! I should have been glad, for some +reasons, to have had the power of sending you into the Royal Navy; but I +have no interest to get you in, and still less any to advance you in it. +The merchant-service should not be looked on as less noble and less +creditable a profession. It is one of the chief means by which +England's greatness and prosperity is maintained. In it your progress +and success will depend almost entirely on your own exertions. You must +also so conduct yourself that you may sustain to the utmost the credit +of the service, and, I doubt not, you will have no cause to regret +entering it. I might have wished to keep you longer at home, but I am +unwilling to miss the opportunity of sending you to sea under charge of +a commander of the high character and attainments possessed by Captain +Frankland. He, in the kindest way, tells me that he is ready to take +you; and he also informs me that a relative of mine is one of the +officers appointed to his ship, Silas Brand by name. You have heard as +speak of my good Cousin Martha, Mrs Brand; Silas is her only son. He +was a steady, good lad when I last heard of him before he went to sea, +and I daresay that you will find him a firm friend. At all events, I am +sure, from Captain Frankland's remarks, that he will prove a profitable +one. He tells me also that his proposed voyage will be one of very +great interest; that the owners of the ship have a variety of objects in +view; so that he expects to visit a number of interesting places during +the voyage, which is, in fact, to be completely round the world." + +"Round the World!" I exclaimed. "How delightful! And am I actually +going to sail all round the world in my first voyage? Well, I did not +expect anything so good as that. Isn't it a first-rate chance, papa?" + +"It may be very long before you return, my boy," replied my father. "I +trust, however, that you will proportionately profit by the voyage. +Captain Frankland says, that he hopes to make you something of a seaman +before you return. You will, I trust, make the best use of his +instructions." + +I promised that I would, and sincerely intended to keep my promise. So +it was finally settled that I was to go to sea, and few lads were ever +sent afloat under better auspices than I enjoyed. I cannot fully +describe the agitating sensations which passed through my bosom when I +began to reflect on the approaching consummation of my wishes. While my +heart beat with anticipated pleasure at the strange sights I was to +behold, I could not but contemplate with sorrow the thoughts of leaving +so many dear ones behind. Not that I for a moment hesitated what I +would do, but the sharp edge of the enjoyment I might have felt was +entirely blunted. Still, I went about talking with a keen relish of all +I was to see, and what I was to do, while the preparations for my outfit +were in progress; and I not a little excited the envy of my younger +brothers, and of some of the boys near us, when they heard that I was +starting on a voyage round the world. + +At last the chest was packed, and lashed on behind the post-chaise. A +few minutes more, and the old home which knew me would know me no more +for many a long day. Can I describe that parting? Still, all bore up +heroically. I did my best not to give way, but there was a hot, choking +sensation in my throat, as if a Thug from India had got his fatal noose +tight round my jugular vein; and a pulling away at the heart, as if the +fangs of a stout double tooth were firmly clenched in it, and a +strong-fisted dentist was hauling it out. My father and Jack were going +with me to see me on board. I believe Jack envied me, and wished that +he was going too, instead of having to pore over dusty parchments. My +mother folded me in her arms, and kept me there. That was the worst. +Still, I could not bear to break away. + +"Come, Harry," said my father, "we shall miss the train." He took me +gently by the shoulder, and guided me into the carriage. I took a last +kiss from Mary's dear lips as I passed her. "I shall be back to-morrow +evening, I hope," said he, following me. + +"I say, Harry, don't forget the bows and arrows you are to bring me from +the Tonga Islands!" sung out Willie. + +"Or the hunting-panther from South America!" cried Georgie. + +"Or the parrots from Africa!" exclaimed Mary through her tears. + +"Or the love-birds from India!" said Julia. + +"Or my ivory fan from China, young sailor boy!" said Isabella. + +"Don't forget the journal you are to keep, or the subjects I asked you +to note for me!" exclaimed the studious James. + +Thus, amid various shouts and exclamations of a similar character, the +moment Jack mounted on the box we drove off towards the nearest station +on the railway which was to convey us to Liverpool. My father said +nothing for some time, and I felt that I could not utter a word without +allowing my feelings to get the better of me. However, by the time we +reached the station, I had much recovered my spirits; and when once we +were in the railway, Jack had so much to talk about, and cut so many +jokes, that I became very happy, as he did not leave me a moment to +think about the dear home I had left. I have often since thought, when +I have seen people grumbling at home, or finding fault or quarrelling +with their brothers and sisters or parents, let them go away and get +knocked and kicked about the world, and they will have good reason to +value their own quiet home as they ought. + +I thought Liverpool a very fine city, with its large public buildings, +and its broad streets, and its churches, and its Sailors' Home, which I +visited, where sailors have a large smoking-hall, and dining-rooms, and +a lecture-room, and a chapel, and where some hundreds may each have a +little separate cabin to himself. I wish every port in the world, much +frequented by shipping, had a place of a similar character. Most of +all, I was struck with the docks, crowded with ships of great size, and, +indeed, craft of every description and nation; as also with its wide +quays and wharfs, and floating landing-stages, and steamers dashing in +and out, and running up and down the river in such a hurry, that they +looked as if they were conscious that they had to struggle for their +existence among the struggling human multitude of the place. We +inquired for the _Triton_. + +"There she is, with the blue Peter flying at the fore! She sails +to-night, don't she, Tom?" said a waterman whom we addressed. "Do you +want a boat, gintlemen?" + +My father said, "Yes;" and agreed with the man as to his fare. + +We stepped into his boat, and away we pulled towards my future home--the +good ship _Triton_. I had never seen a ship before, it must be +remembered. I had looked at pictures of them, so I was acquainted with +their shape; but I had formed no adequate idea of the size of a large +ship; and as the boat lay alongside of the _Triton_, and I looked up and +saw one of the officers standing at the gangway to receive us, it +appeared something like scaling the walls of a castle to climb up to the +deck. What should I have thought had the _Triton_ been a hundred and +twenty gun-ship, instead of a merchantman of 500 tons, for such was her +size! However, I then thought her a magnificent ship; she was indeed a +very fine one for her size. Side ropes being rigged, we soon gained her +deck. The captain was still on shore, but my father at once made out +Silas Brand. He was a shortish, rather thick-set, fair man, with a +roundish face and a somewhat florid complexion. He had light hair, with +largish whiskers, and he shaved his chin in harbour. I had to look at +him frequently, and to talk to him more than once, before I discovered +that his countenance showed much firmness and decision, and that his +smile betokened more than a good-natured, easy disposition. My father +had a good deal of talk with him, while Jack and I went round to see the +ship. In the course of our peregrinations, we entered what I found was +the captain's cabin. A lad of about my own age was sitting at a table, +with a book and slate before him. He turned round when the door opened, +and eyed me narrowly before he got up from his chair. Then, apparently +recollecting himself, he advanced towards us. + +"Are you the new youngster who is to sail with us?" said he, putting out +his hand. "My name is Gerard Frankland, though it is seldom people take +the trouble of calling me more than Jerry. My father told me to expect +you. I'm to look after you, and see you don't get into mischief, I +suppose. I'll be very strict with you, mind that!" + +Amused with his free and easy way, I told him that he was not mistaken +as to my identity. + +"That's all right then," he answered. "This gentleman is your brother. +Take a seat, sir, and make yourself at home. You'll have something? +When my father is on shore, I reign here supreme, though on deck, to be +sure, I can't boast much of my authority. Steward, bring glasses, and +biscuits, and anything else! You're not going with us, sir? I wish you +were. We'll have rare fun before we come back, I'll warrant." + +"No," answered Jack, laughing, and highly diverted with Master Jerry's +volubility and perfect self-possession. "I should much like to take the +trip though. However, my brother Harry will, I hope, on your return, +give us a full account of all you see and do." + +"He'll have plenty to tell then of what we do, and not a little of what +we see," answered Jerry, with a sort of a half wink at me, which was as +much as to say, "We'll be up to all sorts of things." He added aloud, +"My father is not the man to let the grass grow under the ship's bottom; +but here come the glasses! What will you have--hot or cold?" + +"Thank you," said Jack; "our father is here, and we must not stop. We +came to see Harry on board, and have soon to return on shore." While he +was speaking, our father appeared at the door, accompanied by Silas +Brand. + +Gerard's whole manner changed the moment he saw them. He got up to +receive my father with perfect politeness; and, instead of exhibiting +the forward, flippant manner with which he had treated us, he turned at +once into a steady-looking, somewhat demure boy. My father, after +addressing a few kind words to him, and telling him that he was his +father's oldest friend, signed to me that he wished to speak to me +alone. He took me into Silas Brand's cabin, and kneeling down, offered +up a few prayers, full of deep, deep love, for my preservation from all +earthly dangers, and for my acceptance as a forgiven sinner at the day +of judgment. + +"Look straight on beyond this transient world in all you think, or try, +or do. Remember, delightful as this existence may appear, and +undoubtedly is to those who know how to employ it properly, it is but a +passage which leads to eternity. May Heaven guide you, my boy!" He +took me in his arms, and then I knew how his fond, tender heart felt the +parting. He burst into tears: he was not long in recovering himself. + +Captain Frankland came on board. Last farewells were said. My dear +father and Jack went down the ship's side. The pilot remarked that the +tide would suit. The anchor was hove up. A steamer took us in tow; +then, after pulling ahead of us for a couple of hours or more, she cast +off. All sail was set, and free of the Mersey's mouth, away we glided +on our voyage Round the World. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +THE VOYAGE COMMENCED. + +The _Triton_ was a well-found, well-officered, and well-manned ship. +Still, on first getting to sea, there appeared to be a considerable +amount of disorder, and the crew were incessantly employed in stowing +away the last stores which had come on board, and in getting everything +into its right place. This gave me a feeling that I was not in my right +place, for no one had a moment to attend to me, and to tell me what to +do; and had it not been for Gerard, I should have felt not a little +miserable. He was as active as any one, and seemed to be thoroughly up +to his duty. He did, however, find time to speak to me. + +"I'll tell you what to do, Harry," said he; "just keep out of the way, +and look on. You'll learn more in that manner just now than in any +other. You'll have plenty of time to get up your seamanship by-and-by." + +I followed his advice to great advantage. The first manoeuvre I saw +performed on board was when, having got clear of all the shoals and +dangers at the mouth of the Mersey, we shortened sail to allow the pilot +to enter his boat, and the last person we were to see for many a day +connected with home took his departure. He shook hands with the captain +and mates, and wished us a good voyage and speedy return. I watched the +boat as it proceeded towards the pilot-cutter with a curious feeling of +interest. I was aroused by Gerard, who asked me why I was so +sentimental. He saw nothing in a pilot-boat leaving the ship. The last +I saw of our native land were the lofty cliffs of Wales. I came on deck +early in the morning; and, as I looked out aft, they appeared receding +fast on the larboard-quarter, across the bright blue sea. Turning +round, my somewhat bewildered glance next wandered upwards, and there I +beheld, with unrestrained admiration, the wide spread of white canvas +which hung extended on the yards, high, high up in the blue sky, like a +vast mass of snowy cloud. It looked to me as if there was enough sail +to fly away with the whole ship and her cargo; for, the breeze being +light and fair, we had all our courses, and topsails, and +topgallant-sails, and royals set with studding-sails also on either +side, almost sweeping the sparkling waters which danced off from the +_Triton's_ sharp bows as she clove her stately yet rapid way through the +ocean. Captain Frankland was anxious to take every advantage of the +favourable wind, that we might get a good distance from the land, and +thus not run the chance of being driven back again, and be compelled, as +is often the case with outward-bound ships, to take shelter in that +magnificent harbour--Milford Haven, or in the still more lovely one of +Queenstown, on the Irish coast. Away we flew, every day going faster +and faster as the breeze freshened. + +"Not a brace, nor a tack, nor a sheet did we slack" on board of the +gallant _Triton_ for a whole week; and then it fell calm, and we lay +washing our sides up to the scuppers in the pure waters of the Atlantic. +During this time everything was got to rights, and I began to find my +way about every part of the ship, and to learn the names of the spars, +and ropes, and sails. Gerard very soon dared me to go aloft; of course +I was nothing loath. + +"Follow me, then, youngster!" said he; and with a wicked look, up he +went the main rigging. I ascended readily enough, intending to go +through the lubbers' hole, as the opening in the top is called through +which the lower shrouds lead. This way is quite allowable for a +landsman; but Jerry, having no fear of my breaking my neck before his +eyes, led the way by the futtock-shroud; and, as he quickly stood up in +the top, I saw his face grinning over me while I hung with my back over +the ocean, very doubtful whether I could climb round so as to get hold +of the topmast-shrouds. + +"Don't let your feet go till you have got a firm grip of this rope +here," said he, touching the shroud. I clutched hold of it: then up I +slipped my other hand, and, drawing up my knees, soon had them on the +combing of the top, and found myself standing alongside my companion. I +should have liked to have stopped to take breath and look about me; but, +before I could utter a word, he was off again, up the topmast-rigging, +with the agility of a monkey, and laughingly sung out to me to join him +on the cross-trees. I thought he would surely rest there, but away he +was again, nor did he stop till he had got hold of the main-truck; and, +as he clung on with his chin over it, he took off his cap and waved it +round his head. My blood was warmed with the exercise and the +excitement, and I was close after him. The moment he was down I took +his place, and did the same thing; but I had to be quick in following +him, not to miss the way he was leading. Down he slid by the +main-topmast-stay, and in an instant more he was climbing the +fore-topmast rigging. He waited for me, however, and waved me on. I +did not remark that two seamen, the oldest hands on board, were at the +same time deliberately mounting the fore-shrouds. Just as I reached the +fore-topmast cross-trees, they were up to me. + +"You han't paid your footing up here, young master," said one, old Ben +Yool by name. He spoke in a gruff voice, as if he had not a soft +particle in his whole composition. + +"You know what that means, master?" added the other, Charlie Cockle, as +he was called, imitating him. + +"I don't know what you want, but I know that you are two to one, which +isn't fair, at all events; and, do you see, I am not accustomed to give +in to threats," said I, and endeavoured to climb away from them, not +knowing exactly where I was going. + +The midge caught in a web might as well attempt to escape from a hungry +spider. They caught me in a moment; and, without further ceremony, +stretching out my arms and legs, lashed them to the topmast-rigging, +making what is called a spread eagle of me. It was very humiliating, +though my position was thus exalted, and very unromantic; and the rogue +Jerry aggravated my feelings by pretending to pity me, though I guessed +even then that he had arranged the plan beforehand with Yool and Cockle +thus to entrap me. The seamen had descended towards the deck, leaving +me bound in this ignominious manner. Jerry came and placed himself in +the rigging opposite to me. + +"It must be very unpleasant!" quoth he. "I wonder what they would say +if I was to let you loose?" + +"I wish you would," I answered. "It's a great shame, and I don't like +it." + +"But I dare not," he replied, putting on a pretended serious face, +though he could not hide the twinkle of his laughing eyes; "they are +such precious fierce fellows. But don't you think that you might buy +yourself off? I'll see if I can arrange the matter with them." + +I saw that there would be no use contending against my tormentor, and I +was more hurt than I choose to acknowledge; so I wisely agreed to pay +any moderate sum to be released. The arrangement was soon made; and +Yool and Cockle, having unlashed my limbs, begged my pardon, and +complimented me on the daring and agility I had displayed on this my +first climb aloft. + +This adventure, as I took the treatment I received good humouredly, made +me capital friends with all the seamen, and I found that there were not +kinder-hearted or better men on board than Yool and Cockle. I observed +that Jerry took the opportunity when his father was below to play off +the tricks imagined by his fertile brain, though he was sometimes +discovered and reprimanded; but he put on so penitent an expression, and +had such comical excuses to offer, that Captain Frankland saw that it +would be worse than useless to punish him. Indeed, punishment would +scarcely have corrected such faults as he had. Gerard, from being +small, and having delicate features, though they were full of rich +humour, looked younger than I did; but he was in reality older, and had +much more experience of the world. His constitution was considered +delicate, which was the reason his father took him to sea at first; but +now he liked the life so much, he told me, that he had resolved to +follow it as a profession. We both of us slept in a cabin which we had +to ourselves, near the captain's. Gerard was learning navigation; and +Captain Frankland told me that I must study hard to catch him up, so +that we might work together. He superintended our studies; but Silas +Brand was our chief master, and somehow or other, in his quiet way, he +managed to impart a considerable amount of information in a pleasant and +rapid manner. It appeared to me that he always said the right thing at +the right time, so as to impress it on the memory. Our first officer, +John Renshaw, was a very worthy man, but totally unlike my Cousin Silas. +He was tall and thin, and had a long weather-beaten, rather +melancholy-looking face. Not that he was melancholy; the form of his +features made him look so. It is better, however, to look melancholy +than to have facetious features, which always appear to be on a broad +grin. A strong contrast to both of them was found in our third officer, +Samuel Melgrove. He was a man with strongly-marked, rather coarse +features, with red hair and complexion. One might have expected to hear +only the roughest tones come out of such a mouth as he possessed; but, +instead, he spoke in a soft, somewhat mincing manner, and prided himself +on his gentlemanly style and volubility. He could, however, speak loud +and rough enough in case of necessity. If called on suddenly to shorten +sail, no one could make himself better heard. The mates on board a +merchantman have the same sort of duty as the lieutenants of a +man-of-war, with the addition of having to attend to the stowing of the +cargo and stores. We had also a surgeon, who was a good naturalist and +a very scientific man--Mr David McRitchie. He evidently at first +looked with very grave suspicion on Gerard and me, as if we were only +waiting our opportunity to play him some trick; and when he left his +cabin he always locked the door, lest we should get in and do some +mischief; but such an idea was, I must say, very far from my thoughts, +and even Gerard respected him too much to wish to annoy him. How to +convince him of this seemed a difficulty. Gerard undertook to assure +him. + +"Mr McRitchie," said he one day abruptly to him, "I daresay that you +think me a young jackanapes, whose only thought is how he can do most +harm in the world. Now, sir, you are mistaken; all I want is that you +will impart some of your knowledge to Harry and me; but, understand, +whether you do that or not, Harry and I will make it a point of honour +not to do you any injury by word, look, or deed." + +"Oh, I never--Well, well, you are good boys, and I perfectly trust you," +stuttered out the doctor, completely taken by surprise. "I shall be +glad, too, to give you all the information in my power; and I hope, in +the course of the voyage, we may have many interesting subjects to see +and talk about." I was sure that Mr McRitchie would faithfully keep +his word. + +We had three other somewhat important personages on board who were +characters in their way--Richard Fleming the boatswain, James Pincott +the carpenter, and Thomas Veal the captain's steward. They each had +their peculiarities; but I will not stop now to describe them. We had +twenty men forward, all picked hands; for, with the long voyage we +contemplated, and the service we were on, it was necessary to be +strongly manned. I must not omit a description of the _Triton_ herself. +She had a raised poop, beneath which were situated the chief cabins, +and a forecastle, under which the crew lived in two compartments, one on +either side of it. There was also a caboose, or galley, with a great +cooking-range, and, indeed, every convenience the men could desire. We +carried eight guns--9-pounders--for we were going into seas where it +would be necessary to be well-armed, and constantly on our guard against +treachery; and we were also amply supplied with boats, which, I may +remark, were always kept in good order, and ready for instant use. I +was surprised one day during a calm, before we had been long at sea, to +hear the order given to lower boats when there was no ship in sight, and +apparently no reason for it. So were those of the crew who had not +before sailed with Captain Frankland. They, however, flew to obey the +order, and, in a short time, three boats were manned and in the water. +They were then hoisted in again, and stowed. + +"Very well," said the captain, holding his watch in his hand. "Smartly +done, my lads; but another time, I think, we may do it still quicker." + +Some of the men, of course, grumbled, as I have found out that some +people will grumble when any new system is introduced, the object of +which they do not understand. The loudest grumbler at anything new +introduced on board was old Fleming the boatswain. He called himself a +Conservative, or, rather, a Tory, and strongly opposed all change. + +"None of your newfangled notions for me," he used to observe; "I like +things as they were. Do you think our fathers would have all along been +satisfied with them if they hadn't been good? I look upon it as +disrespectful to their memory to wish to have them changed, as if we +thought ourselves so much wiser and better than they were." + +Gerard and I were fond of going forward to the forecastle, where, in +fine weather, in an evening, he always took his seat with his pipe in +his mouth. + +"By the same rule it was wrong to introduce the compass or the +steam-engine; former generations had done very well without them; yet +how should we, on a dark night, have managed to steer across the ocean +as we do, or how could people manage to get about the world as rapidly +as they find necessary for their business or pleasure?" + +Gerard thought that this remark would be a poser for the boatswain; but +old Fleming was not so easily defeated. + +"As to the matter of the compass, do you see, that's what I call an +exception to the general rule," he answered, with a serious look. "But +as for the railways and steam-engines, and all those sort of things +afloat or ashore, to my mind the world would be altogether much better +without them. It's necessary for sailors to go about, that's granted; +but the rest of the world would be very much better staying at home and +minding their own business. What I preach I practise; and when I leaves +home I says to my missus, says I, `Now mind, Molly, don't you be going +gadding about till I comes back to look after you;' and she'd no more +think of going outside the street-door, except when she goes to church +or a-marketing, than she'd try to fly, and that would be no easy matter +for her, seeing that she weighs thirteen stone at least." + +Such is a specimen of old Fleming's style of conversation. Gerard and I +used to be much amused while listening to him, though we did not fail to +make the most of his remarks while repeating them to the mates. James +Pincott the carpenter, on the contrary, was a great reformer. No +invention was too new to suit his taste. Whenever he heard of any +discovery, he could not be contented till he saw it introduced. We +often tried to get the two together, and very soon managed to throw an +apple of discord between them. Pincott occupied much of his thoughts +about a flying-machine, which no failure had taught him to believe could +not be made to work. + +"I'll tell you what, mate, there's just this difference between you and +me in this matter," I heard Fleming remark; "you says a flying-machine +can be made; so do I. You may make fifty flying-machines, or a hundred, +or five hundred for that matter, all different, and with all sorts of +wheels, and cogs, and what not, which nobody can understand; but when +they are made, what I have to ask you, mate, is, will they fly? It's +there you and I differ." + +Having thus delivered himself, Fleming drew himself up with a triumphant +look at his adversary. Now, Pincott was a very quiet man with all his +eccentricities, so he merely answered-- + +"It will be enough for me if one can be made to fly. That's all I argue +for." + +"It never has been done yet, and, to my mind, never will," answered +Fleming, sturdily; "though I have heard of a man who made his son put on +a pair of wings which he had fabricated, and shoved him off the top of a +high wall, and when the lad, as was to be expected, reached the ground, +he broke his leg." + +This was a story told of Pincott, who, however, on all occasions stoutly +denied that he was the culprit. Another story against Pincott was, that +when first iron vessels were introduced, he declared that it was +impossible they could swim. "No, no," it was said he said, "birds can +fly, so I don't see why men shouldn't; but iron always has sunk, and, to +my mind, it always will sink." Fleming, who told the story, used to +wind up with the remark, "But then you see, mate, there's no rule +without an exception." As these disputes never led to any disagreeable +consequences, they served to beguile away many a weary hour at sea. But +I have said enough to describe the character of our inferior officers. +They were both thoroughly good seamen and steady men. + +We had hitherto had little else than sunshine and light winds, so that +my introduction to a sea life was most favourable. Gloriously rose the +sun over the blue sparkling waters, when, on coming on deck, I found the +ship steering south-west, and standing in for the Bay of Funchal in the +lofty island of Madeira. On one side of us were the Desertas--rocks +which Gerard told me gravely were so-called because they had once +belonged to the mainland, and were now making the best of their way off +to Africa; but the doctor differed with him, and observed that they +obtained their name from being desert or barren rocks, especially +compared with the fertile island near which they are placed. Lovely as +is the interior of our dear old country, few parts of its shores are +attractive; and as this was the first land we had made after leaving +home, it seemed doubly beautiful. It appeared, as it rose before us, +like one vast mountain extending from east to west, with a bay in the +centre, and covered in the richest profusion with beautiful trees of +many different sorts, among which, I afterwards found, are the cedar, +chestnut, orange, lemon, fig, citron, the vine, the olive, the mulberry, +banana, and pomegranate, while generous nature sprinkles with no lavish +hand the myrtle, the geranium, the rose, and the violet in every open +space. The geranium especially grows in vast quantities; its scent is +most powerful, and the honey which we got in the island was strongly +flavoured with it. But I forgot; we are not on shore yet. How bright, +and beautiful, and rich, and fertile, and romantic everything looked! +What charming white-washed cottages! What lovely villas, surrounded by +gardens filled with flowers of every hue! What a pretty town stretching +away round the shores of the bay! How clean, and neat, and comfortable +all the dwellings! and how grand the churches and public buildings. +Gerard and I agreed that we should like to come back there some day +after we had done our wanderings, and take up our abode for the rest of +our days. + +"Stay till you have been on shore and seen the inside as well as the +outside of things," observed Cousin Silas, who had overheard us. We +thought he was in what we used to call one of his grumpy humours, and +did not heed him. We sailed on, and dropped our anchor opposite to the +city of Funchal. A health-boat came off, but as no one was sick on +board, the people in her did not trouble us much. When she went away, +we were surrounded with other boats pulled by swarthy, muscular, little +men with gay caps and sashes, and white shirt sleeves, who bawled, and +hallooed, and jabbered, in the vain hope of making us comprehend what +they said. We shouted and hallooed in return, as if each party were +deaf; and it was not till after a considerable expenditure of breath, +that we discovered that we did not understand a word of each other's +language; so at last we took to making signs, by which means we got on +much better. There was no great difficulty in this, as they had an +abundance of fruit to sell, which we were equally anxious to buy. + +The captain had, I found, touched here chiefly to get a supply of fruit, +vegetables, fresh meat, and water, as he knew that the health of a crew +is maintained without difficulty when there is an abundance of these +necessaries. He had also another reason for coming here. It was to +obtain information, which the Portuguese authorities were able to +supply, regarding certain places he proposed visiting. As, however, the +whole plan of our proceedings was to be kept secret, I will not touch on +that subject. Gerard and I were all anxiety to go on shore, so the +captain gave us leave to accompany Mr Brand, with strict charges to him +to keep us out of mischief. "Not an easy job!" muttered Silas, +preparing to accompany us into a boat. For the first time in my life I +stood on foreign soil, and very soon I was undeceived as to the +cleanliness, and comfort, and beauty of the habitations; and many a +house which looked so very picturesque at a distance was found, on a +nearer inspection, to be a very dirty domicile. Still the views from +them were beautiful. Nature has done everything; it is graceless man +who is in fault that all is not in accordance with it. At the corner of +one of the streets we saw a number of horses, and mules, and donkeys, +standing together with their attendant drivers--_arrieros_. + +"Wouldn't you like a ride, Mr Brand?" exclaimed Gerard, looking towards +them. He had not to look twice before the whole _posse commitatus_ of +men and boys rushed forward, and seizing us _vi et armis_, carried us +off in triumph towards their sorry-looking beasts. Which party would +have us seemed a question. Who ever heard of sailors who didn't want to +ride? Ride we must; but as there were thirty or more beasts, and only +three of us, it was difficult to say which of them should have the +honour of carrying us. The _arrieros_ got one of Cousin Silas's legs +put on the back of a horse, and another on that of a mule, while a +little wicked donkey began kicking and plunging directly under him. At +last he sprang on to the back of the horse, and Gerard and I found +ourselves somehow or other on the saddles of two mules, when their +respective owners, catching hold of their long tails, and giving them a +prong with their iron-pointed sticks, away we started from out of the +crowd, who all hallooed and shouted after us, till we had shot some way +up one of the steep rocky heights over which the bridle-paths of the +island lead. "Arra burra--arra, arra, arra!" sung out the crowd. +"Arra, arra, arra!" repeated our _arrieros_, goading the unfortunate +animals with their sticks--"Arra, sish, sish!" It is hopeless to +imitate the sounds emitted by our drivers. Up we shot like pellets from +popguns, through the narrow rock-strewn gorges which are called roads. +Up, up, up the animals scrambled. They seemed to enjoy the fun, or, +perhaps, wiser than men, they felt a pleasure in performing their daily +duty. We, too, enjoyed the magnificent views we got over vineyards, and +fields, and orange-groves, and olive-plantations, with often deep +precipices below us, and the blue sparkling sea in the distance. We +passed several buildings, once convents and nunneries; but when the +constitutional government was established in Portugal, the monks were +turned out of their habitations to gain an honest livelihood as best +they could, though the nuns were in some instances allowed to remain in +their abodes, on condition of their admitting no fresh novices. Thus, +by this time the greater number of professed nuns are old women. They +employ themselves in fabricating artificial flowers of shells and +feathers, baskets and ornaments of various sorts, as well as in making +dried fruits and sweetmeats. As Cousin Silas observed, it might have +appeared hard to turn the poor monks adrift in the world; but as ill +weeds grow apace, it was necessary to eradicate them, lest a fresh crop +should spring up where they had for so long taken root. + +We dined with an English merchant, an old friend of Captain Frankland's, +who treated us most sumptuously. He told us of a curious disease which +had lately attacked the vines, and which he feared would ultimately +destroy them. The grapes growing on the diseased vines, instead of +ripening, wither up and rot. He said that he had urged the inhabitants +of the island not to depend solely on their vines, but to endeavour to +produce other articles for which their soil and climate was especially +suited. Among other things he introduced the mulberry-tree, by the +cultivation of which large numbers of the silk-worm might be bred, and +silk in great quantities exported. Under the present system, when the +vines fail, as the people do not grow sufficient corn in the island for +their support, they are at once reduced to a state of famine. But I +must not prolong my description of Madeira. It is a very lovely island, +and has a very delicious climate, and produces all sorts of nice fruits; +and though the inhabitants have rather a fancy for being dirty, the +English residents set them a better example, and have introduced +comforts and conveniences which make the country a very pleasant abode. +The island is about thirty-seven miles in length by eleven in breadth, +and contains perhaps 60,000 inhabitants. + +Again sail was made on the ship, and away we glided over the smooth +ocean with a north-easterly breeze, passing within two miles of the +island of Palma, one of the Canaries, or Fortunate Islands, which belong +to Spain. The appearance, as we eyed it from the ship, was most +attractive; but Silas, who had been on shore there, told us that through +the misgovernment of the upper classes, and the slothfulness of the +lower, the land does not produce nearly what it might be made to do, +while the people remain in a poor and backward condition. Before sunset +the same day we saw the island of Ferro, the most western of the group. +Before the discovery of America, this was looked on as the extreme +western limits of the habitable world, and till very lately some +navigators calculated their first meridian from thence. There are +thirteen islands in the group, which produce corn, silk, tobacco, sugar, +and the wine which was so long known under their name. We caught about +here the regular north-east trade-wind; away we went before it as +steadily and majestically as a swan glides over his native lake. I hope +every reader of my adventures will look at the map, and see whereabouts +the places I mention are situated, or they will find some difficulty in +clearly comprehending my descriptions. + +We had, I thought, been a long time at sea without meeting with anything +very amusing. + +"I say, Jerry, when are we to fall in with all the wonderful adventures +you told me of?" I asked one day, as we were walking the deck together. + +"You would meet with plenty of wonders if you would but keep your eyes +open to see them," observed Cousin Silas, who overheard my observation. +The reply, however, did not quite satisfy me; nothing like a gale or bad +weather had occurred, and I began to suspect that we had already had a +sample of the sort of life we were always to undergo at sea. + +"Hillo!" exclaimed Jerry soon after this, "what has come over the air, I +wonder? Why, we have got into a regular red fog. What has caused it, +Mr Brand; can you tell me?" + +"No, indeed, I cannot," answered Silas. "I've met with it more than +once. It is a very curious phenomenon." + +"They do say it comes off from the coast of Africa," remarked Ben Yool, +who was at the wheel, and from his age privileged to speak on such a +matter. "It's full of red sand, and I've seen it covering the decks in +some parts as if a man had been scraping a red holystone over them." + +We were still discussing the subject, when Captain Frankland came on +deck. He listened for some time to what we were saying. + +"I am glad to hear you discuss the subject, my lads," he remarked in a +kind voice. "Though you are wrong in your conjectures, if you will +attend, I will try and explain what I know about the matter. It is a +very important one, for by means of this dust--for dust it is--which +fills the air, philosophers have been able to determine in part the +difficult problem of the track of the winds in their circuits. How is +this? you will say. Dust coming from one place surely cannot be +distinguishable from dust coming from another. To the ignorant man it +is not, but to the man of science it is. There are certain minute +animal productions called infusoria and organisms peculiar to each +portion of the globe. The expression is, the habitat of such infusoria +is such or such a place. These infusoria can only be distinguished by a +most powerful microscope. Professor Ehrenberg, who has devoted his +attention to the subject, has examined specimens of the dust which is +now falling on our decks. He found it composed of dry infusoria, the +forms of which are found not on an African desert, but in the south-east +trade-wind regions of South America." + +"South America, father!" exclaimed Jerry, pointing with his hand to the +south-west. "How can those clouds of red dust come all the way out here +in the teeth of the north-east trade-wind?" + +"What becomes of the north-east trade-wind when it reaches the end of +its journey, and where is that end think you, my boy?" asked Captain +Frankland. Jerry looked puzzled, and I had not a notion to give forth +on the subject. "I will try and explain the matter; but when you can +obtain a work, written by Lieutenant Maury, of the American navy, you +will comprehend the subject much better," said Captain Frankland. +"There are three calm regions or belts surrounding the globe--one under +the equator, and one in each hemisphere, under the tropics of Cancer and +Capricorn, which you have heard spoken of as the horse latitudes. +Between these two belts blow the north-east and south-east trade-winds, +meeting at the equatorial belt. Now, when they get there, instead of +causing a whirlwind, the excessive heat causes the particles of which +they are composed to expand and rise, gradually producing a calm. After +rising a certain height, they again commence moving round the globe. +Which course they took it was difficult to say, till we find these +clouds of red dust carried along in an upper region of the atmosphere +from south-west to north-east; for not only are they found here, but up +the Mediterranean and across Switzerland. They are raised into the +atmosphere probably by whirlwinds which occur during the vernal equinox, +which is the dry season, from the valley of the lower Orinoco. Thus, +had a label been attached to each particle of which the wind is +composed, to show whence it came, the problem could not have been more +perfectly solved." + +While the captain was speaking, Mr McRitchie came on deck, and +collected in sheets of paper a quantity of the red dust. "It will be +prized by some of my scientific friends at home," he observed; "and even +the unscientific may value a substance which has travelled half round +the globe high up in the atmosphere." + +"There is another substance, doctor, which travels farther, and is of +much greater use to man; and yet how little he troubles his head to +consider where it comes from," remarked the captain. + +"What do you mean, sir?" asked the doctor, a little puzzled I thought. + +"Water," answered Captain Frankland. "Remember those dense fogs, like +wet blankets, which so continually rise in those calm regions to the +south of us; they are caused by vapours rising from the sea, and leaving +its salt behind. This vapour must go somewhere, and it certainly does +not fall in any place near the region where it is drawn up. See the +beautiful provision of Nature to supply with fertilising moisture the +many districts of the earth! This damp vapour, of which we shall +by-and-by have a specimen, rises into the upper regions of the air, and +is there wafted steadily on till it reaches the northern portion of the +globe. It is raised by the powerful rays of the sun during the southern +summer, and with it a considerable amount of heat is carried off which +remains latent. When it reaches the far colder atmosphere of the north, +it is formed into clouds, and condensed, and then precipitated in rain. +In the southern hemisphere there is, as you know, a larger proportion of +sea than in that of the north; and thus it serves as a reservoir to +supply those spots which would otherwise be arid deserts, with an +abundant supply of the chief necessary of life. The whole of nature is +full of similar beautiful arrangements for making the globe a convenient +habitation for man, clearly to be perceived if men would but open their +eyes to behold them." + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +THE WONDERS OF THE OCEAN. + +We were about a day's sail or so from the Cape de Verd Islands, when one +day, as I was looking out, I saw on the starboard-bow what I was certain +was a shoal of great extent covered with sea-weed. "Land on the +starboard-bow!" I sung out, thinking there could be no mistake about +the matter. I heard a loud laugh at my shoulder. Old Ben Yool stood +there. + +"Well, if that is not land, I do not know what is!" I replied. But +still Ben only laughed at me. I was arguing the point, when the +captain, who was on deck, called me aft. I found him with a chart, +which he was showing to Gerard. + +"You are not the first person, Harry, who has taken that collection of +sea-weed for land," he observed. "That is the Sargasso Sea. When the +companions of Columbus sighted it, they thought that it marked the +extreme limits of the navigable ocean. We are at the southern edge of +it. Look at this chart; it extends in a triangular form between the +groups of the Azores, Canaries, and Cape de Verds. It is caused by the +Gulf Stream, which, circling round the Atlantic, sends off towards the +centre all the sea-weed and drift-wood collected in its course. Throw +some chips into that tub; now, set the water in motion with your hand. +The current you have created sends off all the chips into the centre of +the tub. You need never forget how this Sargasso Sea becomes covered +with weed. But you will wish to know something about this wonderful +Gulf Stream, which not only produces the effect I have described, but +exerts a very powerful influence, on the climate of many countries, and +on the navigation of the Atlantic, besides causing many other important +results. It is, indeed, one of the most wonderful of all the phenomena +of the ocean. Consider it as a mighty river of warm water flowing for +three thousand miles with scarcely diminished volume, never dying, never +overflowing, over a bottom and between banks of cold water. So little +affinity have its waters with the common water of the ocean, and so +different is their colour, that a distinct line can often be traced +where they pass along. See where it takes its rise in the Gulf of +Mexico, whence it is called the Gulf Stream. Now, mark its course, and +note its effects. Remember, that not only is it warm itself, but it +warms the air which passes over it. It likewise contains much more salt +than the common sea-water. The salt gives it its peculiar deep +indigo-like colour. It runs at the rate of between three and five miles +an hour. It is roof-shaped--that is, higher in the centre than on +either side. This is proved by placing a boat on either side of the +centre, when it drifts off towards the edge nearest to which it is cast +loose. Another peculiarity exists in connection with it. Water +radiates heat far more slowly than does the earth. If, therefore, the +Gulf Stream swept along the ground, it would speedily lose its heat. To +prevent this, it is made to pass over a cushion of cold water, into +which its heat does not readily pass. When, however, its waters wash +any shores, they impart some of their heat to them, increasing the +warmth of the climate, adding fertility to the soil, and making it a +more agreeable abode for man. Now, look at the chart, and observe where +the mighty current leaves its reputed source in the Gulf of Mexico. +Mark it sweeping round the coast of Florida, and glancing off to the +eastward near Cape Hatteras, in the United States, allowing a belt of +cold water to wash the shores of that country during the winter months +of the year. Watch it passing near the coast of Nova Scotia, and in the +summer, not far from that of Newfoundland, where it has undoubtedly +caused the formation of the well-known fishing-banks. This is the way +they have been produced. When the summer sun releases the innumerable +mighty icebergs which have been formed on the shores of the polar +regions, they float away to the south, carried by a current which sets +towards Newfoundland. They bear away with them vast quantities of rock, +and stones, and sand. Meeting the hot water of the Gulf Stream, they +quickly melt and deposit their burdens at the bottom, always about the +same spot which you see marked as the Grand Bank. Now the stream, +taking an easterly course, reaches the 40th degree of north latitude, +when it begins to spread itself over the colder water of the ocean, +washing the shores of Ireland; some going up towards Spitzbergen, +surrounding the Shetland Isles, and other isles in the north; more +rushing up the British Channel; and another quantity flowing into the +Bay of Biscay, and away again towards the south--adding warmth to the +whole of the indented shores of Europe, and at the same time supplying +the deficiency of salt to the waters flowing out of the Baltic and the +Polar basin." + +"Thank you, father," exclaimed Gerard; "I now understand why, when last +year we made the voyage to New York, we kept away so far to the +northward. It was to avoid the Gulf Stream, which would have been +setting against us. But I say, father, I want to know why the water +takes it into its head to flow in that way. I suppose there is some +cause for it?" + +"Our beneficent Maker undoubtedly formed it for the benefit of his +creatures," returned the captain; "but, as I have often told you, he +brings about his purposes by the laws or causes which he himself has +established. There may be several causes in operation to form this +ocean-stream, though up to this moment learned men have been unable to +decide what they are. Now one theory is advanced, now another. The +shape of the Gulf Stream may have something to do with it. It appears +that it is higher than the rest of the surface, for it is more bulky. +Water will always seek its level. It has thus a tendency to flow +towards the colder and lower water of the poles, feeling at the same +time the effect of the diurnal motion of the globe; while the water of +the poles, to supply its place, flows towards the equator, subject to +the same disturbing cause. Thus the water of the globe is set in +motion. These being hot, tropical waters, remain on the surface, and a +portion of them is forced into the Gulf of Mexico. Here, though they +lose somewhat of their saltness from the fresh waters of the Mississippi +and Orinoco, they gain more heat from these hot streams, and are still +much Salter than the rest of the ocean. Perhaps the impetus may be +given them by the pressure of the currents from the poles. The diurnal +motion of the globe will account for the drift-wood and sea-weed being +cast off on the east or left bank of the stream. There is another cause +for this. From the stream being roof-shaped, any drift which its left +portion took up would have to go up hill to get to the northward. +Therefore, though trees and other produce of the West Indies are found +on the shores of Europe, none are ever picked up on those of America. +And this brings me to the point from which I set out--the cause of the +Sargasso Sea, the centre, it may be called, of this wondrous and almost +inexplicable Gulf Stream." + +"But, father, still you have not told us why the Gulf Stream flows in +the direction it does," said Gerard, who generally stuck to the point in +an argument on which he wanted information. + +"Men possessed of far more scientific knowledge than I can boast of, +have been puzzled to reply to that question," returned the captain. +"The trade-winds, the diurnal motion of the earth, the expansion of +water by heat, may all combine to force it along and direct its course; +and yet there may be some still more potent cause at work unperceived by +us, perhaps undiscoverable. One thing we know, that it was the will of +the Almighty that so it should flow, for a great and beneficent object; +and that, to effect it, he has employed some potent and sufficient +agent, which, when he thinks fit, he will allow to be revealed to us by +the light of that science which he has given as one of his best gifts to +man. There are, as you perceive on the charts, other currents in the +vast ocean, all set in movement for the sake of benefiting the +inhabitants of the globe. While the warm Gulf Stream runs up to +Spitzbergen, the Hudson's Bay and Arctic currents bring cold water and +icebergs towards the south; and a current from the North Atlantic +carries its cooling waters round the arid shores of western Africa. +There is the great equatorial current from east to west round the world, +and numerous other currents in the Pacific and Indian Oceans, the +influence of which we shall feel during our voyage; and by knowing where +to search for them, and where to avoid them, we can generally make them +serviceable to our object. What I would especially point out to you, my +lads, is the beautiful adaptation of all the works of the Creator to the +great object of the whole. The air and water are kept in motion for the +benefit of man and all living beings. Order everywhere reigns supreme. +Science shows us that storms are regulated by exact laws, and it is only +through our ignorance and blindness that we cannot tell whence they +come, and whither they go. What an admirable system of compensation +exists throughout the universe! Heat, lost by radiation, is quickly +restored; water, lifted up by evaporation, has its place supplied by +colder currents; mighty rivers discharge their waters in vast quantities +into the ocean, and from the far-off regions of the tropics the winds +come loaded with dense vapours, which, precipitated at their sources +with ample and regular measure, supply all their demands. I might +produce numberless examples. As an instance, the whole volume of the +waters of the Mississippi, rushing out at its mouth, find their way back +again in an ever-constant circle to its sources among the far-off lakes +of North America. The Gulf Stream fertilises the earth for the benefit +of man, and it likewise carries food to regions frequented by the mighty +whales. Frequently large shoals of sea-nettles, on which the black +whale feeds, have been met with, borne onward towards its haunts in the +north. The whale itself, it is believed, could not exist in the warm +waters of the stream. Fish, also, are not generally found in it; and +those which inhabit it are of a very inferior flavour. Instead, +therefore, of wandering about the ocean, where they could not be +procured by man, they are driven to the shallow waters near the coast, +where they can easily be caught. It is a curious fact, that the warmer +the water, the brighter are the colours of the fish which inhabit it; +though, as food, they are generally of much less value. While the Gulf +Stream largely benefits the globe, it is at the same time the proximate +cause of shipwreck and disaster, from the storms which it creates, in +consequence of the irregularity of its temperature, and that of the +neighbouring regions, both in air and water. Perhaps nowhere is a more +terrific sea found than when a heavy gale meets the Gulf Stream, when +running at its maximum rate. Many a ship has gone down beneath its +waters. However, I might go on all day telling you curious things about +this same Gulf Stream. One thing more I will mention: people often +complain of the dampness of England. The same cause which so favourably +tempers the cold of our country, creates the dampness complained of. It +is not that our soil is more humid, that marshes exist, or that the +country is not well drained; but it is that the westerly and +north-westerly breezes which prevail, come loaded with the warm vapours +ascending from the tropic heated waters of the Gulf Stream." + +"Thank you, father, for all you have told us," said Gerard; "I think I +have learned a great deal I did not know before." + +I was certain that I had, and directly afterwards put down, as well as I +could remember, all Captain Frankland had said. The next day we sighted +Saint Vincent, one of the ten islands which form the Cape de Verd group, +so-called from being off the Cape de Verds, on the coast of Africa. The +islands belong to the Portuguese. They produce all sorts of tropical +fruits and vegetables, so that ships often touch here to be supplied +with them. A large number of the inhabitants are black, or of a very +dark hue. Instead of standing directly for the Brazils, Captain +Frankland shaped a course almost across the Atlantic for the coast of +South America. He did this, he explained to Gerard and me, to get the +wind, which generally blows off that coast when the north-east trade +failed us; and to avoid the equatorial calms, in which, away from the +land, vessels are often baffled for days together. I found, after I had +been some time at sea, "That the longest way round is often the shortest +way there," as the saying is. In tropical latitudes, winds from +different quarters blow with great regularity in different places at +certain seasons of the year. The great object of a master is, to find +where the wind is blowing which will be fair for him. The two most +regular winds are the north-east and south-east trade-winds which blow +from either side of the equator, and meet in a wide belt of calms found +under it. There are currents in the air as well as in the ocean; and +Silas told me that he has more than once passed ships at sea right +before the wind--steering north, for instance, while his ship, with an +equally fair breeze, has been standing to the south. Formerly, ships +used to be steered as far south as they could get before the +trade-winds; and then often found themselves baffled for days, if not +weeks together, in the calm latitudes off the coast of Africa, when, if +they had stood boldly across the ocean, as we were now doing, they would +never have wanted a wind move or less fair. Thus it will be seen that +in navigation there are currents in the sea and currents in the air to +be considered, and that it requires a great deal of forethought, and +knowledge, and experience, to take a ship in safety and with speed round +the world. We were bowling along in grand style before the north-east +trade-wind, when Gerard stopped his father in his morning walk on deck. + +"I say, father, can you tell Harry and me all about this trade-wind, +which we have got hold of it seems?" said he with a grave look, as if he +wished to become very learned. + +"Which has got hold of us rather, I should say, by the way it is +carrying us along," answered the captain, smiling. No one knew Jerry so +well as he did, though he often pretended not to understand at what he +was driving. "You ask a question to which it is rather difficult to +reply in a brief way. Take a piece of paper; draw a circle on it; now, +draw three parallel belts across it--one in the centre, and one on each +side of the centre. Write on the centre belt, `Equatorial Calms;' on +the upper, `Calms of Cancer;' on the lower, `Calms of Capricorn.' The +circle represents the globe; the ends of a line drawn at right angles to +the belts where it reaches the circle, mark the poles. The globe moves +from west to east. Now, suppose a mass of air sent off from the north +pole towards the equator in a straight line, it not partaking of the +diurnal motion of the earth would appear as if it came from the +north-east. Another mass starting from the equator towards the pole in +consequence of the impetus given it, would be going faster towards the +east than the earth, and would, consequently, appear as if it came from +the south-west. This actually takes place, but in the upper regions of +the air. The same exchange takes place between the south pole and the +equator. Now, let us see what becomes of these masses. That which +started from the north pole meets in the air at about the parallel of 30 +degrees; the mass which started from the equator meeting with equal +force, they balance each other, and produce a calm and an accumulation +of atmosphere pressing downward, and ejecting from below two +surface-currents--one towards the equator, which are the north-east +trade-winds; the other towards the pole, called the south-west +passage-winds. This moving mass of air, which constitutes the +north-east trade-wind, meets near the equator with another mass which +has been moving on as the south-east trade--meeting with equal force, +they form a calm; and then, warmed by the heat of the sun, they ascend, +one-half streaming off high up towards the south-east--that is, counter +to the surface-current--till it reaches the southern calm belt; another +mass coming from the south-west, where it descends, and rushes as a +north-west surface-wind towards the south pole. We have traced the mass +which started from the north pole. Reaching the southern regions, it is +whirled round till, at the pole itself, a perfect calm is produced, when +it ascends and starts off as an upper current towards the equator; but +meeting another current near the tropic of Capricorn, then descends, +one-half flowing out at the surface, as I have before described, as the +south-east trade, the other towards the south pole. This is the most +beautiful and regular system of atmospheric circulation kept up around +our globe. It has not been ascertained exactly why the masses I have +spoken of take certain directions, but we know the directions they do +take. The red dust we found off the Cape de Verds assists us in certain +degrees. We know some of the agents--the diurnal motion of the earth, +and the sun's heating rays. There are certain counteracting or +disturbing causes from which the surface-winds deviate from the courses +I have described. Some lands are covered with forests, others with +marshes, others with sand. All these may be disturbing causes--so are +lofty mountains. From these causes, and the more powerful effect of the +sun's rays in one place than in another, hurricanes and typhoons occur, +and the monsoons are made to blow--the harmattan on the west coast of +Africa; the simoon, with its deadly breath, in Arabia; the oppressive +sirocco in the Mediterranean. What I have said will explain that +beautiful passage in Ecclesiastes, 1st chapter, 6th verse, which shows +the exactness of the sacred writers whenever they do introduce +scientific subjects: `The wind goeth toward the south, and turneth about +unto the north; it whirleth about continually, and the wind returneth +again according to his circuits.' Who gave Solomon this information? I +doubt if any of his sages possessed that scientific knowledge which has +only been attained by philosophers of late years. Perhaps I may still +more clearly explain to you the cause of the circulation of the +atmosphere. I told you that there were two agents at work--diurnal +motion, and the heat of the sun; but to these may be added the cold of +the poles, which contracts the air. Suppose the globe at rest, and +covered with one uniform stagnant mass of atmosphere; suddenly heat, +cold, and the diurnal motion commence their operations. The air about +the equator would expand, that about the poles contract. Thus two +systems of winds would commence to blow--one above, from the equator +towards the poles; and as thus a vacuum would be left below, a current +would come from the poles to supply its place. The diurnal motion +prevents these currents running in straight lines. That coming from the +poles will appear to have easting in them, and those going towards the +poles westing. Not only, however, is the level of the atmosphere +changed by the heating rays of the sun, but its specific gravity. Thus +the heated current moves more easily and rapidly than the colder; and +the latter, consequently, turns back a portion of what was going towards +the poles, and adjusts the equilibrium of the atmosphere. I have +already shown you the great importance of the circulation of the air in +the economy of nature; and how, among the many offices of the +atmosphere, it distributes moisture over the surface of the earth, +making the barren places fruitful, and tempering the climates of +different latitudes, fitting them as the abode of civilised man. But I +will not pursue the subject further just now. You must do that for +yourselves. Try and remember what I have said, and think about it +whenever you have an opportunity." Jerry and I thanked the captain for +what he had told us, and I, as before, at once dotted it down as well as +I could in my note-book. + +Crossing the Atlantic, we sighted a glittering white rock rising fifty +feet out of the water. It was, I found, the Island of Saint Paul's. It +had a curious appearance, standing thus alone in the ocean 500 miles +from the coast of America, and 350 from the Island of Fernando Noronha-- +the snowy pinnacle of a submarine mountain. We hove-to close to it, and +a boat being lowered, Mr McRitchie, Mr Brand, Jerry, and I, went on +shore. The whole rock is not three-quarters of a mile in circumference. +Its white colour, we found, was produced by a thin coating of a +substance formed by the washing off of the birds' dung, collected there +in a succession of ages. The rock was covered with birds--my old +friends, the booby and the noddy, I had so often read about. They +stared at us with a stupid look as we pulled up, not at all able to make +us out, and in no way disposed to make way for us. Gerard and I were +for knocking as many as we could on the head; but Cousin Silas would not +allow us, observing that we did not want them for food, and that they +had a far better right to the rock than we had. The booby, Mr +McRitchie told us, is a species of gannet, and the noddy a species of +tern. The first lays her eggs on the bare rock, but the latter +constructs a nest with sea-weed. While the doctor was eagerly hunting +about for specimens of natural history, we were amused by watching the +proceedings of some of the few inhabitants of the rock. By the side of +several of the noddies' nests we saw a dead flying-fish, evidently +deposited there by the male bird. Whenever we succeeded in driving away +any one of the females, instantly a big crab, which seemed to have been +watching his opportunity from the crevices of the rocks, would rush out, +and with greedy claws carry off the prey. One fellow, still more +hungry, ran away with one of the young birds. Another was going to make +a similar attempt. + +"I ought to stop that fellow, at all events!" said Jerry, giving Master +Crab a stunning blow. We tied his claws, and presented him as a trophy +to the doctor. + +"A fine specimen of _Graspus_" cried our scientific friend, stowing him +away in his wallet. + +"A capital name!" said Jerry. "He seemed ready enough to grasp anything +he could lay his claws on." + +The doctor said he could find neither a plant nor a lichen on the +island, and only a few insects and spiders, besides the boobies and +noddies. I ought to have mentioned that we did not fail to meet with +the moist and oppressive weather found under the belt of calms under the +equator. Frequently I felt as if I could scarcely breathe, and nearly +everybody was in low spirits and ready to grumble. Jerry and I vowed +that the air was abominable. Cousin Silas stopped us. + +"Remember, lads," said he, "what the captain was telling you. If it +were not for them mists, how could the rivers of the north be supplied +with their waters, and the fields of our own land be made fertile? +Thank God rather that you are thus enabled to see more of the wonders of +creation." + +I never forgot this remark of Cousin Silas. A delightful writer, now +well-known, describing the subject, calls it "The Circle of Blessing." +[Mrs Alfred Gatty, in her "Parables from Nature."] + +Making sail, we soon lost sight of that white-topped rock. Soon +afterward Gerard rushed down one morning at daybreak into our berth, +and, rousing me up, told me I was wanted on deck. Half asleep, I jumped +up, and slipping my legs into my trousers--for no other garment was +required in that latitude--ran with him where he led me forward. I had +scarcely got my eyes open when I found myself seized by two shaggy +monsters; and hearing the sound of a conch shell, I looked up, and saw +before me, as if he had just come over the bows of the ship, a +strange-looking personage, with a glittering crown on his head, a huge +red nose, long streaming hair, and white whiskers as big as two mops. +In his hand he held a trident, and over his shoulders was worn a mantle +covered with strange devices. + +"Trite!--where's Trite? Come along, Trite!" he exclaimed, in a gruff +voice--which sounded not altogether unlike that of old Ben Yool's--as he +looked over the bows; and presently he handed up a lady of very ample +dimensions, who certainly, except for a petticoat and a necklace of +shells, I should not have suspected to have belonged to the fair sex. + +"Oh, there you are, my lovie! We must be sharp about our work, for we +have so many ships to board that we haven't a moment to lose. Now, if +there are any young shavers who hasn't crossed the middle of my kingdom +before, let them be brought up here in quarter less than no time, or +I'll do--I'll do--I'll do what you shall see." + +This was said in a terrifically gruff voice. Before I had time to look +about me, the two monsters had dragged me forward before his marine +majesty and his spouse; and one producing a huge cold tar brush, and the +other a piece of rusty hoop, I found my face paid over with some most +odorous lather. I cried out to Jerry, who I thought, as a friend, ought +to help me; but he pretended to be in a dreadful fright, and when the +monsters ran after him he managed to shove so violently against me that +he sent me head first into a large tub of water which stood at the feet +of Neptune. I was, however, immediately hauled out by the shaggy +Tritons, and after a fresh application of lather, my face was scraped +over with the piece of hoop. + +"Douse him--douse the baby again!" shouted Neptune; and from the mode I +was treated, I thought that I should have been nearly drowned, had not +Mrs Neptune, or rather Amphitrite, interfered in a voice which was +intended to be very affectionate, but which sounded as if the poor lady +had a very sore throat, and begged that I might be allowed to return to +my cradle to sleep out the remainder of my watch. + +"Oh, good mother, your sex are always gentle and kind," I answered, +determining to jump with the humour of the thing, and to show that I had +not lost my temper, although the ceremony I had gone through was far +from pleasant. "Now, if you'll just leave one of your squires here +aboard, and he'll come aft by-and-by, I'll try if I can fish out a +five-shilling piece from the bottom of my chest, to buy you and your +good man some baccy and rum, to cheer you when you get back to your own +fireside." + +"Well spoken, like a true son of the Ocean!" exclaimed Neptune, patting +me on the back. "For that same notion you are free from henceforth and +for ever of my watery realms; seeing also as how you have been lathered +and shaved and crossed the line. So here are three cheers for Mr Harry +Hopeton; and may he live to sail round the world, and to command as fine +a ship as this here craft--and finer, too!" + +The crew, at Neptune's beck, on this gave three hearty cheers; and while +the Tritons were chasing down some lads and two or three men, who had +never before crossed the line, I made my escape towards a tub of clean +water, and thence to my cabin, where I very soon removed all traces of +the discipline I had gone through. By the time the captain appeared the +whole ceremony was at an end, and the men were employed in washing down +decks, as if nothing had occurred. It was the third mate's watch; and I +found afterwards that Jerry, who was the chief instigator, had obtained +his leave to have the ceremony take place. The captain, I daresay, also +knew all about it, but said nothing on the subject. Once upon a time +the crew of every ship crossing the line considered it their right to be +allowed full licence to indulge in all sorts of wild pranks; but the +custom got so much abused that many captains have put a stop to it +altogether, while others only allow it among well-tried and trusty +crews. I was not sorry to have had the tricks played on me, because it +contributed to gain me the good will of the people; and I now felt that, +having crossed the line, I had a right to consider myself something of a +sailor. + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +A TRIP UP THE AMAZON. + +Two days after crossing the line we sighted the island of Fernando +Noronha, which, with several outlying islets, is a very picturesque +spot. It belongs to the empire of the Brazils, and is used as a penal +settlement. As Captain Frankland wished to touch at every place not out +of his way, we dropped anchor in Citadel Bay, opposite a fort on which +the Brazilian colours were flying. A boat was lowered, and though some +heavy rollers were setting into the bay, we managed to get on shore on +the top of one of them without getting wet--that is to say, the captain, +Gerard, and I. It was really a pretty sight. We pulled on steadily, +with the head of the boat directed on shore; then a high, heaving, +glassy wave came gliding in, and the boat was on its summit; now the men +pulled away with all their might, and on we flew till the boat's keel +touched the beach. Quickly the waters receded. The instant they did so +we all jumped out, and hauling the boat up before another roller came +in, she was high and dry out of harm's way. A guard of blacks received +us; and hearing that the town was only about a mile and a half distant, +we set off to walk there. We passed through a pretty valley, and some +woods of tropical shrubs, with the blue sea visible beneath their broad, +fan-like leaves, and by many huts and cottages, inhabited mostly by +blacks, who seemed very much astonished at our appearance. At last we +reached the town, which has an open space in the centre, and a church +and the governor's house at one end, and a strong fort above it. Here +nearly all the soldiers and free men are blacks, while the whites are +mostly slaves, made so by their crimes. It must be rather a +satisfactory state of things to the feelings of the blacks. The +governor of this place--of a hundred houses or so--received us very +civilly, and gave the captain all the information he required; and, +besides that, a good supply of vegetables, which the island produces in +abundance. + +On leaving Fernando Noronha we steered for Pernambuco--perhaps, next to +Rio, the port of the greatest importance in the Brazils. On going into +the harbour with a strong breeze blowing, the pilot from gross +carelessness gave the _Triton_ so hard a blow against a rook that an +ugly hole was knocked in her bottom. It seemed for a moment that the +masts would have gone by the board; but the ship, bounding off the rock, +glided on as if nothing had happened. It was a great trial for the +temper of Captain Frankland; but he uttered scarcely a word of reproof +to the pilot, and as to an oath, I never heard an expression even +approaching one pass from his lips all the time I was with him. The +crew were all at their stations, and none stirred from them till the +captain ordered the carpenter to sound the well. He quickly reported +that there were three feet of water in the well, and that it was rushing +in at a great rate. All hands on board not absolutely required to +shorten sail were ordered to man the pumps, and the _Triton_ was carried +in as close to the town as possible, so that she might immediately be +put on shore should there be danger of her sinking. On a further +examination of the damage the ship had received, it was found that it +would be absolutely necessary to land part of her cargo and to put her +on shore before it could be repaired. It was late in the day before +this was determined on, so that nothing could be done that afternoon. +All night long the sound of the pumps going continuously kept me awake +till towards morning, when I still heard them in my sleep. A gang of +negroes had been brought off to work them in relays, so that the crew +were saved the fatigue which they would otherwise have undergone. I was +very glad the next morning when I found the ship hauled close in-shore +to a place where, if she did sink, she could not go far, or drown those +on board. Captain Frankland found that it would take a considerable +time to get the damage repaired, as it was even of a more serious nature +than at first supposed. He bore the annoyance with his usual calm +temper. I have often thought what a valuable possession is a calm +temper, and how worthy of being cultivated. + +The ship was consigned to an English firm--Messrs. Gleg and Robarts--who +rendered us every assistance in their power. Mr Robarts was on the +point of starting in a fast-sailing schooner on a trip along the coast +to the northward and west, as far as the mouth of the mighty river +Amazon. He invited Gerard and me, with Mr McRitchie, to accompany +him--not the last excursion of the sort we were destined to make. As he +undertook to be back before the ship could be ready for sea, the +captain, glad that we should see as much of the country as possible, +allowed us to go. I was amused at hearing the doctor charge the crew +not to fall sick, or tumble down and break their arms or legs, till his +return, at the risk of his high displeasure. The schooner--the +_Andorinha_--was built and manned by Portuguese, or rather Brazilians +and blacks. She was a very pretty little vessel, and a first-rate +sea-boat; indeed, the Portuguese models of vessels often used to put to +shame the crafts of the same class built in England. However, of late +years we have made a great stride in that respect. I speak of the +Portuguese, because the Brazils, it must be remembered, was colonised +from Portugal, and the greater part of the white inhabitants--if they +can be called white by courtesy--are of that nation originally. I am +sorry to say that I lost my notes made on this trip, so that I am unable +to describe it with the minuteness of the rest of my narrative. + +Mr Robarts was a very merry, kind person, and we spent a very pleasant +life on board the little _Andorinha_. We put into several of the large +rivers, as the object of Mr Robarts was to collect some of the wildest +productions of the country from the natives inhabiting their banks. +When, we entered the Amazon, I could scarcely believe that we were in a +river, so wide and grand is the stream. The colour of the water, +however, showed us that it was really a river we were in. We had gone +up for some considerable distance, a strong breeze enabling us to battle +with the current, when at length we came to an anchor near the shore. +About a hundred and fifty miles up is the Brazilian town of Para--a +complete sea-port, though not equal in size to Pernambuco. We, however, +having a favourable breeze, went much further up the main stream, and +then turned into one of the numerous rivers which fall into it. Here +Mr Robarts expected to remain some little time to trade with the +natives. I had been below, when, on returning on deck, I heard Gerard +laughing heartily, and pointing to a boat which was proceeding up the +stream. In the fore-part was a thatched shed, on either side of which +sat four natives paddling. In the after-part was another shed of bamboo +and grass, under which sat the passengers. On the top of all was the +helmsman--a naked savage, lying his full length, and steering with his +feet, under a sun which would quickly have cooked a beef-steak exposed +to it. Mr Robarts told us that the boat or canoe was called an +egaritea, and that it was the canoe usually employed for the conveyance +of travellers on the Amazon. Again we laughed at the helmsman, who +seemed perfectly unconcerned, as, holding on to the bamboo roof with one +hand, he rested his black head on the other, just high enough to let him +look about in every direction. Mr Robarts could not leave the +schooner; but as Mr McRitchie and we were very anxious to see as much +of the interior of this wonderful country as possible, we arranged to go +up in an egaritea as far as time would allow. Mr Robarts allowed us to +take a half-caste native, who had served on board a British ship and +spoke a little English, as our interpreter. He was called Pedro, but he +had a much longer Indian name, which I do not remember. Away we +started, in high glee, with blankets, a supply of provisions, and a few +cooking utensils, with plates, cups, knives, and forks. We could not +help laughing whenever we thought of our araies, or chief boatman, lying +at his length above us, steering with his feet. This mode of travelling +we found very comfortable--almost too luxurious for our tastes--and +tolerably expeditious. I should say that we all had our guns, and that +McRitchie had, besides, his sketch-book, and boxes and cases for +collecting subjects of natural history. The difficulty in this region +was to know what to select. The water abounded with all sorts of +strange fish, and turtles and alligators innumerable. I must say, when +I first saw one of these hideous monsters, I felt an awe creeping over +me, though the natives did not seem to care a bit about them. We had +got to the end of our voyage in the egaritea, and arranged to hire a +light open canoe, with two men as rowers, in which we could proceed up +some of the smaller rivers. Nothing could surpass the luxuriance of the +foliage, which not only lined their banks, but extended a long way +inland, strange birds of all sizes, from the diminutive humming-bird to +others of immense bulk, of the most gorgeous plumage, flew about among +the trees; while, as we paddled along, we heard the most curious +chatterings, and now and then, if we remained quiet for a few minutes, +we could see hundreds of little black and brown and yellow faces, with +bright eyes peering at us from among the boughs. The slightest movement +or noise made by us would send them scampering off along the branches, +or rather swinging themselves by hands and tails from bough to bough, or +from creeper to creeper, that being their favourite mode of locomotion. +They were clean, nice, respectable-looking little fellows, quite unlike +monkeys cooped up in menageries, or even in the Zoological Gardens, and +seemed to lead very happy and joyous lives. Gerard declared that if he +was not a human being really, the next best state of existence he should +desire would be that of a monkey on the banks of the Amazon. We were +not aware at the time of certain facts, which afterwards came to our +knowledge, which might detract somewhat from the desirability of the +existence; among others, that the natives shoot and eat the poor little +fellows with as little compunction as we should young pigs or fowls. + +We were paddling along, admiring the wonderful foliage--one forest +seeming, as it were, to rise up out of the top of another, the lowest +being higher and thicker than any forest in northern regions--when +suddenly a huge black monster was seen swimming rapidly towards us. + +"An alligator!" exclaimed McRitchie. "He'll make mince-meat of us in a +moment. My gun--quick, quick!" + +I was handing him his gun when one of our native boatmen, laughing at +our fright, made signs that there was no danger, and seizing a piece of +drift-wood floating by, adroitly threw it across its mouth. The vast +jaw of the monster came crashing down on it. There they stuck, and the +native assured us, through Pedro, that he was now quite harmless. +McRitchie took a steady aim at the creature's eye, while a native stood +ready with a coil of ropes to throw over it directly it was killed, or +it would have sunk, I fancy, out of sight in an instant. McRitchie's +bullet took immediate effect, and we soon had the creature hauled up on +the nearest bank, where our medico had the opportunity of anatomically +examining him at his leisure. While he was thus employed, Gerard and I +agreed that it would be a good opportunity to prepare dinner, assisted +by Pedro. The natives preferred sleeping in their canoe. While we were +engaged over our fish, I on a sudden looked up, and saw a huge animal of +the tiger species stealing catlike towards the doctor, attracted +probably by the carcass of the alligator. The creature seemed at that +moment about to make its fatal spring. I had my gun providentially by +my side. I shrieked out to the doctor to be on his guard, and at the +same moment raised my weapon to my shoulder to fire. He had the large +knife with which he had been cutting up the alligator in his hand. +Resting on my knee, I fired, and though I did not flatter myself that I +was a good shot, happily hit the animal on the head. He fell backwards, +stunned but not dead; and the doctor, rushing forward with his knife, +deprived the creature of existence, thanking me in the same breath for +the service I had rendered him. + +"Come, we are meeting with adventures now, I do think, indeed!" +exclaimed Jerry, as we sat round our repast, after the enthusiastic +doctor had cut up the tiger. "Hurrah! it's great fun." + +Soon after embarking to proceed on our voyage, we looked into a curious +little nook under the trees, where, in the centre of the stream, lay a +canoe with two people, a man and his wife, in it. They were not +over-encumbered with garments, but the man had some curious feather +ornaments on his arms. At first they seemed inclined to paddle away, +but a shout from one of our canoemen brought them alongside, and from +the affectionate greeting which was exchanged between the parties we +found that they were relations, or at all events great friends. Pedro +informed us that they invited us to their dwelling. We were delighted +to accept the invitation, as we particularly wished to see the way of +life of the aborigines. We paddled on some little distance, when our +new friends, leading the way pushed in among the tall reeds till we +found ourselves close to some long poles with a platform on the top and +a ladder leading to it. We followed them up the ladder, when we found +ourselves in a sort of hut, thickly thatched over with palm-leaves. +Looking out, we saw several similar habitations. It seemed something +like living up in trees. We concluded that the object the natives had +in view in placing their habitations in such positions was to avoid the +floods, as also snakes and crawling creatures, and the noxious air which +floats close to the surface. All the natives' houses are not built in +this way, for when we went further inland we met with several standing +only a short distance from the ground--on some more elevated spot. The +natives are not very pleasant companions, as they anoint their bodies +all over with oil, which gives anything but a notion that they indulge +in cleanliness. Jerry, however, observed that it was probably nothing +when people got accustomed to it, and that as oil was a clean thing, +they might be more cleanly than people who wear dirty clothes and never +wash. Even these people do wash their children; and we were highly +amused in the morning on seeing a mother giving her little black-headed +papoose a bath. The bath was a big tub made out of the hollowed +seed-lobe of a species of palm. The fat little creature splashed about +and seemed to enjoy the bath amazingly. After this we agreed that the +natives had a good reason for anointing their bodies with oil, and that +they were not naturally a dirty people. With Pedro, who carried the +doctor's cases, and one of the natives as a guide, we made from thence a +long excursion inland. We were all together when Pedro stopped us. +"There is something curious up in the trees," he observed. We peered +through the branches, and a little way off saw two men--negroes they +seemed--seated at some distance from each other on the boughs of +different trees, perfectly motionless. Each of them had a tube at his +mouth about twelve feet long, and very slender. The mouthpiece was +thick--a short cylinder apparently--as the doctor told us, a receptacle +for wind. The weapon or instrument, he said, was a sarbacan. Numerous +beautiful birds were flying about in the neighbourhood, some of them the +most diminutive humming-birds. Soon as we looked down fell one, then +another and another. They were shot with little darts of hard wood +pointed at one end, and twisted round with wadding at the other to +prevent the wind escaping. Jerry said that at school he had often made +similar weapons on a small scale, and had killed insects with them. +After the sportsmen had shot off all their arrows they came down from +their perches to collect their game. We found that they were employed +by some naturalists at Para, and that the birds were wanted either for +stuffing or for the sake of their feathers. We saw several snakes as we +continued our walk, and I must own that I felt very uncomfortable when +they appeared hanging from the boughs of the trees or crawling along +among the thick grass. Many of them were perfectly harmless, but +others, we were told, were fearfully venomous. Once we very narrowly +escaped a rattlesnake which appeared close to us, but Providence has +ordered it that most of these creatures should be more afraid of man +than man need be of them, and they make off rapidly at his approach. +If, however, they are trodden on, or are disturbed waiting for their +prey, they become savage, and revenge themselves on the intruders. In +most instances, the only chance of saving the life of a person bitten is +at once to suck the wound. + +At length it was time for us to go back to the egaritea, that we might +return to the schooner. We found, on rejoining the passenger canoe, +that she would not be ready to start till the next morning. We were +doubting what to do with ourselves in the meantime, when Pedro informed +us that he had heard of some amusing sport to take place that night, and +that he could obtain leave for us to join in it if we wished. A party +of natives were going a little way down the river to a sandbank on which +turtles wore accustomed, at this season of the year, to come on shore in +order to deposit their eggs. The natives hide themselves near the spot, +and as soon as the unsuspecting turtles have performed the operation, +they rush out and turn as many as they can catch on their backs. There +they lie helpless till they are dispatched by the hungry aborigines. We +started in our own canoe, in company with twenty or thirty others, late +in the evening. On reaching the neighbourhood of the sandbank all the +canoes put to shore, and were drawn up on the beach. The natives, one +acting as a leader, whom we followed close after, proceeded along in +single file till a number of bushes and trees close to the bank was +reached. Behind these the party were soon concealed. It was a great +trial of patience waiting for the turtle. I thought at last that they +would not appear, and regretted having lost our night's rest for +nothing. At last, however, a low whistle from our leader aroused the +attention of the whole party, and a number of black objects were seen +moving over the white sands, till the bank seemed literally covered with +them. They remained for some time scraping holes in the sand, and, as I +supposed, depositing their eggs in them; then, at a sign from our +copper-coloured leader, out rushed all the savages, and getting between +the water and the turtle began turning them over with wonderful +rapidity. Jerry and I tried our hands at the sport, but while we turned +one turtle a native would turn a dozen, and would rush into the water +after those that had escaped, and frequently bring them back. At length +all the turtle had escaped or been killed, or had rather been turned on +their backs, where they lay utterly unable to move. The natives now +selected five or six, and carrying them to an open place inland where +the squaws had already lighted a fire, hero they cut the flesh out of +the shell and immediately began cooking it in a variety of ways, and as +soon as it was cooked tossing it down their throats. They all ate till +they were gorged, and then went fast asleep round their fires, forgetful +of tigers or rattlesnakes or other wild creatures. I should think a +tiger must occasionally carry some of them off when they are in that +state, unless the wild beasts prefer the turtles, which I rather fancy +they do. We selected four turtle, and filled a basket with a quantity +of the round soft eggs, and then paddled back to our egaritea. + +Soon after it was daylight we started on our passage down the river, +which, as we had a strong current in our favour, was very quickly +performed. The _Andorinha_ was just ready to sail, and as we had a fair +breeze, we did not stop at Para, but proceeded at once to sea. + +I have narrated the chief incidents of our expedition. By-the-by, the +doctor took a capital sketch of one of the tree habitations, literally +perched among the branches. He had to climb a tree to take it, an easy +matter in those parts, considering the immense number of tendrils to +assist a person in the operation. A big monkey was sitting on a +neighbouring bough, and did not observe us, as we were hid by the thick +foliage. I have introduced the sketch at the end of the chapter. + +We had a favourable voyage back to Pernambuco, where we found the +repairs of the _Triton_ just completed. Captain Frankland was of course +very anxious not to lose a day after this was done, so as soon as the +cargo could be restowed we bade farewell to Mr Robarts and our other +kind friends, and with a light wind stood out of the harbour. Our +destination was Rio de Janeiro, the capital of the Brazils. I shall not +forget the magnificent sight which met my eyes, as one bright afternoon +we glided through a narrow entrance into its superb harbour. We +appeared to be sailing up a large lake, extending as far inland as the +eye could reach, and surrounded with lofty mountains of many different +and picturesque shapes. On either side were walls of granite, rising +sheer out of the water to a height of nearly 2000 feet, while behind +them rose the vast Sugar-loaf Mountain, and a number of other lofty and +barren peaks towering up clear and defined against the blue sky. Like +mighty giants they surround the harbour, the ground at their bases +sloping towards the water, and sprinkled with pretty villages, and +quintas, and orange-groves, and covered with the most luxuriant +vegetation. A picturesque fort guards the entrance to the bay. Passing +it, after sailing about four miles, we dropped our anchor among a crowd +of vessels carrying the ensigns of nearly all the civilised nations of +the world, before the city of Rio, which, built on a flat extending two +miles from the hills, appeared on our left hand. As our stay was to be +short, the captain allowed Gerard and me to accompany the doctor on +shore at once. He himself went with us, and introduced us to a +merchant, who kindly undertook to show us about the place. + +"There, go and see all you can, and give me an account of what you have +seen when you return on board," were his parting words. + +Rio, with its superb harbour, as seen from the heights above it, is a +picturesque city, as I think the drawing I brought home and now give +will prove. It is built upon piles--that is, the lower part--and as the +drainage is bad, it is at times very unhealthy. On landing, we found +ourselves on a large open space with a palace before us, and a fountain +in front of it. Before the palace stood two negro soldiers as a guard. +The army, our friend told us, is composed chiefly of negroes, who make +very good soldiers; and the navy is manned by them. Acting with +Englishmen, many of whom are in the Brazilian navy, they are as bravo +and trustworthy as any men to be found. Off the square branched a +number of narrow streets. As the climate is so hot, all the streets are +made narrow, that they may be kept as much as possible in shade. The +houses are mostly of good size, and the walls are very thick; they thus +keep out the heat of the sun. The churches are also substantially +built, and decorated in a very florid style--the interiors being tawdry +in the extreme, calculated only to please the uncultivated taste of the +negroes and of the lower order of whites. Railways have been formed in +the Brazils, and one runs to Petropolis, a summer resort of the +principal inhabitants. Omnibuses, too, have made their appearance. The +streets are paved with fine blocks of stone, and the city is lighted +with gas; indeed, as our friend observed, "under the liberal government +of the present constitutional emperor the country has made great +material progress. When her literally unbounded resources are +developed, the Brazils cannot fail, unless her constitution is +overthrown, of becoming a wealthy and happy nation. At present, her +wretched parody of the pure religion of Christians, and her lazy, +profligate, and ignorant priests, tend more than anything else to retard +her progress. Vile as they are, they have been unable to prevent the +free circulation of the Scriptures and the toleration of Protestant +opinions." + +We were struck by the immense number of negroes who crowd the streets. +Those born in Africa are known by the distinguishing marks of their +tribes on their foreheads. Many of them are free. A negro in Rio may +demand his valuation from a magistrate, and when he can make up the +fixed sum he can purchase his freedom. Slaves are generally treated +kindly by their masters, and as their price is high, on account of the +impediments thrown in the way of the slave trade, their health is +carefully looked after. The porters are all slaves. They pay their +owners so much a day, and keep the rest of what they gain for +themselves. They carry everything on their heads. We sometimes met a +dozen grunting or singing in time, as they stooped under some huge +machine borne aloft above them. They lie about the streets with their +baskets, ready for anybody's call. We thought the Brazilians a very +quiet and most polite people. They were continually bowing to each +other, and there was none of that bustling roughness so often seen in +England. We met the emperor on horseback in plain clothes, though his +attendants were in handsome uniforms. He was a fine intelligent-looking +young man, and is much liked. The Brazilian government is liberal. +Both Houses of Parliament are elected by the people; and if there is a +majority of three-fourths in favour of a measure in the Lower House, the +measure is virtually carried, whatever the vote of the Upper. If the +Senate, or Upper House, do not agree, the two meet in convention; and as +the number of the Senate is small compared to that of the Lower House, +it can thus always be outvoted. The vote of the emperor can suspend a +law for a year; but if, at the end of that time, it be again passed by +the Legislature, it takes effect. In reality, the government is a +republic, the emperor being the executive, though deprived of +legislative power. + +We passed in our walk a house out of which a funeral procession was +coming. It was that of a young lad of our own age, we were told. That +and the neighbouring houses were hung with blue cloth. The hearse and +liveries of the servants, and the trappings of the horses, were of the +same colour. His hands were crossed before him with a cup in them. The +decorations at the funerals of young children are red, those only of +grown-up people are black. If boys are named after any of the saints, +they are dressed in appropriate costumes. If after Saint John, a pen is +placed in one hand and a book in the other. If after Saint Francis or +Saint Anthony, he has a monk's gown and cowl. Sometimes a boy is called +after the archangel Michael, and then he wears a gilt pasteboard helmet, +a tunic with a belt round the waist, tight red boots, and his hand +resting on a sword. Poor little girls, with rouge and false locks, are +made to represent Madonnas and female saints. Jerry and I agreed that +we should not like to be rigged out in that guise after we were dead. + +Rio is supplied with water by an aqueduct which comes from far up among +the mountains, its chief source being a romantic and forest-surrounded +spot, called the "Mother of Waters." The actual channel which conveys +sufficient water to supply so large a city as Rio is only nine inches +wide and nine and a half deep. The precious fluid, however, comes +rushing down with great rapidity, and thus quickly fills all the +reservoirs below. It is conveyed from its mountain-source sometimes +across valleys on high massive arches, sometimes in the interior of a +thick wall-like structure, and sometimes underground. The channel has +for its whole length an arch above it of sufficient height and width to +enable a man to walk upright along it. Altogether, we agreed that Rio +if it were not for the slaves and the monks, and the want of drains, +would be a very civilised city. Never did sight-seers get over the +ground faster than we did, or make better use of their eyes. I ought to +have mentioned that steamers ply in various directions in the harbour of +Rio. Our friend proposed a trip up the country, which would last during +the few days we had to spare. We started in one of the smallest of the +steamers, and went up the River Macacu. One thing struck us--a boat +laden with slaves, which had been landed on the opposite shore, and were +being smuggled into the city. We went on shore at the small town of +Porto Sampaio, and thence on mule back about fifteen miles, to the +country-house of a Brazilian gentleman, our friend's friend. We four +had a room to ourselves--a large, roughly built apartment. Scarcely +were we all in bed, and the light out, when, just as I had dropped +asleep, down came something on my nose. I started up, and there +appeared to be a tremendous clattering and pattering about the room. + +"I say, Harry, what are you heaving at me?" sung out Jerry, springing up +also. + +"Rather, what are you throwing at me?" I retorted. + +"Hillo! what's the matter?" cried the doctor; "I felt something soft +slip through my fingers--animals of some sort--what can they be?" + +"Only rats!" said our friend, awoke by our exclamations. "I know they +are somewhat numerous in this house." + +We all sat up, and began shouting and striking right and left; but the +rats did not mind us a bit. At last the doctor lighted a lucifer match, +and away scampered at least a hundred rats into the holes from whence +they had come out. We thought that we were to have rest, but as soon as +darkness and silence were restored, out they all came again, and made as +much hubbub as before. Jerry and I kept knocking about us to little +purpose, till we both fell back asleep; and all night long I dreamed +that I was fighting with a host of black men on the coast of Africa. +When the morning broke, they scampered away like so many evil spirits, +leaving their marks, however, behind them. They had committed no little +mischief also. They had gnawed through our friend's shoes and the +doctor's leather cigar-case; they had carried off Jerry's leather +braces--the remains of which were found near one of the holes--and the +front strap of my cap. We all had suffered, but, as Jerry remarked, as +they had left us our noses and toes it did not much signify. They +infest the country in all directions, we were told. + +The estate we were on produced chiefly sugar. The milk by which the +canes are crushed consisted of three vertical wooden rollers worked by +mules. The most interesting subject connected with our trip was the +cultivation and preparation of the mandioca. The chief produce is +called farinha: the slaves are fed almost entirely on it. A field of +mandioca, when ripe, looks something like a nursery of young plants. +Each plant grows by itself, with a few palmated leaves only at the top. +The stem is about an inch in diameter at the base, and six or seven feet +long. A bud appears at nearly every inch of the otherwise smooth stem. +These plants give forth tubers of irregular shape, in substance like a +parsnip, about six inches long and four thick. The tubers, after being +scraped and rinsed, are ground, or rather grated against a wheel with a +brass grater as a tire. One slave turns the wheel, and another presses +the root against it. The pulp is then put into bags and pressed. The +matter, which resembles cheese-cake in consistence, is then rubbed +through a wire sieve and thrown into shallow copper pans moderately +heated. After being stirred up, it quickly dries, and the produce is +not unlike oatmeal. The juice pressed out is very poisonous by itself. +It is, however, collected in pans, when a beautifully white substance is +precipitated to the bottom. This substance is tapioca, so largely used +in puddings at home. To plant a field of mandioca, the stems of the old +plants are cut into bits about four inches long, and stuck in the +ground. They quickly take root, and, sending forth shoots from the +buds, are in two years fit again to dig up. The mandioca is called +cassava in some countries. The press used by the Indians is a simple +and most ingenious contrivance. It is made by the Indians wherever the +plant is grown. It is a basket made of fine split cane loosely plaited; +in shape, a tube five feet long and five inches in diameter at the +mouth, and narrowing somewhat at the bottom. A strong loop is left at +each end. To use it, first it is wetted, and then a man holding the +mouth presses the other end against the ground till it is half its +former height. A long smooth stick is now inserted down the middle, and +the pulp is packed tightly round it till the basket is full. It is then +hung to a beam or branch of a tree by a loop at the mouth, while a heavy +weight is attached to one at the bottom, till the basket has assumed its +original tube-like form and length, and the whole of the liquid has been +pressed out of the mass of mandioca. + +One of the most curious features in a Brazilian forest is the vegetable +cordage, or _sipos_, which hang down from every branch, like slack ropes +from the rigging of a ship. Jerry and I several times could not resist +having a good swing on them, while the doctor was hunting about for his +specimens. Their roots are in the ground. They climb up a tree, then +hang over a branch and descend, and often twist upward again by their +own stem, to descend more than once again to the ground. We were shown +the nests of some diminutive bees. The nests are not so large as a +turkey's egg, while the bodies of the bees are but little thicker than +the bodies of mosquitoes. The comb is of a dark brown colour, and the +construction of the nest is somewhat like that of ants. The only +entrance is a small hole, at the mouth of which they construct a tube +turning upwards. This is regularly closed up at night, so that no damp +can enter, and it is never opened till the sun has been some time up. +The bees have no stings, but they are very brave, and will drive away +the ordinary bee from their hives. A sketch which the doctor took, and +finished up afterwards on board, will afford a better idea of the +vegetation of a Brazilian forest than any verbal account I can give. + +I might go on indeed for hours describing all the wonders we saw during +our short trip. Our last excursion was to the Corcovado Mountains, +whence we looked down on the blue waters of the superb harbour of Rio, +surrounded by sandy beaches and numerous snow-white buildings, peeping +from amid the delicate green foliage which covers the bases of the +neighbouring mountains, and creeps up almost to their summits; while the +mountains are on every side broken into craggy and castellated peaks of +every varied shape; the whole forming a not easily forgotten panorama. +Once more we were on board and under weigh. The bay, as we sailed out, +was full of vessels; but the flag of Old England was not, as I should +have supposed, among the most numerous. With a fair wind we passed out +of the harbour, and stood along the coast to the southward. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +ADVENTURES IN THE FALKLANDS. + +The reason, I believe, why sailors in a well-regulated ship are +generally so happy, is, that they are never allowed to have an idle +moment. Mr Renshaw was always finding something for the people to do; +and when that work was finished, there was something else of equal +importance to be done. The picture our deck presented on one day will +serve for that seen on most days in fine weather: on one side the +spun-yarn winches were going, manufacturing spun-yarn out of old junk--a +never-ending source of employment; Mr Pincott and his mates were busily +at work building a boat on the other; the sail-maker and his gang were +repairing some of the sails, and making light ones for the gentle +breezes of the Pacific; while Fleming and his crew were laying up rope, +and the rest of the watch were knotting yarns, making sinnet, wad-bags, +wads, chafing gear of all descriptions, such as worming, parcelling, +roundings, spun-yarn, rope-yarn, marline, seizing, stuffs, and service +of all kinds; the names of which things alone are, I suspect, sufficient +to puzzle a landsman, so I will say no more about them. Aft were +Captain Frankland, with one of the mates and Gerard and I, taking +observations of the sun,--an employment in which, as I began to +understand it, I felt great interest. It struck me that, as far as I +saw, Captain Frankland took very little concern about the ship. He +seldom spoke a word to any of the crew, and only occasionally on points +of duty while on deck, to the mates. I soon found, however, that no man +could more effectually exert himself, when his exertions were required. +Hitherto there had been nothing to call forth his energies. With light +winds and calm seas, he had better employment in his cabin. That very +day a change came over the even tenor of our lives; scarcely were our +sextants stowed away, when, as the captain was walking the deck, I saw +him frequently turn his glance to the westward. There, over the land, +in a moment it seemed, arose a bank of clouds, which every instant grew +denser and denser, and came rushing toward us across the sky. + +"All hands shorten sail!" shouted Captain Frankland, stopping suddenly +in his walk. Quick as the word, the work in which everybody was engaged +was stowed away, and up jumped the crew, all life and activity. Away +they flew aloft--royals were sent down, top-gallant-sails were furled, +and the yards were braced so as to take the wind on the starboard-tack. +We had had the wind from the north-east, but it now fell almost a dead +calm, and the lower sails began to flap idly against the masts; and +under our topsails we waited the coming of the squall. It did not long +delay; on it came in its majestic fury. On one side of us the whole sky +was covered with a dense mass of threatening clouds, while the sea below +appeared torn up into sheets of hissing foam; on the other, the sky was +blue, and the water smooth as a polished mirror. There was not a breath +of air where the ship lay. Then down on us came the fierce squall with +its utmost fury--rain, hail, and wind united--over heeled the stout ship +as if she had been a mere cockleshell, till her gunwale was buried in +the water. I thought she would never rise again, but I kept my eye on +Captain Frankland, who seemed as cool and collected as if nothing +unusual was happening. With speaking-trumpet in hand, and holding on by +the weather-rail, he ordered the mizen-topsail to be furled. The lee +maintopsail braces were then slackened, to shiver the maintopsail; and +the wind being taken out of it, the whole pressure was thrown on the +headsail; the helm was then put a-starboard, and her bow paying off, +righting herself, away flew the ship rapidly before the gale on an even +keel. The foaming seas, rising every moment higher and higher, coursed +each other up under our stern, as if angry at our escaping their power. +Dark clouds were above us; dark hissing seas on every side; the thunder +roared, the lightning flashed brightly: so terrific did the scene appear +to me, that I thought at times that we must be hurrying to destruction. +I concealed my feelings, for Gerard took the matter very coolly, and he +was not likely to spare me if I expressed any unwarrantable alarm. +After we had run on before the gale for some time, it began to moderate. +We had all the time been going out of our course; so, to avoid losing +more ground, the captain gave the order to heave the ship to. I had +never before seen this operation performed. The fore-topsail was first +furled, and the maintopsail, which was closely reefed, and the +fore-topmast staysail were the only sails set. "Brace up the main +yard!" was the next order given. "Now, down with the helm!" cried the +captain, watching a favourable opportunity when a heavy sea had passed +us. The ship felt the influence of the wind, and came up with her head +to the westward; and then she rode, rising easily to the tops of the +seas, and gliding slowly down into the valleys--their wild, foaming, +hissing crests rushing furiously by her, but not a drop of water coming +on board. I had never pictured to myself a scene so awfully grand as +that which I now beheld in perfect security. On one side the waters +rose in a wall high above the deck, and looked as if about to overwhelm +us; while the next instant we were looking down into a vale of waters of +depth so great, that it seemed, if we slipped into it, we should never +again struggle upwards. When summoned to dinner, I went below with the +expectation that I should be unable to have a mouthful; instead of +which, there appeared to be very little more motion than usual, so +easily rode the ship; and I could scarcely persuade myself that I had +but just left a scene of such wild confusion on deck. The gale did not +last more than twelve hours, and the ship was then once more put on her +proper course for the Falkland Islands. + +"Land ho! land ho!" was shouted one forenoon from aloft, with the usual +prolonged cry. The Falkland Islands were in sight, and the land seen as +we drew nearer, I found, was that about Cape Bougainville. We stood on, +and next we made out the rugged hills above Berkley Sound, and then got +close to the dark brown cliffs of Macbride's Head, with hundreds of +seals lying on the sands and rocks below them. We could hear the roar +of the beasts as they looked up at us, indignant, I thought, at being +disturbed by our approach; but Mr Brand told me that, fierce as they +looked, they are a very harmless race, and easily captured. On the +downs above were numerous cattle feeding, which gave us the idea that we +were approaching some civilised part of the world. Passing Berkley +Sound with a stiff breeze, which rushed out of it, we stood on for Mount +Low, and then beat up Port William, which has a line of sand hills on +one side of it, and Stanley Harbour at the end. Although the day was +fine, the appearance of the country was not very attractive; for there +are no trees--rocks, and sand hills, and tussac grass, and barren +heights, being the chief features. We dropped anchor opposite Stanley, +the capital of the settlement. Above a line of piers and quays appeared +a double row of neat white cottages, inhabited by the pensioners who +were sent out to assist in founding the colony. Round and about them +are other houses and cottages, extending along the shores of the bay, +and sprinkled on the sides of a gentle slope. They are generally of +light tints, which contrast well with the dark background of the hill +beyond, and give the place a pretty appearance. Further up is the +church, not a very ecclesiastical-looking building; and beyond again, +the cemetery, which has a neat chapel attached to it. The Government +House is a long, low cottage edifice, which looks well from the harbour; +and on the east of the town are some extensive stores, belonging to the +Falkland Island Company, with their small fleet of vessels in front of +it. On the west of the town is the Government Dock-yard, with +block-house, workshops, guard-house, and stores, all neatly railed in. +The surrounding country consisting of slight elevations, either rocky or +covered with tussac grass, is not attractive. I could not help looking +at the place with great interest, as the first infant British settlement +I had seen; and I thought less of what it then was than of what it might +become, under good management. The last idea was suggested to me, I +must own, by Mr Brand. + +The chief promenade in Stanley is called Ross Road, running right and +left of the principal street for about two miles. On one side of it are +built a number of houses facing the water, and among them are two or +more hotels, of some pretensions. Behind this road are some smaller +streets, inhabited by labouring people, Spanish Gauchos, and others. +There are, perhaps, rather more than a hundred houses in the town, and +between 400 and 500 inhabitants, including boatmen, stray sailors, +Gauchos, and other wanderers. Several of the houses have gardens which +produce a fair supply of vegetables, and beef is to be had in abundance; +but as the colony produces very little else in the way of food, the +inhabitants are somewhat hard up in that respect. The islands +alternately belonged to England and Spain, till, in 1774, they were +finally evacuated by the latter power, though it is only of late years +that they have been systematically colonised by England. The first +governor, Lieutenant Moody, arrived there in 1842, when the site of the +intended town was changed from Port Louis to Port Stanley. As a proof +of the value of the islands, Mr Lafosse, a British merchant at Monte +Video, paid 60,000 pounds to have the right over all cattle of every +description to be found on the East Falklands, for six years and a half. +From what I heard, the climate is very healthy. It is at times windy, +but in summer it is as mild and dry as the south of England. In winter +the cold is never severe, and only at intervals of several years does +snow fall to any depth, so as to risk the destruction of cattle. The +most remarkable production is the tussac, a gigantic species of grass, +which grows to the height of ten feet, and is capable of sheltering and +concealing herds of cattle and horses. The core of this grass is of so +nutritious a nature, that people have been known to live for months on +it, and to retain their health. From this cause the animals on the +islands grow to a great size, and their flesh is of a particularly fine +flavour. The great object for which the settlement was founded, was to +afford a place where ships might repair, and to supply those going round +Cape Horn, or returning home that way, with fresh provisions. It is +also under contemplation to make it a penal settlement, for which it is +in many respects particularly adapted, if sufficient employment for the +convicts can be found. + +Gerard and I were very anxious to get on shore to enjoy some of the +sport we had heard so much about. "Wouldn't it be fine to kill a fat +bull, who would make nothing of tossing one twelve feet up in the air if +he could but catch a fellow on the tip of his horns?" said he, rubbing +his hands. + +I agreed with him; but we had little hopes of having our wishes +gratified, when a gentleman from the shore offered to give us a trip +round in one of the Company's schooners to the West Falklands, where she +was going to procure cattle. As the ship was to remain here some days +to have one or two slight defects made good, and to take in a supply of +beef, fresh and salt, Captain Frankland allowed us to accept the offer, +Mr Brand going to look after us. Away dashed the little schooner, the +_Sword-Fish_, having a fine fresh breeze, with as merry a party on board +as ever put to sea. There was our friend Mr Nathaniel Burkett, and his +friend Mr Jonathan Kilby, both keen sportsmen, and up to all sorts of +fun; and Gerard and I, and the master of the vessel, Tom Cribb by name, +who, though not a good shot, seeing that he had but one eye, and that +had a terrific squint, knew every inch of the coast, and exactly where +we were likely to find sport; and then there was Cousin Silas, who was a +first-rate shot, though he did not throw away his words by talking about +the matter. Pleasant as our trip promised to be, many a gale has to be +encountered off those wild islands, and dangers not a few. We, however, +instead of standing out to sea and going round all, took a course, +well-known to our skipper, among the numerous isles and islets grouped +round the larger Falkland. Their names I cannot pretend to remember. +At last we dropped anchor in a snug cove where we were to remain for the +night. We, the sportsmen, were to have a boat left us, and we were to +land, while the schooner ran on to a station some way further. We had +one dog with us, Old Surley by name, belonging to Mr Kilby--as brave an +animal as ever flew at a bull's neck, for he feared neither bull nor +beast of any sort. With our guns, plenty of ammunition, and a stock of +provisions, we pulled up a creek where we could leave the boat in +safety, and landed. We first climbed a rock on the shore, whence we +could look about us and take a survey of the island. It was of +considerable size. We saw that we should have no difficulty in +penetrating across it, through the high tussac grass which almost +entirely covered the ground. We first advanced together. We soon came +to some curious green mounds, covered with a velvety moss, about two +feet high and nine in circumference. I happened to sit down on one to +tie my shoe, and it made a most comfortable seat. + +"Do you know what that is?" said Mr Burkett, giving it a blow with the +butt end of his gun, which broke the moss to pieces as if it had been a +huge toadstool. The mossy coat was an inch and a half in thickness, and +the whole interior appeared filled with wide-spreading miniature +fir-trees. Every stalk, of which there were a great number, was edged +with diminutive leaves like those of the fir; and the tops were +sprinkled with little pieces of resin, brown outside and white within, +some not larger than a pin's-head, and others half the size of a +filbert. We afterwards came to some mounds where the plants had pushed +through the green moss, and their leaves having slightly expanded, they +looked like miniature myrtles. Instead of going directly inland, we +made our way along the shore among the penguin grass. This grows to the +height of ten feet, on the top of clumps of decayed vegetable matter, +forming large hillocks, which made the shore look as if it had been +covered with a coppice of underwood. We took our way through it, often +being hid from each other by the high grass, and had not gone far when a +loud roar saluted our ears. Jerry and I were together, but we had lost +sight of the rest of the party. I instinctively drew back, and he +looked very much as if he would have run away, had he known where to run +to. He says he felt very brave though. + +"What's that?" I exclaimed. + +"A lion!" replied Jerry, looking uncomfortable. + +"A wild boar," said I; "there are no lions here." + +"A big bull, perhaps," cried my companion. "I hope his horns are not +sharp!" + +Our guns were loaded only with small shot, so that we could hope to make +but little impression on the body of a wild animal. The roar was +repeated, and there was a loud rustling among the penguin grass on a +mound near us. The grass moved rapidly. We looked towards it. +Presently the huge head of a ferocious-looking animal appeared glaring +at us from among the grass. We shouted lustily for help to our friends. + +"Let's run, it is a lion--I told you so," cried Jerry; "no time to lose, +if we don't wish to be eaten up!" Suiting the action to the word, Jerry +turned round, and, in attempting to escape, tumbled over some of the +tangled stalks, and lay sprawling on the ground, while I endeavoured to +lift him up. The huge monster all the time came roaring towards us, +Jerry and I shouting out,--"Help, help, help! a lion, a lion!" In +another moment I expected to feel his claws on my shoulder. + +"A sea-lion, my lads!" cried Mr Jonathan Kilby, who at that moment +appeared close to us from among the high grass. "Jump up and attack +him." + +The beast having no legs, and being able only to make progress with his +fins, had not advanced so far as we expected. Our friend, having in the +meantime drawn the small shot from his gun, and put a ball instead, +fired at the head of the beast. The ball entered and stopped his +further progress, and there he lay, helplessly floundering about, and +roaring more lustily than ever. This gave Jerry and me time to recover +ourselves, and to put bullets into our guns, with which we soon put an +end to the sufferings of the poor beast. He was, we found, a species of +seal, about eight feet long, of a yellowish-brown colour, and with a +large mane, covering his neck and shoulders. He looked as if he would +prove an ugly customer in the water; but as he had only flappers for +front legs, with very small nails on them, and only a tail instead of +hind-legs, a person on shore could very easily keep out of his way, and +Jerry and I felt rather foolish at the fright he had put us into. We +had achieved our victory before Mr Brand and Mr Burkett found their +way up to us. As he lay not far from the boat, we settled to take his +skin on our return. Going on, we reached a lake of some size, from +which vast numbers of teal got up. Jerry and I shot several, which made +us very proud; and the rest of the party tagged thirty or more between +them, so that they were pretty well loaded. Before long, we again +managed to get separated from the rest, but we had grown so satisfied +with our prowess that we were indifferent to consequences. We felt that +we were not likely to starve even if we lost our way. I was just going +to fire at a teal, when Jerry pulled my arm, and pointing to an opening +in the distance among the clumps of grass, I saw the head of a huge bull +not fifty yards from us, and, as it seemed, fast asleep. Now was the +time to show what we could do, so we withdrew our small shot and loaded +with ball. Like North American Indians on a war-trail, we crawled +stealthily towards him. We halted, and resting our guns on a bank, +fired together. + +"I am certain I hit him," cried Jerry. + +"So am I," I added--though I was surprised that the beast did not move. + +"We've killed him!" cried Jerry, as on we rushed, expecting to find a +rich prize. He was lying down when we hit him, we saw that. We kept +him in sight for some way, then we found our further progress somewhat +impeded by the bogginess of the ground. At last we were brought to a +stand-still about ten paces from our victim. Jerry gave a blank look at +me, and I looked at him, and burst out laughing. The poor beast was not +alive, certainly, but we were innocent of his death. He had evidently +got into the bog in wet weather, and in vain struggling to free himself, +had died of starvation. His head was stretched out, as if hopelessly +longing for the rich food he saw growing not thirty yards from him, +which yet he could not reach. All around the morass were the hoof-marks +of his comrades, as if they had been watching him in his dying +struggles, scampering round and round, perhaps with terror, or perhaps +thinking how they might help him. + +"At all events," exclaimed Jerry, "we may say we hit a huge bull and +left him as dead as mutton; and there's no great harm if the rest go +back to look for him. We can easily point them out the place by the +side of the lake." + +A little further on we reached a smaller lake which was swarming with +birds--geese, ducks, divers, and other wild-fowl. Among them were +several swans, beautifully white, with black necks, which kept swimming +gracefully about like the great lords of the feathered population among +whom they moved. Jerry and I were very hungry, so we sat ourselves down +to take a nibble at our biscuit and cheese, not wishing to disturb them +till our friends should come up to help us to slaughter them. We had +sat a little while, and opened our wallet, when, what was our surprise +to see the birds swimming together, and landing in numbers below our +feet! Slowly some advanced, as if to reconnoitre us, and then others +came on, till some hundreds were within thirty yards of us, evidently +wondering what strange animals we could be. Then they began to talk to +each other in a most strange discordant cackle, their voices growing +louder and louder, as if they were disputing on the subject, and could +not settle it to their satisfaction. We lay back and watched them, +highly diverted. Nearer and nearer they approached, talking away +furiously all the time in tones of wonder and surprise, more than in +those of anger. + +"I know what they are saying," whispered Jerry. "Well, these are two +strange beings! How could they have come here? They are not seals, +that's certain, for they have legs; but they don't look as if they could +swim with those long, thin projections instead of flappers; and +assuredly they can't fly, for they have no wings. How can they feed +themselves, for they have no bills? and see what great ugly round things +they've got for heads. Evidently they cannot dive or live under water. +They are not fish, then, nor birds; for if those are feathers growing on +their backs, they are very rugged and dirty. Well, we pity them; for +they are strange beasts, that's a fact." This quaint notion of Jerry's +tickled my fancy so much that I burst into a loud fit of laughter, which +somewhat startled our flock of visitors; while Jerry, sitting up, hove a +stick he had carried all day made fast to his side in among them. The +missile did not, however, make them turn tail; but, instead, they +clustered thickly round it, and, as if it had been some impertinent +intruder, began pecking at it furiously. As we could not carry the +birds away, with a praiseworthy self-denial we abstained from firing. +When, however, we jumped suddenly up and clapped our hands, away they +scuttled at a great rate, chattering and quacking louder than ever. We +hoped, however, to reward ourselves for our present self-denial, by +returning with all the party to have a shot at them in the evening. +After this we walked on for a mile, and had begun to wonder what had +become of our companions, and to be a little anxious at having missed +them, when we were startled at hearing a loud roar not three hundred +yards from us. It was very different from that of the sea-lion, and we +too soon recognised it as the voice of an angry bull. Again the bull +bellowed, and this time several other bulls lent their voices to the +terror-inspiring chorus. We ran to the top of the highest mound near +us, and thence we made out five or six bulls, with their tails up in the +air, rushing towards us, following one whose voice we first heard. The +spot on which we stood afforded us no protection, for the beasts would +have rushed up it in a moment, but a couple of hundred yards on was a +rock with steep sides, just rising above the grass; and our only chance +of safety was to climb it before the horns of the first bull had reached +our backs. Had he come directly on, as fast as his legs could carry +him, this we should have had no chance of doing; but instead of that, he +every now and then stuck his sharp ugly-looking horns into the grass, +and tossed it above his head, as if to show how he intended to treat us +when he caught us. We rushed on with our eyes fixed on the rock, not +venturing to look behind, and expecting every moment to feel his horns +at our backs. We kept a tight hold of our guns, but unfortunately +dropped our wallets and the game we had shot. On we ran and on came the +bull; the rock was a dozen yards before us, and he was not much further +off in our rear. We sprang on; Jerry tripped over a lump of decayed +grass, but he picked himself up, and, crying to me not to stop, followed +me. The face of the rock was too perpendicular directly in front to +allow me to get up it, but a little to the right it was more broken. I +sprang towards the place, and scrambled up. Jerry reached the foot of +the rock; the bull was making for the right side, where he had seen me +climb up. In another moment he would have pinned Jerry to the rock, or +tossed him up to me. + +"Help me! help me, Harry!" he sung out, with good reason dreadfully +alarmed. I had just time to throw myself down at full length, and, by +loaning over the rock, to seize his hand, before the bull, seeing him, +with a terrific bellow made a full butt at him. With a strength I did +not think myself capable of exerting, I hauled him up to me, the bull's +horns actually passing between his feet! In his hurry, however, he +dropped his gun at the foot of the rock, and the bull vented his rage +and disappointment by giving it several butts as it lay on the ground; +and I was in great hopes that he would strike the lock and make it go +off--it would have astonished him not a little. Jerry almost fainted +with the fright the brute had given him, but he very speedily recovered, +and then we looked round to see what sort of a place we were on. We +found that it was, fortunately, inaccessible on all sides; so we +returned with much greater composure to watch the proceedings of our +bovine enemies. The other bulls had now come up, with their tails in +the air, bellowing at the top of their voices, and tearing the ground up +on all sides, and throwing the grass over their heads. They appeared +for some reason to be fearfully enraged against us. There were seven +bulls altogether. Placed in the convenient position we were, we agreed +that we could easily shoot them, and thus raise the siege; but on +examining the contents of our pockets, we found that we had only got +five bullets between us. Now, supposing every bullet to have had in +this case its billet, and to have mortally wounded an animal, that would +have left two unprovided for; and even with two we had no desire to +contend on the level ground. Still we determined to do what we could; +so I loaded and took a steady aim at the beast which had led on the +attack. The bullet struck him on the head; but his skull was thick, and +though it wounded him severely, it did not enter his brain. The pain +made him tear up the ground more furiously, and bellow louder than +before. Jerry said he would try the next time; so I loaded, and he took +the gun. I thought he was going to make a good shot, but he was +nervous, and the bullet only struck the beast's shoulder, nor did it +increase the sweetness of his temper. We had thus only three bullets, +and all our enemies as vicious as ever. The most important thing we +agreed to be done was to get rid of the leader; so I took the gun again, +and carefully loading, waited till he made a tilt right up to the face +of the rock, really looking as if he had been going to try and leap up +at us. I tried to be perfectly cool, and fired. The bullet struck him, +I was certain of that, but it did not kill him, so I supposed that it +had glanced off over his head. + +"I won't miss again," I cried, loading as rapidly as I could. "One of +our last two bullets must do the deed." + +Our enemy, on receiving his last wound, turned off and made a rapid +circuit round the rock, to discover, we concluded, if there was any +place by which he could get up at us. Finding none, he returned. As +soon as he appeared, I took a steady aim, resting the barrel on a lump +of rock--I fired. Roaring with fury, he bounded along towards the rock. +I thought he would almost have reached us. Suddenly he stopped--down +went his head, and over he rolled close under the rock, and there he lay +stone dead! We both of us simultaneously raised a loud shout of +victory; but, as Jerry remarked, we began to crow rather too soon, for +the other six bulls, no way daunted at the fall of their leader, +continued raging round about us as furiously as ever. We had only one +bullet left, and with that we could scarcely hope even to settle one of +them. We sat ourselves down watching our enemies, hoping that they +would grow tired of waiting for us and go away; but they seemed by no +means disposed to move. Never did a beleaguering army watch more +pertinaciously round a hard pressed garrison than did our formidable +enemies watch to toss us in the air. In vain we stood up and looked +around on every side for our friends, as far as our somewhat limited +range of vision extended. There was not a sign of them. They, too, +would have become not a little anxious about us, except Cousin Silas +thought we were still with Mr Kilby, and the latter gentleman supposed +we had joined our other friends. If so, unless they met they would +probably not come to look for us. As we had taken but a light luncheon, +we began to feel very hungry, and to cast longing glances at our +satchels and the teal, which lay at some distance from the rock, but +which we dared not attempt to got. Not ten feet below where we sat was +the bull. Jerry looked over the rock-- + +"I should so like to have a juicy beef-steak out of you, old fellow!" +said he, addressing the dead animal. "I say, Harry, don't you think we +could manage to get it? The other brutes will certainly grow hungry +before long; and, as they don't want to eat us, while they are picking +up their dinners I shall have plenty of time to get down and cut out a +few slices. I have my knife, and I sharpened it only yesterday." + +I had mine also; and, as I highly approved of his suggestion, we +resolved to wait a favourable opportunity for our exploit. Raw meat was +not, however, to our taste; so we agreed to try and light a fire and +cook our steaks. There was plenty of dry moss and grass on the rock, so +we set to work and collected all that we could find, so that we soon had +a famous heap of it, sufficient almost to roast the whole animal. As we +expected, the bulls, after looking at us for some time, feeling the +calls of hunger, began to lower their tails, and putting their heads to +the ground, commenced to munch the tender grass. + +"Now, if these beasts had been lions and tigers, the more hungry they +grew the more anxious they would have been to get at us. It's lucky all +animals are not carnivorous." + +Having delivered himself of this sagacious remark, Jerry said he was +ready to turn butcher. We waited, however, till the bulls had got a +little further off, and then he descended on the carcass of our victim, +while I bent over the rock, as before, to help him up should they appear +inclined to tilt at him. Enough steaks were cut to dine half-a-dozen +men; and then, as the bulls did not observe him, grown brave from +impunity, he went on further and picked up his gun. This he handed up +to me, and it was not much the worse for the butting it had got. The +bulls were still feeding quietly, apparently having forgot all about us. + +"I say, Harry, I think some biscuits, and rum and water, would not be +bad things with our steaks, not to speak of the teal," said he, looking +up at me. "What do you advise? May I venture to run for the satchels +and some of the game?" + +I agreed with him that it would be very desirable to have them, and +offered to accompany him. + +"No, no," he answered, with a knowledge of generalship for which I had +not given him credit; "do you load the gun, and stand by to cover me if +I am pursued; you will be ready also to help me up the rock as before. +If I were to take your place with the gun up there, the chances are that +I should shoot you instead of the bull, and that would not do. I'll go, +never fear." Jerry, as will be seen, was a creature of impulse. He was +as brave as any one when he had time for reflection, and saw the +necessity for coolness. As soon as I had loaded the gun and got ready, +keeping his eyes on the bulls, he cautiously advanced towards our +satchels. If a bull lifted his head, he stopped, and crouched down to +the ground. Then he advanced again on all-fours; and so by slow degrees +he worked himself up to the spot at which he aimed. He seized the +things, and began to return as slowly as before. It would have been +well if he had continued his caution, but when he had got about half way +on his return, he took it into his head to run, laughing loudly at the +success of his exploit. His figure moving alone, and his voice, roused +the bulls. Up went their tails, and a terrific bellow made his laughter +cease in a moment. I shouted to him to run faster. On he scampered, +shouting loudly, "Fire, Harry, if you see one of them going to butt!" I +was all ready, and he bravely held fast our property. The bull nearest +to him, wildly whisking his tail and bellowing louder than ever, was +close to him. I was in doubt whether or not to fire, lest I should +still more infuriate the animal should I wound without killing him. In +another moment I saw that there was no alternative. His horns were +close to Jerry's back, and in an instant he would have had him high up +in the air. I shouted to Jerry to jump on one side. He followed my +advice with wonderful coolness. I fired. My bullet hit the bull in the +right eye. Down went his head, tearing into the ground. He rushed on +almost close up to the rock, bellowing furiously, ploughing up the earth +with his horns; and then, as if he had been making a voluntary +summerset, he rolled right over, and was dead. It was indeed a triumph. +I had no time to think about it then. On rushed Jerry, for the other +bulls were coming up fast. Throwing aside my gun, I helped Jerry up the +rock with the things he had so courageously recovered at the moment the +other beasts were up to him. + +"Bravo, Harry!" he sung out; "you've saved my life and shot the bull; +you are a capital fellow!" + +I proposed that we would not compliment each other till we had lighted +our fire and cooked our steaks. As we had now some teal, we added a +couple to our repast. We had some lucifers, so we soon made a glorious +fire. Having plucked our teal, we poked them under the ashes, while, in +true sportsman fashion, we toasted the steaks at the end of our ramrod. +Having also pepper and salt, we had every reason to be satisfied with +our repast. + +"I say, I wish those other fellows were here," said Jerry. "It would be +great fun if they would come, thinking we were stuck in a bog, or spiked +on the horns of bulls, and find us so jollily eating away up here. +Here's to your health, Harry. May you always make as good shots as you +did just now, when you saved me from the butt of that beast's head! +Hillo! have a bit of your brother?" cried he, holding a piece of the +steak at the end of his ramrod down towards one of the bulls, which came +snuffing up towards us. + +Thus we went on laughing and joking, perfectly contented, and thinking +only of the present moment. We forgot that our fuel would soon be +expended; that the position we occupied would be a very unpleasant one +on which to pass a cold and perhaps rainy night; and that our friends +would become really alarmed should we not make our appearance at the +boat. These considerations did not begin to weigh with us till we had +finished our dinner. When, however, we had time for reflection, we were +not quite so well contented with ourselves. + +"This is very good fun," I remarked, "but I should like to know how we +are to get away unless these beasts of bulls choose to raise the siege." + +"They'll not do that in a hurry," answered Jerry. "We must wait till +night-time, when they can't see us, and then make a run for it." + +"But how are we to find our way to the boat in the dark?" I asked. "I +scarcely know whereabouts she lies." + +"To the westward, then, I think," said he. "If the sky is clear we may +steer by the stars, and we shall manage to find our way." + +I cannot say that I felt as hopeful as my friend professed to do, still +there appeared to be no other means of escaping the bulls, and getting +back to the boat. Should we wait till the morning the brutes would +probably espy us, and run a tilt at us as before. We had provisions to +last us for many days, but we had no liquid, with the exception of a +little rum and water, which, although we had carefully husbanded it, was +very low in the flask. A breeze had sprung up from the east, and it was +already rather cold on the top of the rock; so, making up our fire, we +sat down by it. We were amused at the way in which the bulls +occasionally came and had a look at us; as much as, Jerry said, to ask, +"Well, when are you coming down to let us give you a toss? We don't +intend to go away till we've tried it on. We are at home here, you +know, so we are in no hurry." Provoked, as he declared, at their +impudence, he at last seized a bundle of burning grass which, he had +twisted into a torch, and when a bull came near he hove it at his head. +The flaming mass caught on his horns, and certainly had the effect of +making him turn tail, and rush bellowing off from the rock; but it had +another effect, and a most disastrous one, on which we had not +calculated. Galloping on, the animal very soon freed himself from his +burning head-dress by sending it into the middle of a large clump of +tussac grass. + +"Hurrah! the brute has made a famous bonfire!" exclaimed Jerry, clapping +his hands as he saw the bright flames burst out from the easily ignited +grass. + +"Larger than we may bargain for," I remarked, as in another instant, +fanned by the wind, the fire began to run along the ground, and a +neighbouring clump broke forth into a furious blaze. + +"Well, that is a bonfire!" cried Jerry, still not comprehending the +extent of the mischief he had commenced; but it was not long before he +also saw with me what was going to occur. On went the fire, running +along the ground as if it had been strewed with gunpowder--then for an +instant playing round some tall clump, out of which directly afterwards +forked flames darted forth, and quickly reduced it to ashes, while thick +volumes of smoke curled upwards to the sky. No sooner did the bulls +scent the smoke than up went their tails, and with loud bellows they +dashed off through the grass, trampling it down in their fright. + +"Now is our time!" I exclaimed; "the siege is raised; let us make the +best of our way to the boat." + +Following the impulse of the moment, we seized our guns and the birds we +had shot, and leaping off the rock, began to run in an opposite +direction to that which the bulls had taken. + +"Hurrah! the bulls are off. There they go like mad things, with their +tails up in the air!" exclaimed Jerry, as we ran on. + +"I did it finely--didn't I? That bonfire was a capital idea. We've +killed two, and the rest won't be in such a hurry to butt at people in +future." + +On we scampered, but we had not gone twenty paces before I seized +Jerry's arm and came to a stand-still, looking with dismay at the scene +before us. The flames, blown by the wind, had caught the neighbouring +clumps of tall grass. Dry as tinder, they were blazing up furiously. +Our further progress was completely barred by the fierce flames which +were rapidly extending on every side, and even then running along the +ground towards us. We had already passed over a quantity of dry grass +which, in another moment, might be on fire, and then all hope of escape +would be lost. + +"Back, back!" I exclaimed--"to the rock, to the rock! It is our only +place of safety." + +With frantic speed we rushed back, the fierce flames, like hissing +serpents, close on our heels. Hotter and hotter became the air--more +dense and suffocating the smoke. Blinded and confused by it, we could +scarcely find our way. A trip over the tangled grass-stalks we knew +would be fatal. The flames were already scorching our backs. On either +side we saw them leaping upwards round the tall tufts of dry herbage. +We shrieked with pain and terror. The rock was reached, but to scale +its steep sides seemed beyond our power. With a strength I did not +believe myself to possess, I seized Jerry and hoisted him up. Grasping +the clumps of grass and rugged lumps of rock, he scrambled to the top, +and then leaning over, lent me his hand, and dragged me after him. +Horror of what might be my fate enabled me to do what I otherwise could +not have accomplished. At the same moment that I reached the top of the +rock, the whole surrounding surface of the ground below became a sea of +raging fire--leaping, tossing, hissing, roaring, the flames blown here +and there by the wind; it was like the ocean in a storm. The devouring +element came circling round us, the bright flames darting up like the +tongues of huge serpents, eager to make us their prey. Bewildered by +the scorching heat and black circles of smoke, we were nearly falling +back into the fiery sea. I felt that I could not much longer retain my +senses. I seized Jerry's arm, and dragging him back, we retreated +towards the centre of the rock. Even there the heat was so intense, and +the smoke so suffocating, that it was with difficulty we could breathe. + +"This is dreadful!" he exclaimed faintly. "Harry, I cannot stand it--I +am going to die." Saying this, he sunk gasping to the ground. At the +same time I felt an agonising sensation in my chest, and fully believing +that the same fate as his was about to overtake me also, I dropped down +senseless by his side. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +OUR BOAT ADVENTURE AMONG THE FALKLANDS. + +A current of cool air was passing over the face of the rock, I conclude, +for, to my no small satisfaction, I discovered that I was alive, and +could very speedily sit up. The spectacle which met my sight, however, +was terrific in the extreme. Far as the eye could reach, the whole +country was in a blaze, the flames crackling and hissing as they +fiercely attacked clump after clump of the tall tussac grass, while the +ground over which they had passed was charred and blackened, the +globular masses of the bog balsam glowing with fervent heat. The flames +also still burned brightly close round us, and I saw no means by which +we could escape from our position. As soon as I had collected my +thoughts, I remembered my companion. I found a few drops of spirits and +water in our flask. I poured them down his throat. He looked up. + +"What! am I still alive?" he muttered faintly. "Oh, the bulls and the +fire! what's going to happen next?" + +"That is more than I can tell you exactly," I answered; "but I suppose, +in time, the fire will burn itself out, and then we may get away from +this. Let us watch it meantime. It is worth looking at." + +In a short time, after a few sighs, Jerry lifted up his head from the +ground, and sat up. The sight at which we gazed was especially grand +when a fresh puff of wind sent the flames rolling along, and throwing up +forked flashes, as they found new fuel to feed on. All the beasts it +had encountered had, of course, fled, terror inspired, before it; but +numberless young birds must have been destroyed, and we saw hundreds of +their parents hovering over the spot where their nests had been, in the +vain effort to save their offspring. Some we saw fall into the flames, +either from having their wings singed from approaching too near, or by +being suffocated with the smoke. When we saw the effects of the fire, +we were doubly thankful that we had not attempted to make our way across +the island. Once surrounded by that fiery furnace, we must have been, +to a certainty, burned to death. Suddenly a dreadful thought occurred +to me. + +"Jerry," I exclaimed, "where can our friends be all this time? Is it +possible that they can have been among the grass, and that the fire may +have caught them up? Good Cousin Silas, and Mr Burkett, and jolly Mr +Kilby. Poor fellows! we may be much better off than they are." + +"Oh, don't talk about it," said Jerry, shuddering; "it is too dreadful. +I hope--I hope they will have got into a place of safety. Poor fellows! +and it was all my doing. Do you know, Harry, I think we ought to pray +for them. They may be requiring aid which no mortal man can give them." + +"Yes, indeed," said I; "we ought--let us." And together we knelt down +on the hard rock, surrounded by the roaring flames, the thick black +smoke curling around us, and sometimes almost suffocating us; and most +earnestly did we offer up our prayers for the safety of our friends and +for our own; and most thankful did we feel that we had been preserved +from the dangers into which we had been thrown. I pity the person who +is ashamed to acknowledge that he prays for protection both for himself +and those he cares for. How should we go through the world without the +protection of an all-merciful God? Often and often I have had proof of +how utterly unable we are to take care of ourselves. Among the many +blessings and advantages I have enjoyed is that of having had parents +who taught me to pray, and not to be ashamed of praying. At school, +when some poor, weak, foolish boys were afraid to kneel down by their +bedsides to say their prayers, my brothers and I always persevered in +the practice; and very soon we put to shame those who tried to interrupt +us--and not only we ourselves, but other boys who did the same, were +from that time never interfered with. Sure I am that our prayers were +heard, and that the blessings we prayed for in earnestness and +simplicity were given us. When we rose from our knees we found our +courage much increased. The occasion had made us serious, and reminded +us of our duties. I wish that it had been always so, that it were still +always so; but even now as I write, I feel how much day after day I have +left undone of what I ought to have done. Is it not so with all of us? +Then what necessity is there for prayer for strength from above to +enable us to do our duty. I say again, don't be ashamed. Pray always; +and if it is for your good, what you ask with faith God will most +assuredly give you. He has said it, and his promises never fail. + +Night was now approaching, but we could yet see no prospect of our +escaping from our present position. The darkness, as it came on, served +to brighten the effect of the fire; and as we gazed round on every side, +as far as the eye could reach, we could see only the bright glare of the +conflagration as it went on widening its circle round us. Now and then, +as it reached spots more thickly covered with clumps of tussac grass, we +could see the flames rushing upwards in pyramids of fire; but in other +places a dense fierce glow could alone be perceived as the fiery wave +receded from us. The sight we beheld was certainly a very grand one, +and not easily to be forgotten; but our position was far from pleasant, +and we would thankfully have found ourselves on board the schooner, or +even in the boat under shelter of a sail. Our clothes were scorched, +and so were our hands and feet; we were getting very hungry, and no fuel +remained to enable us to cook our provisions, while now that the fire +was removed from us the sharp wind made us feel very cold. When we +considered the small area of the rock which had been at one time like an +island amid the fiery ocean, we had more reason than ever to be thankful +that we had escaped destruction. On further examination of the locality +we discovered that the proximate cause of our escape was owing to the +position of the rock near a piece of water, the extent of which we +perceived when the fire in our neighbourhood had burned itself out. A +narrow belt of grass only intervened between the rock and the water, the +rest of the ground being a marsh covered with moist rushes, which did +not burn. As the wind had for the greater part of the time blown over +the pond, we were thus saved from suffocation. Had the rock been +thickly surrounded by high grass, I think that we must have been burned +to death; for, blown by the wind, the flames would have reached the very +centre of the rock where we lay; and had we not been roasted, we should +have been suffocated by the smoke. We crouched down on the rock, and +sat for some time without speaking, watching the progress of the flames. +The ground around us was still glowing with the remains of the fire. +How long we had sat silent I do not know, when Jerry exclaimed, with +animation-- + +"I say, Harry, why shouldn't we have a steak off our old friend the +bull? He must be pretty well done through by this time." + +"We will try him at all events," said I; and descending the rock, we +very soon had some fine slices of beef out of him. Finding that the +ground was sufficiently cooled to allow our walking on it without +burning our shoes, we advanced with our steaks stuck at the end of our +ramrods to a glowing heap of bog balsam. Kicking it up with our feet, +it soon sent forth a heat amply sufficient to cook our already +half-roasted steaks. When they were done, collecting our guns, and +bags, and game, we sat down on the lee side of the rock, and speedily +silenced the cravings of hunger. We should have been glad of something +to drink, but we were not yet sufficiently thirsty to induce us to get +water from the pond. We felt very tired after all the exercise we had +taken, and the excitement we had gone through during the day; but we +were afraid to go to sleep lest the bulls should wander back, or +something else happen we knew not what; besides, the anxiety about our +friends kept us awake. At last, however, as we sat shoulder to shoulder +under the rock, sleep stole imperceptibly on us, and I do not think that +I ever enjoyed a sounder slumber than I did that night. When we awoke +we rubbed our eyes, not knowing where we were. It was broad daylight. +We rose to our feet, and after stretching our cramped limbs, we climbed +to the top of the rock to look about us. The fire still raged over part +of the island, which was enveloped in thick wreaths of black smoke; but +to the west we caught sight of the blue sea, sparkling brightly in the +sunshine, the intervening space being free from flames, though +presenting a surface of black ashes, not a blade of grass apparently +having escaped the conflagration. We thought, too, that we recognised a +point round which the schooner had come just before dropping us in the +boat. This encouraged us to hope that we might not be very far-distant +from the place where we had landed. Without waiting, therefore, for +breakfast, we determined at once to set off. + +"Let us take some beef, though," exclaimed Jerry; "it will prove that by +our own prowess we have killed a bull at all events." + +The slices of beef were speedily cut, therefore, and strung on over our +shoulders, and, like two young Robinson Crusoes, we set off in the hopes +of soon relieving our anxiety about our friends. Nothing could be more +melancholy than the appearance of the country through which we passed-- +cinders and blackness on every side. Every now and then we nearly +tumbled into a glowing heap of bog balsam. It was sad, too, to see the +number of nests, some with eggs in them, and others with young birds +completely roasted; indeed, we passed many old birds burned to cinders. +At last we struck the shore; but the face of nature had been so +completely altered by the fire, that we were uncertain whether it was to +the north or south of the creek at which we had landed. At last we +agreed that we were to the south of the spot we wished to reach, so we +stood along the beach to the north. We had not got far before we saw, a +little way inland, where the grass had been, two black masses. We +grasped each other's arms. Were they the figures of men? Trembling +with fear we hurried towards them. Though burned to cinders, still we +had no difficulty in recognising them as two seals. The poor things, +stupified and astonished by the fire, had probably had no time to waddle +into the water before it had overtaken them. Perhaps seals, like fish, +are attracted by fire, and the foolish animals had thought it a fine +sight to behold. We had taken no breakfast, and were beginning to feel +the want of food, but, at the same time, we were so thirsty that we did +not feel as if we could eat. There was plenty of salt water; but that +was not tempting, and would only have increased our suffering. Jerry +sat himself down on the beach and said he could go no further; but I +urged him to continue on, in the hopes that we might come soon upon a +stream of water. I remember even then being struck by the immense +quantities of kelp which fringed the shore. The long leaves and roots, +where left by the tide, looked like pieces of thick brown leather; and +we agreed that cups and bowls, and all sorts of things, might be made +out of it. Kelp is a species of sea-weed of gigantic size, and its +sturdy stems have been known to reach the surface from a depth of nearly +three hundred feet; some of the wide-spreading weeds looking like tanned +hides extended on the surface. Its roots cling with a powerful gripe to +the rocks, on which alone it grows. Some of the stems are sufficiently +strong to moor a boat with. I had a knife, the handle of which was made +by simply sticking the hilt of the blade into a piece of the root while +it was wet;--when the kelp dried the blade was firmly fixed in it. We +had not gone far when a rippling sound saluted our ears; and running on, +we found a bright, sparkling stream gurgling out of the bank. We put +our mouths down to the spot where it gushed out, and oh, how we enjoyed +the cool pure draught! Nothing could then have been more gratifying to +our taste. We found this gave a remarkably keen edge to our appetites; +so we sat down by the stream and produced a piece of the steak we had +cooked the previous evening, and the remains of our biscuit. While +discussing them, Jerry exclaimed that he saw something galloping along +the shore. + +"Is it a bull?" I asked, thinking that we might have to decamp, and +looking out for a place of safety. + +"It comes on very fast," he answered. I jumped up, for I was sitting a +little below him, and looked in the direction he pointed. + +"It's old Surley! it's old Surley!" I shouted. "Our friends cannot be +far-off." + +On came the old dog, and was very soon jumping up and licking our hands +and faces, and wagging his tail, till it looked as if he would wag it +off. He seemed in no way displeased at receiving a piece of beef; and +as soon as he had got it he began to trot off with it in his mouth in +the direction from which he had come. After going a few yards, however, +he stopped and turned half round, and wagged his tail, as much as to +say, "Come along with me; I trotted all the way on purpose to fetch +you." + +We took up our guns to show that we were about to follow; and on this he +began to jump, and frisk about, and bark, to exhibit his satisfaction, +and then he stopped and went on a little, and then stopped again to see +that we were following. In great hopes that he was leading us to our +friends, we went on as fast as we could walk. Our path led us under +some cliffs which were literally crowded with penguins and young +albatrosses, or mollimauks. There was a regular encampment or rookery +of them, extending for five or six hundred yards in length, and from one +to two dozen in breadth. The nests of the albatrosses were nearly a +foot high, and of a cup-like form. Feathers were just beginning to +spread on the backs and wings of the young birds, and to take the place +of the down with which they had originally been covered. Old Surley +passed by without taking any notice of them. When we approached the +spot they set up a loud gabbling, and spouted out an oily substance at +us. The penguins were much more dignified, and looked at us with silent +contempt. The surface of the sea near at hand was covered with the +parent birds, and the air was alive with them as they flew backward and +forward to carry food to their young; but as, following old Surley's +example, we did not attempt to molest their broods, they took no notice +of us. The penguins were the most numerous, and appeared to be the +original inhabitants of the spot. They were arranged with great +regularity, those having just broken the shell being together, as were +those with their feathers appearing, and also those expecting soon to +fly. Never had I seen so many birds together. However, we were too +anxious about our friends to stop, so we hurried on after old Surley. +From the steady way in which he proceeded, we felt sure that he was +leading us in the right direction. Nor were we deceived. Before long +we recognised the creek where we landed, and soon we reached the boat +drawn up on the shore. We rushed towards her to discover if our friends +had lately been there. We examined her thoroughly; but after all we +could not decide the point. Thus we remained as anxious as ever. +While, however, we were engaged in this manner, we had not watched old +Surley, and when we looked up he was gone. Just before we got into the +boat, Jerry's cap had tumbled off, and when he wanted to put it on +again, though we hunted about in every direction, it was nowhere to be +found. At first we thought of continuing our search for our friends, +but we soon agreed that it would be wiser to stay where we were; that if +they had escaped they would certainly return to the boat, and that if we +went in search of them, the so doing would only delay our meeting. +Being somewhat tired, therefore, we got into the boat, and drawing the +sail over the after-part, we lay down in the stern-sheets and were soon +fast asleep. We were both awoke by old Surley's bark, and jumping up, +we saw Mr Brand with his other two companions running along the beach. +We jumped out of the boat and hurried to meet them. Mr Brand had +Jerry's cap in his hand, which old Surley had carried with him to show +that he had found us. We speedily narrated our adventures to each +other. They had been dreadfully alarmed on our account. It turned out +as we had supposed--Mr Kilby had reached the sea-shore by himself, +thinking that we were with the other party, while they supposed we were +with him. However, they had not been very anxious about us till they +saw the conflagration burst out, and guessed that we were by some means +the cause of it. They were on their way to look for us, but the flames, +like some mighty torrent, rushed towards them. They had with frantic +haste to dart through the clumps of tussac and penguin grass to reach +the beach. They hurried to the boat, and had barely time to leap into +her, and shove off, before the flames, fanned by the wind, came +crackling and hissing up after them, and would very probably have set +her on fire. Cousin Silas was almost in despair about us, and Mr Kilby +told me that he said he should never forgive himself if we came to harm. +They were much interested with the account we gave them of our +adventures; and as it was time for dinner, we agreed to cook and eat the +trophies we had brought with us--the beef-steaks--before putting to sea. +We were amused at finding that we had committed an illegal act in +killing the bulls; but, as it was in self-defence, it was agreed that +the act was justifiable. + +It had been arranged that we were to rejoin the schooner on the evening +of this day, at a point of land running out from an island a little to +the west of where we now were, unless the weather should prove bad; in +which case she was to come in for us. The weather, however, was very +fine, so making sail we stood across the channel. The station to which +she had gone was three or four miles further to the south. The water +was very clear, and as we passed through the kelp we looked down in some +places where it grew less thickly, and could see its vast stems and +branches, with their huge leaves, springing up from the depth of many +fathoms, like a forest of submarine oaks or Spanish chestnuts. We were +amused with the flight of some of the ducks we put up. Mr Burkett +called them loggerheads, racers, or steamers. Their wings will not lift +them from the water, but whirling them round and round, they went +scuttling and waddling away over the surface at a rapid rate, generally +two and two--the loving husband and his wife--leaving a deep furrow in +the water behind them. We burst into fits of laughter at the ridiculous +manner in which they moved. They are fat and fishy, and not at all fit +for food. I never expected to have seen more birds together than we had +passed at the rookery under the cliffs in the morning; but we sailed by +an island, of which birds of all descriptions had taken entire +possession. There were various species of ducks, and geese, and snipe, +and teal, and shags, and grebes, and penguins, and albatrosses, and +sea-rooks, and oyster-catchers, and gulls with pink breasts, and many +others, of whose names I have no note. As we believed that we had +plenty of time, we landed near some cliffs to have a nearer look at +them. So tame were they that we could knock down as many as we liked +with our sticks; but it was murderous work, and as we did not want them +to eat--indeed many were not fit for eating--we soon desisted from it. + +Near where we landed the cliffs ran out into the sea, forming natural +docks, and in one of these cliffs we discovered a large cavern, which +seemed to run a great way under the ground. By climbing along the +ledges of the rocks, somewhat slippery with sea-weed, at no little risk +of a ducking, we got to the mouth of the cavern. The sides were +composed of ledges rising one above another, and every available spot, +as far as the eye could penetrate, was occupied by shags and divers, and +other sea-fowls. There were thousands--there might have been millions +of them, if the cavern ran back as far as we supposed it did. They in +no way seemed alarmed at our intrusion, but allowed us to kick them +over, without attempting to escape. However, at last, old Surley found +his ways after us, and his appearance created the wildest hurly-burly +and confusion. Such clapping of wings, and hurrying to and fro, and +quacking, and shrieking, and whirling here and there, was never seen +among a feathered community. They must have been very glad when we took +our departure. + +We had got into high spirits with our walk, and had begun to forget all +about the bulls and the fire, when, as Jerry and I were in advance +scrambling along the shore, we saw basking, a little way inland, among +some tussac grass, a huge animal. "Why, there is an elephant!" I +exclaimed, starting back "or a live mammoth, or something of that sort. +I don't like his look, I own." + +However, screwing up our courage, we advanced cautiously toward the +monster, as he seemed no way disposed to move at our approach. Then we +halted and examined him more narrowly. He was alive, for we saw his eye +complacently looking at us, as Diogenes might have looked out of his tub +at the passing crowd. He was fully twenty feet long, with a huge +unwieldy body and a big head. The most curious thing about his head was +a huge nose, or trunk rather, which hung down nearly half a foot below +the upper jaw. His skin was covered with short hair of a light dun +colour, and he had a tail and fins like a seal. While we were still in +doubt what he could be, Mr Kilby overtook us, and laughingly seizing +our hands ran up behind the monster. + +"Are you for a ride?" he exclaimed; and before Jerry suspected what was +going to happen he found himself seated on the monster's tail! "There +you go, on the back of a sea-elephant," exclaimed Mr Kilby, giving the +beast a poke with his stick. "Hold on tight, and he can't hurt you." + +Jerry did hold on, not knowing whether to laugh or shriek out with fear. +Away crawled, or whalloped rather, the elephant towards the water, Mr +Kilby and I keeping alongside, ready to catch Jerry should he fall off. +I soon saw there was no real danger, except the monster should roll +round, when his weight would kill any one under him. Jerry also +instantly entered into the joke of the thing, and was delighted with the +idea of being able to boast that he had ridden on a sea-elephant. + +"I shall be carried off into the depths of the ocean, and you, Mr +Kilby, will have to be answerable to my disconsolate father," he sang +out, half laughing and half crying. "Good-bye, Harry; a pleasant voyage +to you round the world. May you not be spirited away by a sea-monster +like this. Oh! oh! help me off, though!--he'll have me into the sea to +a certainty, and then he'll turn round and gobble me up--he will. I +know he will." + +As the beast approached the beach, lest the joke might be carried too +far, we lent him a hand to dismount, while his steed crawled on as +sedately as before into the water, and, as he swam off, turned round his +head, as much as to say, "Hillo, master, are you not coming too? Just +try it, and see how you like a swim with me." Mr Kilby told us that +this animal had probably been sick, and had remained behind while his +companions had taken to the sea, which they always do on the approach of +summer. In autumn they come on shore, and live in large herds in marshy +places by the sides of rivers, eating grass like cattle. The females, +which are without the snout, suckle their young, of which they have +generally two at a time. As they are very slow in their movements, to +afford themselves time to escape they have sentinels posted while they +are feeding, whose duty is to give notice of approaching danger. They +are very good tempered and inoffensive, though the mothers will attack +those who molest their young. Mr Kilby told us of a man who had his +leg bitten off by a female, while he was attempting to carry away her +cub. We now once more took to the boat. We had not been long under +weigh before I saw Mr Burkett looking up anxiously at the sky. + +"I don't quite like the look of the weather," he remarked. He had been +a sailor, and had long been cruising about the islands. He was +therefore our pilot on the present occasion. "Brand, can you make out +the schooner anywhere?" Cousin Silas replied that he could nowhere see +her. "Then something has delayed her at the station," observed Burkett. +"As the tide is making in that direction, and the wind is fair, we'll +run down there instead of crossing the channel to the point proposed." + +This plan was agreed to, though it might have been wiser had we kept to +our original purpose. For some time we made fine weather of it, but +getting into another channel, we found the wind first scant, and then +directly against us. We had consequently no choice but to attempt to +beat up to the station. This delayed us much beyond the time we +expected to get there. We of course kept a bright look-out for the +schooner, lest she should pass us; but evening was closing in apace, and +still we had a long way to go. However, Mr Burkett said he knew +exactly where we were, and that we should be able before long to make +out a light in one of the cottages, which would guide us to the station. +So we kept a press of sail on the boat, and looked out for the light. +The boat stood well up to her canvas, but after passing high cliffs, and +opening a channel from the sea, a sudden squall took her, and before we +had time to cast off the sheet, she was over on her beam ends. Cousin +Silas whipped out his knife and tried to cut the main-sheet, while I let +go the head-sheets, and Burkett jammed down the helm; but it was too +late--over went the boat. Our ballast, happily, consisting of +water-casks, she did not sink, though she turned bottom upwards. It was +a moment of intense horror and dismay. I felt myself under the boat, +entangled in the rigging! I had no time for thought. I felt that death +had come, far away from home and friends. The next moment I was dragged +out and placed on the keel--Cousin Silas was my preserver. Where was +poor Jerry, though? Again Silas dived, and brought him to the surface, +handing him up near me. Mr Kilby and Mr Burkett were clinging on to +the gunwale, and now they all climbed up; and there we sat, our lives +for the moment preserved, but with very grave apprehensions as to what +should become of us. Old Surley, when the boat capsized, kept swimming +round her; and when we climbed up on her bottom, be followed our +example, sitting as grave as a judge, thinking it was all right. Had we +been near inhabited shores, or in a channel frequented by vessels, we +might have had some hope of being rescued; but the schooner was the only +vessel we could expect to pass that way, and the chances of her seeing +us appeared very remote. Happily the wind fell, and there was not much +sea, or we should have been washed off our insecure hold. The current +was running very strong, and Burkett was of opinion that it would drift +us down towards the station; but it was a question whether we could +reach the place before the tide turned, and whether we should get near +enough to it to make our cries heard. These discussions occupied us for +some time, and perhaps assisted to divert our minds from the very awful +position in which we were placed. Jerry and I were sitting near each +other astride on the keel at the after-part of the boat. Cousin Silas +had climbed up over the bows, while Burkett and Kilby hung on, lying +their full length amidships. + +"I say, Brand, don't you think we could manage to right the boat?" said +Burkett. "If we could do it we might paddle on shore somewhere, and we +should, at all events, have no fear of starving." + +"We'll try what can be done," answered Cousin Silas, slipping off into +the water, and we following his example. "All ready now--heave away." +We hove in vain. The sail, and something else heavy, which had got foul +of the rigging, prevented us righting her. + +"We must give it up, I fear," cried Burkett at last. "The oars went +adrift, I fear; and as we have no hats among us, we should have nothing +to bail her out with." + +As it happened, we all wore light sea-caps, which would have helped us +very little in getting rid of the water. With sad hearts we had to +abandon the attempt, and again to climb up into our places, considerably +exhausted with the efforts we had made. Night was now coming on +rapidly, and the darkness which grew round us much increased the horrors +of opposition. + +"One thing I have to tell you," said Burkett,--"there is always a light +kept burning at the station. If we sight it, we shall know whereabouts +we are, and be able to calculate our chances of reaching the shore." + +This, however, I thought very poor consolation. The light could be of +no use to us unless the tide took us near enough to it to allow of our +voices being heard on shore. Fortunately we could still distinguish the +dim outline of the coast as we drifted by, or we should not have known +in what direction to look out for the expected light. Cousin Silas said +very little--he was anxiously looking out for the beacon, to us of such +vital importance. How dreadful, indeed, was our situation! I dared not +think--I dared not hope to escape--still I dared not turn my eye to the +future. I waited with a sort of apathetic indifference to the result. +No light appeared; the current was evidently setting us through the +centre of the passage out to sea, in the direction of that +storm-surrounded promontory, Cape Horn. We must abandon even the remote +prospect of being drifted on shore on one of the southern portions of +the Falklands. For some time there was a complete silence among us. It +was broken by Cousin Silas. + +"My friends," said he, in a calm, grave tone, but without a sign of +agitation, "has it occurred to you that we may soon be called upon to +die? Are you prepared for death? Are you ready to stand in the +presence of the Judge of all the earth?" + +No one answered him. What were their thoughts I do not know. Mine were +very terrible. I thought how hard it was for those young as Jerry and I +were, to be summoned to leave the beautiful world which we expected to +enjoy so much. I forgot that numbers young as ourselves had been called +away. + +"It is a fact we should all of us attempt to realise," continued Silas. +"We must be judged. Have we gone to the Fountain which washes away all +sins, to be cleansed from our iniquities? Do you trust on Christ, and +Christ alone, as our Saviour, who will acknowledge us as his disciples-- +who will present us purified from our sins for acceptance by the Father? +My dear friends, I put before you these great truths, because our +happiness or our misery for that eternity which we are now approaching +depends on them. On what do you trust? Oh, be able to give a +satisfactory answer before it is too late." I will not give the +conversation which followed. It was very brief. The result was, that +each of us turned ourselves to prayer, and prayed as we had never prayed +before. Had we even been more disposed to levity than we were, we could +not but have felt the earnestness of the appeal made to us--the +importance of the subject--the awful truths uttered by our companion. +Darker grew the night--the sea-birds screamed above us--the distant +cliffs grew dimmer, their outline less distinct--the rushing tide earned +us rapidly onwards--the cold wind pierced through our wet clothes, and +sent the spray dashing over us. Shivering, benumbed, hungry and faint, +I felt as if I could no longer retain my hold. Death--death, I thought, +was truly approaching. Still, notwithstanding all Cousin Silas had +said, I did not so much picture the future; I did not even dread it as I +mourned for what I was leaving--the distant home I loved so well, and +all those who so dearly loved me. I thought of the anxiety the +uncertainty of my fate would occasion, the grief when they learned the +truth; and bitter tears burst from my eyes, not for myself, but for them +I loved. I mention the state of my mind and feelings on this awful +occasion for a very important object. It agrees with my own experience, +and all I have heard from others placed in similar situations;--a person +who has been living unprepared for death, for eternity, cannot on a +sudden change the whole current of his thoughts, and fix them on the +awful state into which he is hurrying. If he has not before found peace +with God, there is little hope that he will seek it then. Oh no! the +time to do that is while we have health and strength, and hope to have a +long life before us to be consecrated to him. He has an eternity +prepared for us--are we to give him alone the dregs of our short span of +life? He gave us everything--are we to return him only a few hurried +prayers and ejaculations of sorrow? We cry out for mercy--on what do we +ground our expectations of receiving it? Remember that God is a just +God--what, in justice, do we deserve? Oh! remember also that "in such +an hour as ye think not, the Son of man cometh;" and as you value your +happiness for eternity, say not in your heart, "My Lord delayeth his +coming." I was thinking of home, and all I loved there. Suddenly a +shout brought my thoughts back to the sad reality of our own position. + +"The light! the light!--there it is--I see it clearly," exclaimed Jerry, +whose bright eyes had been constantly on the watch for the looked-for +beacon. + +"Where? where?" we all simultaneously cried out. + +"At a right angle with the boat's keel, as she now lies, on the +port-side. There--there, it is quite bright." + +All of us looked intently in the direction he indicated. There was the +light--there could be no doubt about it, beaming forth cheerfully +through the darkness. It was still a mile or more to the south along +the shore past which we were drifting, and we certainly were nearly a +mile, if not a full mile, from the coast. + +"How near do you judge that we shall drift to the station?" asked Cousin +Silas of Burkett. + +He considered a little--"Not much nearer than we now are," he answered. + +"What chance, then, have we of making ourselves heard, and getting help +from them?" again asked Cousin Silas. "None," said Burkett, in a sad +tone. + +"Then it must be done!" exclaimed Cousin Silas, in a firm tone. +"Friends, one of us must endeavour to reach the shore by swimming. The +risk is great. It is a long way, but it is the only means by which we +may be saved. The strongest and best swimmer must make the attempt." + +"I wish that I were a better swimmer than I am," said Burkett, "but I do +not think I could do it." + +"I am but a poor one--I know that I could not," added Kilby with a sigh. + +"I'll try, Mr Brand," cried Jerry; "I can float for ever so long, if I +can't swim all the way." + +"I'll go with you," said I, preparing to throw off my clothing as Jerry +was doing. + +"No, no; neither of you lads must go," exclaimed Cousin Silas, eagerly. +"I was prepared for the risk when I made the offer. Harry, tell my +mother, if you escape, how I thought of her to the last. Never forget +what I have just been talking to you about. Gerard, your father will +understand that I died in the discharge of my duty. Friends, good-bye; +I trust that God, in his good pleasure, will enable me to bring you +Help." + +Saying these words, he handed us his clothes, which we hung across the +keel of the boat, and then he slid off into the dark water, and struck +out directly for the shore. As soon as he was gone, old Surley seemed +resolved to follow his example; and though we tried to hold him, he +dashed off into the water, and away he went, swimming quietly by the +side of Mr Brand. + +"One good thing is, the old dog will perhaps help him if he gets tired," +remarked Jerry. "I've heard of them doing such things." + +Cousin Silas calculated that, being carried to the south by the set of +the current he should thus land directly under the light. With calm, +steady strokes, he clove his way through the yielding fluid. Not a +sound escaped from his manly breast, nor could we detect the noise made +by his slowly-moving hands, as they separated the water before him. How +earnestly did we pray for him!--how eagerly did we watch him, till his +head was shrouded in darkness. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +ROUNDING CAPE HORN. + +On drifted the boat! Darkness was above us--darkness was around us!-- +that small beacon-light the only source of hope. Without it we must +have given way to despair. How eagerly, how intently we listened for +the sound of Cousin Silas's shout, should he have succeeded in reaching +the shore! We came almost abreast of the light; not a sound reached our +ears. + +"It is a long distance for the voice of a man exhausted with swimming to +be heard," said Burkett. "He scarcely, too, could have reached there +yet." We thought not either. We relapsed into silence and listened. + +"O Burkett! what of the kelp?" suddenly exclaimed Kilby. "Can he ever +swim through it?" + +My heart sunk within me as I heard the question; what man, even the +strongest swimmer, freshly taken to the water, could force his way +through those tangled masses of sea-weed? My noble-hearted cousin, was +he then to be the first victim among us? + +"The shore is sandy thereabouts, and unusually free from kelp. There is +a natural dock where the schooner lies, and clear water all round." + +These words spoken by Burkett again revived my hopes. Still not a sound +reached us. We could distinguish no signal from the shore to give us +hope. Blacker and blacker grew the night. More keenly whistled the +wind. The sea-birds' shriek, echoing it seemed from the caverned rocks, +sounded like a funeral wail. We fancied that many a fierce albatross +was hovering over our heads, to pounce down on us when nature gave way +before our sufferings. + +"Harry, Harry!" said Gerard in a low voice, "I don't think I can stand +this much longer. Oh, my poor father! my poor father! how sorry he will +be to think that I should often have done things which I knew would vex +him." + +"Silence," said Burkett; "we must try at all events and make ourselves +heard, lest Brand should have failed to reach the shore. Now get ready +for a shout; never fear cracking our voices." + +We were just then, as far as we could judge, directly abreast of the +light. Every instant after this would be making our case more hopeless. +How we shouted, again and again! but all we heard in return was the +discordant shriek of the sea-fowl as they flew away startled at the +noise. So we drifted on. In vain we shouted; our voices grew weary, +and we gave it up in despair. Our eyes were still fixed on the light. +We sunk lower and lower. We held on to the boat, but every moment +increased our difficulty in so doing, the wind getting up, or rather we +had drifted into a more exposed part of the channel, and the boat began +to toss about, while the spray beat wildly over us. How long the time +seemed! Every moment was counted as a minute; every minute as an hour. +We had to gripe on to the keel with all our might, or we should have +been washed off. With the greatest difficulty we could retain our hold. +Yet we could still see the light dimly glimmering in the distance; but +as that grew fainter and fainter, so did our hopes of being rescued. +Scarcely could we see the light; dimmer and dimmer it grew; then we +looked--it had disappeared! The rapid current hurried us on. The wide, +storm-tossed Southern Ocean lay spread out before us. Darkness was +around us. No land could be distinguished. Hope of life fled. We all +prayed. We encouraged each other. We resolved not to give way to +despair while life remained. We had to speak in a loud tone to be +heard. + +"Silence!" exclaimed Burkett abruptly. "I heard a sound. Yes, yes! +See, see! Heaven be praised; that noble fellow Brand is safe, and we +may yet be saved!" As he spoke, a thin stream of light shot upwards +from the dark ocean, and broke into a thousand beautiful coruscations +above our heads. "A rocket! the schooner had some on board for +signals," cried Burkett. "She is under weigh to look for us!" + +About the light we had no doubt; but it was scarcely possible that he +could have heard any sound. None, at all events, had reached our ears. +A few moments before, we had been prepared to die; now life, with its +many fancied advantages, occupied all our thoughts. With intense +eagerness we looked towards the spot whence the rocket had ascended. +All was darkness. Suddenly a light burst forth; of intense brightness +it seemed, as it shed its rays over the foam-sprinkled, dancing water, +and showed us clearly the spars, and rigging, and white canvas of the +schooner. We shouted long and lustily, but we were too far off to be +heard. Our hearts sunk, for she was standing away from us. Once more +we shouted. Our shout was answered from a different direction from that +where we had seen the schooner. Earnestly we listened. We could +distinguish, too, the loud barking of a dog. + +"Old Surley is safe, at all events. I am glad of that, poor fellow," +exclaimed Gerard. "I like that old dog." + +We watched eagerly. A light was observed dancing over the seas. Again +we cried out. How cheery struck those sounds on our ears, which we had +thought would never hear the human voice again. In less than five +minutes a whale-boat dashed up to us, with old Surley in her bow, and at +her stern sat Cousin Silas. We were saved! and before we could speak, +we sank down on our knees, to return thanks to Him whose right arm had +preserved us. A few words served to tell us how Cousin Silas had +reached the shore a little way above the station, with old Surley as his +companion; how kindly he had been received, and how promptly every one +rushed to man the boats to hasten to our rescue. + +In less than an hour we were at the station, when the schooner and the +other boats soon returned. We were put to bed and rubbed with blankets, +and had hot rum and water poured down our throats, so that very soon we +recovered; nor did we suffer any material injury from the cold and wet +to which we had been so long exposed. The schooner had been delayed, +being unable to complete her cargo of seal-skins by the time expected. +The next day we sailed, and in three days arrived safely in Stanley. We +found the _Triton_ ready for sea, and only waiting our return to sail. +I was in the cabin when Captain Frankland first saw Gerard after hearing +of our escape. Tears stood in the old man's eyes as he took his son in +his arms; and I saw by the expression of his countenance how he loved +him. Mr Brand always stood high in his estimation; when he heard of +what Silas had done, he stood higher still. I must own it, Jerry and I +very soon forgot the awe-inspiring thoughts which had passed through our +minds while we expected so soon to be called into eternity. Our chief +concern was, having lost our guns and gamebags. We were, therefore, +highly delighted when Burkett and Kilby made their appearance on board, +each with a very good fowling-piece in his hand, with powder-flasks and +shot-belts, and all other requisites, and begged our acceptance of them, +in remembrance, as they said, of the adventures we had gone through +together. + +"Thank you, thank you," we exclaimed; "we'll not forget you, at all +events, wherever we go." + +We called our guns after the good-natured donors, and had their names +engraved on them. Many a wild-fowl did Burkett and Kilby knock over in +various parts of the world. Old Surley accompanied our visitors. Mr +Brand and he had become great friends after their long swim together; +and Kilby, to whom he belonged, in the warmth of his heart presented him +to Cousin Silas, who, very much to our satisfaction, did not refuse the +gift. Thus old Surley became our companion in many a subsequent +adventure. Just before we sailed, some very sad news reached the +colony. It was the death of Captain Allen Gardiner and his six +companions on the bleak coast of Terra del Fuego, where they had gone +for the purpose of forming a missionary establishment, with the hope of +spreading a knowledge of the Christian faith among the benighted +inhabitants of those wild regions. + +Captain Gardiner had left England in the autumn of 1850, with Dr +Williams, a surgeon, who went forth as a catechist; Mr Maidment, who +held the same office; Erwin, a carpenter; and three Cornish fishermen, +named Badcock, Bryant, and Pearce. The _Ocean Queen_, the ship in which +they took their passage, proceeded on her passage to the Pacific, after +landing them at Banner Cove in Picton Island, which will be found near +the entrance of Beagle Channel, about half way between the Straits of Le +Maire and Cape Horn. They had with them two large boats, called the +_Pioneer_ and _Speedwell_, and two small punts, with tents and stores; +but their supply of provisions appears to have been very scanty. +Scarcely had they pitched their tents when the natives collected in +considerable numbers, and threatened to attack them. To avoid +collision, they ultimately took to their boats, intending to seek +another spot where they might form their station. They put to sea; but +in going out of the harbour the _Speedwell_, under charge of Dr +Williams, got entangled among the rocks, and was nearly lost. All hands +on board suffered much. Captain Gardiner had in the meantime found +Bloomfield Harbour, which he thought would suit them, but during his +cruise had lost the punts he had in tow. He at last returned to Banner +Cove; but on sailing again his boat got on shore. Then it was +discovered that all their powder had been left on board the ship, and so +they had no means of killing the wild-fowl on which they depended +chiefly for their support. Some of their provisions they buried here as +a reserve. Again they put to sea; but their boats, which they clearly +had not strength to manage, were beached on their way to Bloomfield +Harbour. After a fortnight's delay, they got afloat and sailed on to a +spot about forty miles along that iron-bound coast, called Spaniards' +Harbour, which, after much consultation, they agreed would be the +fittest place for their location. Here they arrived at the end of +January 1851; but the _Pioneer_ was driven on shore, and irretrievably +wrecked. So they collected what stores they could save, and dragged +them into a cave near the spot--her remains being hauled up on the +beach. Dr Williams, meantime, carried the _Speedwell_ further up the +harbour, and anchored her there. Disasters followed them. A tide +higher than usual washed into the cave, and swept away a large portion +of their stores; then a hut they had built under the rook caught fire; +and Captain Gardiner barely escaped with his life; lastly, scurvy broke +out. Their provisions were running very short, so they sailed back to +Banner Cove, to procure those they had left there. The provisions were +found; but the scanty store could only last them a few months. They +seemed to have a foreboding of the fate which awaited them. On +conspicuous places on the rocks they wrote in large letters, "Go to +Spaniards' Harbour. Hasten! hasten! We are suffering from sickness--we +are nearly starving!" Words of the same signification were written on +paper, and buried in bottles where they might most likely be found. + +They reached Spaniards' Harbour by the end of March. Captain Gardiner +took up his habitation at the cave, in the place he called Earnest Cove, +to watch for those who, it was hoped, would come to their relief; while +Dr Williams went to a more sheltered spot, up the harbour, at the mouth +of Cook's River, with the _Speedwell_. The months passed slowly by. +Their food was all gone. They caught and ate mice, a fox, a fish half +devoured, a penguin and shag--most unwholesome food--and then mussels +and other shell-fish; and then the Antarctic winter set in; and lastly, +through disease and starvation, one by one they died. They had kept a +daily record of their proceedings--of their sufferings. While they had +strength, they occasionally assisted each other. The last effort of the +two survivors was to go on crutches to Cook's River, to learn the state +of Dr Williams, who had for long not come to them; but their weak state +compelled them to abandon the attempt, and they returned to die in +Earnest Cove. Maidment had been sleeping in the cave--he died there; +Captain Gardiner near the remains of the _Pioneer_, which had been +hauled up on the beach, and with which he had formed a slight shelter +for himself from the weather. They had kept their journals to the last; +and wonderful as it may seem, though storms had raged and rains had +fallen, those journals had been preserved. Captain Gardiner's last +written words were addressed to Dr Williams, of whose death he was not +aware:-- + +"Dear Dr Williams,--The Lord has seen fit to call home another of our +little company. Our dear departed brother left the boat on Tuesday +afternoon, and has not since returned. Doubtless he is in the presence +of his Redeemer, whom he served faithfully. Yet a little while, and +though ... the Almighty, to sing praises ... throne. I neither hunger +nor thirst, though ... days ... without food ... Maidment's kindness to +me ... heaven." + +In October a schooner was despatched from Monte Video with provisions, +under the charge of a Captain Smyley. Too late he reached Spaniards' +Harbour, and having just time to visit the _Speedwell_ in Cook's River, +a gale springing up, he was compelled to put to sea without ever landing +at Earnest Cove. In the meantime, Captain Morshead, in the _Dido_ +frigate, having sailed from England, was ordered to call at Picton +Island with relief for the party. After continuing the search for some +time, they were about to abandon it, when the inscriptions on the rocks +were discovered, calling on them to go to Spaniards' Harbour. There the +_Dido_ proceeded. Maidment's body was found in the cave, Captain +Gardiner's by the side of the boat, with their journals and books +scattered around. Their remains, with those found at Cook's River, were +carefully interred in a grave on the beach--the funeral service being +read by one of the lieutenants. The colours of the ship and boats were +struck half-mast, and three volleys of musketry fired over the graves. +The journals--not a word of which was, as I have said, rendered +illegible--were carefully forwarded to England, and, like voices from +the grave, have undoubtedly instigated many to aid those who seek to +spread the truth of the gospel among the savage inhabitants of those +wild regions. + +"Those noble Christian men have not suffered in vain; and yet they met +the just doom of those who neglect to take those precautions which are +necessary for the preservation of life. God has, in his infinite +wisdom, given us reason and forethought; and that reason and forethought +we ought to employ as much when engaged in his service, as when occupied +about the ordinary affairs of life." This remark was made by Captain +Frankland, and I have often since reflected on it; and I trust that by +repeating it, it may tend to guide the plans of those labouring in +objects for the spread of God's great name and glory, and all the +blessings of the gospel throughout the world. The particulars of the +narrative I have thus briefly given had just reached Stanley, and were +the subject of conversation among all those who had any idea above that +of the price of seal-skins and the profits of the last wreck on their +shores. + +With a fair wind and fine weather we sailed to double Cape Horn, +intending to pass through the Straits of Le Maire. Often on the passage +did Gerard and I and Cousin Silas talk of the fate of Captain Gardiner, +and long to visit the spot where he and his brave companions died, and +to see the strange wild natives it had been his ardent desire to bring +to a knowledge of the truth. The favourable breeze carried us through +the straits, and as the well-defined outline of the rocky shores of +Terra del Fuego rose before us, we gazed with deep interest on a land +which had been the scene of the sad catastrophe now occupying our +thoughts. + +To the west and north of us were numerous islands clustering together, +of various sizes, with deep channels between them, most of them +consisting of rocky mountains, often rising in perpendicular precipices +from the ocean, and shooting upwards to a vast height in towering peaks +and rugged crags, untrod by the feet of man or beast. Along the shores +of these numerous isles and islets are gulfs and bays, and coves and +creeks without number, often with level ground in their neighbourhood +producing a somewhat rich vegetation, and forming a great contrast to +the terrifically wild and barren tracts which are the chief +characteristics of the region. Bold, precipitous headlands, with dark +barren elevations behind them, appeared on our right as we skirted the +northern shores of the straits. We made Cape Good Success, and a little +way beyond it, crossed abreast of the mouth of Spaniards' Harbour, into +which rolls the whole set of the South Atlantic. Then standing on till +near the entrance of the Beagle Channel, up which a little way lies +Picton Island, we stood away towards Cape Horn, so as to steer close +round it into the Pacific. Captain Frankland had often been here, and +had once brought up in a harbour for many days from bad weather, when he +had surveyed many of the passages in his boats. I was below; Gerard +rushed into the cabin. + +"We are off the Cape! we are off the Cape!" he exclaimed; "it is a sight +worth seeing." I hurried on deck, and thence I beheld rising not a mile +from us, in all its solitary grandeur, that far-famed promontory Cape +Horn,--a lofty pyramid frowning bold defiance towards the storm-tossed +confines of those two mighty oceans which circle the earth. Dark clouds +rested on its summit, foam-crested waves with ceaseless roar dashed +furiously at its base, the sea-fowl flew shrieking round it; and as I +gazed at it, I could not help thinking how an old heathen would have +believed it the very throne of the god of storms. Well has it earned +its fame. Scarcely were we round the Cape, when the wind, which had +hitherto been favourable, shifted suddenly to the westward and +southward, and dark clouds came rushing up from that quarter in hot +haste, like a stampede of wild animals on the prairies of America. The +long swell which had been rolling up from the east was met by a +succession of heavy waves torn up by the fierce gale blowing along the +whole course of the Southern Pacific, creating the wildest confusion on +the world of waters. A few minutes before it seemed we were gliding +smoothly on before a favourable breeze, under topsails and +top-gallant-sails; now the ship was madly plunging into the foam-covered +tossing seas. + +"All hands shorten sail!" cried Mr Renshaw, the first officer. + +"All hands shorten sail!" was repeated along the decks. + +"I thought how it would be when I saw the nightcap on the top of the +Horn," muttered old Ben Yool. "We shall have a sneezer before we have +done with it, and it may be this day month won't see us round the Cape." + +Old Ben's prognostications were not very pleasant, for we were anxious +to be round the Cape among the wonders we expected to behold in the +Pacific. Scarcely was the order given, than the crew were in the +rigging. Top-gallant-sails were quickly stowed, three reefs were taken +in the topsails, and the courses were brailed up and furled. This was +done not a moment too soon: the mighty seas came rolling up mountains +beyond mountains, with wide valleys between them, into whose depths the +ship plunged down from each watery height as it came under her, seeming +as if she could never rise again. Still once more she was lifted +upwards among showers of spray, which flew off from the white-crested +seas, deluging us fore and aft. Overhead the wild scud flew fast, the +stern Cape looked more solitary and grand, and the sea-fowl with +discordant shrieks flew round and round, closing in the circles they +were forming till they almost touched our masts. The ship struggled +bravely onward on the starboard-tack, rapidly increasing her distance +from the land, but making very little way to the westward. + +More than once I held my breath and clenched my teeth, as I felt the +ship sending forward, and saw the wide, deep valley into which she was +plunging, and the long, huge, watery height rolling on towards us, and +looking as if it must overwhelm us. And then, when having, by a miracle +it seemed, escaped the threatened danger, to see another valley just as +deep and wide, and another mountain just as big--and to know that though +we might rush ever so fast onward, we should find valley after valley +just as deep, and mountain after mountain just as big for days and days, +or weeks to come, perhaps; when, too, I heard the howling and whistling +of the wind, and the creaking and complaining of the timbers and +bulkheads, and the roar and dash of the seas,--I own that I could not +help wishing that my feet were planted on some firm ground, and that I +were enjoying the wild scene from a distance. + +"O Jerry, where are we going to?" I exclaimed, when we first met the +full swell of the Pacific. + +"Going? why, to the west coast of South America, and to Robinson +Crusoe's Island, and to all sorts of wild places," he answered, +laughing. "We have rather a rough road before us, as you say; but never +mind, Harry, you'll soon get accustomed to it, and a little bumping is +good for the digestion, they say." + +Jerry was right; in a very short time I was as much at home as any one +in a gale. + +The puff we had got off the east coast of America showed me what a gale +was; but that was mere child's play to the storm now blowing. When I +thought anything was at its worst, when matters wore a most gloomy and +threatening aspect, I could not but admire the coolness and +self-possession of Captain Frankland and his officers. They seemed to +take it all as a matter of course, and walked the deck as composedly as +in a calm, only they had to hold on pretty tightly at times to the +weather-railings, when the ship, with a sudden jerk, was sent over to +port, and then back again almost as far on the other side. It was fine, +however, to see the tall figure of Captain Frankland, as he balanced +himself, leaning backward when the ship shot downwards into the trough +of the sea; and I soon gained confidence from the perfect composure he +exhibited. Very soon the wind came round more to the northward of west, +and the ship looked up rather nearer to her course round the Cape. Our +satisfaction, however, was soon destroyed by the redoubled fury with +which the gale came down on us. The captain beckoned Mr Renshaw and +Mr Brand to come to him. They stood in earnest conversation on the +quarter-deck. Darkness was coming on--I could just see their figures +grouped together. With startling energy Mr Renshaw had just given the +order to furl the fore and mizzentop-sail, to heave the ship to, when +there was a loud crash. + +"Down! down for your lives!" shouted the captain. The main-topmast had +been carried away. Masts, and yards, and blocks, and rigging, came +hurtling down on deck in one mass of ruin, injuring two or three of our +men, and knocking one poor fellow overboard. In vain an attempt was +made to save him. To lower a boat would have been madness. His +death-shriek sounded in our ears as he dropped astern, and soon sunk +beneath the dark, troubled waters. We had little time to think of his +fate--the fate of many a gallant seaman. Our own danger was great. The +mates sprung forward to clear the wreck, and to secure as well as could +be done the other masts. The fear was that the fore-topmast and +mizzen-topmast, if not the lower masts, deprived of their support, might +go likewise. The wreck was quickly cleared, and the masts got on board. +To stand on or to heave to were equally out of the question. It was +necessary to put the ship before the wind. The mizzentop-sail was +furled, the helm put up, and the ship was to be wore round. Now came +the danger. In wearing, if a sea strikes a ship abeam, there is a great +risk of her bulwarks being stove in, and of everything being washed from +her decks. Every one held on to whatever he thought most secure. The +ship wore steadily round. A huge sea came rolling on, but already the +fore-yard was squared; it struck her on the counter, and she flew +unharmed before it. Instead, however, of running to the eastward, she +was headed up towards the land. No one turned in that night. Sharp +eyes were on the look-out for land. Cape Horn, like some gigantic +spirit of the deep, was seen towering up amid the raging ocean. On we +kept. Once more we were under shelter of the land, the mizzen-top-sail +was set, and we ran up just outside those islands which cluster +thereabout so thickly, till at daylight we were off the mouth of a +channel, up which we ran, and dropped our anchor in a fine land-locked +harbour. + +"We are far better off here than battering about outside, and knocking +the ship to pieces," observed Mr Pincott, the carpenter. "Now, if we +could but get a fresh spar for a topmast, we should soon be all +ataunto." + +As, however, we were not likely to find spars large enough for the +purpose in this part of the world, it was necessary to make use of the +broken one. While this work was going on, it was resolved to hold some +communication with the natives. A boat was lowered, under charge of Mr +Brand--Gerard and I and Mr McRitchie going in her, and two hands, as no +more could be spared from attending to the repairs of the ship. We were +all armed, but the captain directed us to be very careful in our +intercourse with the wild people we might meet. We had with us some +trinkets, glass necklaces, bracelets, rings, gilt lockets, knives, +scissors, and other trifles, to barter with them, or to win their +good-will. After pulling some way, we reached a sandy cove surrounded +with trees of good height, and a quantity of brushwood below them. We +saw several wigwams among the trees, and two canoes hauled up on the +beach. Beyond the wood were ranges of high hills, the nearest ascending +almost precipitously from the water, while those further off were worthy +of the name of mountains. It was altogether a very beautiful and +attractive scene--the more so, that it was totally unexpected in that +region. No natives were visible, so we ran the boat on shore, and +landed. The wigwams were in shape like those of the North American +Indians composed of a number of long sticks stuck in the ground in a +circle, and bending inwards till their other ends met, and were secured +together with a band. Instead of being covered with birch bark, these +were thatched very neatly with dry grass or reeds, and formed very warm +abodes. In the centre a pile of ashes showed where their fires were +placed. Their canoes were very like those of North America, being built +of bark, with ribs neatly formed, and kept in shape by several beams +athwartships secured to the gunwale. Near the wigwams were two other +partly finished canoes. While we were examining these rude habitations +and means of locomotion, a shout from the two men left in the boat made +us look up, and in an opening in the wood we saw some dozen or more +savages advancing stealthily towards us. Mr Brand, the instant he saw +them, told us to fall back behind him; and he then advanced alone, +patting his stomach,--the sign of amity among these people. It is as +much as to say, I suppose, "I have had a good dinner, and I hope that +you have had one also." They, in return, all shouted and gesticulated +most vehemently, pointing to their mouths in their eagerness to speak, +not being aware, probably, that we did not understand a word they said; +however, at last they began to pat their stomachs, and then we knew that +all was right. Accordingly we advanced to meet them, patting our +stomachs with one hand, and holding out the other to grasp theirs. They +were of a brownish copper colour, well formed and athletic, with long +shaggy hair--their only clothing being a piece of skin thrown over one +shoulder. In such a climate as that of Terra del Fuego, their being +able to go without clothes shows that they must be of a very hardy +nature. We were soon surrounded by some thirty or more of these very +unprepossessing gentlemen, all talking most furiously to us or at us, +some patting us on the back, and others examining our handkerchiefs, and +caps, and buttons, or any article of our dress they could get hold of. +We patted them on the back in return, but as they had no clothes, we +took hold of their hair and admired it; and Jerry must needs catch one +fellow by the nose, and assured him that he had a very handsome nob! In +this way we in a short time became excellent friends, though, as we had +no interpreter, we could only communicate with each other by signs. +When they found that we did not understand what they said, they hallooed +louder and louder; and as they had voices of most stentorian power, they +at last spoke to us in a perfect roar, till they almost deafened us! By +their tones we fancied that they were saying, "Well, if you cannot +understand that, you must be desperately stupid fellows." + +When they found that we had come as friends, they invited us to +accompany them to the village, or, as Jerry called it, their wigwamment, +about a quarter of a mile off, in a sheltered nook among the trees. +Fearing no treachery, we agreed, and we walked along in the most +amicable way, they slapping us on the back, and we slapping them, while +they often indulged in the most uproarious shouts of laughter. Stopping +suddenly, they asked us by signs if we were hungry, and immediately +gathered a number of fungi, which grew in clusters round the roots of a +tree which Mr McRitchie told us was an evergreen beech. They handed +them to Jerry and me, at the same time patting us on the stomach. + +"What are these toadstools for, old gentleman?" exclaimed Jerry, holding +them up and laughing. "They don't want us to eat these, surely, for our +luncheon?" + +"They do, though," said Mr McRitchie. "They are the edible fungi. +Just take a piece; the people hereabouts eat them largely." + +Jerry on this took a large mouthful, but spat it out, declaring that he +would just as soon eat shoe-leather. I ate a small piece, but thought +it tasted very insipid, and not very digestible. The savages looked +astonished at our want of taste, and, to show that they appreciated the +production more than we did, crammed quantities of it into their mouths. + +"Come, Mr McRitchie, for the advancement of science you must eat some!" +exclaimed Jerry, handing him a big fungus. + +This was a favourite expression of the doctor's; nor, to do him justice, +was he slack to put his principles into practice. I have since often +remarked in England the roots of beech trees completely surrounded with +masses of fungi not unlike them in appearance. The doctor ate enough to +redeem our character with the savages, and then we proceeded in the same +amicable way as before, till we reached their village. It consisted of +ten wigwams, some of considerable size, capable of holding twelve or +more people. They were neatly thatched with straw, and their doorways +had a piece of carved wood, so as to form an arch overhead. Several +little, long-backed, sharp-eyed, hairy terriers came barking out and +snapping at our heels, and wore very annoying till they were called off +by their masters. In and about the huts were a number of women and +children, the former far from unpleasant in their looks, though as dirty +as the men. Indeed, from their appearance, we had reason to doubt +whether any of the tribe had ever washed in their lives. The women had +a modest, retiring look; and the children seemed in no way frightened +when they saw us. Cousin Silas had a happy knack of making friends with +savages, and especially with their children. His secret, I found, was +great gentleness. While Mr McRitchie, Jerry, and I sat down on a log +facing the huts, he advanced slowly towards the nearest group of +children with some bracelets and lockets, which he now first produced, +singing and dancing at the same time, so as to attract their attention. +They stared at him with open eyes, but showed no inclination to run away +till he got near enough to slip the string of a locket over the neck of +the tallest child--a little girl--and a bracelet over the arm of +another; and then, taking their hands, he began slowly to move round and +round in a circle, beckoning to the rest of the children to join hands. +This they readily did, and then two or three of the men--their fathers +probably--joined the circle, and we got up and united our hands to those +of the savages, and then several of the women came; and there we were-- +Mr Brand, and the doctor, and Jerry, and I, and the savages--men, +women, and children--all singing, and dancing, and jumping, and laughing +like mad, till we were fain to stop for want of strength to go on. To +show their satisfaction, the savages gave us all round some +over-affectionate hugs, which, besides nearly squeezing the breath out +of our bodies, were unpleasant on account of the very dirty condition of +the huggers. We would not tell them that we did not like it, so we had +to submit to the ceremony as often as they thought fit to perform it, +and to put the best face we could on the matter. The dance over, they +invited us into a wigwam. It was ten feet in diameter, with a fire on +the ground in the centre. Round it were heaps of dry grass, on which +apparently they slept; while bunches of grass were hung to the roof, +probably to dry. The smoke found its way out of the doorway, and +through a small aperture, where the poles at the apex joined. There we +all sat round the fire, squatting on our heels, and talking away as fast +as our tongues could move, as if we were keeping up a very interesting +conversation. The smoke and heat, not to mention the want of +cleanliness in our hosts, made us very glad to get out again into the +fresh air. Besides the fungi I have spoken of, the Fuegians live +chiefly on fish and the shell-fish they gather on the rocks, though they +eat birds and grubs of all sorts--and, I fancy, nothing comes amiss to +them. We observed that a platform of clay was placed in each canoe, on +which to place a fire. There was also a sort of well at the bottom of +the canoe, and out of it a man was constantly employed in bailing the +water, which leaked in through the seams. The men we met were of good +size, and robust; but their legs were thin and weak, owing to their +sitting so much in their canoes and walking so little. When by degrees +we produced our gifts, and distributed them among the party--men, women, +and children--their pleasure knew no bounds. They danced, and laughed, +and shouted into our ears louder than ever; so that we thought it would +be as well to be off while they remained in such excellent humour. They +were much astonished at seeing the doctor pull out his note-book and +write in it. The doctor, to indulge them, made a few clear strokes; and +a young man, who had attached himself to Jerry and me, imitated them in +a wonderful way, considering his rough and uncouth hand. We had heard +them making a number of strange sounds, and at last we discovered that +they were imitating our words. + +"Good-bye," said Jerry, as we got up to go away. + +"Good-bye," replied our young friend as clearly as possible, seeming +fully to comprehend the meaning of the words. + +"You speak capital English," said Jerry, laughing. + +"Capital English," repeated the savage, shouting with a laughter which +was quite catching, as if he had said something very clever. + +Then, having gone through another process of hugging, we proceeded to +the boat, accompanied by our new friends. Having refitted the topmast, +we waited till the gale had blown itself out; and once more putting to +sea, we had a very quick passage round Cape Horn, now no longer clothed +in storms, to Valparaiso, the sea-port of Santiago, the capital of +Chili. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +ADVENTURES IN CHILI. + +One morning, when it was my watch on deck, soon after dawn the cheery +sound was heard of "Land on the starboard-bow!" I looked out; and as +daylight increased, there appeared, as if rising out of the ocean in +their desolate grandeur, capped with snow and towering high above the +clouds, the lofty summits of a range of mountains trending away north +and south far as the eye could reach. They were the giant Cordilleras. +On we sailed with a fresh breeze. The sun ascended with stately pace +from behind them, and then a mist arose and shrouded their base. Hour +after hour we ran on, and yet we seemed not to have got nearer; till +once more the mists lifted, and wild, rocky, and barren heights sloped +upwards before us from the ocean. Full sixty miles were gone over from +the time those snowy peaks were first seen till we reached Valparaiso, +far away down at their base. We must have been a hundred and twenty +miles off them at sunrise. + +Coming so suddenly from the wild regions of Tierra del Fuego and the +unattractive Falklands, Valparaiso appeared to us a very beautiful +place. It is very irregularly built--at the bottoms of valleys, on the +tops of hills, and on their steep and sometimes rugged sides, rising +directly out of the blue ocean, with a succession of range after range +of lofty mountains behind it the Cordilleras towering in the background +beyond all. Gerard and I were very eager to get on shore; so was old +Surley. He wagged his tail, and ran to the ship's side and barked, and +looked up in our faces and looked at the land, as much as to say, "How I +should like to have a scamper along the beach there!" + +"Yes, you may all three go, if Mr McRitchie will take care of you," +said the captain, laughing. Fleming got leave to accompany us, as he +had been unwell for some weeks, and the captain thought a trip on shore +would do him good. We found that there would be time to get right up +among the mountains, where we hoped to find some good sport, our great +ambition being to kill a guanaco--the name given to the llama in its +wild state. A number of boatmen good-naturedly helped us to land on the +beach, with our guns and carpet-bags. It was market-day; the market was +full of vegetables and other provisions, and the place bore a very +cheerful aspect. We heard that, in spite of the want of level ground, +the town has very rapidly improved in the last few years. The country +generally, since order has been established, has become prosperous. +Everybody praises the climate, and perhaps there is not a finer in the +world; for, although hot in summer, the air is dry and pure, and +tempered by the sea-breeze, which regularly sets in every forenoon. In +the harbour were two or three old hulks, the remains of the fleet +commanded by Lord Dundonald, when he performed one of his most gallant +exploits--the cutting out of the _Esmeralda_ frigate, belonging to the +Spaniards, from the port of Callao. Fleming was with him, and told me +all about it. + +"What a lucky adventure!" I remarked. + +"No, Mr Harry, it wasn't luck, it was prudence and forethought which +gained the day with him then at all times. There never was a more +prudent, and never a braver man. He feared nothing, and took every +precaution to insure success. We were three days getting ready. We +were all dressed in white, with a blue mark on the left arm--160 +blue-jackets and 80 marines--and armed with cutlass and pistols--all +picked men. Every man knew exactly what he had to do--some to attack +one part of the ship, some another; others to go aloft and loose pails, +some to the main, and others to the foretop. The admiral sent all the +ships of the squadron out of the bay, except his own flag-ship. At +midnight we were told off into fourteen boats. A line of booms had been +placed across the mouth of the inner harbour, with only a narrow +entrance. Just then the admiral's boat, which led, ran foul of a +Spanish guard-boat; but he whispered to the crew, that if they gave any +alarm he would kill every one of them; so they held their tongues, and +we were quickly alongside the _Esmeralda_. The Spaniards were asleep, +and before they had time to seize their arms, we were upon them, the +frigate's cables were cut, and we were running out of the harbour. Had +the admiral's directions been followed in all points, we should have cut +out every craft in the harbour, and a rich treasure-ship to boot; but he +had traitors serving under him, and all was not done which ought to have +been done." Fleming told me also how Lord Dundonald took the strong +forts of Valdivia, to the south of Chili, by storm, with his single +ship's company; but I must not now repeat the story. + +We engaged two caleches, rattle-trap vehicles, like gigs with hoods, to +carry us to Santiago, the capital of Chili. One horse was in the +shafts; another on the left side was ridden by a postilion on a +high-peaked saddle, with a long knife at the saddle-bow; he being +dressed with a straw hat over a silk handkerchief tied round his head +and the ends hanging down behind, a short jacket, coarse pantaloons, +high boots, huge spurs, and a poncho hanging over one shoulder. Jerry +and Mr McRitchie went together, Fleming accompanied me, and we had old +Surley, who sat up between our legs, looking sagaciously out before him. +Away we rattled. The road was much better than we had expected to find +it in a place so far away from England as this seemed. My idea was, +that once round Cape Horn, we should not see anything but painted +savages or long-tailed Chinese; and I was quite surprised to find good +roads and carriages in Chili. We slept two nights on the road; admired +Santiago, which is full of laughing gas, the air is so fine; it stands +1700 feet above the level of the sea. Then we started off on horseback +towards the Cordilleras, to a spot called the Snow Bank, whence Santiago +is regularly supplied with snow all the year round. At the capital we +fell in with an English sailor, Tom Carver by name, who had served with +Fleming under Lord Cochrane, and having married a Chilian wife, had +settled in the country. He came as our interpreter, for without him a +guide we procured would have been of very little service. Leaving our +horses at a small rancho, or farm-house, we set off with our guns, +Fleming and the guide carrying most of the provisions, though we each of +us had a share. The scenery was wild and grand in the extreme, +consisting of the snow-capped peaks of the Andes, of rugged heights, and +of dark glens and gorges, with precipices which went sheer down many +hundred feet below us. We had not gone far before we came to a +suspension bridge made of hides, cut into strips and twisted together, +thrown across a fearful gorge. Bundles of sticks placed on the ropes +form the road. It was full of holes, and as I looked through, far down +into the torrent foaming below, I could not help feeling how very +disagreeable it would be to slip through. Surley followed at my heels, +and even he did not like it. We now reached a wide valley, on the sides +of which, far up on the mountains, we descried a number of animals, +which Jerry and I concluded, without doubt, were the much-desired +guanacoes. Mr McRitchie, with Simmons, the sailor, and the guide, were +ahead; Fleming was with us; so we agreed, as we could not fail of being +seen by our companions, we would climb the mountain in chase of the +game. Up, up we climbed, old Surley after us. He seemed to think it +very good fun; but Fleming, not accustomed to such exercise, was soon +blown. + +"Come along, Fleming," cried Jerry; "we shall soon be up to the beasts; +don't give in, man." + +"No, Mr Gerard, you go on, and leave me to follow you slowly," answered +Fleming. "If I stop, you'll easily find me again." + +We, of course, were ready enough to follow this advice; so Jerry, +Surley, and I, pushed on up the mountain as fast as we could climb +towards the nearest herd of guanacoes. They were of a light-brown +colour, of about the size of a stag. I should describe the animals we +saw as having small heads, with large and brilliant eyes, thick lips, +and ears long and movable. The neck was very long, and kept perfectly +upright, while the haunches were slightly elevated; so that they looked +somewhat like little camels--the purpose of which, indeed, they serve +when domesticated. We could see several herds in different parts on the +side of the mountain. There was one low down near the path in the +direction the doctor and his companions had taken. They were feeding +quietly, when one looked up, then another, and away the whole herd +scampered at a tremendous rate up the mountain. We thought that the +sight of the doctor's party had put them to flight; and it showed us +that we must be cautious in approaching the herd we had marked. Old +Surley was very eager to be after them, and we had great difficulty in +keeping him back. + +The air was keen and at the same time hot. There was not a cloud in the +intense blue sky, and the rays of the sun came down with great force, +and blistered our skin and peeled our noses till we were afraid of +touching them; but we did not think much about that trifle while the +guanacoes were in sight. Concealing ourselves as much as possible +behind rocks and bushes, and here and there an evergreen quillay-tree, +we got nearer and nearer to them. Sometimes we got behind clumps of the +great chandelier-like cactus, whose sturdy green twisted stems afforded +us capital shelter. + +"It is lucky we are not very big, or we should not be able to hide +ourselves so well," observed Jerry as we crept on. The valley lay far +below us, with steep precipices and a brawling torrent, with rocks and +shrubs scattered about; and high above us wild jagged peaks and +snow-covered mountain-tops. The stillness of the air was most +extraordinary. Not a sound reached our ears. Never have I been in a +wilder or more magnificent scene. I do not know what our four-footed +companion thought of it, but he certainly enjoyed the idea of catching a +guanaco--so did we, indeed, more than anything else. We had got within +five hundred yards of the nearest without being discovered. Hitherto we +had gone on very cautiously. Our eagerness overcame our discretion. We +left cover and ran on exposing ourselves to view. + +"Stop, stop, Harry!" sang out Jerry. "We are near enough to fire; stop +and let us recover our wind." The advice was good, and I was about to +follow it, when one of the guanacoes turned his head and saw us. Before +we could bring our rifles to our shoulders, they were off like the wind. +Jerry was going to fire after them but I stopped him, pointing to +another herd a short distance further off, along the side of the +mountain. + +"You'll frighten them too if you do," I observed. "Let us try to get up +to them more cautiously." One great difficulty was to keep Surley back, +or he would have followed the herd till he had caught one of them, or +broken his neck over a precipice. Consoling ourselves for our +disappointment with the hopes of getting near enough up to the next herd +to fire before being seen, we scrambled on as before. Now and then we +glanced behind us to mark the spot where we had left Fleming, while we +kept an eye in the direction Mr McRitchie had taken; and on that broad +exposed mountain-side, we did not think it possible that we could miss +each other. We climbed on, therefore, without any misgivings as to how +we should find our way back again. I fastened my handkerchief through +Surley's collar to keep him back. He was thus able also sometimes to +help me up a steep place or a rock quicker than I could have got by +myself. Jerry followed close behind me. The distance was, we found, +greater than we expected to the next herd. We were, fortunately, to +leeward of them, and not one of them noticed our approach. We halted +behind a thick cactus. There was a rock some three hundred yards +further off, and within a good shot of the herd. + +"Now, Jerry, you mark the fellow to the left; I'll take the one to the +right," said I, almost trembling in my eagerness. "Don't let us fire +till we get up to the rock; then rest a moment, and it will be hard if +we don't hit one of them. If we miss, we'll see what Surley can do for +us." Jerry nodded his agreement to this proposal, and crouching down, +we crept on till we reached the rock. For an instant we waited to +recover breath, then we lifted up our rifles and rested them on a ledge +of the rock. It would be impossible to have got a better aim. Crack-- +crack--we both fired. Off scampered the herd up the mountain. + +"We've missed! we've missed!" we cried. "Oh, bothera--No, no! there's +one fellow staggering. The one I fired at," I exclaimed. "Hurrah!" + +"There's another! See, see!--he's over--no! he's up again, and away +with the rest," sung out Jerry. "Let Surley after him, Harry. He'll +bring him down. Hurrah, hurrah, what luck!" + +With such like exclamations we darted from behind our cover, and ran as +fast as our legs could carry us up to the guanaco I had hit; while +Surley, hounded on by us, went off in hot chase after the animal Jerry +had wounded. We were soon up to the guanaco I had hit. Poor beast! he +staggered on, and then over he went on his side. He looked up at us +with his mild eyes, as much as to say, "Oh, you cruel white men, who +come from far-off across the seas, you have well-nigh destroyed the +original people of the country, and now you would wage war against us, +its harmless four-footed inhabitants." He tried to spit at us, but his +strength failed him, and in an instant more he was dead. As soon as we +saw this, off we went after Surley. He had singled a guanaco out of the +herd, and marks of blood on the grass showed that it had been wounded. +Old Surley was among them. Then one beast was seen to drop astern. +Slower and slower he went, kicking out all the time at the dog, who ran +leaping up to try and catch hold of his neck. He got a kick, which sent +him rolling over, but he was up again. + +"Hurrah!" cried Jerry. "He has him now, though. Remember, Harry, +that's the beast I shot." + +On we ran and clambered to get up with Old Surley and the guanaco, which +was still struggling to get away. He made several desperate springs +forward, but he struck out with his heels and spat in vain, for the +stanch dog was not to be shaken off. He was rapidly getting weaker--he +struggled less violently--at last over he came, and we saw there was no +chance of his escaping. We stopped, and, like good sportsmen, loaded +our rifles in case they might be required. By the time we got up the +guanaco was dead, and Old Surley was standing over him, looking +wonderfully proud of his victory. What was to be done with the game now +that we had got it? was the question. We could not carry it away, for +each animal was fully four feet high, and eight or nine long. We looked +about for marks by which we should know the spot where the last killed +lay. We thought that we had found some that we could not mistake, but, +still more certainly to recognise it, we piled up all the stones and +bushes we could collect on a rock, till we had made a considerable heap, +which we thought would be conspicuous at a distance. We then began to +consider that it was time to look about for our companions. We could +nowhere make them out, but we had no doubt as to easily finding the spot +where we had left Fleming. First, however, we had to go and mark the +place more distinctly where we had left my guanaco. It took us as long +to descend the mountain as to climb it; for we often came to steep +places which we had to make a circuit to avoid. We reached the edge of +a small precipice, where we had a tolerably clear view of the hill-side +below us, and of the valley beyond. In ascending, we had passed on one +side of the rock. We looked about to discover the spot where we had +left the guanaco. There it lay; but not a hundred yards from it we saw +another animal approaching it by stealthy steps. We watched it +narrowly. + +"It must be a big cat!" cried Jerry. + +"No, no; it is a puma--the South American lion," I sang out. "Oh, if we +can but get a shot at him it will be fine!" + +He was so intent on the prospect of a feast off the dead guanaco that he +did not see us. He crawled up near it, and then sprang on the carcass. +We did not like to have our game destroyed, so we could not help +shouting out, "Get off from that, you beast!" Our voices startled the +puma, and looking round and seeing us, and Surley approaching with an +angry growl, he trotted off down the mountain. We agreed that he was +probably an old fellow, and that, having lost his activity, he could not +catch the live animals. We both fired, but we were not near enough, and +missed him. Away he bounded down the mountain without once stopping to +look behind him. + +"I vote we take some slices out of our friend here," said Jerry. His +suggestions were generally very practical. "I don't see why we should +run the risk of losing our dinner altogether. The chances are that +another of these pumas finds him out and leaves us but poor pickings." +I agreed to the wisdom of the suggestion, and so we supplied ourselves +with enough meat for all the party. We then raised a mark near our +guanaco as we had done before. + +"That will do famously," said Jerry, finishing the heap with a long +piece of cactus. "Now, let us go and look for Fleming. The doctor and +guides will be back soon. I'm getting very hungry, I know, and if they +don't come I vote we make an attack on the prog baskets without them." + +"Let us find Fleming and the baskets first," I answered; for my mind +began to misgive me about finding him as easily as we had expected. The +chase after the guanacoes had led us a long way, and I found it very +difficult to calculate distances or the size of objects in that bright +atmosphere, where the proportions of all surrounding objects were so +vast. Still I did not express my fears to Jerry. We kept our eyes +about us, on the chance of falling in with another puma; for we agreed +that it would be much better to be able to talk of having killed a lion +than even two harmless llamas. On we went for a long time, scrambling +over the crags, and precipices, and rough ground. + +"Where can Fleming have got to?" exclaimed Jerry at last; "I am certain +that we are up to the spot where we left him." I thought so likewise. +We shouted at the top of our voices, but the puny sounds seemed lost in +the vast solitudes which encompassed us. "I think it must have been +further on," said I, after I had taken another survey of the country. +So on we rushed, keeping our eyes about us on every side. + +We had gone on some way further, when Jerry laid his hand on my arm. +"What is that, Harry?" he exclaimed. "It is the puma! See the rascal +how stealthily he creeps along! He's after some mischief, depend on it. +I hope he won't go back and eat up our guanacoes." + +"We must take care that he does not do that," said I. "We'll stop his +career. Is your rifle ready. We'll creep after him as stealthily as he +is going along. He is so busy that he does not see us, and the chances +are that we get near enough to knock him over." + +"Come along then," exclaimed Jerry; and, imitating the puma's cautious +mode of proceeding, we rapidly gained on him. We had got up almost +close enough to fire when Jerry whispered, "O Harry, what is that? It's +Fleming, dear! dear!" + +Just below where the puma was crouching down ready to make his fatal +spring, lay the form of the old seaman; but whether he was dead, or +asleep, or fainting, we could not tell. There was not a moment to be +lost. In another instant the savage brute would have fixed his claws in +his throat. We rushed on--so did old Surley. The puma had actually +begun his spring when we fired. Both our bullets took effect, but still +he leaped forward. He fell close to Fleming. Our shipmate sprang up on +his knees, but it was only to receive the claws of the brute on his +chest. The blow knocked him over. We were running on and shouting all +the time, to distract the attention of the puma. + +"He is killed! he is killed!" cried Jerry. "No." In an instant, with a +clasp-knife in his hand, Fleming was up again and plunging away at the +throat of the brute. He rose to his knees. He gave stab after stab, +and prevented the puma from fixing its jaws on his own throat, which +seemed the aim of the enraged animal. The brave Surley was at his +flanks tearing and biting at them with all his might. + +"Hold on, Fleming," we shouted; "we will be up to you directly." + +"Fire! fire!" cried Fleming; "I can't keep the brute back much longer." + +At length Surley's attack seemed to produce more effect on the puma. +For a moment he turned round to try to repel him. Fleming seized the +opportunity, and, taking better aim than he had hitherto been able to +do, plunged his knife right up to the hilt in the animal's breast, and +then sprang back out of his way. We came up at the same moment, barely +in time to save Surley from some severe handling, for the puma had +turned all his fury on him. We stopped and loaded, and then running on +got close up to the beast, to run no risk of hitting the dog, and fired. +Over he rolled, giving a few spasmodic clutches with his claws, and +with a snarl expired. + +"You've saved my life anyhow, young gentlemen," said Fleming. "When I +felt the brute's claws on my breast, before I saw you and honest Surley +there, I thought it was all over with me." + +Surley was standing over the dead body of the puma, and he seemed to +think that he had had the chief hand in killing him. We were very proud +of the trophy; and when we found that Fleming was scarcely injured, +though his clothes were somewhat torn, we were very glad that the +adventure had occurred. Fleming told us that when we did not return he +had set off to look after us; but at last, overcome again with the heat +of the sun, he had sat down and dropped asleep. It was now getting late +in the day, so after we had marked the place where the dead puma lay, we +agreed that we would return to the bottom of the valley and try and find +our companions. That we might enjoy a whole day in the mountains, it +had been arranged that we should bivouac in the valley, and not commence +our return till the following morning. We looked about for the doctor +and guides, but they were nowhere to be seen. We fired off our rifles, +but no one answered in return. We began to be anxious. Could they have +been stopped by robbers? or could any Indians have attacked them? Such +things had occurred before now, we were told. Sometimes bands of the +fierce Araucanian Indians had been known to make incursions into the +province from the south, and to attack farm-houses and even villages +among the mountains. Robbers, too, in large bands once frequented the +country, and laid contributions on all the peaceable inhabitants. +Still, since the government has been settled and order established, such +occurrences were no longer heard of. We therefore resolved that it +would be unwise to make ourselves unhappy; so, after having partaken of +some of the articles of Fleming's basket to stay our appetites, we set +to work to prepare for our encampment for the night. We fixed on a spot +under a high rock, which would shelter us from the prevailing wind; and +we then looked about for fuel with which we could light a fire. We +found a plant in great abundance, but we could not tell whether, it +would burn or not. "Try, at all events," said Fleming. We made a heap, +and put some paper and matches under it. It burned admirably, exuding a +resinous smell; and we afterwards found that it was called the _Alpinia +umbellifera_. After we had collected enough fuel for the night, we sat +ourselves down before the fire wrapped up in our cloaks, which Fleming +had been carrying for us. When enough ashes had been made, we produced +our meat and toasted some slices at the end of our ramrods. + +"I say, Harry, does not this remind you of the night we spent at the +Falkland Islands?" said Jerry. "I like this bivouacking life +amazingly." I agreed with him that it was very good fun in fine +weather, but that with cold and snow, or rain, I thought we should very +likely change our tune. + +"That you would, young gentlemen," observed Fleming. "Remember that +you've only seen the bright side of life as yet. There's a dark side as +well, and you should be prepared for it when it comes, otherwise you +won't be fit to meet it like men. Don't go on fancying that the sun is +always to shine on you, and that you are always to be warm and +comfortable, and to have plenty of money in your pockets, and no +troubles and sorrows, and pains and sicknesses. You'll have your share, +and it is better that you should depend on it, not to make you value +this world too much." + +"I say, Fleming, don't preach--there's a good fellow!" exclaimed Jerry. +"I want just now to enjoy my slice of guanaco. I know what you say is +very true, and I'll remember and think about it by-and-by." + +Fleming might have made further remarks on the subject, had not a faint +shout, as if from a distance, reached our ears. We listened. Could it +be from Indians or robbers? Jerry put his hand to the top of his head. +"Oh, my scalp!" said he; "it feels very uncomfortable already." Again +the shout reached us. We shouted in return. We had little doubt that +it was raised by the doctor and his companions. Soon they emerged out +of the darkness laden with all sorts of specimens of natural history. +We crowed over them, however, for they had not killed either a guanaco +or a puma. They could not doubt our assertions, as they had proof in +the slices of the former which we cooked for them. Fleming and Old +Surley, too, showed the marks of their encounter with the puma; and we +got great credit for having killed him. We were a very merry party as +we drew round the fire recounting our adventures; and Surley sat up +looking as wise as any of us, and if he could but have put his words +together, he would have told as good a story as any of us. At all +events, he dogfully played his part at the feast, and ate up with +evident relish all the scraps of guanaco flesh which we gave him. Mr +McRitchie was as satisfied as we were with the result of his day's +excursion; and as we had an abundant supply of everything to make the +inner man comfortable, and good cloaks to keep the outer warm, we were +all very happy. Our guide talked a good deal, though no one but Tom +Carver understood a word he said. Tom and Fleming, however, spun the +longest yarns, all about Lord Cochrane and all the wonders he had done, +and how from his daring and bravery he made the people of the country +believe that he was in league with the Evil One, if he was not rather +the Evil One himself. They gave him the name of the _Diabo_. + +"No one ever deserved it less," exclaimed Fleming. "The devil, to my +mind, is cunning and cowardly, and a fool into the bargain. Resist him, +and he'll run away. Act a straightforward, honest part, and he can +never get round you. Lord Cochrane, you see, mates, was as true and +honest as steel, as brave as his sword, and so wise, that he never +undertook to do anything when he didn't see the way clear before him +that would lead to success." Tom agreed also in heartily praising their +old chief, though they were not very complimentary to the Spaniards or +to the people of Chili, whom he had come to assist. + +"I say, Tom, do you mind when we were going away from Valparaiso to +attack Callao, and you and I were serving aboard the _O'Higgins_, how +that lieutenant brought the admiral's little son on board?" said +Fleming, for the purpose, I suspect, of drawing his friend out. + +"Ay, that I do," answered Tom Carver. "You see the flag-lieutenant had +gone on shore for some of the admiral's traps, when he fell in with the +little chap, who wasn't more than five or six years old. `I want to go +with father,' says he. `I must go with father aboard the big ship +there. I will go.' At first the lieutenant said he couldn't take him; +but the little fellow cried out so, that he couldn't find it in his +heart to refuse him; so he lifted him up on his shoulders and carried +him away to the boat. The child shouted and crowed with pleasure, +waving his little hat above his head, just like a sucking hero as he +was. When the people saw it, they seemed as if they would grow mad with +delight, and followed him in crowds, cheering and crying out, `_Viva la +Patria_' at the top of their voices. I was one of the boat's crew, and +certainly there was something in it somehow which took our fancy +mightily. Off we pulled aboard the flag-ship, before Lady Cochrane +found out what had become of the child, and I daresay she was in a great +taking. Well, we only got aboard just as the ship was under weigh, and +he couldn't be sent on shore again. There was nothing to be done but to +take him with us. We weren't sorry to have him, for, you see, next to a +monkey, there's nothing does a ship's company more good than having a +little child to look after. The small chap had nothing but the clothes +he was dressed in. `What's to be done with him?' says the admiral. +`Why, bless ye, my lord, he'll have fifty nurses, every one as good as +the she-maids as has to look after him ashore,' answered Ben Brown, the +admiral's coxswain; `and as for clothing, the ship's tailor will rig him +out in no time.' To my mind, the admiral rather liked having the little +fellow with him. Fearless himself, he couldn't even feel fear for one +of those he loved best on earth. Young master very soon made himself at +home among us, and in a couple of days the ship's tailor had as complete +a midshipman's uniform made for him as you'd wish to see. + +"We were bound, do you see, to Callao, where the admiral discovered that +a large Spanish ship was about to sail for Europe, with great treasure +aboard. Besides her, there was a Spanish squadron of considerable force +lying in the harbour, under the protection of the guns of the forts. +The admiral was up to all sorts of dodges, so he hoisted American +colours, and, as two United States' ships of war were expected with +another ship, stood in. A fog, however came on, and the _Lantaro_, one +of our squadron, parting company, his plan was defeated. However, we +fell in with a Spanish gunboat in the fog, and took her. Fogs and light +winds baffled us for some time; but the admiral was not a man to be +turned aside from what he had intended, so at last we got in before the +forts, and with springs on our cables began blazing away at them and the +fleet, of which there were altogether some fourteen vessels. Well, I +was telling you of the admiral's little son. Of course his father was +very anxious about him, for it was no child's work we were about, so he +locked him up as he fancied safe in his after-cabin. As soon, however, +as the firing began, the youngster thought he should like to see some of +the fun; so what does he do, but work his way out through the +quarter-gallery window, and find his way up on deck. `Go down below, +sir, this moment,' says the admiral when he sees him. `You'll be having +your head shot off if you stay here.' The shot was flying about us +pretty thick by that time, let me tell you. `No, no, daddy,' says he. +`Let me stay here. You stay, and de oder midshipmens stay; why +shouldn't I?' He couldn't speak quite plain yet, do you see. `Take him +below out of harm's way, one of you,' says the admiral, turning to me. +You see he had plenty to do watching the enemy and issuing orders, and +had not time to look after the boy. So as the admiral ordered, I seized +up the young gentleman, and was going to carry him off below, when he +began to kick up such a hubbub, and to kick, and scratch, and bite, it +was as hard work to hold him as it would have been to gripe a +rattlesnake. `Put me down, I say--put me down,' he sung out. `I'll not +go below. I want to stay on deck and fight the enemy.' Well, I saw +that there was no use in taking him below, because, as no one could be +spared to look after him, he would have been soon up again; besides, to +my mind, a shot finds its way into one part of a ship as well as +another. So I put him down again, and there was his little lordship as +busy as any powder-monkey, handing up the powder to the gunners. Well, +as I was saying, the shot was falling pretty thick about our ears, when +a round shot takes off the head of a marine standing close to the small +boy, scattering the brains and blood of the poor fellow right over the +small chap, almost blinding him. The admiral was looking that way. His +tall figure bent forwards. I thought he would have fallen from the +agony of his mind. He believed his child was killed. In an instant, +however, the little hero recovered himself, and dashing the blood from +his face, ran up to his lordship. `Don't be afraid, papa,' says he; +`I'm not hurt--the shot did not strike me. Tom says the ball isn't cast +that can kill mamma's boy.' That was true enough, for he'd heard some +of us say, what we believed, that he couldn't come to harm any more than +his father could. The admiral's face brightened again, when he saw that +no harm had happened to the boy. I suppose after this he thought as we +did, for he let him stay on deck during the whole action; and a pretty +sharp one it was, when I tell you we had two hundred guns firing away at +us for a couple of hours. If it hadn't been for the fog, we shouldn't +have had a stick standing at the end of it. After this we had several +brushes with the enemy. + +"At last the admiral considered that it would be a great thing to take +Valdivia, a strongly-fortified place on the south of Chili, still held +by the Spaniards. We had some Chilian troops on board, and very brave +fellows they were, under a French officer. Our own officers were worth +very little, and the admiral had to look after everything himself. One +night we were off the island of Quiriquina, and he had turned in to take +a little rest, leaving the deck in charge of one of the lieutenants. +The lieutenant thought he should like a snooze, so he turned in and left +a midshipman in charge of the ship. The midshipman went to sleep, and +when he awoke he found the ship all aback. In trying to box her off he +ran her on shore, on the sharp edge of a rock, where, if there had been +any swell, she would have beaten her bottom in. Many of the people +wanted to abandon the ship; but the admiral was not a man to allow such +a thing while there was a hope of getting her off; and telling them that +they would be all murdered by the savages on the coast if they landed, +he set all hands to work at the pumps. When they came to be examined, +they were all out of repair; and as the carpenter could make no hand at +mending them, what does the admiral do but whip off his coat and set to +work with his own hands. Didn't we feel that he was a man we'd follow +through thick and thin, though we knew that pretty well before then. At +last, what with pumping and bailing, we found that the water did not +gain on us, so the stream anchor was got, and heaving on it with a will, +we once more set the old ship afloat. `Never mind, my lads,' says the +admiral; `if we can but make her swim as far as Valdivia, we shall do +very well without a ship for a time.' By that we knew he intended to +take and occupy the place. The admiral wanted to take the Spaniards by +surprise, so he shifted his flag aboard the _Intrepedo_ brig-of-war, +taking with him the _Montezuma_, a man-of-war schooner, and, in spite of +a high sea, all the troops were put on board the two vessels. You +should just see what sort of a place Valdivia is, with strong forts on +both sides of a channel not three-quarters of a mile wide. There is +only one small landing-place, called the Aquada del Ingles, with a fort +protecting it. Towards that we stood, for the surf sets so heavily on +the shore, that a boat attempting to land anywhere else would be knocked +to pieces. We had a gallant English officer in command of the troops, +Major Miller. I never saw such a fire-eater. His body was almost +riddled with shot, but he never seemed to mind; nothing sickened him of +fighting; and as soon as he got well he was as ready for work as ever. +So, as I was saying, the brig and schooner ran in and anchored close to +Fort Ingles, keeping the boats on the other side of the vessels, out of +sight. The admiral hailed the fort, and said we had lost our boats +coming round Cape Horn, and begged they would send one; but just then +one of ours drifted astern, and the Spaniards, smelling a rat, opened +fire on us. Instantly the admiral ordered the troops to land, and a +launch, with the gallant Major Miller, and some forty-four marines, +shoved off, and under a heavy shower of musket-balls, pushed for the +shore. His coxswain was wounded, and he received a shot through his +hat. On we shoved (for I was with him), and leaping on shore with loud +cheers, we drove the enemy before us at the point of the bayonet. I +forgot to tell you that when the _O'Higgins_ got on shore, we had nearly +all our powder spoiled, so that he had to depend entirely on the +bayonet. There's no better weapon to be used when Spaniards are +concerned. They can't stand it. Other boats followed, and in less than +a hour we had 300 troops landed. We waited till it was dark to begin +the attack. There was a gallant young ensign, Mr Vidal. While the +main body advanced in front, firing off their muskets, and shouting to +show the Spaniards that we were going to give them a taste of the +bayonet, he got round to the rear of the forts, and opening his fire, +the enemy got frightened, and took to their heels, while we took the +forts--which was what we had come to take. At the same time 300 more +Spaniards, who were marching into Fort Ingles, were seized with a panic, +and all fled together. The brave Chilians bayoneted them by dozens; and +when the gates of the other forts were opened to receive the fugitives, +they entered at the same time, and thus fort after fort was taken with +very little loss to us, but a good deal to the enemy. Two days after, +we attacked the forts on the other side of the water with the same +success, and then took the town of Valdivia itself, which is some little +way up the river. We found a large supply of ammunition in the place, +and I know that I got a fair share of prize-money. That Major Miller I +was telling you of was soon after this again desperately wounded in +attempting to take another fort. When he had fallen, his faithful +marines made a desperate charge, and brought him off. They were all +Chilians, it must be remembered. One of them, named Roxas, was a very +brave fellow. He was the first to land with the major, and had helped +to carry him to the beach on their retreat. Two out of three were +wounded, and when the major invited him to step into the boat, `No, +sir,' says he; `I was the first to land, and I intend to be the last to +leave the shore.' You see, young gentlemen, it is not only Englishmen +can do gallant things, and I like when I have an opportunity to praise +those with other blood in their veins. + +"You'd like to know how we took the _Esmeralda_, I daresay?" said Tom. + +"I told Master Harry all about that the other day," observed Fleming. +"It was a gallant thing, wasn't it?" + +"But, I say, I wonder if the gentlemen over heard talk of what my lady +did? She was, for a woman, and a young, beautiful woman too, just as +brave as my lord. Well, I'll tell you. The first part I heard from a +man, a soldier, a brave, faithful fellow, who was with her; the rest I +saw myself. She, with her baby, was up the country, at a place called +Quilca, among the mountains, when, as she was at a ball at some great +man's house there, she heard that the Spaniards had made up their minds +to seize her and her infant, and to detain them as hostages. To think +with her was to act. Going quietly out of the ball-room and changing +her dress, she popped the nurse and child into a sort of palanquin, and +mounting one of her horses, and ordering out all the rest, she started +away in the middle of the night, and pushed on without stopping +anywhere, or telling any one where she was going. All that night and +all next day she travelled on, mounting another horse whenever the one +she rode grew tired. At last she arrived at a dark ravine, just a split +in the mountain some hundred feet deep, with a foaming torrent roaring +below. There was just the sort of rope bridge we had to cross +yesterday. Some of the people had gone down below to haul the horses +over, and she had sent her own horse across, when what should they hear +but the sound of the enemy's bugles. Seizing her child, she ordered the +palanquin-bearers to go over, and then followed close behind them +herself. Again the bugle sounded,--the enemy were close at hand. She +hurried on, but the movements of so many people crossing made the bridge +swing fearfully from side to side. She felt as if she must be thrown +off into the raging gulf below. More and more the bridge swung, and at +length, overcome with terror, she sank down on the narrow pathway, +clasping the infant to her breast. I've heard people say they dream of +such things. Here was the reality. The bridge continued to swing +backwards and forwards with a fearful motion, and she clung to it for +her life. It was a great risk for any one else to venture on the +bridge, but, in spite of that, Pedro, the soldier I told you of, crawled +along, and, says he in his own language, `Give me the child, my lady, +and I'll take care of it;' and crawling along with it in his arms, he +placed it in safety. Then he went back, and helped Lady Cochrane +across. Just then the advance guard of the enemy's troops appeared, +winding down the sides of the mountains. Pedro and the other men hacked +away at the bridge; the ropes parted and fell into the torrent, and her +ladyship was safe, while the Spaniards ground their teeth in vain. On +she pushed, till she reached the coast, and there she found the +admiral's ship, and came on board. We were all proud to have her; for +you see, with all her beauty, there wasn't a bit of vanity or nonsense +about her, and she would speak kind-like to any one of us, just as if we +was her equal. Soon after she came on board, the admiral heard that +there was a rich Spanish ship just about putting to sea, and a very good +sailer. He knew if she once got ahead of us we should never catch her +up, so, without waiting to land Lady Cochrane, we slipped our cables and +made sail up to where the treasure-ship and several others of the +enemy's vessels lay at anchor. We beat to quarters, and got up to them +about midnight all ready for action. We were not long in beginning the +sport, nor they in returning the compliments we paid them; for, besides +the treasure-ship, the Spaniards had some gun-boats moored under their +forts. While we were firing away, the mother, just like her little son, +wouldn't leave the deck, but stood there like any hero, animating the +men. + +"After some time one of the crew of a gun, a Chilian, seemed to be +afraid of firing. What does her ladyship do, but, seizing his arm, and +guiding the match to the touch-hole, fire the gun! She thought maybe +that the man would be punished if he was observed. However, the effort +was too much for her, for you see she was but a young woman, and she +sank down on deck in a fainting fit. We thought she was wounded, and +several of us ran forward to lift her up and carry her below. It did +our hearts good to find that there was nothing really the matter with +her. When the action was over, and we had pretty well knocked the +treasure-ship and gun-boats to pieces, we returned in the morning to our +former anchorage. As we were furling sails, her ladyship came on deck +to show us she was all to rights. No sooner was the canvas stowed, than +we manned yards of our own accord, and then didn't we cheer her and the +admiral with right good will; and the whole crew, one and all, Chilians +and Englishmen, five hundred of us, burst forth with the hymn of the +Republic, praying at the end that Heaven would bless and prosper them. +She bowed more than once, but didn't say a word, and then burst into +tears. + +"Ah! she was the lady who knew how to win a sailor's heart!" + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +ROBINSON CRUSOE'S ISLAND. + +Fleming and his old shipmate, Tom Carver, kept spinning their +interesting yarns about Lord Cochrane's gallant deeds till a late hour. +At last it was time to go to sleep; so we wrapped ourselves up as +closely as we could in our cloaks, with our feet to the fire and our +backs to the rock, to seek repose. Fleming, and Tom, and the doctor, +however, kept watch one after the other, both to keep up the fire and to +prevent our being taken by surprise by the visit of a puma, or any other +unwelcome visitor. By-the-by, the doctor told us that the puma very +seldom seeks his prey in the day-time, or attacks men, though he has +been known to do so at times. The fellow we killed measured fully five +feet from the nose to the tail, which was itself, in addition, two feet +and a half long. The back was of a brownish-red colour, and the breast +of a reddish ash colour, and the lower jaw and throat white. Its face +was like that of a huge cat, and it is said to be able to climb trees, +and to drop down from them on its prey. Its ordinary way of seizing its +prey is to spring on the back, and draw back the head of the animal till +its neck is broken. The guanaco, which is common throughout South +America, was used by the ancient Peruvians, in great numbers, as a beast +of burden. It carried about a hundredweight. Its flesh also served +them for food; of its skin leather articles were made, and its hair was +woven into cloth. When domesticated, it is known as the llama. It +feeds on vegetables, and requires no attention. Its voice resembles the +shrill neighing of a horse. Its use as a beast of burden has been +superseded by the horse, the ass, and the mule. The fleece of the tame +animal is not so long as that of the wild one. Their appearance I have +already described. I shall never forget that night among the Andes,-- +how the stars of the southern hemisphere came out, and shone with a +brilliancy I had never before seen in that purest of pure atmospheres, +among those grand old mountains. For a long time I could not go to +sleep: at last I did, and it seemed but a moment afterwards that Terry +aroused me to go with Tom and the Indian guide to bring the guanaco and +the skin of the puma. With their aid we were not long in finding the +puma, and in having his skin off him. We found the first guanaco +untouched, so we took his skin and some of the flesh. As, however, we +were looking for the spot where we had left the other, a huge condor +rose into the air, followed by two or three others. + +"Ah! you'll not find much beyond his bones, depend on that," said Tom. +"These birds don't leave pickings for anybody else." + +Such being the case, we agreed that it was not worth while to climb up +so far, as we were in a hurry to get back to the rock to breakfast. +Directly after it we set off on our return to the city. The natives of +Chili, we were told, often catch the puma with the lasso. They also +hunt it with dogs, and shoot it when it climbs up trees. When we came +to the bridge of hide-rope it looked more rickety and impassable than +ever. Just fancy a few rotten-looking strips of leather slung across a +chasm some thousand feet deep! + +"Never mind," said Fleming, laughing; "hold on to something. If it give +way don't you let go, at all events, and the chances are you are brought +up somewhere. My maxim is, Never let go of one rope till you have got +hold of another." + +However, we crossed in safety, and spent a very pleasant day at +Santiago, seeing all the sights of that city, though Jerry and I agreed +that we would rather have been in the mountains shooting guanacoes or +hunting pumas,--so I daresay would old Surley. We got back in good time +to Valparaiso. When dining at the hotel, we met an Englishman who had +travelled over all parts of South America, and had made an infinite +number of sketches, which he did in the most rapid way. He made me a +present of several, which he drew at the hotel; among them was the +Frontispiece to this volume. He gave us the following information at +the same time. He told us that apes' flesh was very nice for eating--a +fact some of our party were inclined to doubt. He laughed at our +scruples, and assured us that he had frequently dined off apes. The +Indians on the Amazon go out regularly to hunt them, and have a very +successful mode of so doing. Every hunter is provided with a hollow +cane, called a sarbacan--I before described it in our trip up the +Amazon. It is about twelve feet in length; and a quiver containing a +dozen little pieces of very hard wood, sharp at one end, and fitted with +a bit of cotton-wadding at the other. Concealed by the luxuriant +foliage of the forest, the Indian, resting his sarbacan on the branch of +a tree, waits the near approach of his prey; then blowing out one of the +little polished arrows from the tube with his mouth, he invariably +strikes the ape, and brings him to the ground. What ensures the success +of this mode of hunting is, that it is carried on without the slightest +noise, and a whole troop of apes may be killed without their discovering +whence the death-dealing darts proceed. When we were on the Amazon we +did not know that the poor monkeys were killed in this way. I forgot to +mention before the beautiful regularity of the land and sea-breezes +which we experienced at this place. It was the dry season of the year, +and the air was wonderfully bright and clear. The atmosphere being in a +state of equilibrium (so the doctor told us), was ready to obey even the +slightest impulse, and to rush towards any spot where rarefaction was +taking place. Thus, at about ten in the morning, as the rays of the sun +gain power and shed their influence over the earth, the air from the sea +begins to move towards it. As rarefaction increases, so does the +strength of the wind, till by three or four in the afternoon it rushes +in with great force, creating a considerable sea, and if a vessel is not +well moored, driving her before it. Captain Frankland knew what to +expect, and was therefore prepared for the emergency. + +On the afternoon of our return to Valparaiso, we put to sea. From the +cause I have mentioned respecting the strength of the sea-breeze, it is +necessary to make a good offing from the land. We therefore stood off +shore till we had sunk the tops of the Andes below the horizon. The +name of the _Pacific_ was given to this ocean by the Spaniards, who +first crossed the Isthmus of Panama, under the belief that the whole sea +was always as calm as was then the portion they beheld. Storms, if less +frequent, are certainly not less violent than in other portions of the +world. We certainly very frequently experienced the fickleness of the +elements. As we were about to haul up to the northward, the wind +suddenly shifted round to that very quarter, and then shifted somewhat +to the eastward. We stood away on the starboard-tack, but were +evidently making a great deal of lee-way. At last Captain Frankland, +finding that no progress could be made, hove the ship to. Jerry and I +had by this time got pretty well accustomed to knocking about, so that +we did not mind it. We suffered the greatest inconvenience at our +meals, because very often the soup which we had intended to put into our +mouths without signal or warning rolled away into the waistcoat-pockets +of our opposite neighbour. The doctor more than once suffered from +being the recipient of the contents of Jerry's plate as well as of mine; +but he took it very good-naturedly, and as he very soon returned us the +compliment, we were all square. Not long after dinner, while we were on +deck, Ben Yool, who was aloft, hailed to say that he saw bearing right +down for us a large brig, and, considering the gale, that she was +carrying a wonderful press of canvas. Her courses were brailed up, but +her topsails were set, while the top-gallant-sails and royals were +flying away in ribbons, except the main-royal, which, with the mast, had +gone over the side. We accordingly all looked out for her. We soon, as +we rose to the summit of a long rolling sea, caught sight of her, +plunging over the foaming waters and often half buried in them. There +was something very strange in her appearance, and in the way she came +tearing along through the waters. Captain Frankland looked at her +attentively through his glass. + +"I cannot make it out," he exclaimed; "the people on board are either +all drunk or must have gone mad." + +We were not kept long in suspense. On came the brig. She was a +fine-looking vessel; but such a sight met our eyes as I never expected +to see. Her deck was crowded with men, but instead of attempting to +shorten sail, they were all shrieking and fighting together. One party +seemed to have taken possession of the after-part of the vessel, the +rest were forward--while in the intermediate space several lay weltering +in their blood. Now one party would rush forward and meet the other in +the waist, and then after a desperate struggle one would retreat before +the other. Thus they continued as long as they remained in sight. It +appeared, from the glimpse we got of them as they drove by, that the +crew had risen against their officers, who were fighting to regain the +upper hand. What they were it was difficult to say, but their +appearance bespoke them to be a great set of ruffians. I asked Ben Yool +what he thought of them. + +"To my mind, Master Harry, they are nothing better than a set of +pirates, and I had just as soon not have fallen in with them in smooth +water." + +Every spy-glass on board was directed towards them. Strange as it +appeared, there could be no doubt about the matter. In spite of the +terrific gale--in spite of the prospect of the masts going overboard, +and of the ship being reduced to a complete wreck, an event which might +any moment occur, the wretched crew of the brig were destroying each +other with the maddest fury. From the state of things on board as we +saw them, the chances were that the survivors of the victorious party +would not have strength to take in sail or clear the deck at the end of +the fight. + +"That was an extraordinary spectacle we have just witnessed," observed +Cousin Silas, as Jerry and I were holding on to the rails near him as +the strange brig disappeared, hidden by the dark foam-topped waves which +leaped up between her and us. "Never heard anything like it before, +perhaps you will say, lads. Now, in my opinion, you have heard of many +things exactly like it before. What is the world doing at the present +moment? What has it been doing since the flood? Men have been +quarrelling, and fighting, and knocking each other on the head, while +ruin has been encircling them around, from that time to the present. We +were sent into this world to perform certain duties--to help each other +in doing them--to love God and to love each other. If we obey God, we +are promised eternal happiness: if we disobey him, eternal punishment. +We are told that this world must come to an end, and that all things in +it will be destroyed. What do men do? They shut their eyes to all +these truths. They live as if they and everything in the world were to +last for ever--as if there were no God to obey and love; and, like the +madmen we have just seen, they separate into parties, hating each other, +and fight, and quarrel, and deface God's image in which he made man, +utterly regardless of the terrible doom awaiting them--just as the +people aboard that ship were doing." + +"The simile would not have occurred to me, Mr Brand," observed Jerry. +"I see it now, though. Still, if people do as little harm as they can, +it is all right." + +"No, no, lad. Don't for a moment indulge in such an erroneous, foolish +notion, put into people's heads by the spirit of evil himself, to +deceive them. I tell you we were sent into the world not only to +abstain from sin, but to do as much good as we can--to actively employ +ourselves--to look about us to see how we can do good,--not to wait till +some opportunity occurs that may never come. But we are certain to find +some good work if we look for it; and if your heart is right towards +God, and you earnestly wish to serve him, and not the world, and not +yourself, he will point out to you what to do." + +The conversation was interrupted by a heavy lurch the ship made, which +sent Jerry and me tumbling away into the lee scuppers; a huge sea at the +same moment came rolling up with a foaming crest towards us. It caught +the brig broad on the bow--up it rose like a wall, and then with a loud +angry roar fell right over us. I felt myself swimming in deep water, +with my mouth full and almost blinded. I heard Jerry's cry close to me. +The dreadful thought occurred to me that we were both overboard, and +the utter impossibility of lowering a boat to save us flashed across me. +I shrieked out for help. A whirl--a confused sound of roaring, hissing +waters--a sensation of battling and struggling with them--an eager +desire to clutch at something,--are all I remember. Down came the gale +on the ship with greater fury than before--another sea from the opposite +quarter struck her. I felt myself grasped by a strong arm, and when I +opened my eyes, I saw that I was being dragged up to windward by Cousin +Silas, who, at the imminent risk of losing his own life, had sprung out +with a rope in his hand and hauled me on board again. + +"Oh, where is Jerry--where is Jerry?" were the first words I uttered. +No one answered. "Oh, he is lost! he is lost!" I cried, and burst into +tears, forgetting altogether to thank Cousin Silas for having saved me. +I felt that I could never survive the loss of my young shipmate. Just +then I saw several of the crew running to leeward. Two or three heads +were in the water, with arms wildly striking out. Shrieks, too, rung in +my ears. Ben Yool was among them; I saw his face clearly; he did not +seem alarmed, like the rest. A long rope was hove to him. He grasped +it. He struck out towards another of the swimmers; it was Jerry. Ben +seized him in one of his arms, while he was striking out with the other. +There seemed, however, but little chance for him of escaping with his +life; for when the ship again surged ahead, the rope would have been +torn from his grasp, but just then another cross sea providentially +rolled up to leeward, and sent him and Jerry close up to the bulwarks. +There they were grasped by the crew, and when the ship rolled over again +to the other side, they were hauled on board safe and sound. Two other +men remained in the water. They turned their faces with straining +eyeballs imploringly towards the ship, which was drifting from them. In +vain they shrieked out; no one could help them. A foaming, hissing sea +rose between us and them. Far, far away the unhappy men were carried, +and when the ship rose again to the summit of a wave, they were nowhere +to be seen. I felt then how mercifully I had been preserved, and +grateful to Him who had thought fit to save me, while, for his own +inscrutable ends, he had allowed others to be taken. Jerry, I know, had +the same thoughts and feelings, though I fear their impression soon +faded, but not away altogether. Its traces, however faint, were +permanently left on our minds, and I believe that they have often since +had a powerful influence on us. I hope, also, as we grow older, that we +may often recur to them instead of endeavouring to drive them away. +Joyful as Captain Frankland was at recovering his son, he felt much the +loss of his two men; for he truly was the father of his crew, and they +knew and gladly acknowledged it. This was the secret of the influence +he had over them. The ship still lay to, but the gale increased. +Suddenly there was a loud report, like a clap of thunder. The +fore-top-sail, close-reefed as it was, had blown out of the bolt-ropes, +and the shreds fluttered in streamers from the yards. Away it flew, +lashing the yard with fury, and coiling itself into thick twists of +rope. The wind unfortunately caught the bow, and bringing her right +round, exposed her broadside to the sea. The instant the accident +happened, the mates, with some of the crew, had rushed forward, and +loosing the fore-stay-sail, were hoisting it just as a big sea came +roaring towards us. It was half way up at the moment the sea reached +us. "Hoist away, my lads!" was the general cry. The ship felt its +effects; springing forward, she seemed to dash through the sea, which, +however, broke in a deluge over us. Her head came round, and away she +flew before the storm. Before, however, the fore-stay-sail was up it +was blown clean away, and the ship dashed on under bare poles to the +westward, leaving our two poor shipmates in their watery tomb far +astern. All that night we ran plunging on. In the morning watch the +wind began to fall. I asked Yool, who was in the same watch with me, +what he thought was going to happen. + +"Why, Master Harry, that the gale is tired of blowing, and that we shall +before long have a calm, or only just a light, pleasant breeze," he +answered. So it proved; after this the wind rapidly decreased, and by +sunrise all hands were aloft bending new sails, and busily employed in +repairing the damages received in the gale. Just as the captain came on +deck, one of the mates hailed from aloft that he saw a whale, or a rock, +or some large black object, just rising out of the water--he could not +make out what. + +We had been on the point of hauling our wind to stand back for Callao, +but the captain ordered the ship to be kept on, to ascertain what the +object could be. I with others had gone aloft to look out also, when, +as the sun arose, I saw before me what I at first took to be a cloud, +but gradually it grew more and more distinct, till I was certain that it +was a lofty mountain. The rest of the crew were so busily employed +about the rigging, and in looking out for the whale or whatever it was, +that I was the first to see it;--of this I was very proud. + +"Land ahead!" I sung out. + +"Ay, ay; all right, Harry," he answered, knowing of course what land it +must be. I soon after went down on deck, where I met Jerry, looking +rather pale and ill after his bath. + +"Do you know what that land is?" I asked, pointing to it; for with the +increasing light it was now seen clearly from the deck. + +"Why, it's no other than Robinson Crusoe's island--Juan Fernandes; and +my father says he intends to run in there, as it will be more convenient +to repair damages at anchor; and he thinks that very likely the gale may +come back again on us. Won't it be jolly to go on shore and to see the +very cave he lived in, and the sand where he first saw Friday's +foot-mark, and the descendants of the goats he had, and various other +animals? I am certain I could find out every spot of ground he talks +about. There's no place I would rather see than this." + +"So would I," I observed. "But you forget, Jerry, there was no such +person as Robinson Crusoe. We may be disappointed when we get there." + +"I won't believe it!" he answered, indignantly. "There was, and there +must have been, and there shall have been a Robinson Crusoe! How could +he have written his life if he had not lived, I should like to know?" + +"There was a man called Alexander Selkirk, who was left there from one +of Lord Anson's ships, and a first-rate writer--Daniel Defoe by name-- +got hold of his account, on which he founded the story of Robinson +Crusoe," I answered. + +"I tell you that is all bosh," said Jerry. "I don't believe that any +man who had not gone through every scene he describes, could have given +as good an account of them as does Robinson Crusoe; so I intend to stick +to my belief, and not care what anybody else says on the subject." I +must own that I felt very much inclined to agree with Jerry, and to look +on Defoe very much in the light of a pirate, who had got hold of a ship +which did not belong to him. The important discussion was cut short by +the report of the first mate, who had again gone aloft with his glass to +take another look at the object seen ahead. + +"As far as I can see, I've no doubt that it is the hull of a ship +floating bottom uppermost," he sung out; "but whether any one is still +clinging to her or not, is more than I can make out." + +"Get one of the boats ready, Mr Brand; we'll board the wreck, at all +events," said the captain. While the boat was quickly prepared, we made +good progress towards the wreck. + +"There is a man on her; I can see him clearly," sung out the third mate +from forward. "He is lying along the keel. He is alive; he sees us; he +is waving to us." + +As soon as the ship got up to the wreck, she was hove-to, and I followed +Mr Brand, with Ben Yool, into the boat. There was still a great deal +of sea running; and when we got up to the wreck, there was no little +danger, we discovered, in getting alongside her. There were masts and +spars still hanging on by the rigging around her, which would at once +have stove in our boat if we had got among them incautiously, and we +should very likely have lost our own lives. There was only one man on +the ship's bottom; we saw him just lifting his head and watching us +anxiously as we pulled round. We could discover no spot free from +danger; so we pulled off again to consult what was best to be done. The +poor wretch thought we were going to desert him, and shouted out to us +in English and Spanish, imploring us to have compassion on him, and save +his life. + +"Ay, ay, friend!" answered Ben Yool. "Don't suppose we'd leave you +there; we should be rum sort of Christians to do that. Wait a bit; +we'll get you off directly." + +"He appears to be unable to help himself, or he might lower himself down +by a rope," observed Mr Brand. "Make a line fast round me; I think +that I could manage to got in just under the quarter, and so haul myself +up by some of the ropes I see hanging over it." + +To propose was with Cousin Silas to act, and in another moment he was +striking out towards the wreck. Avoiding the main-mast--close to which, +with some of its spars, he had to pass--he at length got hold of the +quarter without injury. He was soon up alongside the stranger. The man +was apparently unable to walk; so Mr Brand supported him as he helped +him along the keel, till he reached the after-part; and then, securing a +line to him, he beckoned us to pull in, while he lowered both himself +and the man into the boat. We quickly pulled back again, before the +shattered mast drove towards the hull. From the appearance of the +wreck, she did not look as if she would have floated much longer. The +stranger was a mulatto--a fine, tall fellow, apparently, but now looking +very wretched and weak from loss of blood and want of food. We soon had +him on board, dried and put into a clean hammock, under the doctor's +care. His manner at first was rough, and somewhat sullen; but it +improved by degrees, and he seemed grateful for the kindness shown to +him. He was evidently suffering so much from pain that no one asked him +for particulars about the wreck, or how he had been brought into his +present position. It was not till the doctor came in to dinner that we +began to suspect the truth. + +"Do you know that that man has received a couple of desperate wounds +with a long, sharp knife?" said he. "When I discovered this, it +occurred to me that he must have been one of the crew of the vessel +which passed us yesterday, and that she had met the fate which was to be +expected." + +"No doubt about it," answered Captain Frankland. "I have thought so +from the first; but I did not wish to prejudice anybody against the +man." + +"He is not disinclined to be communicative; but whether he speaks the +truth or not is another question," said the doctor. "He says that the +vessel capsized was a Peruvian brig; that he and another man had a +quarrel, in which he received two stabs; that soon after the brig was +struck by a squall, and capsized; that one of the boats was uninjured, +and that some dozen people escaped in her." + +"I think the latter part of his account is very likely in some respects +to be true," observed Captain Frankland. "If so, they are a class of +gentry we must be on the watch for and keep clear of. They cannot be +far-off, and they are not likely to stand on ceremony, if they want a +ship, which is probable, about helping themselves to the first they fall +in with likely to suit them." + +Jerry and I agreed, however, that we should very much like to meet with +the pirates and have a brush with them. + +"They would find us better prepared than they expected," said he. "They +do not know, besides our big guns, what a supply of arms we have on +board." + +Notwithstanding our strong suspicions of the character of the stranger, +he was treated from the first with every possible kindness. All this +time we were approaching Robinson Crusoe's island. We almost expected +to see a man dressed in goat-skins, with a high conical cap, a gun in +his hand, and a negro and goat moving behind him, waiting on the shore +to welcome us. In my opinion, he would have found his dress of skins +very hot in that climate, while his savage could have been only of a +lightish-brown colour. As we drew in with the land, rocks, trees, and +shrubs, clothing the sides of the lofty and picturesque mountains, grew +more and more distinct; and then a few cottages peeped out here and +there, and a fort guarding the only harbour, with the Chilian flag +flying over it, showing us that it was no longer a deserted island; but, +unfortunately, the inhabitants we found were not of a class to make it +the abode of peace and contentment. The Chilian Government have turned +it into a penal settlement, and the chief residents are the convicts and +their guards. It is only to be hoped that the result of their labours +may make it a fitter place for the habitation of more virtuous people. +We ran into the harbour, which is nearly land-locked, and dropped our +anchor. It was a curious feeling, coming suddenly from the storm-tossed +ocean, to find ourselves surrounded by land, with lofty mountains rising +up from the shore close to us. We all agreed that we were never in a +more beautiful or picturesque spot. Even now the town is a very rough +sort of a place. There might have been a hundred cottages, some neatly +white-washed, but others made only of boughs and mud; and even the +governor's house is only of one story. The fort was a mere stockade, +and of little use as a defence. The governor was an Englishman, who +belonged to the Chilian navy. Poor fellow! his was a very unpleasant +and dull life; for, except a priest and the officer in command of the +soldiers, he had no one with whom he could converse. While the crew +were employed in setting up the rigging, Jerry and I and the doctor +accompanied Captain Frankland on shore. We were received on landing by +a very ragged set of soldiers, many of whom had not even shoes on their +feet, and all, more or less, seem to have borrowed some of Robinson +Crusoe's garments. Besides the governor's house, there was a chapel--a +little, low building, with a cross on the top of it to show its object. +The poor soldiers crowded round us, and asked if we had shoes to sell. +Fortunately there were some cases on board, one of which the captain +sent for; and the third mate, who acted as supercargo, disposed of the +whole of them, though there was some difficulty in finding articles for +barter when their cash ran short. Had not the governor helped them, +they would have remained shoeless. We were delighted with the quantity +of fruit which was brought to us. There were cherries, and very large +strawberries, and melons, and grapes--all of which, we had no doubt, +were planted originally by Robinson Crusoe. We lunched with the +governor; and then, while the captain returned on board, Jerry and I and +the doctor started with a guide to take a long walk into the country. +Away we went, highly delighted, and soon found ourselves in a beautiful +and fertile valley, with waterfalls coming down the sides of the hills, +and bright streams and ponds. We came, too, upon a flock of goats; and +one very old fellow had a nick in his ear, so we had no doubt that he +was one of those left by Robinson Crusoe himself. The doctor would not +give, an opinion on the subject, but Jerry asserted that there could not +be a shadow of doubt about it. Going on a little further, we came upon +a cave--a veritable cave--in the side of the mountain, with a sort of +rough porch in front of it, built of boughs and thatched with straw. +Jerry uttered a loud shout of delight. + +"There!" he exclaimed. "I knew it was all true. Why, there is the very +hut Robinson Crusoe built for himself." + +His voice must have aroused some one who was within, for a door was +pushed open, and a figure appeared, who, if he was not Robinson Crusoe, +was very like pictures of him. He had a long beard, and was dressed in +goat-skins, and had sandals on his feet, and a thick stick in his hand-- +altogether a very wild-looking character. Jerry drew back, and looked +at him very much as if by some incantation he had conjured up the spirit +of the long-departed hero. + +"It can't be Crusoe!" he gasped out. "Yet, if it isn't, who can he be?" +At length he gained courage, and both of us slowly approaching the man, +he said, with a desperate effort, "Pray, tell me who you are?" + +A grim smile lighted up such of the features of the man as could be seen +through his bushy beard, whiskers, and moustaches. He shook his head. +Jerry repeated the question. + +"No intende," he answered. + +"Then he can't be Robinson Crusoe if he doesn't understand English," +whispered Jerry, with a sigh. + +The doctor, who had been behind gathering plants, now came up. He +laughed heartily when we told him that we had had great hopes that the +rough-looking stranger might turn out to be Robinson Crusoe himself, +gone back to live on his own island. He exchanged a few words with the +stranger. + +"The man tells me that he is a goat-herd--a convict--unjustly banished +here;--that of course. He begs that we will give him a few coppers to +buy a glass of rum." + +Jerry and I eagerly searched in our pockets, when we discovered some +Chilian coins, which we bestowed on the poor goat-herd; but even as I +dropped them into his hand, I could not help feeling that I was offering +an insult to a great man in distress by giving him such a trifle. The +provoking part of the affair was, that, as the doctor told us, the man +himself had never even heard of Robinson Crusoe in the whole course of +his life. We had a delightful ramble through the valley, and over the +hills. We found an abundance of the sandalwood-tree growing on the +mountains, and myrtles in great quantities, with a variety of other +aromatic shrubs. Vegetables of all sorts were growing in profusion, and +there were a number of cattle, and horses, and mules. There was also +plenty of milk; and from what we saw at the governor's table, there was +no lack of provisions of any sort. + +Old Surley was with us, and he made acquaintance with a great number of +the canine race of high and low degree, though those of low degree, I +must say, vastly predominated. We made a collection of all sorts of +things,--bits of myrtle, and sandalwood, and leaves, and flowers, and +shells; for we were sure our friends at home would highly prize +everything coming from Robinson Crusoe's island. We got some delicious +milk also, I remember--which sailors as well as Londoners know how to +value. There is an abundance of wood on the island, and delicious +streams of pure water, one of which runs through the centre of the town. +I must not forget to mention the immense quantity of fish we caught. +This abundance of fish, Captain Frankland considered, is owing to a cold +current which flows by the island from the Southern Pole, and at the +same time tempers the air and adds fertility to the soil. The island is +about 300 miles from Valparaiso, 33 degrees 30 minutes south latitude. +It is about fifteen miles long, and five broad. After we had seen it in +all directions, we agreed that it was indeed a pity that it was in the +possession of those who were so little able to make a good use of it. I +never saw a more idle set of people than the inhabitants who were not +compelled to work. All the time we were on shore, they did nothing but +walk about or lie down in the shade, wrapped up in their big cloaks. + +When we returned on board we accompanied the doctor to see his patient, +the mulatto we had rescued from the wreck. The doctor asked him whether +he would not go on shore, where he might have fresh fruit and +vegetables, and be better taken care of than he could be on board. + +"No, no," he answered. "Thank you, though, much. There are no good +people in this place. I do not want to be among them." + +"Then you know something about them?" said the doctor. + +"There are very few places where I do not know somebody," he answered, +evasively. + +The doctor did not press the point. Indeed the poor man was not in a +condition to be carried. He told us that his name was Manuel Silva; +that he had all his life been knocking about the world, and that he did +not look upon any one country as his home. We asked him no questions, +and he did not choose to tell us how he had got on board the vessel +where we found him. The next day, when we went on shore, the governor +told us that he had often difficult work in keeping the convicts in +order, and that not long ago a dozen of them contrived to run off with a +boat, headed by a desperate fellow who had been a seaman. They got +clear away, and soon after news was brought that a large brig had been +attacked and taken, and all the crew made to walk the plank. + +"It will be necessary for us, then, to be on our guard," remarked the +captain. "They would be ugly customers to fall in with." + +"Indeed it will," observed the governor. "They were desperate and +cunning fellows, too, and they will, I fear, do no small amount of +mischief before they come to an end. I have sent notice to the Chilian +Government, who will despatch one of their ships of war in search of the +fellows; but in this wide ocean, with thousands of islands among which +they may lie hid, there is but little chance of them being found." + +We had another day's delightful ramble over the hills and across the +valleys of this lonely island; and except that Robinson Crusoe must have +found it somewhat dull, being alone for so long before Friday came to +him, Jerry and I agreed that he was in no way to be pitied, and that we +should like nothing better than having to spend some time there. We did +not quite settle how long. There are a number of caves high up in the +sides of the mountain, overlooking Cumberland Bay harbour, as it is +called; and those barbarous fellows, the Spaniards, compel the convicts, +who labour at the stone quarries, to live in them. The challenges of +the sentinels, reaching all the way down to the harbour, broke the still +silence of the night, as we lay at our anchors, ready to sail with the +first dawn on the following morning. A light wind wafted us away from +that romantic spot, our visit to which is among the most pleasant +recollections of our voyage. We gazed astern as if we were looking our +last on the land of our birth, and did not leave the deck till its faint +blue mountains had sunk beneath the horizon. In consequence of what we +had heard from the governor, we got our guns and small arms in order, to +be ready for the supposed pirates, should we fall in with them, while a +sharp look-out was kept, that we might not be taken unawares. Captain +Frankland was too brave and experienced a man to be afraid of taking +necessary precautions on all occasions. It did not occur to the +captain, till we had been some time at sea, to inquire of Manuel Silva +whether he knew anything of the pirates. Grave suspicions had begun to +cross his mind that he was in some way connected with them. Of course +Silva denied all knowledge of them. When pressed to give some account +of himself, he replied, "I am grateful for all your kindness. If I have +an opportunity I will show it. I do not wish to tell you falsehoods, +therefore do not press me on that subject." With a favourable breeze we +steered a course for the coast of Peru. + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +VISIT TO THE EMPIRE OF THE INCAS. + +To the south of Lima, in the Bay of Pisco, are found three small +islands, or rather barren rocks. Not a tree grows on them--not a blade +of grass. The feathered race for ages past, probably since the last +flood rolled over the face of the globe, have made them their abode. +Strange as it may seem, they are of more intrinsic value than the +richest mines of Potosi; yet their produce is all on the surface, and to +be obtained but with little labour. They are the three Chincha Islands, +and their produce is guano. It is the result of the droppings of birds, +which in that dry and rainless region has preserved all its fertilising +qualities, and has been stored up, by the decree of a beneficent +Providence, to restore strength and vigour to the far-off lands of the +Old World. We sighted them one morning, and running in, brought up in +their neighbourhood. There were sixty ships, mostly English, anchored +near them, for the purpose of loading with guano; and sometimes there +are upwards of a hundred. A boat was lowered, and the captain, Jerry, +the doctor, and I, went in her. We had to climb up to the top of one of +the islands by a ladder; the cliffs are so steep, and being composed of +felspar and quartz, so broken away by the action of the sea, that it is +the only method of reaching the summit. The island was covered with +thick layers of guano, and one cutting, about a hundred yards from the +cliff, was sixty feet deep, or rather high, for the cutting is made into +it from the side, just as a slice is cut out of a cheese. A +steam-engine is employed in digging it out, and filling a set of cars, +which run on a tramway to the edge of the cliff under which the vessels +lie to load. Two hundred convicts were engaged in shovelling down the +guano, and a number of stout negroes are employed in the hold to +distribute it as it comes down through a canvas shoot. They have to +wear iron masks, as the fresh guano is stronger than volatile salts, and +more penetrating than coal-dust. + +The bird which produces the guano is a sort of tern, with red bill and +legs. It has a long whisker-like feather curling out under the ear on +each side. The top of the head and the tips of the wings and tail are +black. The body, which is about ten inches long, is of a dark-slate +colour. Large flocks of gulls, divers, and pelicans, likewise visit the +islands. It is calculated that, on one island alone, there were +2,000,000 tons of guano; and although from 200,000 to 300,000 tons are +annually imported into England, it will take some time to exhaust the +supply. Guano is a corruption of the Quichua word _huaim_. The Quichua +is the language of the Incas. Under the enlightened government of the +Incas the value of guano was well-known, and severe laws were enacted +against any one disturbing the birds during the breeding season. +Pulling away to another island, we found a number of Chinese employed in +digging out the guano. We were not surprised at seeing them look very +miserable and unhappy, for the oppressive odour arising from the +fresh-dug guano was intolerable, to us even for a short time. We were +told that many of them in their wretchedness commit suicide, flying, +through their ignorance, from present evils to those they know not of, +instead of endeavouring manfully to support their lot, if inevitable, or +to seek proper means to escape from it if they have the power--not that +I thought this at the time, by-the-by. I only remarked to Jerry that +they were very great fools for their pains. A little way up the bay, on +the mainland, is the sea-port of Pisco, a neat Spanish-built place. In +the neighbourhood are numerous remains, which prove how populous must +have been the country under the sway of the Incas. + +Sailing north, we entered the Bay of Callao, the port of Lima. Before +us lay Callao, with rich green plains on either side, covered with white +farms and willow-trees, with the high cliffs of Morro Solar to the +south, and below it the bathing-place of Cherillos. Six or eight miles +inland appeared the white towers of Lima, surrounded by orange-groves; +while above them, far into the blue sky, rose peak beyond peak of the +ever-glorious snow-capped Andes. Such is the scene which, for many ages +past, has been looked on; but a change--a great and important one--is +taking place in the land; and what was our surprise, when we went on +shore, to see English omnibuses and broughams--and more than that, the +terminus of a railway, the carriages of which ran rattling on to Lima. + +"Funny," cried Jerry, when we found ourselves, with the captain and the +doctor, in one of the aforesaid carriages, "to think that we are all +away on the other side of that great big straggling continent of +America, and yet to feel, as we look about this box, as if we were only +skurrying off from London to Liverpool." + +I entered into his feelings, and the voyage round Cape Horn, and our +different adventures, seemed like a dream, till we looked out and saw +the giant Cordilleras, and then we were soon reminded where we were. We +met a Peruvian gentleman on the railway, who told us much about the +country. Among other things, while the Marquis of Villa Garcia was +viceroy of Peru in 1746, on the 28th of October, during a warm but +perfectly calm evening, while the inhabitants of Callao and Lima were +not dreaming of evil, on a sudden, without a moment's warning, the earth +shook with tremendous violence. Every house in Callao fell level with +the ground, crushing their hapless inmates. Many of those in Lima were +likewise overthrown; and as the affrighted survivors looked seaward, a +vast wave like a gigantic wall came roaring on towards the devoted +place. In an instant every living soul in Callao, with the exception of +one man who clung to a piece of timber, was overwhelmed by the raging +waters. Not a vestige of the town remained. On went the wave, carrying +with it a Spanish frigate, the _Saint Fernim_, and other vessels, +leaving them high and dry far inland. Lima narrowly escaped complete +destruction, and it was long before the inhabitants recovered from the +panic into which the catastrophe had thrown them. For years after the +destruction of the Inca rule, unhappy Peru groaned under the +misgovernment and tyranny of the Spaniards, and rapidly and surely the +aboriginal inhabitants decreased in numbers. Several revolts occurred, +but were crushed with barbarous severity. At length the colonists of +Spain conceived the hope of throwing off the yoke of the mother country. +Although frequently defeated, the people of Chili were, by the aid of +Lord Cochrane, at last successful. General San Martin, who had become +the president, entered Lima on the 19th of July 1821, the viceroy La +Cerna being cut off from any support from Spain by the Chilian fleet +having retreated to Cuzco, where he took up his head-quarters. +Ultimately he was completely defeated, and his whole army was destroyed. +On the 20th the independence of Peru was proclaimed, and though the +republic was long subject to intestine commotions, from what we could +learn and see it now appears to be making very satisfactory progress. + +We next wished to get up to Cuzco, the ancient capital of the Incas, +situated high up among the Andes; but we had no time to accomplish the +journey. We heard, however, of a very interesting place twenty-five +miles to the south of Lima, on the coast. It was the city and temple of +Pachacamac, "the creator of the world," supposed to have been built in +times long anterior to those of the Incas. We had two days to spare +before the ship was to sail, and the captain said we might visit the +place. The doctor, Jerry, and I, with a guide, a half Indian, set out, +accordingly, at an early hour on horseback. We were accompanied by +Silva, who, from speaking Spanish perfectly, went as our interpreter. +He was still ill, and weak from his wounds and his exposure on the +wreck, but he begged so hard that he might go on shore, that the doctor +could not refuse him. He had won the regard of all by his respectful +and unobtrusive manners, and had managed completely to obliterate the +suspicions which the captain at first entertained of him. The doctor +told us during the ride more than I knew before about the country. The +early inhabitants were worshippers of Pachacamac, and when the Incas +introduced the religion of the Sun, instead of destroying the faith they +found existing, with an enlightened policy they allowed the temples of +both to exist side by side. Passing close to the lofty cliffs of the +Morro Solar, we rode through a large sugar estate, and then across a +sandy desert, with several lakes in it stocked with water-fowl, and soon +afterwards, from the top of a gentle ascent, we saw before us the hill +on which stands the remains of the once celebrated temple. The mighty +fane stood at the top of the hill, with terraces encircling it, and +surrounding the base was the town. Beyond were seen the blue waters of +the Pacific rolling on the sandy shore. We could not help feeling sad +and awe-struck as we rode into the deserted city. The walls were there, +although many were battered down, but the roofs of all had disappeared. +Passing through the town, we climbed up a height 400 feet above the sea, +where the remains of the great temple were standing. The walls +surrounding the centre space are about twenty feet high, and we +discovered even some of the vermilion paint with which they were adorned +still adhering to them. Below this wall were a succession of three +broad terraces. The interior shrine was entirely destroyed by Hernando +Pizarro, when he was sent by his brother, at the suggestion of the Inca +Atahuallpa, to collect the treasures which it was supposed to contain. +The priests had got notice of his purpose, and flying, had concealed the +greater portion of their wealth. Disappointed in his expectations, +Pizarro having stripped the shrine of all its gold and ornaments, +levelled it with the ground. The interiors of the larger portion of the +houses were full of sand. + +Having wandered about through this melancholy relic of the past with old +Surley at our heels, who in no way seemed to enter into our enthusiasm, +we turned to retrace our steps to where we had left our horses. We had +observed some figures at a distance among the ruins, but they seemed to +take no notice of us. Suddenly they disappeared. We found our guide +standing by our horses where we had left him. He seemed rather +agitated, but we could not make out what had happened, as we did not +understand a word of his language. When we mounted, he inquired of us +by signs whether we had got pistols. We showed him that we had not, or +arms of any sort. He did not treat us as we afterwards thought he might +have done had he not been an honest man, and say, "Oh, if that is the +case, I will rob you myself." He shook his head and showed us his own +long knife, and signified that very likely we should have to use it for +our defence. Such was the interpretation, at all events, that we put on +his various signs. Silva, who had been a little behind, now came up. + +"The poor man has seen some blacks who bear a bad character, it appears, +and he is afraid they will attack us," he observed. "However, show a +bold front, and we shall easily drive them off if they do." As there +was no avoiding the danger, whatever it was, we made up our minds to +meet it as well as we could. + +"It has something to do with those fellows we saw among the ruins," said +Jerry. "Only I think they would have robbed us then, had they intended +to do so." + +"Perhaps we are mistaken altogether, or, what is as probable, our guide +has unnecessarily frightened himself, and tried to frighten us," +observed the doctor. + +"We shall see, doctor," said I. "I hope you are right." Just then we +reached a small hut, such as is inhabited by Indians. Jerry declared +that he must have a draught of milk, as we saw some cows feeding near, +and before the guide could stop him, he had knocked at the door. +Instead of the kindly face of an Indian appearing at his summons, out +rushed a big, savage-looking negro, and by his angry gestures seemed to +inquire what we wanted. + +"A calabash of milk, friend Sambo," answered Jerry, in no ways daunted. +While, however, he was speaking, two other blacks appeared at the door, +while three or four more, flourishing long knives, came running toward +us from a neighbouring wood. + +"Put spurs to your horses, boys, and let us get away from this!" cried +the doctor. As we were attempting to follow his advice, one of the +blacks seized Jerry's rein, and though I struck the fellow a heavy blow +with my stick, he would not let go his hold. The consequence of the +blow was nearly fatal to me, for the fellow with his other hand struck +at me with a long glittering knife, and had not I pulled back my horse +by an involuntary movement, he would have plunged it into my side--as it +was, he cut my trousers and drew blood from my leg. Seeing things come +to this pass, the doctor and Silva, who proved himself a brave fellow, +began to lay about them, one with his stick and the other with a heavy +Spanish riding whip; while old Surley, who, after growling fiercely, saw +that the time for action had now arrived, began to bite away at the +negroes' thin calves and long heels, greatly to their annoyance. Each +man, as he found himself bit, turned round and endeavoured to stab the +dog, and very much afraid I was that they would succeed; but so actively +did he jump about from side to side, now bounding here, now there, that +not one of the numberless blows which were struck reached him, while his +furious barking and repeated bites served most materially to distract +the attention of our assailants. Still they were fully eight armed +savages to five people with sticks and a whip, and a dog; and as Jerry +and I were only boys, and old Surley had only his teeth to fight with, +it must be acknowledged that we were very unequally matched. Feeling +this, we should certainly have felt it no disgrace to run away if we +could; but the black held on so tightly to Jerry's rein that we could +not escape. At last the negro I speak of, finding that he had missed me +and could not hit the dog, lifted up his long knife and made a desperate +lounge with it at Jerry. I saw what he was about to do, and crying out +to Surley, my stick instinctively came down with all its force on the +ruffian's arm, while the dog sprung up and caught him by the throat. He +let go at that moment the rein. + +"Now on, boys, on!" sung out the doctor, who saw what had occurred; and +bringing our sticks down on our horses' backs, we dashed past the +infuriated negroes, on whose heads Silva bestowed many a terrific whack +with his stout stick, as they attempted to catch his rein. We were +followed closely by the guide and our valiant ally, old Surley, at whom +several blows were aimed, but he escaped them all, and at full gallop we +pushed over the sandy plain, pursued by our black assailants. Happily +they had no fire-arms, or we should have fared ill. When we had got +beyond their reach we pulled up and congratulated ourselves on our +escape, while old Surley came in for his due share of praise and thanks. +He wagged his tail and opened his mouth, as if he were about to speak +and say, "I only did my duty, masters; you feed me well, and treat me +kindly, and I love you, and am ready to fight for you, and do you any +other service in my power, as I hope to prove whenever I have the +opportunity." + +It was very late when we got back to Lima, to the house of a merchant +who had asked us to stay with him. He told us that the blacks who +attacked us were, he had no doubt, emancipated slaves, who had always +borne a very bad character. Had they been properly educated, and +prepared for freedom, they might have turned out well; but those +wretches are a melancholy example of what will be found to be the case +in other countries where slavery still exists, should the slaves +suddenly be made free, or should they rise and win their freedom for +themselves. Unless they are carefully trained--taught to depend on +their own exertions, and instructed in the pure truths of Christianity-- +they will, when freed, sink into a state of sloth and wretchedness; or +if they rise to obtain their own freedom, they will, very certainly, be +guilty of the most dreadful murders and every kind of atrocity in +carrying out their designs. I often have since thought of what our +friend said, and have prayed that the people of the United States will +make due preparation for enlightening those held so long in bondage. On +the nature of that preparation it defends (I have often heard Captain +Frankland say) whether their dear-bought liberty shall give joy and +gladness, or poverty and misery. + +The next morning, before returning to Callao, we rode out to visit the +ruins of an Inca town, situated on a hill forming one side of a fertile +and well-irrigated valley. The walls of the houses were built of +unburnt brick and mud, carefully constructed at right angles to each +other, and very thick--indeed, they put us in mind of some of the +pictures we had seen of Egyptian architecture. We were surprised to +hear of the great number of Indians who still exist in the country. +Under the present government they live happy and contented lives among +the lovely valleys of their ancestors. Their huts are generally built +of stone and covered with red tiles, creepers being trained to trail +over the walls, over which often a huge pumpkin is seen to hang, while a +prickly cactus stands as a sentinel at the doorway. The dress of the +men is a serge coat of an emerald green colour, without a collar, and +with a short skirt; loose black breeches, open at the knee, after the +Spanish fashion; and a long red waistcoat with large pockets. Pieces of +llamas' hide fastened round the feet serve them for shoes, while their +legs are stockingless. On their heads they wear broad-brimmed hats or +caps, adorned with gold-lace or ribbons of gay colours. The women wear +the same hat as the men, with a mantle over the shoulder secured in +front by a silver pin; a red bodice, and a blue petticoat reaching a +little below the knee. Altogether they present a very picturesque +appearance. We made another very interesting excursion in a canal up a +river--or a stream rather, for it was very narrow--but what we were most +struck with was the richness of the vegetation, the bark, reeds, and +trees, and shrubs of all sorts which grew close to the water. What was +remarkable were the palm-trees, which shot up above the other trees-- +themselves of no inconsiderable growth. We were sorry not to be able to +spend a longer time on the river. It put us very much in mind of the +scenery of the Amazon. We saw enough of the country to make us long to +see more of it, but were obliged to hurry back to the railway-station to +get to Callao, once more to embark on board the _Triton_. + +It was night by the time we reached the harbour, the sea calm as glass; +and it struck me that there was something peculiarly solemn as we looked +out on that dark, silent expanse of water, after gazing as we had done +for some days on the lofty snow-capped Cordilleras, and the laughing +green valleys round Lima. Dark as was the water, no sooner were the +oars dipped in it than it appeared as if they were ladling up some +red-hot fluid metal; and as the boat which was sent to take us off +pulled toward us from the ship, she left a long line of fire in her +wake. Even when we scooped up the water in our hands and threw it into +the air, it appeared like sparkles of fire, so long did it retain its +brilliancy. The slightest movement in the water caused a flash of +light. Jerry and I agreed that we had never seen anything more +beautiful. The doctor told us that this phosphorescence or luminosity +of the ocean is caused by a minute animal, scarcely perceptible to the +naked eye, though sufficient to tinge the water of a brown or reddish +colour. Other marine substances are, however, luminous. While we were +waiting to step into the boat, the bay having returned to its original +darkness, on a sudden it appeared as if it had become a vast caldron of +molten lead. The waters tumbled and rolled about in sheets of flame. + +"It is indeed a beautiful sight," exclaimed the doctor; "never saw such +a display of luminosity." + +"Grand, grand!" cried Jerry. "A thing to talk about--ah! what is that?" + +We were all silent. There was a low, rumbling, awful noise, neither +like distant thunder nor the report of cannon--nor, indeed, anything +else I ever heard; the earth seemed to sink under our feet, and then as +if it were being crushed together--rocks, and earth, and sand, all in +one lump by some mighty force. It was very dreadful. Our knees +positively trembled under us, at least I felt mine doing so. The boat +rose and fell several times. I remembered the way in which old Callao +had been destroyed, and I began to fear that a similar catastrophe was +about to occur. For a time there was a perfect rest, no movement of +earth, or water, or air--not the less awful on that account though. + +"Is it all over?" at length exclaimed Jerry, who was the first to break +the silence. + +"I hope so," answered the doctor; "but let us get into the boat, and +pull on board; we shall be safer there than on shore, at all events." + +We followed his advice. As the boat clove her way through the water she +seemed to be gliding over a surface of gold, overlaid by some dark sand +which was parted as she went by. When we got on board, we found that +our shipmates had felt the shock, the vibration of which must have come +up as they supposed by the chain cable. For a long time we walked the +deck, expecting another shock, but the night passed off quietly, and +when morning returned there was nothing to indicate that an earthquake +had taken place. I ought to have said that the present town of Callao +was built at a little distance from the site of the old town destroyed +by the earthquake, and on a higher and more commanding position. + +Once more we were at sea. One of the most interesting places we called +at, on account of its position and associations, was Panama. For many a +year it slept on neglected and almost forgotten. Now it has been +completely aroused from its lethargy, to find itself in the middle of +the highway to California, and the chief resting-place of gold-diggers. +It is bounded by the sea on three sides, and surrounded by a wall with +ditch and bastions on the land side. In the centre is the _plaza_, into +which converge several streets of old-fashioned, sedate-looking Spanish +houses, with broad verandas and heavy folding-shutters. Now a change +has rudely come over them. Above the door of one appeared, in huge +characters--"American Hotel"; while a board announced that "Good +Lodging, Brandy Smashes, Sice, and Egg-nog," were to be obtained within. +There are several other hotels with conspicuous signs, all denoting +that they have been established by citizens of the United States, while +there exist several restaurants, cafes, and newspaper and billiard-rooms +besides. A steamer had arrived only a few days before at Aspinwall, on +the east side, and the town was consequently full of passengers who had +come across by the railway. Nowhere, perhaps, are the past and the +present brought into greater contrast. We visited the ruins of several +churches and other buildings with massive walls, which probably never +were finished,--all attesting the departed importance of the place. Now +palm-trees grow in their lonely courts; tropical climbing plants throw +their festoons in rich luxuriance over their elaborate architecture, and +banana-trees have taken root in the clefts of the crumbling walls. +Panama, however, is not the identical city whence Pizarro sailed for the +conquest of the kingdom of the Incas. That city stood six miles down +the coast; and after it was sacked and utterly destroyed by Morgan, who +murdered every soul then within it, none returned to take up their +habitation there, and it still remains as he left it, a heap of ruins, +now overgrown by rank vegetation. + +We were fortunate in finding the directions Captain Frankland expected +to guide his future course, and I got letters from home. How greedily I +devoured them! Every word I read over and over again, and I kissed them +more than once, when I knew Jerry was not looking at me. I do not give +a longer account of the place, because I was engaged most of the time I +was there in writing home. I judged from the delight I felt in getting +letters, that mine would afford a somewhat similar pleasure; so I found +they did, and I advise those of my readers who have to go away from home +to remember this, and never to lose an opportunity of writing. We were +bound for San Francisco, the giant mushroom city of the wondrous +gold-bearing regions of California. I had always fancied that the +Pacific was, as its name betokens, a wide expanse of island-sprinkled +water, seldom or never ruffled by a storm. At length I had practical +proof of my mistake. We had made a good offing from the coast, to give +a wide berth to that narrow strip of land which runs from north to +south, and is known as Lower California. I saw the captain looking +constantly at the barometer; Jerry and I looked also, for we guessed +that something was the matter. The quicksilver sank lower and lower in +the tube, showing that the superincumbent atmosphere had become lighter, +or more rarified, and that a current of air would soon come in from some +direction or other and fill it up. + +"What's going to happen?" I asked of Jerry, seeing that the glass, or +rather the fluid in it, fell more and more. + +"Why, we are going to have such a gale as we don't often meet with, I +suspect," he answered. Just as he spoke, his father's voice was heard +on dock. We immediately hurried there as fast as we could fly. At the +time there was but little wind, then it became perfectly calm, with only +a long heavy swell from the southward. The calm was of short duration. + +"All hands shorten sail!" sung out the captain. The crew sprung aloft; +so did Jerry and I. We never shirked our duty, and Captain Frankland +knew that if he let us do so, whatever the excuse, we should never +become true seamen. It was hard work to hold on to the yard, much more +to get in the stiff canvas. I have heard of people having their teeth +blown down their throats by a gale; I thought mine would have gone, and +then I should have gone too, for I literally had to hold on by them to +steady myself on the yard. Jerry was not far from me. We tugged and +hauled away, and at last got the canvas rolled up as we best could; but +I must own that it was far from well done. The gale was still +increasing in strength, and we were not sorry to find ourselves safe on +deck again--so, I think, was the captain to see us. Perhaps, however, +he had got so accustomed to the risks his son was constantly running, +that he did not think about it. Scarcely had we come down from aloft, +and were looking about to see what was going to happen, than we saw away +to the south-east, far as the eye could reach, a tumbling mass of +foaming waters rushing on at a furious rate towards us. + +Meantime the storm stay-sails had been set, and the helm being put down, +the ship was hove-to with her head to the eastward. As the seas came +with the swell, they were regular, and though the ship plunged +violently, now rising to the summit of a wave, now sinking down into the +trough, there was no fear of any of them breaking on board provided our +masts stood. Such was the state of things when night came on. The wind +howled, and whistled, and shrieked; the sea roared and hissed; the +timbers and the masts groaned; the bulkheads creaked; and everything and +everybody which was not secured very tightly, tumbled and rolled about +in a most uncontrollable manner. For my part, I confess that I more +than once wished I were safe on shore again. As to turning in, not one +of us thought of doing that. Still the glass was falling, and still the +gale was increasing. With regard to eating, also, all we could do was +to nibble a biscuit; for, as Jerry observed, had we attempted to put +anything into our mouths with a fork, the chances were that we should +have sent fork and all down our throats, or dug the prongs into our eyes +or noses, or done some other mischief. Every now and then Jerry and I +started up on deck to see how things were going on, not that we could be +of any use there. Just as we had agreed to go below again, a blast, as +if a fresh hand had beep added to the bellows, came down upon us; there +was a terrific report, the ship heeled over on her side as if she were +going down, and away flew the stay-sails out of the bolt-ropes, followed +by nearly all the canvas, which, ill furled in our hurry, broke loose +from the gaskets, and, fluttering away with loud flaps, was soon reduced +to ribbons, knotted and twisted in every conceivable way. As the ship +fell off into the trough of the sea when her sails rent, a foaming +billow came roaring up, and striking her, made a clean breach over us. +There were shouts and cries fore and aft. Jerry and I held on for our +lives. Happily the stanchions we held to did not give way. Half +terrified, and not knowing what was next to happen, we tried to pierce +the gloom which surrounded us. Jerry's chief anxiety was for his +father; so was mine, and for Cousin Silas likewise, and, indeed, for our +kind friend the doctor. I had time also, strange as it may seem, to +think about old Surley, and to hope that he had not been washed +overboard, for unwisely he had followed us on deck. Very soon we were +satisfied that the captain was safe, for we heard him issuing orders in +a clear voice which sounded high above the gale. Directly afterwards +Cousin Silas passed us on his way forward, to get the fore-stay-sail on +the ship, to bring her head round. + +"If that does not do, what will happen?" I asked of Jerry. + +"We shall have to cut away the mizzen-mast and the main-mast too," he +answered. "Pleasant, won't it be?" I hoped that we should not be +driven to this alternative. As soon as the captain had given the +necessary orders for the safety of the ship, we heard him telling Ben +Yool to go and look for us. + +"They be safe enough, sir," was the answer. "I see'd them after the +squall." + +"Ay, ay, father, we are all right here," sung out Jerry. How high and +shrill his voice sounded amid the roar of the tempest! By this time the +sail was hoisted, the helm was put up--the ship's head rose and fell, +and rose again. At length the canvas felt the force of the wind. + +"Hurrah! hurrah!" was shouted fore and aft. Slowly round came her +head--the helm was righted. The fore-staysail was quickly hauled down +again, or the next squall would have taken it out of the bolt-ropes, and +away we flew under bare poles--now plunging headlong into the deep +valleys before us, our stern lifted high up above the seas--now climbing +the opposite side of the watery hill, the wave following us as it came +up, vast and indistinct in the gloom of night, looking as if it must +overwhelm us. + +"But what has become of old Surley?" I asked of Jerry, when we had time +to draw our breath a little more freely. "Can the dear old fellow be +washed overboard?" + +"I hope not; perhaps he didn't like the look of things on deck, and +skulked down below again," answered Jerry. "Let us go and look for +him." + +This was no easy work, in the way the ship was pitching and tumbling +about, and not without considerable risk; but on that point we did not +very much trouble our heads. Old Surley was always ready to fight for +us; and had we thought about the matter, we should have been ready to go +through any amount of danger for his sake. Letting go our hold, +therefore, away we crawled, grasping at anything we could reach, to +prevent ourselves from being rolled away to leeward. At last we reached +the forecastle, where the men had all huddled together, but old Surley +was not there. This made us very anxious about him. No one had seen +him. We began to fear that, as he had not hands to hold on by, he must +have been washed overboard when the heavy sea struck the ship which had +laid her on her beam ends. + +"You'd better not be scuttling about the decks, young gentlemen," said +Ben Yool. "Another of those big seas may come, and then if you are +caught by it you may be carried away further off than you'll like." + +"Thank you, Ben," we answered. "We'll take care of ourselves; but we +must first find old Surley, whatever happen." Saying this, we began to +work our way aft again, peering and putting our hands into every place +where we thought he could be stowed away. As we were passing along +close to the booms on the starboard side, under the long boat, I thought +amidst the howling of the tempest that I heard a low whine. I told +Jerry. We together hunted about the spot till our hands touched a hairy +coat. It was that of old Surley. Of that we were certain, by hearing +him again whine. He could not move. Poor fellow, he had been jammed in +among the booms. We judged that there would be great difficulty in +releasing him, but after feeling about in all directions round him, we +determined to make the attempt. I took his head and Jerry took his +tail, and, watching our opportunity as the spars separated by the +movement of the ship, we lifted him out of the trap in which he had been +caught. He licked my face and hands, and then turned round and did the +same to Jerry; indeed, he took every means to evince his gratitude. We +were very happy to find that none of his bones had been broken, and +together we all three scrambled back in the best way we could to the +cabin. Old Surley seemed to be very hungry after his imprisonment, so I +made another excursion on deck to the cook's larder, and got him a piece +of meat, with which I returned to the cabin. We should have been glad +of something of the sort ourselves, but as we could not attempt to cook +anything, and the meat I had brought was raw, we gave the whole of it to +our four-footed friend. We all sat down on the deck of the cabin, +holding on by the legs of the table--that is to say, Jerry and I held +on, and Surley lay between us. The doctor was in his berth. After, as +he said, he had sufficiently enjoyed the scene on deck, he had wisely +turned in, feeling that he could be of no use anywhere else. Never +before had I spent so uncomfortable a night on board. We were very wet, +and cold, and hungry, and not at all certain that the ship would not go +down, and carry us and all hands with her. + +"It's not so bad, though, as the time we spent on the bottom of the boat +among the Falkland Islands," observed Jerry. + +"But that only lasted a short time," I remarked. "For what we know, it +may blow as hard as it does now for a week to come. What shall we do +then?" + +"Grin and bear it. That's the only thing to be done that I know of," +answered Jerry. + +All that night we sat up as I have described, now and then dozing off +for a short time, but then waking up again as the ship gave a more +tremendous plunge than before. At last the captain came and lay down on +the sofa, and seeing that we were all safe, went to sleep; but he was +soon on deck again, and remained there till daylight. All that day the +gale blew as hard, if not harder than ever, and we went rolling and +pitching away before it. All the people were sent below except the +hands at the wheel, and they secured themselves there, lest they should +be washed away by the seas which threatened every moment to break aboard +us. As to looking out, all we could see were the foaming mountains of +water rising up in broken masses around us, and the sheets of spray +which never-ceasingly flew over us. Night came on again, and matters +had not mended. The glass was still lower than ever. Jerry and I had +managed to shift our clothes, so that we were more comfortable than on +the former night, and old Surley had had a lesson not to venture on deck +again. His coat was thus dry, and we all lay down together to pass the +night. Having scarcely closed our eyes the night before, we soon went +to sleep. Never have I slept more soundly. Suddenly I woke up. The +ship was plunging as heavily as before, and the wind was howling and the +sea roaring as loudly as ever. Still only half awake, I found my way up +the companion-ladder. I looked out. No one was to be seen on deck--the +dark mountain seas and the confused mass of rigging could alone be +perceived. I cast my eyes aloft? What was that I saw? High up in the +air, at the main-topmast-head, there was perched a ball of fire. I was +so astonished, and, I may say, alarmed, that I could not speak. What +could the phenomenon portend? It stayed there for some time, then all +of a sudden it glided down, and went out to the main-top-sail yard-arm-- +a bright, glowing, flaming ball. It will be setting the ship on fire! +I thought that I would go and rouse up some one to tell what I had seen, +in case there was any danger to be apprehended. Still I could not tear +myself away from my post. I shouted out to Jerry, but he did not hear +me. I was just returning below when I found Cousin Silas at my +shoulder. + +"So, Harry, you want to find out when the gale will have done blowing," +said he. + +"Yes, I do indeed; but look there!" I exclaimed, pointing to the ball +of fire. + +"Ah, there's old Jack o' lantern!" he answered composedly. "Not a bad +sign either. A gale seldom lasts long after he has come. Look at him, +he is rather playful to-night." He was indeed. Sometimes the light +would ascend and then descend the masts, then run along the yards, and +waiting a little at each yard-arm, would be back again and slip down one +of the stays to the fore-mast, and mount up in a second to the +fore-topmast head. Sometimes, when the ship rolled very much, the +mast-head would leave it floating in the air, but as she rolled back +again it would quickly re-attach itself. More than once it got divided +into several parts, as it flew about the rigging, but was very speedily +re-united again. Cousin Silas laughed when I told him that I thought it +might do us some injury. + +"Oh no; Jack is a very harmless fellow," he answered. "More than once, +when it has not been blowing as hard as it does now, before I was out of +my apprenticeship, I and others have chased Jack about the rigging, and +caught him too. When near, he seems to have a very dull, pale light. I +and another fellow determined to have him. At last I clutched him. I +felt that I had got something clammy, as it were, which stung my skin +like a handful of thin jelly-fish. I brought him down on deck, and +clapped him into a box. In the morning I could feel that there was +something in the box, but all the light was gone, and the box hadn't +been opened long before the thing, whatever it was, was gone too." + +Had anybody but Cousin Silas given me this account, I should scarcely +have believed him; and even in this case I had some little difficulty in +not supposing that he must, in some way or other, have been deceived. + +Jack, however, did not bring us the fine weather we wished for. +Daylight returned, and we were little better off than before. We +nibbled some biscuit, as Jerry said, to keep our spirits up, and then +had a look at the glass. It had risen two degrees. Still the sea ran +very high. Jerry and I went at last on deck, followed by Surley. The +captain and officers were there, for they had resolved to try and bring +the ship to; as she was running a long way out of her course. This, +after a time, was done, when the wind lulled, under a close-reefed +fore-topsail. We rode after this much more pleasantly, and then the sea +began to go down, and once more we could move about the deck without +danger of being washed overboard. + +"All hands make sail!" was at length the cheering cry, just as the sun +had set, as the poets say, in his ocean bed. We sprang aloft--Jerry and +I racing who should be first up on the yard-arm. Surley looked as if he +would like to follow. Jerry beat me. The ship was still rolling +heavily in the swell after the gale. He was springing out towards the +yard-arm, laughing gaily at his success, when the ship gave a roll, and +away he was sent clear of the bulwarks and into the sea. To glide down +by a back-stay and to jump overboard after him was the work of a moment. +I scarcely knew what I was doing. I fancied that I just heard the cry +of "A man overboard;" but I was not certain. I knew that I was for my +size a good swimmer, and I wanted to save my friend. He could swim, but +not much. He threw up his arms; I saw him, and struck out towards him. +I had a companion, I found, hastening also to his rescue. It was old +Surley. He swam faster than I did, seeming to know the importance of +haste. We were not without means of support, for as Jerry fell the +life-buoy had been let go. It was such as are carried by men-of-war, +and could support several people. I sung out to Jerry. He heard my +voice, but he only answered faintly. He had got his mouth full of +water, and had been stunned and confused by his fall. He was beating +the water wildly, forgetting apparently that he could swim. + +"Help! help!" he sung out; "I'm sinking! I'm sinking!" I did my utmost +to reach him, but was still some way off. Surley dashed towards him, +and seized him by the collar, holding his head above water. I saw that +the best thing I could do was to tow the life-buoy up to him. It was +not far off. Surley seemed to divine my intention, and swam towards it. +At last I got it up to Jerry. He had just strength enough left to +catch hold of it. Old Surley put his paws in the beckets to support +himself, and then we all three were hanging on to the life-buoy, while +the ship, as it seemed to us, was running far away, already almost +concealed by the thick clouds of spray with which we were surrounded. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +ADVENTURES IN MEXICO. + +"I am so glad you are saved, Jerry," said I. These were the first words +I spoke after we had got hold of the life-buoy. + +"But are we saved?" he exclaimed. "Will the ship be able to come back? +and if she does, will they see us, do you think?" + +"They'll not desert us--of that we may be certain," I replied; and I +thought how heart-broken Captain Frankland would be when he found that +his son had fallen overboard and was in all probability lost. Strange +to say, I did not think at all of my own perilous position. I had gone +to save Jerry, and it seemed a matter of course that I must save him. +It must be remembered that our heads were very little above the level of +the water, and that although the sea had gone down considerably, we were +surrounded by masses of foam--now sinking into the trough, now rising to +the top of a wave. Our view, therefore, was very limited. We were +looking out eagerly for the ship through the thickening gloom. Happily, +when the life-buoy was let go, the trigger was pulled. This set off a +sort of blue light, which burned at the top, and which water could not +extinguish. We felt sure, therefore, that as long as that light +continued burning we should be seen by those on board. Our great dread +was that the light would go out before the ship could get back to us. +We strained our eyes in the direction of the ship. The thickening gloom +and mist were rapidly encircling her, and shrouding her from our sight. + +"O Harry, Harry, she's going away, and they won't know where to look for +us!" cried Jerry. "Poor father, what will he do? and my carelessness +has brought you into this trouble, and poor Surley too. I wish you +hadn't jumped overboard for me." + +"I'm very glad I did, for I don't think that you would have been alive +now if I had not," I answered; "and don't have any regrets about me--I +only did my duty, and I am sure that you would have done the same for +me. But I say, do you remember what Mr Brand talked about when we were +holding on by the bottom of the boat among the Falklands?" + +"Yes, I do; something about our being summoned before many moments to +stand before the Judge of all the world," answered Jerry. "I've been +thinking of that just now." + +"So have I," said I. "Well, it strikes me that if we thought about it +oftener we should be better prepared for the time when it does come. +Come it will, I know,--`as a thief in the night,' the Bible says. I'll +try and think more on the subject, so that when the moment does come I +may be ready." + +Many people make resolutions as we did: how few keep them! It is +extraordinary that we should have been able to talk so much in the +position in which we were placed. As I was saying, we strained our eyes +gazing after the ship. + +"Jerry," I exclaimed suddenly, "she has hove about--I am certain of it! +See, see! she is coming nearer!" + +Breathlessly we watched. Even though the gloom was thickening, we could +discern that her bow was turned towards us. We shouted in our +eagerness--not to show where we were: there was no use in that, nor +could we have made ourselves heard; the light also from the life-buoy +was still burning brightly. On came the ship towards us. There was no +doubt about the matter. + +"There's down with the helm!" cried Jerry. "They are going to heave +to--hurrah! hurrah!" + +In another minute the ship lay hove-to a short distance to windward of +us. She looked like some huge dark spirit rising out of the ocean. We +knew that they must be lowering a boat, though we could not see it. +Then we shouted, to show that we were all right and in good heart. A +shout from the boat's crew was given in return, and a light was held up +to show us that help was coming. Over the waves it came dancing towards +us. In a few minutes more the boat was up to us, with Mr Brand at the +helm. Whenever any very important work was to be performed, I observed +the captain liked to intrust it to Cousin Silas. + +"Take old Surley off first!" exclaimed Jerry. Manuel Silva, who had, it +appeared, insisted on coming, was about to help him in. "He has had +hard work to hold on, poor fellow." So Surley was taken into the boat, +and then I, for Jerry would not get in till the last; and then the +life-buoy was lifted in, and in a very short time we were all safe on +deck, and the ship once more steering towards the American coast. + +We were earned below--that is to say, Jerry and I. The men took care of +Surley. We were put into our berths, and the doctor came to us, and we +were rubbed, and had some hot brandy and water; and then I, at all +events, felt all to rights. Jerry had been hurt by his fall, and it +took him much longer to recover. The captain went and sat by him; and +Jerry told me that he heard him offering up his thanks to our merciful +God for having restored his son to him. He then came and talked to me, +and told me how sorry he should have been had I been lost, and how +grateful he felt to me for having been the means of saving his son's +life. I do not know exactly what I said. I remember I told him what I +was sure of,--that Jerry would have done exactly the same for me. There +was this difference, that I could swim very well, and that Jerry could +swim very little, so that I deserved less thanks than he should have +done had he jumped in for me, considering that he would have run far +greater risk for my sake than I had done for his. The captain smiled +when I said this, but made no remark. He had always been kind to me,-- +he was now kinder than ever; but this did not prevent him from taking +every means to make me a sailor, and to keep me to my duty, while at the +same time he afforded me every opportunity of seeing as much as possible +of the world through which we were passing. + +Silva, as I before have said, by his quiet manners, readiness to lend a +hand when any work was going forward, and anxiety to be on good terms +with all, had completely won the good-will of everybody on board. He +was evidently a man of some attainments, and was more likely to have +been an officer than a man before the mast. With Jerry and me he was +apparently very frank. He told us how when a young lad he had been +turned adrift into the world to seek his fortune, without parents or any +one to care for him; and how he had battled on, picking up information +where he could, reading what books he could lay hands on, and laying in +a store of knowledge for future use. + +"I have served on board vessels of every description. I've been on +board slavers, and merchant vessels, and men-of-war of several nations. +I've served with Lord Cochrane both in the Pacific and Atlantic; and for +a long time I was in an opium clipper in the China Seas; but, as you +know, lads, a rolling stone gathers no moss, and here I am, as poor as I +was when I first began life. However, there are plenty of ways by which +a man may make his fortune if he chooses, and I must find one of them +some of these days." + +He spoke in a desperate, careless tone, as if he in reality cared very +little what became of him, or what he did. We had begun to feel a +strong liking for the man, and were now inclined to pity him sincerely. + +I will not describe another gale which came on, and drove us away to the +southward and westward for several days, the wind shifting about so much +that we scarcely knew where we had got to. At length, when it had +moderated, so that an observation could be taken, we found that we were +on the coast of Mexico, not far from the harbour of Mazatlan, near the +entrance of the Gulf of California. The ship had been so battered about +during the gale, that the captain was glad of an opportunity of running +into harbour to repair damages, before proceeding to San Francisco, +where he could not expect to find workmen, and where, if he remained +long, his own crew might be tempted to desert. As we stood in for the +shore, a few barren rocks or small islands appeared in sight, and +running through, we found ourselves before a pretty little town, part of +it standing on the foot of a steep promontory, and partly on a sandy +bank which encircles a wide lagoon. This was Mazatlan. It is inhabited +by Mexican Spaniards. The first mate, Mr Renshaw, had not been on +shore during the voyage, so the captain insisted on his going with the +doctor and Jerry and me. We first went to an inn--a _meson_, as it was +called. It consisted of a quadrangular building, with a court-yard in +the centre, and a corridor running round it. All the rooms opened into +this corridor, and had no communication with each other. The corridor +was the general lounging-place; and at night many of the guests who +preferred air to privacy, slung their hammocks in it. Round the walls, +or on the pillars, they also hung up their saddles and other riding +gear. As to furniture, there is something like a bedstead, a wooden +elevation which keeps the sleeper from the floor; but chairs and tables +are luxuries seldom met with, while washhand-stands are things unheard +of--washing being but little in vogue among the travelling population. +We were fortunate in falling in with two Englishmen--that is to say, +one, Captain Driscoll, was an Irishman, who had been in the Mexican +service; and the other, Dr Dwyer, was a merchant. They knew the +country well, and were travelling towards Durango, the largest town in +the neighbourhood. They had with them two young men, sons of +_rancheroes_, as the Mexican cattle-farmers are called. They both lived +some way up the country, and as they also were bound to Durango, and had +speedily to return, it was arranged that we should all travel together. +With the addition of our new friends' two servants, we thus together +mustered ten persons. We were all of us well-armed, and not without +necessity: our friends told us that the country had lately been infested +by large bands of Comanche Indians, who had been driven away from the +borders of the United States, and had discovered that they were able to +carry on their depredations among the Mexicans almost with impunity. +"They are not likely to attack a well-armed party, and if they do, we +can give a good account of them." This account only the more excited +our interest, and we quite hoped that the Indians would attack us. When +we first went to the inn, we saw a large party on horseback just setting +out, we understood, in the same direction. They were all armed to the +teeth,--with pistols in their belts, some with swords by their sides, +and others with lances or rifles. They made a gay appearance on their +richly caparisoned steeds, with their broad-brimmed hats and feathers, +bright-coloured sashes, trousers open at the knees, with silver buttons +and loose jackets, with yellow boots and large silver spurs. They were +laughing loudly and talking; and as they flourished their spears and +rifles, they boasted how they would treat any Indians who might dare to +attack them. The doctor said he thought that it was a pity we had not +been ready to accompany them. + +"Let them go alone," answered our friend; "I know those boasting +gentlemen too well to trust them. If attacked, they would leave all the +fighting to us. We shall be better off by ourselves." Our friends +provided horses and all necessaries for the journey, and in high spirits +we started, mounted on high Spanish saddles, from which it seemed +impossible that we could ever tumble off. I will not attempt to +describe the scenery in detail. It was hilly, and woody, and rocky, +with valleys and waterfalls; now and then we came to a plain with a wide +extent of open country, and then had to cross rocky ridges, and climb +lofty heights among crags and pine-trees; but nothing came amiss to us +or our horses. The young farmers had pressed us to stop a day at their +father's house, which was only a little out of the way. It was built in +the fashion of the inn I have described, surrounded by the +farm-buildings and pens for cattle. The father was a fine, hearty old +man, dressed in the ancient Spanish costume; and their mother and +sisters were kind, fresh-looking people, very unlike the +parchment-skinned, withered crones we had seen in the town. They gave +us for supper _tortillas_, which are thin cakes made of corn, and eggs, +and fried beans, and some other things, to which we did justice. The +next morning our friends asked us if we would like to see a hunt. + +"Of what?" we asked. + +"Of a bear," was the answer. "One has been seen in the neighbourhood, +and his destruction is resolved on." + +"Oh, by all means!" we exclaimed, wondering in what way the bear was to +be hunted. "Let us go." + +After an early breakfast, we set out on horseback, accompanied by +several men on foot carrying long poles. Each of the young rancheroes +had a long coil of rope round his saddle-bow, to which one end was +fastened--at the other was a running loop. This I found was a lasso--a +weapon (for so it may be called) in their hands of very formidable +character. The appearance the young rancheroes presented on horseback +was very picturesque. Their saddle-cloths and saddles were richly +worked, and the head-gear of their horses was adorned with gay tassels. +Round their own heads, and necks, and waists, they wore bright-coloured +handkerchiefs. Their jackets and trousers were made very loose, and +adorned with a profusion of silver buttons; while on their heels they +wore huge silver spurs, with rowels as large as the palm of a man's +hand. Two other rancheroes joined us. They had seen the hear, and +found out his haunts. We reached a wild, rugged country, with a few +trees in the valleys, and numerous large rocks jutting out in the sides +of the hills. + +"The rancheroes say that the bear's cave is not far off from here," +observed one of our English friends. "We must be prepared for him. +Keep by us and do as we do." Scarcely had he spoken when a loud growl +or snort was heard, and not a hundred yards from us a huge, grisly, +brown monster rushed out from behind a rook, showing his teeth, and +standing upon his hind-legs as if ready to fight. I had never seen a +more ferocious-looking monster. While we were looking at him he went +down on his fore-paws, and with a loud growl made a rush at us. + +"Put spurs to your horses, and gallop down the valley, or he will be +upon us!" exclaimed our friends. We were not slow to follow this +advice. I looked round--the bear was following us. Fast as we went, +unwieldy as the monster looked, he came as rapidly after us. I could +not help thinking if one of our horses fell, what would become of the +rider. It was not unlikely either that one of us, especially the first +mate, who was not accustomed to ride, might tumble off. If so, the bear +would certainly kill him. On we went as fast as our horses' legs could +carry us. The bear was, notwithstanding this, gaining on us. I kept +alongside Jerry, so did the mate. Their horses could not go faster. I +wondered what had become of the rancheroes; I did not see them. Another +terrific growl was heard, and looking over my shoulder, I saw that the +bear had gained still more on us. He was not eighty paces from us. +Just then I saw Jerry pulling at his horse's bridle. He hauled away +lustily, but it was too late. Down went the poor animal over a big +stone, and away flew Jerry over his head. I shrieked with terror. How +could I help him? I turned round, hoping to divert the bear's +attention, but the monster took no notice of me, and made straight at +Jerry. At that moment, when I thought that it was all up with him, I +heard a loud _switch_, as if something were passing rapidly through the +air, and two of the rancheroes darted out from behind a cliff, having +thrown their lassoes over the bear's head and shoulders. Away they +galloped in an opposite direction to which he was going, till their +ropes were at their fullest tension, and then their horses drew up, +planting their feet firmly on the ground and dragging against the +astonished animal. Instead of seizing the prey he expected, he found +himself drawn up with a halter round his neck, and heating the air in a +vain endeavour to escape. When he found that he could make no head +against the two rancheroes, who were endeavouring to stop him, he turned +round in a fit of fury and endeavoured to overtake them. Keeping their +lassoes at full stretch, away they went before him; and if he stopped a +moment to try to get rid of the nooses, they gave him a jerk which made +him move on again. Jerry was, happily, not hurt by his fall, and having +caught his horse, the mate, and I helped him quickly to mount and to +overtake the rest of the party who were following the hunters. After +galloping along the valley for a quarter of a mile or so, the two other +rancheroes darted out from behind a rock, and whirling their lassoes +round their heads, cast them with unerring aim over the shoulders of the +bear, and then galloped away from him. The monster had now four lassoes +round him. Mighty as was his strength, and fierce as were his +struggles, he was in an instant brought to the ground. He bit, and +struggled, and snarled, or rather growled in vain; tighter and tighter +grew each noose till he was hauled over on his back. Some of the men on +foot, who had been hidden in the neighbourhood, rushed forward, and +threw their lassoes over his legs. He was now utterly helpless. Then +the men came with their long poles, with which they formed a sort of +litter, and off they carried poor Bruin in triumph. It was certainly +much pleasanter examining him now he was made fast than when he was at +liberty. We were told that his strength is so great that he can, +without difficulty, overcome the huge bison whom he meets with in the +plains. The doctor called him the _Ursus ferox_. His claws were long +and strong, his canine teeth of great size, and his eyes deeply sunk in +his head. We followed the huge prisoner in triumph till we came to a +road, when he was put on a cart and rumbled off to the farm. Thence he +was forwarded to Mazatlan, and very likely shipped off to some distant +part of the world. + +On our way back to the rancho, we encountered a herd of wild cattle, one +of which the young rancheroes wished to capture. Off they set in +pursuit of a fine bull they had singled out from the herd. One of them +rode up on the right side of the animal about twenty feet off, the other +kept a little behind at about the same distance on the left side. Away +flew the noose of the right-hand man over the head of the beast; at the +same moment the ranchero behind cast his by a peculiar knack over the +left hind-foot, as the animal lifted it in running. The sudden jerk +brought him to the ground, and the other ends of the lassoes being +fastened to the saddles, the horses stood perfectly still, dragging away +with all their might in opposite directions. Their masters quietly +dismounted, and leaving their horses thus keeping the bull secure, they +leisurely approached him. They then secured his feet in such a way that +he could only just walk, and bent his head down to his legs, so that he +could not butt, and making him get up, led him away a prisoner. Several +were treated in the same way. We wonderfully enjoyed our day's +excursion. + +The next morning by daybreak we set off to continue our journey. It was +very pleasant travelling. Sometimes Jerry and I rode together, +sometimes with the doctor or Mr Renshaw, and at others with our two +English friends, from whom we gained a good deal of information. From +all I heard, I should not at all like to live in Mexico. The +descendants of the fierce conquerors have become a most degenerate race, +without religion, without morality--each man ready to destroy his +neighbour for the sake of getting into his place. That object seems to +be the only end and aim of all their politics. As to patriotism, it +does not exist. The nearest approach to the sentiment is made by those +who wish for a settled government, that they may enjoy their property in +peace and quiet. The consequences of the constant change of government +are, that brigands abound, that the confines of the country are left +open to the depredations of the Red Indians, and that the army of the +state is left in a dreadfully disorganised condition--ill paid, ill fed, +ill clothed, and utterly unable to cope with the evils which beset them. +We stopped for a few hours at a ruined house to take our mid-day meal, +and then continued our journey. Soon after this we came to some +blackened walls which showed where a village once stood. We learned +from the rancheroes that only a few weeks before there existed on the +spot a pretty hamlet, with a contented and happy population of some +fifty persons or so. One morning, just as they were setting forth to +their work, the dreaded war whoop of the Indians was heard. Two or +three hundred Red Indian warriors, armed with spears, rifles, and round +shields, were seen galloping towards the devoted village. Some of the +people fled. All tried to flee, for so completely unprepared were they +that there was no time to make any defence. The women and children, as +they were overtaken, were indiscriminately slaughtered. The plunder +that was considered worth carrying off was collected, and then in +wantonness the village was set on fire. A few of the fugitives had at +length reached Durango with the tale of their misfortunes. Some troops +had been sent out with orders to exterminate the savages, but they took +very good care not to come near them, while the Indians indeed were +probably making a foray some two or three hundred miles away. At night +we reached a rancho, the owner of which was known to our friends. He +received us hospitably, slung hammocks for us in one of the corridors of +the house, and gave us the usual tortillas, and eggs, and beans for a +feast, in addition to some very fine beef. The evening of the next day +was approaching, when, as we were descending a hill, we saw in the plain +below us a number of horsemen galloping about. We were too far off to +make out what they were. The rancheroes gazed earnestly at them. Mr +Renshaw had a good glass with him. + +"Why, there are red fellows on horseback, with spears and shields, but +without a rag on them," he exclaimed. "They seem to be fighting with +another set of fellows dressed as Spaniards, and, hang it, the latter +are turning heels and flying." The rancheroes seemed very much excited +all the time, and rode a little way down the hill, that they might +better see what was going on. They quickly turned round and beckoned to +us to join them. We did so, and soon saw that if we would save the +lives of the Mexicans, there was not a moment to be lost. Although +there were thirty of them, there were fully four times as many Indians. +It was not difficult to divine what had occurred. The Mexicans had been +taken by surprise, and instead of pulling up and keeping close together, +each man had galloped off in the hope of saving his own life, without +thinking of his companions. The Indians had thus got in among them, and +had already pierced several through with their long spears. Each Indian +warrior, however, as soon as he had killed or disabled a man, stopped to +take his scalp, and this gave time to some of the Mexicans once more to +unite and to present a better front to the enemy. The resistance they +were making, however, was very feeble, and as we galloped on we saw that +they had once more begun to break. The Indians had been so intent on +the attack that they had not perceived our approach, neither had the +Mexicans. + +"Now, my friends," exclaimed our friend Captain Driscoll, who seemed as +if by right to take the command, "keep together, shoulder to shoulder, +and dash boldly in among those red villains. Cut them down, and pistol +them as best you can, shouting at the top of your voices. I know them +of old; they won't stand that. When they hear English voices they'll +run; they know what they are to get. Wait till I give the word, +though." + +It was very exciting. Down the steep hill we dashed at full speed, our +horses seeming clearly to understand what we were about. Already +several more Mexicans had, through their cowardice, lost their lives. +We were within two hundred yards of the scene of strife. "Now's the +time!" shouted our leader. "Hurrah, hurrah! my lads! Give way, you red +scoundrels!" we all shouted at the top of our voices. The Indians, +hearing our cries, turned their heads, and seeing a large body of +horsemen coming down the road, and not knowing how many there might be +following, thought that it was high time for them to be off. Our +appearance, also, gave the Mexicans courage, and they charged more +manfully than they had done before. + +"Wallop ahoo aboo, Erin gobragh!" sung out our leader, Captain Driscoll. +"Fly, ye red scoundrels; fly, or we will cut you into mince-meat!" +Whether the Indians understood what he said I do not know, but as he +suited the action to the word, wielding a pretty heavy Toledo, they took +his advice, and, disengaging themselves from the melee, urged their +horses to a rapid flight. We, however, were too close to them to allow +them to escape altogether with impunity, and three of them were knocked +off the backs of their steeds, two of whom were mortally wounded. A +third, I thought, was lead. He lay on the ground without moving, or +apparently breathing, his tomahawk still held in his death-grasp. The +cowardly Mexicans very soon put the other two poor wretches out of their +pain, by running them through and through with their lances. Two or +three of the heroes were in the act of charging the dead man, with the +intention of running him through, when up he sprung to his feet, and +away he went as quick almost, it seemed, as a flash of lightning after +his comrades! Several of our party gave chase after him, but though he +was on foot it appeared as if he would distance us. His leg, however, +had been wounded, and he had miscalculated his strength. His pace +slackened. Once or twice he stumbled; he felt that he could run no +more. He was a brave fellow, and was determined to die like a man, with +his face to his enemies. Flourishing his tomahawk above his head, he +uttered his war cry, and rushed desperately towards us. A Mexican's +lance struck him on the shoulder, and brought him to the ground. The +other Mexicans were about to despatch him, but Captain Driscoll sung out +in Spanish, "Spare his life; spare his life; we do not kill fallen +enemies;" and Jerry and I, impelled by the same feelings, threw +ourselves before him, and by signs showed that we had resolved to +protect him. The Indian seemed to comprehend what we were about, though +perhaps he thought we wanted to preserve his life only to torture him, +for he did not show that he was in any way obliged to us. The moment +the lance was withdrawn, he sprung up with his weapon in his hand, ready +to fight on; but one of the rancheroes threw his lasso over his +shoulders, and, with a jerk which, had it been round his neck, would +have dislocated it, brought him again to the ground. + +"We will bring him along with us," said Captain Driscoll; "the poor +wretch has shown great courage, and deserves to live. Perhaps we may +learn from him something about his tribe." + +The captive Indian was dragged along; and, finding that at present he +had no chance of escape, he came on quietly. No less than eight of the +Mexicans had lost their lives, so sudden had been the attack of the red +men, and most of the bodies had been deprived of their scalps. As it +was impossible to carry the corpses with us, and we had not time to bury +them, they were left to afford a banquet to the birds of the air and the +beasts of the forest--a common occurrence in this country. Some of +those who had run away now came back, and by degrees the whole party was +once more collected together. It was already late in the afternoon, and +we were anxious to find some place where we could rest for the night. +There was a village, we heard, at no great distance, and by riding +pretty hard we might reach it by nightfall. After what had occurred, +this we were all well disposed to do, for we could not tell at what +moment the Comanches, when they found that our numbers were smaller than +they had supposed, might come back and attack us. It was amusing to +hear the vapouring and boasting of the Mexicans, as our friends, with +their own comments, translated it to us. The greatest boasters were the +greatest cowards. Not one but could offer an excellent reason for +having run away. Several were going to procure help; others to get +behind the Indians, to attack them in the rear; others were heroically +making a diversion, to draw off their attention from their friends. It +was nearly dark when we reached the village, but not a sign of living +beings was there--no dog barked, no child's cheerful voice was heard, +not a cock crew. Alas! there were blackened roofs and walls, and +charred door-posts. The Indians had been there; all the inhabitants +must have been slain or had fled. We rode through the hamlet; not a +human being was to be found. One house--the largest in the place--had +escaped entire destruction. It had two stories; a ladder led to the +upper one. It would afford us shelter during the night, which gave +signs of being a tempestuous one. Behind the house were some sheds, +where our horses might be tethered. The first thing to be done was to +obtain food for them. It was more important that they should be fed +than that we should; so a party was sent out to cut grass, and soon +returned with a sufficiency. Most of the people had brought provisions, +as we likewise had done, and thus in that respect we were very well off. +Captain Driscoll, by tacit consent, was chosen to make the arrangements +for our security during the night. In the lower room was a large +hearth, on which a blazing fire was made, and by the light of it we ate +our somewhat frugal supper. We then all climbed up into the loft, and +the Mexicans, with their _scrapes_, and saddles, and saddle-cloths, soon +made themselves comfortable beds, and we imitated their example. The +Indian prisoner had been made to come up, and then they bound his arms +and legs, and he sat in one corner with a man to watch him. I had been +asleep some time, when I felt Jerry pulling at my arm. I looked up. +The light of the moon was streaming in through a gap in the roof, for +the storm which had threatened had passed off. Jerry put his finger to +his lips to impose silence, and pointed to the Indian. He was sitting +up; his hands were free, and he was busily employed in disengaging his +legs from the lashings which secured them. What to do I scarcely knew. +If the prisoner would go away without hurting any one, I thought it +would be the best thing that could happen. Then it occurred to me that +if he escaped he might give information to his friends of our +whereabouts, so I thought it would be best to stop him. I was on the +point of singing out, when up sprung the Indian, the long knife of his +sleeping guard in his hand. He was about to plunge it into the man, +when Jerry's and my shouts arrested his arm, and leaping down the +trap-hole at which the ladder was placed, before those who had been +aroused could catch hold of him, away he flew through the village. +Pursuit was instantly made, but before the foot of the ladder could be +reached, he was out of sight. Those who had gone after the Indian +returned looking very foolish; and the man who had charge of him was +soundly rated, but that was all that could be done. I found that the +same reason for apprehension was entertained by the party which had +occurred to me. However, after a time, the Mexicans got tired of +watching, and all lay down again in their places. I could not go to +sleep. I did not like the thought of that Indian escaping, and I +wondered that Captain Driscoll did not take more precautions to guard +against a surprise. I found that Jerry was awake, and when I told him +my ideas he agreed with me. We lay still for a little time, and then we +got up and looked out. The night was perfectly still and fine. We +fancied that if anybody were stirring we should not fail to hear. We +went back into the loft, and then found that Captain Driscoll was awake. +He asked us what we had been about. We told him our apprehensions. He +laughed, and replied, that after the drubbing we had given the red +rascals they would not venture to come near us. + +"The Duke of Wellington tells us that we should never despise our +enemies, whoever they may be," I answered. + +Captain Driscoll laughed. "The duke was not thinking of Red Indians," +he observed. "Don't be alarmed, my boys, the thieves won't come." +Scarcely had he uttered the words, when there was a neighing, and +kicking, and stamping of horses' feet in the court-yard below us. We +looked out. The place was full of Red Indians! + +"To arms! to arms!" shouted the captain. Everybody was instantly on +their feet. I found that he had more arrangements than I had fancied. +The Indians had got over the walls of the court-yard, but the gate was +so blocked up that they could not open it to get our horses through. +Their only outlet was through our house. The door leading to this was +instantly occupied by some of the Mexicans, while others ran their +rifles through all the crevices and holes in the walls, and began firing +away at the Indians. They, disappointed in their attempt to carry off +our horses, after ham-stringing several of them, leaped back over the +walls, exposing themselves as they did so to the rifles of the Mexicans. +Several were shot down, but the greater number made their escape. No +one attempted to follow them, however, for there could be no doubt that +a large party of them were in the neighbourhood, and that they would +very likely renew their attack on us. They did not disappoint us. In +less than a quarter of an hour the trampling of horses' hoofs was heard, +and through the gloom of night a large body of horsemen was seen +galloping up through the street of the ruined village. As they got +near, they gave vent to the most unearthly shrieks and cries, intending, +undoubtedly, to terrify us. Captain Driscoll was not, however, totally +unprepared for them. He had stationed the best marksmen of the party +behind the walls of the enclosure and at the windows of the house. +There was little time, however, to make the arrangements, but each man +seemed to know pretty well what he had to do. Not a shot was fired, not +a word was uttered. The Indians, expecting an easy victory, galloped +along the road, flourishing their lances, or holding their rifles ready +to fire as soon as any one appeared to fire at. They got close up to +the walls of the house, and there halted, fancying apparently that we +had already decamped. Some got off their horses, to examine the ground +for our trail. + +"_Tira! tira_!--fire, my lads, fire!" shouted our leader in Spanish and +English. Every one of us obeyed the order, with such effect that fully +a dozen savages were knocked over, and many more wounded. We lost not a +moment in loading again. The savages, firing their rifles at us, rode +desperately up to the walls, as if intending to jump off their horses +and climb over them. Had they succeeded in so doing, they might have +overwhelmed us with their numbers. They were, however, received with +another volley, delivered with such good effect that their courage +failed them, and, wheeling about, they galloped away down the road as +fast as they could tear. Two Mexicans only were wounded, and not very +seriously. As may be supposed, no one went to sleep again that night; +and as soon as day broke we were all in our saddles, that we might reach +Durango before dark. We now proceeded with something like military +order, to avoid a surprise; for it was thought probable that the Indians +might have formed an ambush on the road, with the intention of attacking +us. In the afternoon, as we rode along, we caught sight of a body of +horsemen winding their way down a hill on the opposite side of the +valley. They might be Indians. Each man examined the lock of his +musket or rifle, and felt his side for his sword. They approached, and +we then saw that they were a troop of cavalry. They were very ragged, +and their horses were very miserable, and certainly they did not appear +as if they could contend with the well-mounted Indians we had +encountered. These Comanche Indians, as the Mexicans call them, succeed +in their forays by the rapidity of their movements. They will +accomplish a hundred miles in the day, driving several horses before +them. When one is tired, they mount another. If any are killed by +over-riding, their places can always be supplied from the nearest, +cattle estate. They strike terror among the widely-scattered +inhabitants of the borders; but there is no doubt, if they were bravely +and systematically opposed, they would be very quickly driven away, or +compelled to have recourse to more peaceable occupations for their +support Durango is a pretty little town, with white-washed, flat-roofed +houses, standing on a plain surrounded by high rugged hills, a +remarkable feature being the number and size of the American aloes which +grow in the neighbourhood. We put up at a _meson_, not remarkable for +its cleanliness or the luxury of its provisions, and were not sorry to +find ourselves once more in our saddles on our way back to Mazatlan. We +reached that place without any adventure; and the same evening, having +wished our kind friends, Captain Driscoll and Mr Dwyer, good-bye, +sailed for San Francisco, the wonderful port of the gold regions of +California. + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +CALIFORNIAN EXPERIENCES. + +One fine morning we found the _Triton_--one of a crowd of vessels of all +rigs and sizes--standing in with a fair breeze towards the far-famed +harbour of San Francisco. High black rocks ran out of the sea before +us, like monsters guarding the entrance to that domain of boundless +wealth. Loud roars, too, saluted our ears, which, on a further +examination of the rocks, were found to proceed from a large +congregation of sea-lions assembled at their bases. As we glided by, +not fifty fathoms from some of the rocks, they looked up at us with +inquiring eyes, as if to know why we had come there; and, certainly, +from their formidable heads, they appeared as if they were well able to +defend their native territory. Jerry could not resist the temptation of +firing his rifle among them. It had a wonderful effect on the whole +body; big and little sea-lions, and cows, and seals, all began +floundering away in the greatest dismay into the water--their +awkward-looking movements being very amusing; at the same time, +thousands of birds, which had been perched on the rocks, or floating in +the water, rose into the air, with loud screams, circling round our +heads; while porpoises, or some other huge monsters of the deep, kept +gambolling around us, and now and then leaping out of the water in +sportive humour. + +All this exhibition of wild animal life was, it must be remembered, +within a few miles of the rich and populous city of San Francisco. The +transition was very great; yet but a short time back a rude fort and a +few small huts were the only settled abodes of man. The actual harbour +begins at a spot called the Golden Gate, where a high rock with a flat +summit projects into the water. On it the American Government are +constructing a fort, which no hostile vessel will be able to pass with +impunity. Passing this point, we saw before us on the right a perfect +forest of masts, with every flag under the sun flying aloft; and behind +them appeared, on a low hill rising like an amphitheatre from the +harbour, the far-famed city itself. It was a busy, exciting scene. +Some of the vessels brought bands of English adventurers; others crowds +of Chinese, with round felt hats and long tails; others Malays; and some +even seemed to have blacks on board. At a short distance from the city +were moored several large ships, their masts struck, their rigging +unrove, deserted by their crews, and some by their officers likewise. +The doctor, Jerry, and I, were the only persons who accompanied the +captain on shore. The mates remained to guard against all risk of any +of the crew deserting. It was only just daylight when we landed, but +all the world was astir. Time is considered too precious here to lose a +moment. The town itself presented an extraordinary collection of strong +contrasts: there were wooden sheds, and tents, and mud hovels, mixed up +with vast stores and large dwelling-houses; while carts, and waggons, +and coaches of every variety of build were moving about in all +directions, among people from every part of Europe--Germans, Italians, +French, Greeks, and English--the latter, of course, predominating as to +numbers; Yankees, with their keen, intelligent looks; Californians, in +their serapes; Mexicans, with their laced breeches and cuffs; and +Chilians, in broad-brimmed hats; Sandwich Islanders, and Negroes from +every part of Africa; Chinese, with their long tails and varied coloured +robes; and Malays and other people from the East. Indeed, Europe, Asia, +Africa, and America were there fully represented,--all brought together +for the one object--a search for gold--all thinking of their own +business, and caring little or nothing for anybody else, so that their +aims were not interfered with. Those who had been to the diggings were +pretty clearly to be distinguished by the one dark brown earthy hue +which pervaded their dress, and such parts of their countenances as +their huge tangled beards and whiskers allowed to be visible. + +We first went to the market, to obtain provisions for the ship. It was +already crowded with purchasers. There was a magnificent display of +fruit and vegetables, and fish of all sorts and strange shapes, and huge +lobsters and turtle of a size to make an alderman's mouth water; and +then in the meat-market there were hung up before the butchers' stalls +huge elks with their superb antlers, and great big brown bears--just +such monsters as the one we saw captured, for they are considered +dainties here--and beautiful antelopes, and squirrels, and hares, and +rabbits in vast heaps--not to speak of pigs, and sheep, and oxen. The +beef, we heard, was, and found to be, excellent. I mention these things +to show how the inhabitants of a vast city like San Francisco, though +just sprung into existence, can, by proper arrangement, be fed. A large +number of the shops are kept by Chinese, who sell all the fancy and +ornamental work, and act as washerwomen. They are said to be great +rogues, and are, under that pretext, often cruelly treated by greater +rogues than themselves. It is a sad thing to see heathen people coming +among nominal Christians, who, paying no regard to the religion they are +supposed to profess, prevent them from wishing to inquire into the truth +of a faith they might, with a good example before them, be tempted to +adopt. One Chinese appeared to us so much like another, with their +thick lips, little slits of eyes, ugly parchment faces, in which age +makes no perceptible difference, that it seemed as if we were meeting +the same person over and over again. The signs over their shops are +written in Chinese, and translated into the oddest English and Spanish I +ever saw. One of the features in the street population of this city +which struck us were the shoe-blacks. Each is provided with a +comfortable arm-chair and a newspaper. He slips his employer into the +chair, hands him the paper to read, and then kneeling down, works away +till he has polished the leather boots; for which his demand is a +quarter of a dollar--the smallest coin in circulation, it seemed to us. +The sum is paid without a word; off walks the man with the clean boots, +and one with a dirty pair soon takes his place. + +There is no want of restaurants and cafes, or of places where food in +abundance could be procured, though the price was rather astonishing. +Captain Frankland had some business to transact with a merchant--he left +us at one of them to dine. When he rejoined us, he told us that he +would take us to a scene in which he hoped we should never be tempted to +mix. We went out, and soon reached a magnificent building, full of +spacious halls, with an orchestra keeping up a succession of attractive +airs. Making our way, not without difficulty, through the crowd, we saw +before us several long, green-covered tables, surrounded by people, who +appeared to be engaged in playing, on a grand scale, every conceivable +game of chance. Never did I see countenances so palpably expressive of +the worst passions of our evil nature. The keepers of the banks were +evidently villains of the darkest dye. They sat with their revolvers on +the table, guarding the heaps of gold before them, as they skilfully +managed the cards and dice over which they presided. The captain +assured us that they and those in league with them--the professional +players--always contrived to collect the largest proportion of the gold +in circulation--many of their foolish victims dissipating in one evening +all the hard-earned gains of a year. There were ladies, too, among +them, gambling as eagerly as the men--dishonouring their sex. The sight +of those countenances and the whole air of the place was sickening. +"Fifty ounces"--"A hundred"--"Two hundred ounces"--were the words we +heard repeated on every side. Presently a man started up--a fine, +handsome young fellow--from before whom a heap of gold had been swept, +clutching his hair. "And I was to have started for home to-morrow. O +Mary!" he exclaimed, unconsciously, as he passed us. There was the +report of a pistol--a cry. The young man was picked up dead at the +door. The players went on as before, scarcely turning their heads to +hear the account. Who the unhappy youth was, no one knew. We had seen +enough to answer the captain's object in taking us to the place. We +strolled on through the city till we reached the Chinese quarter. +There, also, we were attracted by a strange noise intended for music, +produced by two stringed-fiddles, violoncellos, drums, and gongs, into a +building--a very shabby place; yet in the centre was a table with heaps +of gold upon it, and surrounded by a number of odd little men in wide +jackets, short trousers, long tails at their backs, huge embroidered +slippers on their feet, all deeply engaged, as if some most serious +matter were going forward--their queer eyes twinkling with mistrust as +they followed the course of a game which was being played. In the +middle of the table was a heap of counters covered by a bowl, under +which the players put their hands, and drew out a number of them at a +time, which they counted with a long stick, and then the heaps of money +changed owners, but on what grounds we could in no way discover. + +"You laugh at those odd little Chinese, and think them fail objects to +joke about," observed the captain; "but we must remember that they are +men with souls to be saved, responsible beings, like the unhappy people +in that gorgeous saloon we were in just now. The vice in which we have +seen them indulging is the same, though, as their light is less, they +may be less to blame. My hope is, that what you have seen to-night will +make you wish never to see the same sights again." + +In the public room of the hotel, where we remained for the night, a +number of people were collected from all parts of the world. Some had +been at the diggings; some had made money; several had come back as poor +as they went, and much the worse in health; others were about to go up +to try their fortunes, with secret hopes of succeeding where others had +failed. The conversation of many of them was very amusing. One man +especially interested us by the account he gave of his first journey up +the country. He was evidently, from the tone of his voice and manners, +a gentleman by education, though in appearance as rough and +weather-beaten as a navvy who has put on a black coat for Sunday. He +addressed himself to us, as he probably thought that we had come out to +turn gold-diggers, and he wished to warn us of the dangers to be +encountered. + +"I had a good appointment in England, but I wanted to become rich in a +hurry, so I threw it up, and came out here," he began. "You may doubt +the wisdom of the proceeding; so do I now. I had a companion, and with +him and the mate of the ship I arrived in, as also her carpenter and a +Chinese boy, I arranged to go up the country. With the implements we +had provided, and as much food as we could carry, we got on board a +small schooner, bound up the river to Stockton. We had on board a +strange assemblage of people. Many of them looked quite capable of +cutting our throats. They were mostly armed, and bowie-knives and +revolvers were constantly exhibited. When after two days' voyage we +landed, we were glad to get into a wretched hut, where we could obtain +food, and rest, and shelter, to prepare ourselves for our tramp to the +diggings. We remained only one day, for the charges were so high at the +inn that we should have been ruined had we stayed longer. Of the forty +people who had come up in the schooner, very few accompanied us. We +found a party of about thirty starting, with five or six mules carrying +provisions. We joined ourselves to them. Each of us had a rifle slung +to his back, in addition to a week's provisions and our mining utensils, +while our pistols and knives were stuck in our belts. We went on for +two days pretty easily. I shall never forget the appearance of some +people we met, who had come overland from the western states of +America,--their haggard eyes, long matted hair, shrunk forms, and +tattered clothes, which hung on them like loose rags fluttering in the +wind. They were the remnants of a large party, the greater number of +whom with their horses and cattle had died on the way, from the +hardships they had to encounter. The latter part of the road, they +said, was strewed with the whitening bones of men and animals, +broken-down waggons, and abandoned furniture. The next day's journey +gave us a specimen of what those poor fellows had endured. The sun came +out with intense fury, and struck scorching down on our heads. Not a +drop of water could be got. There was a pool, we were told, some way +on. We reached the spot: it was dry. Our thirst grew intolerable. +Those who had been accustomed to take spirits suffered more than the +rest. We lay down that night at a place where there was no wood. We +had no fire, therefore, to cook our provisions. We could not eat the +meat we had brought with us raw. All night long the wolves howled +horribly in our ears. At daybreak we arose and pushed on. There was a +water-hole, we were told, a few miles ahead. We reached the spot: it +was dry. Many who had hitherto held out gave way to despair. The +muleteers had skins with water, but they guarded them, revolver in hand, +to moisten their own and their mules' lips. Their lives depended on +those of their animals. A few of us had flasks, but we could only +venture to take a drop of the precious fluid at a time. One man had a +bottle of brandy. He boasted at first of his cleverness in having +secured it. Now, he went about offering the whole of it for a drop of +water. Several of the brandy drinkers sank down. They had agreed to +keep together. They implored us to help them. A deaf ear was turned to +their entreaties. Our own lives depended on our hastening on. Three or +four others dropped by the way, one by one. No one waited for them. +`On, on, on!' was the cry; `Water, water, water!' At length, towards +evening, the mules pricked up their ears: trees appeared in the +distance. We hurried on. A glittering stream gladdened our sight. We +rushed into it, greedily lapping up the water. Our mules drank eagerly. +We felt revived and strengthened. There was abundance of wood: we +lighted a fire and dressed our provisions. Several birds, and two or +three animals were shot to increase our feast. + +"Ha, ha, ha, how we laughed. To-morrow, we said, we shall be able to +push on to the mines, and begin to dig for gold. In an instant every +one was talking of gold. `Gold, gold, gold,' was heard on every side. +Did any one think of the poor wretches we had left dying on the road-- +men--brethren by nature, by a common faith--men with souls? Not one of +us thought of going back. At all events, not one of us offered to go +back. An all-powerful loadstone was dragging us on--the lust of getting +gold. Had we gone back to relieve our fellow-beings, we should have +been unable to proceed the next day for the diggings. A whole day would +have been lost. Oh, most foul and wretched was the mania which inspired +us! Unnatural! no; it was that of fallen, debased human nature; it was +too true to that nature. Those miserable men must have died horribly-- +devoured by wolves or scalped by Indians. The next day we pushed +eagerly on; yet we had to sleep high up on the side of a snow-capped +mountain; thence we were to descend to the scene of our labours. +Bitterly cold it was; yet we dared not move, for frightful precipices +yawned around. We reached the first diggings that evening. The miners +had just knocked off work, and crowded round us to hear the news, and to +see what we had brought. Rough as they looked, by far the greater +number, I judged by the tone of their voices, belong to the educated +classes. And shall I become like one of these men? I thought. I soon +became like one of them, and rougher still. `I expected a friend about +this time,' said one, describing him. He was among those who had fallen +and been deserted. He made but few other inquiries. He knew that such +events were too common to complain. I saw him brush away a tear, as he +turned from us. That man was too good for the company he was among. We +encamped by ourselves, we knew not whom we must trust. After this our +travelling party broke up. My companions from the ship and I were to +work together. We fixed on a spot, and erected our rude hut; then we +bought a rocker and shovel, pick-axe and spade, with two tin pans, and +set to work. I dug out the earth, another carried it, and a third +washed it in the rocker. Our success was tolerable; but it was many +days before we got enough to pay for the articles we had purchased, and +our provisions. In the meantime, what scenes of wretchedness, misery, +dissipation, and violence, did I behold! In every direction men were +dying of fever and dysentery. At night the gambling booths were filled +with those who rapidly got rid of the earnings of many days. I was +witness, too, of an encounter between two large parties of diggers. One +party had encroached on the ground prepared by the other, and refused to +quit it. Bowie-knives, and pick-axes, and hatchets, rifles and pistols, +were instantly brought into play. A sanguinary encounter ensued. +Numbers fell on both sides; at last one party turned and fled. I +visited the scene of the strife soon after. A dozen or more human +beings lay on the ground dead, or dying--arms cut off--pierced through +and through with knives--skulls fractured with spades and pick-axes, and +many shot to death. The dying had been left to die alone without aid or +pity, while their companions returned to their gold digging. Often and +often I sickened at the sights I beheld, but still I continued at the +work. I was compelled to continue at it. I had given up everything for +it. I was like a slave chained to it by the leg. Gladly would I have +gone back to my steady occupation and quiet life, surrounded by those I +respected and loved. I have only partly described the hardships we +endured. We had famine, and cold, and rain. Often we were without +fuel, our clothing was ragged and insufficient, and sickness in every +form came among us. Besides desperate quarrels among the diggers, the +Indians came down upon us--fierce, sanguinary warriors, eager for our +scalps. Their vengeance had been excited by aggressions made on them by +the whites. We could scarcely leave the camp without risking an attack +from them. Many diggers became their victims. Such was our life for +months. At length my companions and I, by unexpected good fortune, +saved a sufficient amount of gold dust to enable us to return to San +Francisco. Steady work at home would have enabled me to lay by nearly +as much, while my health and spirits would not have been broken as they +now are. We kept together to defend each other. Many diggers on their +way to the city, after labouring for years, have been robbed and +murdered. My companions spent most of their hard won wealth, and +returned to the diggings, where, one after the other, they fell victims +to disease, or the knives of assassins. I had had enough of the life, +and my knowledge of business enabled me to procure a situation in a +merchant's office in this place, where, by employing the sum I had +scraped together, and by stript attention to business, I have realised +an amount four times as large, in a quarter of the time it took me to +collect it at the diggings." + +"What you have said, sir, is very true," observed another gentleman +present. "Things, however, have somewhat mended of late. Still, a +gentleman has to lead little better than a dog's life in those regions. +For my part, although I was what is considered very lucky, I soon +sickened of it, and considered myself fortunate in being able to get +away with my gold in my pocket and a whole skin on my back. Still this +is a wonderful country, and will become a great country some day. I +have travelled over a good deal of it. Not long ago I travelled up one +of the most beautiful valleys in the world. At the bottom was a green +grassy sward with a pure bright stream running rapidly through it, over +a clear, pebbly bottom. The hills on either side were clothed with +trees of various descriptions, rocks here and there jutting out between +them of many fantastic forms, while my ears were assailed with the +cheerful sound of falling water, and my eyes gladdened by the sight of +sparkling cascades flowing into basins, whence arose masses of white +foam. Further on arose, appearing at the end of the valley, range +beyond range of mountains, the higher capped with snow. Though the sun +was hot, the air was pure and cool as it came off the mountains, +tempered by the numerous cascades. At length I reached a spot where the +valley widened, and there, spread out before me, lay a blue shining lake +fringed by lofty trees, with the hills rising gradually behind them, +while the water seemed alive with fish, which leaped from its calm +depths, and with the water-fowl which skimmed over its surface. You'll +all say that was a lovely spot." + +We all agreed that it must be, and that we should like to take up our +abode there. + +"So I thought," he answered. "But as a man cannot well live on fish and +water-fowl without corn, and potatoes, and vegetables, not to speak of +beef and mutton, and none of these things were to be procured within a +hundred miles of the place, I was glad to get out of it. There's +another wonderful spot away to the south, near Sousa, where I have been. +There is a stream called the Stanislas river. Up it I went, and then +journeyed along one of its tributaries, the high banks of which are +covered with trees, till I reached a broad valley. I could scarcely +believe my eyes. There arose before me a number of trees larger and +taller than any I supposed existed on the face of the globe. It is +called the Mammoth-tree Valley, and is 1500 feet above the level of the +sea. There were no less than ninety of them scattered over a space of +about forty acres, and rising high above the surrounding pine forest. +They are a species of pine or cone-bearing trees. [Coniferae +(Wellingtonia gigantea.)] In the larger ones the branches do not begin +to spread out till the stem has reached a height of 200 feet, and some +are upwards of 300 feet high. One was 32 feet in diameter--that is, 96 +feet in circumference--while the smallest and weakest is not less than +16 feet in diameter. The tops of nearly all have been broken off by +storms, or by the snow resting on them. The Indians have injured others +by lighting fires at their bases, while the white men have cut down one +and carried away the bark of another to exhibit in far-off lands. It +took five men twenty-five days to cut down the `Big tree,' for so it was +called. They accomplished their work by boring holes in the stem, and +then cutting towards them with the axe. The stump which remains has +been smoothed on the top, and the owner of the property, who acted as my +guide, assured me that sixteen couple could waltz on it. In one a +spiral staircase has been cut, so that I was able to ascend to a +considerable height by it. My acquaintance, the owner of the estate on +which these monsters grow, has given names to all of them. One he calls +Uncle Tom's Cabin, because there is a hollow in the trunk capable of +holding from twenty to thirty people. One hollow trunk has been broken +off and lies on the ground, and a man on horseback can ride from one end +of it to the other. There are two trees called Husband and Wife, and +another he called the Family Group, consisting of father, mother, and +rather a large progeny of twenty-five children, regular sons of Anak. +The father fell some time ago, and striking another tree broke off the +upper part. That portion measures 300 feet, and the part which still +stands 150--so that the whole tree was 450 feet in height. Three +hundred feet is the ordinary height of the giants of the forest. From +various calculations it would seem that these trees must have existed +for three thousand years at least--perhaps more; I can only say that I +considered the spectacle well worthy of the long journey I took to +behold it." + +We thanked the stranger for the account he had given us. We heard many +other wonderful stories, the truth of some of which we had reason to +doubt, so I have not repeated them here. Captain Frankland was very +glad to get away from San Francisco without losing any of his own crew. +Probably, had he allowed them to have any communication with the shore, +this would not have been the case. + +On our return on board, the first mate told the captain that a strange +brig had come into the harbour and anchored near us--that soon afterward +Manuel Silva was seen holding some communication with the people on +board. In a little time a boat came off from her, and after some +conversation with a man in the boat, he said that he must bid us +good-bye. No persuasions the mate used could induce him to stop, and he +stepped into the boat, and nothing more had been seen of him. We were +very sorry to lose him, and it struck us at the time, I remember, that +there was something mysterious in his way of departure. + +We were at sea about twenty-two days without falling in with land. It +was late one evening when we sighted Woahoo, the largest of the Sandwich +Islands, of which Honolulu is the chief port and capital of the kingdom. +It was dark by the time we brought up in the roadstead outside the +harbour. As I, of course, had read how Captain Cook was killed by the +Sandwich Islanders, and had often seen prints in which a number of naked +black fellows are hurling their spears and darts at him, I had an idea +that I knew all about them, and had pictured to myself exactly what I +should see when next morning we went on shore with our boat's crew +well-armed to trade with them. The next morning at daybreak the anchor +was hove up, and with a light breeze we stood in through a narrow +passage in a coral reef, which extends from one point of land to +another, and forms the harbour. What was my surprise to see before us, +when we dropped our anchor, a neat, pretty-looking town, with a fort on +the right side bristling with cannon, a fertile valley extending far +into the country on the left, and lofty mountains rising in the +distance. Over the fort flew the Hawaian flag. It is formed of the +British union-jack, with alternate blue, red, and white stripes. The +streets are broad, and run at right angles to each other. There were +numerous hotels, some of them really very handsome buildings on an +extensive scale, and managed after the American fashion, while in the +streets were a number of large and well-furnished shops. There are +several churches and chapels of very respectable architectural +pretensions. The Custom House is a handsome stone building near the +fort, and the regulations as to duties are strictly observed. The chief +place of business is in the centre of the town; and the most fashionable +locality, where the residences of the leading people among the natives +are situated, is a green sward skirted by the beach and shaded by lofty +cocoa-nut and plantain trees. The European villas are generally further +back--many of them very prettily built, and surrounded by gardens full +of the most delicious fruit and flowers. Many of the foreign consuls +and merchants live in villas a few miles up the country. Good wharves +have been built, and ships of 700 tons can refit alongside them. +Altogether Honolulu is a very wonderful place. + +Jerry and I and the doctor, as usual, went on shore to see what was to +be seen, and this time we were accompanied by Mr Brand. The ship was +to remain in the harbour for several days, and we were very anxious to +make a journey to some distance into the interior, that we might see the +natives as they were away from the centre of civilisation. We had +introductions here to several gentlemen, who promised to forward our +views. We were amused with the extraordinary appearance of the natives +in the streets--barbarism and civilisation met together. The former +dress of the men was the taro, a kilt joined between the legs, so as to +form a wide and very short pair of breeches. Some to this now add a +blue shirt, sometimes with the tails tucked in, sometimes flowing +gracefully. Some wear cast-off coats, or jackets, or trousers, of +Europeans; but few of the common people have more than one of these +garments on at a time, and still fewer ever encumber themselves with +shoes and stockings. The women had on generally long blue chemises, or +gowns and bonnets of every variety of colour and shape, and put on in +all sorts of ways--some placing them hind part before; indeed, they had +apparently exercised their ingenuity to make them as unbecoming as +possible. Formerly, we were told, their head-dress was a wreath of +flowers, which suited their dark skins, and had a very pretty effect. +The chiefs, however, and their wives, were dressed in European costume, +and the king in public wears the Windsor uniform. It is supposed that +the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands derive their origin from the +Malays, and that at a very remote period a Malay junk, or fleet of +junks, was cast on those shores. Their skins have the same dark hue, +and their features the same form, as the Malays of the present day. It +is said that this group is becoming rapidly depopulated. The people +themselves have taken up the idea that their race is to become extinct, +and seem willing to yield to their fate without a struggle. The +diseases introduced by Europeans have tended to cause this, but they +themselves have many pernicious customs. Among others, no sooner does a +native feel himself attacked with fever than he rushes into the sea, or +into the nearest cold stream, as he fancies, to cool himself. The +result is that--the pores being closed instead of kept open and +perspiration encouraged--death comes in a few hours. Among our friends +here was Mr Callard, a missionary, who had resided in the island for +some years. He has gone into a hamlet, and found not a person remaining +alive. On one occasion he met an old man sitting at the door of a hut; +he asked where the rest of the people were. + +"All dead," was the answer. + +"Then do you come with me, and I will provide for your wants." + +"No," said the native gloomily; "I will not move. I am preparing to +follow them." + +The islands produce the paper mulberry, from which their cloths and +cordage are made; the acacia, used in the construction of their canoes; +the banana, the sugar-cane, the yam, the bread-fruit; and, the most +important of all, the taro root. Of late years, coffee, cotton, rice, +tobacco, indigo, melons, the vine, oranges, peaches, figs, tamarinds, +guavas, and many other plants and fruits have been introduced. The +natives pay the greatest attention to the cultivation of the taro root. +It is planted in square patches, either in swamps or in ground easily +irrigated, with banks and sluices, so that the water can be let on at +pleasure. It takes eleven months to come to perfection. When dried, it +is pounded on a smooth stone by means of another held in the hand, while +a little water is poured on it, when it is reduced to a paste called +poi, which is then fit to eat. Much labour and patience is required to +bring it to perfection; and by the exercise of these qualities, there +can be no doubt that the natives have acquired those habits of industry +which are scarcely known among other savages. The only animals found in +the island were dogs and pigs, undoubtedly brought there by their +ancestors. The roots of the taro are from six inches to a foot in +length, and three or four inches in diameter. In substance it is rather +more fibrous than the potato. It is often eaten whole, like a potato. +The skin is scraped off with a shell, and the taro, split into two or +three pieces, is then placed on leaves in an oven containing stones, +heated as usual, the whole being then covered up with earth to steam for +half an hour. + +Honolulu has become a great place of call for ships, from all parts of +the world, since San Francisco sprang into existence. Vessels coming +round the Horn, to make a good offing, steer for it. Others from +Australia, China, and the Eastern Archipelago, touch here; while whalers +have for long been in the habit of putting in here to refit and recruit. +The extreme healthiness of the islands induces many people from +California to come here, and the hotels and lodging-houses are filled +with invalids, often possessors of considerable wealth; but, at the same +time, from their profligate and dissipated habits, they set but a bad +example to the natives. The natives are called Kanakas. They are +generally fine-looking men. The women are fairer, and with regular +features; many of them ride on horseback with men's saddles, dressed in +gay riding habits, and with a wreath of flowers encircling their raven +tresses, which gives them somewhat of a theatrical appearance. The +islands are governed by a sovereign, King Kamehameha the Third, who has +a large family, and an income of about 1500 pounds a-year. He has +likewise an army, clothed in gay uniforms, but there are almost as many +officers as men; indeed, as the kingdom is under the joint protection of +England, America, and France, there can be but little employment for +soldiers. The police are of far more use in apprehending drunken +sailors, and keeping order in the town. They are dressed in a blue +uniform, with a gold-lace cap, and armed with a staff with a brass knob. +The monarchy is hereditary, and limited. The king's ministry consists +of a premier and other officers, similar to those of the English +Government, and many of them are English or Americans, and very +intelligent men. We found that in the town there were all sorts of +places of public amusement, and, among others, a theatre, where English +plays are acted, and where the king constantly attends. We went, and +were not a little surprised to see the boxes filled with very +gaily-dressed people, mostly whites. It was a very hot night. The play +was "Hamlet." Hamlet had been using a pocket-handkerchief very +liberally all the evening, pressing it to his brow and cheeks, and at +last he said, "Oh, that this too, too solid flesh _wouldn't_ melt, and +resolve itself into a dew!" Jerry and I applauded him very loudly. He +gave us a wink, as much as to say, "I see you understand me." He was +evidently a wag, and Hamlet was not suited to him, nor he to Hamlet. +There was no reason, however, because the royal Dane had been murdered, +that his son should murder the Queen's English at the rate he did, or +the character of Hamlet as Shakspeare drew it. Who would have thought +of Shakspeare in the Sandwich Islands? Shakspeare never acted in so +pretty a theatre. + +Many of the natives, although able to afford habitations of a European +style, still live on in those used by their ancestors. They are +generally of an oblong shape, with a very high-pitched roof, thatched +with grass and plantain leaves; and as the eaves slant down to within a +short distance from the ground, they have a very picturesque appearance. +They are cool in summer, and are impervious to rain. The ceilings, +which are very elegant, are composed of polished bamboo, neatly +interwoven, while the floors are carpeted with mats of coloured grass. +The walls are decorated with a native cloth, called tapa, which serves +the purpose of tapestry. The house is divided into separate chambers at +night by mats hung up on lines. The beds are primitive; a mat serves +for every purpose, and a wooden roller as a pillow. Many of the Kanakas +are well educated, and read and write not only their own, but several +European languages likewise. There is one newspaper in the Hawaian +language, if not more, and several works have been published in it, +while the translation of the Bible is to be seen in every native hut. +Of course, all this information I picked up from different people during +our stay at Honolulu. + +"We have not had any fun for a long time; I wonder what will turn up +next," said Jerry to me, after we had been there a couple of days. + +The next morning, Mr Callard, the missionary, who was an old friend of +Captain Frankland's, came on board, and invited Jerry and me and Mr +McRitchie, and Mr Brand, if he could be spared, to accompany him to the +large island of Hawaii, round which he was going to make a visitation +tour. Having to wait here for information on some important matters, he +gave us the leave we asked. + +"You may take Ben Yool with you also," said he. "The schooner is rather +short-handed, and you will find him useful at all events." + +Jerry and I were highly pleased with this, for Ben was a great +favourite. We were soon ready with our rifles and knapsacks, not +forgetting to take old Surley with us; it was a long time since the poor +fellow had had a run on shore. + +"Take care that the natives don't cook and eat him," said Mr Renshaw, +as we shoved off. + +The little mission-schooner, the _Dove_, was in readiness to receive us, +and in a few minutes, with a fair breeze, we were standing away to the +southward, towards the large island of Hawaii, or Owhyhee, on the shores +of which the immortal Cook lost his life. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +EXCURSION IN HAWAII. + +We had a pleasant run for two days, with a light wind, and hoped the +next morning to land at Kailua, the capital of the island of Owhyhee; +but at sunset a sudden squall struck the little vessel, and had not Ben +Yool been at the helm, and instantly luffed up, while Jerry and I let +fly the foresheet, we should in all probability have been over, and +become food for the sharks. It came on very dark and blowy; and as it +was too late to make a harbour, we gave the shore a wide berth, and ran +on. The next forenoon, when we made the land, we found that we were to +the southward of Kailua. As we stood in, Mr Callard told us that on +the shore of Karakakooa Bay, which was before us, Captain Cook met his +death, and that he would show us the very spot where that event +happened. I felt as interested as if I were about to visit classic +ground. Often and often as I had been reading through Cook's Voyages +with delight, I little thought that I should see the very spots he +describes, much less that one which has become sacred in our memory. +Before us appeared a line of volcanic cliffs, of considerable height, +the land rising again above them, covered with the richest verdure; +which makes the summits of the rocky and lofty mountains beyond appear +still more sterile and uninviting. To the right, among groves of palms +and cocoa-nut trees, appeared the steep, sloping roofs of a native +village; while on the left, where the cliffs sink towards the water, and +groves of various tropical trees appear scattered about, our friend +pointed out to us the very spot where Cook was killed. The cliffs near +are full of caves, which are used by the natives as places of sepulture; +and in one of these, it is said, the bones of the great navigator were +deposited by the priests, and valued by them as relics. Our friend told +us that he had constantly made inquiries among the chiefs and natives as +to the affair, and that he is certain the attack on the whites was not +premeditated. Some of the people had stolen a boat for the sake of the +nails in her, with which they wished to make fish-hooks. He landed with +some boats to recover it. While speaking to some of the chiefs on the +subject, a number of natives collected; and without his orders the +marines, believing that he was about to be attacked, fired. A chief was +killed. The natives advanced, and, while he was in the act of ordering +his people to desist, he was pierced through the body by a spear. Grief +and dismay took possession of the hearts of both parties when he fell. +By the then superstitious natives he had been looked upon as their +deified and long-lost sovereign, Rono. This Rono (so their legends +asserted) had in a fit of anger killed his wife, when, repenting of the +act, his senses deserted him, and he went about the islands wrestling +with whomsoever he met. At last he took his departure in a vessel of a +strange build, and no one knew where he had gone, but all expected him +to return. When Captain Cook appeared, the priests believed that he was +Rono, and, clothing him with the garments kept for their god, led him to +their temples, and offered sacrifices to propitiate his favour, while +the people prostrated themselves before him--he all the time little +suspecting the reason of the honours paid him. After his death some of +the people naturally doubted that he could be Rono, but others still +affirmed that he was; and it is believed that the priests took some of +his bones and preserved them in a wicker basket covered over with red +feathers, which are highly prized by the natives. In this they were +every year carried about from temple to temple, when the priests went to +collect tribute of the people. After the abolition of idolatry in 1819, +it is not known what became of them; perhaps they were concealed by some +old priest who still clung secretly to the ancient faith. + +Talking of nails, it is extraordinary what excellent fish-hooks the +natives will manufacture out of them. They prefer them to the best made +in England. They still set a high value on them; but they are not quite +so simple-minded as some of the Friendly islanders we heard of, who, on +obtaining some nails, planted them, in the hope of obtaining a large +crop from the produce! Scarcely had we dropped our anchor when we were +surrounded by the canoes of the natives, who wore but the primitive +maro. They brought off bread-fruits, cocoa-nuts, bananas, and other +products of the soil, in the hope of thus making themselves welcome. +One of them, who spoke English tolerably, undertook to pilot our boat on +shore. We were eager to land. As we pulled in, a number of men, women, +and children, came down to welcome us. The men, like those in the +canoes, wore the taro, but the women were dressed with the loose blue +gowns I have described, and with wreaths of flowers round their heads. +We ran in among the masses of lava which lined the shore, and were +kindly helped by the people to land. We observed that they were all +especially grave, for nowhere are more merry creatures found than the +native women. As we walked along they followed us in silence. At +length our guide stopped and pointed to the ground on which we stood. + +"There, white men--there, friends--there it was your great sea-chieftain +fell." He repeated, we found, the same words in his own language. The +natives listened to what he said, and then hung their heads ashamed, as +if they had been guilty of the sad deed. We broke off several pieces of +the lava from about the spot, to take to our friends at home, and sent +them on board the schooner. We were to accompany the missionary +overland to Kailua, where the schooner was to meet us. After the +missionary had spoken to the people, we were anxious to proceed on our +journey, and one of the principal natives, who lived a few miles to the +north, insisted that we should remain at his hut for the night; and we, +accordingly, gladly accompanied him. We found the feast preparing +outside the door, in the usual oven. Knowing that Englishmen have an +objection to eat dogs, he had killed a fatted pig. The oven was a +simple affair. A hole was dug in the earth, in which a large fire was +lighted upon some stones, till all the earth around was hot; piggy was +then put in, and the hole was covered up with loose earth; clouds of +steam then issued from the earth, and when no more was perceptible the +meat was declared to be cooked properly. We all sat round on mats in +the primitive fashion, the food being placed before us either in +calabashes or on large leaves. Instead of bread we had the bread-fruit. +It has somewhat the flavour of bread, and answers its purpose, but has +neither the appearance nor consistence of our staff of life. It is +about the size of the shaddock, and, when fresh gathered, the flavour of +the citron; but it is always eaten baked, when it has the solidity of a +roasted chestnut. Besides these luxuries, we had some fish nicely +cooked, which we ate with the thick interior of the cocoa-nut, which may +truly be called the cream, while the juice served to quench our thirst. +We had a number of visitors, who all, both men and women, chatted away +most merrily, especially the women, who kept up a continued peal of +laughter. At night the hut was lighted up with chips of a resinous +wood, called kukia, which were stuck all round on the posts which +supported the roof; and when we expressed a wish to retire to rest, mats +were hung up to partition off our sleeping chambers. + +It is, I find, impossible to describe all the interesting habits and +customs we observed of this primitive people. The next day about noon +we found ourselves, on issuing from a grove of cocoa-nut trees, on the +shore of a beautiful bay, with high black rocks running out on either +side, and a yellow, sandy beach. From the way the sea broke, first with +great violence, and then a second time with diminished force, there were +evidently two lines of coral reefs, one without the other. A number of +people were seated on the rocks watching with great interest what was +going forward. Some men, women, and children were in the water, while +others with their boards, about a foot wide and four feet long, in their +hands, were preparing to follow them. Placing the boards on the water, +they threw themselves on them, and then swam out, diving under the +breakers of the inner bar, and appearing on the in-shore side of the +outer one. The great art appeared to be, to remain on the steep slope +of the outer sea-roller as it swept majestically on towards the land, +and then, just before it broke, to dive under it, and to reappear +mounting up the side of the following watery hill. Sometimes a lad +would keep above water too long, and the surf would roll him over, and +carry away his board; but he quickly recovered it, and soon regained his +credit. Shouts of laughter bursting forth on all sides when any such +mishap occurred, showed that there was little fear of damage. The women +and children kept generally on the inner bar, but were quite as expert +as the men. On mounting to the top of the rocks we saw two of the men +swim out beyond the rest, on the further side of the breakers. The +natives seemed to be watching them attentively. Soon one of them was +seen to dive, then the other. In a little time they both appeared, +flourishing their knives above their heads, and at the same moment two +huge black bodies floated to the surface, and were borne in by the +rollers towards the shore. + +"What can they be?" I exclaimed to Jerry. + +"Sharks," he answered, watching them. "Well, I should like to know how +to tackle to with one of these monsters. I own that I shouldn't much +like to have to fight one of them with a suit of armour on, and a spear +or battle-axe in my hand. I suspect even Saint George who killed the +dragon would have found it somewhat a tough job, and yet these naked +fellows make no difficulty about the matter." + +"It is just what a man has been used to," I answered. "I daresay one of +them would be very unhappy with a suit of armour on and a battle-axe." + +No surprise seemed to be created by the achievement, and the bold +swimmers took their places among the rest on the rollers as if nothing +had happened. When swimming out in this way, every man has a knife +secured to his board. As soon as he sees a shark, he swims away a short +distance. The shark approaches--he pretends to be very awkward. +Keeping his eye on the monster, who begins to fancy he has got a feast +prepared, he watches his time, and suddenly diving, sticks his sharp +weapon with all his might in the under part of the monster. Sometimes +the shark attempted to fly, but generally the blow is fatal, and he is +towed in triumph on shore. + +After spending a day at Kailua, the capital of the island, where there +is a fort and a governor, and where several merchants reside to supply +whalers with provisions, we embarked once more on board the schooner, +and ran round the south of the island to a small harbour in the +neighbourhood of Whyhohino, a chief missionary-station. We were +received very kindly by the missionaries, and they procured us horses to +enable us to accomplish one of the chief objects which had brought us to +the place--a visit to the summit of the great volcano of Kilauea. They +also found us two guides who were to accompany us to the crater, while +two other men were to remain with the horses below. Mr Callard himself +had his duties to attend to, so that he could not accompany us. Ben +Yool had been left with the schooner, so our party consisted of Mr +McRitchie, Cousin Silas, Jerry, and I, not forgetting old Surley. He +always kept close to us, suspecting, perhaps, if the natives caught him, +they might cook and eat him. We were well supplied with provisions, and +with bottles of water, which we could replenish on the way. We +travelled at first along the coast, and then struck inland, directing +our course towards the lofty summit of the mountain, whence, even at +that distance, we could see pillars of smoke ascending to the sky. It +was getting dark when our guides told us that close at hand was a cavern +in which we might pass the night sheltered from the weather. Torches of +resinous wood were soon procured, and they led the way down a steep +path, till we found ourselves at the entrance of an immense cavern +formed in the lava. It was some hundred feet square, and from fifteen +to twenty high. When lighted up by the torches, it had a very wild and +picturesque appearance. The horses were tethered in one part, while we +all went out and collected grass and fern leaves for our beds, and a +good supply of fuel for our fire. Having cooked our supper, we sat +round the fire, while one of the natives, who spoke English very well, +told us some of the wonderful tales about Pele, the goddess of the +burning mountain, and her numerous diabolical followers. Though our +guides were now Christians, and professed to disbelieve all these +fables, it was evident that their minds were considerably affected by +them; so difficult is it to get rid of early associations. The cavern +had become rather smoky, and Mr Brand had gone out to enjoy the cool +air, when he called us to him. We looked towards the mountain, which +rose in majestic grandeur before us, the summit crowned by wreaths of +flame, which rose and fell as if impelled by some secret power within. +After admiring it for some time, we returned to our bandit-looking abode +for the night. + +The next morning, leaving our horses, we set out on foot towards the +crater. A mass of smoke alone rested on the summit of the mountain. +The road was very rough, vegetation in many places destroyed, and in +general we found ourselves passing over masses of lava, with deep +crevices in some places and huge masses in others, while here and there +the crust was so thin that it gave way beneath our feet. The heat was +very great; but we found a red berry growing on a low bush, which was +very refreshing. At length, after some hours of toil, we found +ourselves standing on the summit of a cliff, while below us appeared a +vast plain full of conical hills, and in the centre of it a mass of +liquid lava like a wide lake of fire. It was what we had come to see-- +the crater of Kilauea. Below the cliff, inside the basin, was a ledge +of considerable width of solid lava. We looked about for a path by +which we could reach the plain. At last we found a steep bank where the +cliff had given way. By this we now descended with the help of sticks, +with which we had been provided. The descent was difficult and +dangerous in the extreme, as the lava gave way before us, and huge +masses went rolling and tumbling away, some in front and some behind us, +as we slid down the steep bank. The appearance of the ground was such +that we, with reason, hesitated on trusting ourselves to it. Old +Surley, too, smelled at it, and examined it narrowly, as if very +doubtful about running over it. Still, our guides assured us that other +Englishmen had been there; and where others had been we knew that we +could go. At last we reached the bottom, and walked on, with our staffs +in hand feeling the way. More than once I felt the ground cracking +under my feet. It was not hot, but it struck me--suppose it is only a +crust, and one of us were to slip through into the boiling caldron +beneath! I own that I more than once wished myself back again on cool +and solid ground. To go through the ice is disagreeable enough, but to +slip down under this black cake would be horrible indeed. Not five +minutes after this idea had crossed my mind, I heard a cry. It was +Jerry's voice. I looked round--his head and shoulders only were +appearing above the ground, and his arms stretched out wide on either +side, while with his fingers he tried to dig into the lava, to prevent +himself from slipping further. + +"Oh, help me! help me!" he shrieked out; "I cannot find any rest for my +feet, and shall sink into some horrible pit." + +"Stand back--stand back," shouted Mr Brand, as the rest of us were +running forward; "you will all be going in together. Stay, let me see +first what I can do. Hold on, Jerry; don't move, my boy," he added. +Then taking another pole from one of the guides, he laid himself along +the ground; he gradually advanced, till he had placed a pole under each +of Jerry's arms. "Now, swing your legs up, and I will draw you away," +he cried out. Jerry did as he was told, and was dragged on to firm +ground. The ground had given way just as if it had been a piece of +egg-shell. Probably it had been formed by a sheet of lava flowing +rapidly over some fissure without filling it up. Jerry was most +thankful for his preservation, but he had too much spirit to wish to go +back, and insisted on proceeding on to the borders of the liquid fiery +lake. Before us, amidst the burning expanse, rose two lofty cones, one +of them insulated, the other joined by a causeway to the ledge of lava. +Besides these, a number of smaller cones were seen in various +directions. The ground was also full of pools of burning sulphur, or +other liquid matter, while huge black shapeless masses of lava lay +scattered about in every direction, thrown out, undoubtedly, from the +mouth of one of the large cones before us. On we pushed our way, +notwithstanding, and at last we stood on the very brink of the lake of +fire! I could not altogether divest myself of the idea that it might +bubble over and destroy us. It was strange that no heat appeared to +proceed from it, and yet the points of our sticks were instantly burned +to cinders when we put them into it. After we had got accustomed to the +strange scene, we agreed that we should like to mount to the top of the +cone by the causeway. Off we set. We reached it, and began the +hazardous ascent. There was an outer crust, which often gave way under +our feet--still we pushed on. Our guides urged us to desist, saying +that no one had ever ventured thus far and returned alive. Still they +followed us. Up the cone they climbed. It was a strangely wild +scene:--the fiery lake below us, around us; the vast masses of lava +piled upon the plain; the high black cliffs on every side; the wild, +hopeless desolation of the country beyond; and the numerous cones, each +the mouth of a miniature volcano, sending forth smoke in every +direction. We had nearly reached the summit of the cone, when a thick +puff of sulphureous smoke almost drove us back headlong. A loud roar at +the same time, louder than a thousand claps of thunder, saluted our +ears. + +"Fly! fly!" cried our guides; "the mountain is going to vomit forth its +fiery breath." Not a moment did we delay. Down the side of the cone we +sprung--none of us looked back. Thicker and thicker came forth the +smoke. Rivulets of lava began to flow, streaming down the cone into the +lake below; some came towards the causeway, leaping down its sides. On +we went, every instant dreading a fall through the thin crust. Ashes +came forth and fell around us, and then huge masses of rock came down +with loud splashes into the fiery plain. Some went even before us, and +were buried deep in the ground over which we had to tread. The roar of +the mountain continued. Down we sprung; a blow from a stone would have +killed us--a false step would have sent us into the fiery pool, to the +instant and utter annihilation of our mortal frames. I felt as if I +could not cry out. An unspeakable dread and horror had seized me. At +length the plain of lava was regained. No one was hurt; yet the danger +was not past. Still the lava streamed forth. It might overflow the +banks of the lake, for aught we could tell. Ashes and masses of rock +fell in showers around us. We fled like Lot and his family, nor stopped +till we reached the cliff. Then it was searched in vain for a way to +mount to the summit. We did now look back to see if the lava was +following us, but the glowing lake lay as calm as before. The outburst +seemed to have subsided. Now and then a jet of lava and fire came +forth, and a puff of smoke, but both soon ceased. At last, walking +round under the cliff, we found a practicable way to the top. We were +saved, and grateful for our escape, while our curiosity was amply +satisfied. We were suffering much from thirst, when what was our +surprise to come upon a pool of clear water, with reeds growing round +it, though in the very neighbourhood of hot basins of sulphur, and of +cones spouting forth wreaths of smoke! We expected to find the water +hot, instead of which, it was deliciously cool and refreshing. On +ascending the cliff, we found that it was too late to descend the +mountain that night, so our guides led us to a hut built to afford +accommodation for travellers. It stood overlooking the cones and the +lake of fire, and never shall I forget the extraordinary appearance of +that scene, as we watched it during the greater part of the night, or +the magnificent spectacle which gladdened our eyes when the glorious sun +rose from out of his ocean bed, and lighted up the distant snow-capped +peak of the lofty Mouna Roa, which is 14,000 feet above the level of the +sea. + +We collected several specimens of sulphur and lava, and also a quantity +of what the natives call the hair of Pele. Every bush around was +covered with it. It is produced from the lava when first thrown up, and +borne along by the air till it is spun into fine filaments several +inches in length. It was of a dark olive colour, brittle, and +semi-transparent. In our descent of the mountain we entered long +galleries, the walls and roof hung with stalactites of lava of various +colours, the appearance being very beautiful. They are formed by the +lava hardening above, while it continues to flow away underneath--thus +leaving a hollow in the centre. We might have spent many days in +wandering about that strange, wild region, but we had seen enough to +talk about ever afterwards. We got back safe to the station; and when +there, we found that Mr Callard had resolved to remain some time on the +island. He begged us, consequently, to take back the schooner to +Honolulu, with directions for her to return for him in a fortnight. It +seemed quite strange to us to be at sea again after the wonderful scenes +we had witnessed, and Jerry declared that he was well content to find +himself afloat with a whole skin on his body. The wind came round to +the north-east, and we had to stretch away to the westward to lay a +course for Honolulu. We were about thirty miles off the land when the +wind fell light, and gradually a thick fog arose, in which we found +ourselves completely shrouded. We still stood on, keeping as good a +look-out as we could through the mist, lest we should run foul of any +other vessel--not that such an event was likely to happen just then in +the Pacific. When night, however, came on, the fog grew still thicker, +and the darkness became so great that we literally could not see our +hands held out at arm's-length before us. Mr Brand had kept the middle +watch, and then Jerry and I, with Ben Yool, went on deck, with some of +the native crew, to take the morning watch. We glided slowly on over +the dark waters, the breeze falling gradually, till it was almost a +calm. Jerry and I were walking the deck together, talking of the +strange sights we had lately seen, when, happening for a moment to be +silent, a cry, or it might have been a shriek, struck my ears, as if +wafted from a distance across the water. + +"Did you hear it, Jerry?" I asked. + +"Yes; did you? What can it be?" he answered. "Ah! there's another--it +cannot be fancy." + +"No; I heard it distinctly," I remarked. "There is some mischief going +forward, I fear. What is to be done?" Again that faint, wailing cry of +distress reached our ears. + +"You don't believe in ghosts, do you?" said Jerry. "If there were such +things, I should fancy that those cries were uttered by them, and +nothing else." + +"Nonsense, Jerry," said I, half vexed with him, for I saw that he was +inclined to give way to superstition. "If those sounds are not the +effect of fancy, they must proceed from some human beings in distress; +but what can be the matter is more than I can say." We found, on going +forward, that Ben Yool had heard the cries, and was still listening, +wondering what caused them. They had also reached the ears of the +native seamen. They declared that they must be caused by the spirits of +the storm roaming over the water, and that we should have a heavy gale +before long. Again a shriek reached us, louder and more thrilling than +before. + +"Oh, this is dreadful!" I exclaimed. "There must be some foul mischief +going on somewhere not far off. We must call up Mr Brand, and see what +steps he will think fit to take." I went and roused him up, and told +him of the strange sounds we had heard. Both he and the doctor were +soon on deck. At first he laughed at our description of the sounds we +had heard; but after he had listened a little time, another long, +deep-drawn wail came wafted across the ocean. + +"That is the cry of some one in mortal fear or agony," he remarked. +"There is another!" It was a sharp, loud cry, or rather shriek. + +"The calmness of the sea and the peculiar state of the atmosphere would +enable a sound to travel from a long distance," observed McRitchie. "It +may come from a spot a mile, or even two miles off." + +"We must try and find out the direction, and go to the help of the poor +people, whoever they are," exclaimed Mr Brand. + +"How is that to be done?" asked the doctor. "Our cockleshell of a boat +will only hold three or four people, and the chances are that some +ruffianly work is going on, and we shall only share the fate of the +victims." + +"It must be done, though," answered Cousin Silas. "I cannot stay +quietly here when perhaps our appearance may prevent further mischief. +I will go in the boat, and I daresay I shall have volunteers to +accompany me." + +"In that case I will go with you, Brand," said the doctor, who was as +plucky as anybody. "I still say, however, that we should be wiser +remaining where we are till daylight." + +"No, no, doctor," returned Cousin Silas; "you are not a fighting-man. +Your life is too valuable to be risked. You stay on board and look +after the lads." + +"But we want to go with you, Mr Brand!" exclaimed Jerry and I together; +"you won't leave us behind?" + +"I daresay, boys!" answered Cousin Silas. "What account should I have +to give to the captain if either of you got knocked on the head and I +escaped? You remain on board the schooner. It will be daylight soon; +and if I do not return before then, you'll be able to see where to pick +me up." + +"If you resolves to go, why, d'ye see, sir, I goes with you," said Ben +Yool, stepping up. "One of these brown chaps says he'll go, and that's +all you want. To my mind, if we can frighten the villains from going on +with their murderous work, we may do some good; but as to forcing them +to hold their hands, we couldn't do it if we were even to lay the little +_Dove_ alongside them." + +Mr Brand thanked Ben for his promptness in offering to support him, and +accepted his services; and arming themselves, they both, without further +delay, accompanied by a tall, strong Sandwich islander, lowered the +schooner's dinghy into the water. + +"What I'd advise, sir, is this," said Ben: "Let us get as close up to +where the cries come from as we can without being seen, and then let us +hail the vessel, or raft, or whatever it may be, in gruff voices, and +say that if they don't knock off their murdering work, and let the +people they are harming go free, we will blow them all up into the sky. +If they don't heed us, we'll shriek and cry, and make all sorts of +noises, as if a thousand demons were about to board them; and, as people +who are about any bad work are certain to have bad consciences, they'll +fancy that the noises are ten times louder and worse than they are. If +that does not succeed, we must try some other dodge; we shall hit off +something or other, I daresay." + +While Ben was thus delivering himself, Mr Brand was loading his +pistols. All things being ready, they stepped into the boat and shoved +off. They were immediately lost to sight in the thick darkness which +surrounded us. Their oars had been muffled; but we could hear the +gentle lap of the oars in the water for long afterwards, showing to what +a distance sound could travel, and that the scene of the outrage we had +been listening to might be further off than we supposed. As Mr Brand +had taken the bearings of the _Dove_, and proposed pulling directly to +the south-west, whence the sounds came, and directly in the eye of the +wind, such as there was, which had shifted to that quarter, we knew that +he would have no great difficulty in getting aboard us again. Still we +could not help feeling very anxious about him. The plan, however, +proposed by Ben Yool struck us as likely to prove as effectual as any +that could be conceived;--much more so than had the little _Dove_ +herself appeared; for, as she did not measure more than twenty tons, she +was not calculated by her size to command respect, especially as she had +no guns on board, and we had only our rifles. Scarcely had the boat +left the side of the schooner when the shrieks were repeated. They +seemed louder, or at all events more distinct. We could no longer have +any doubt that they were uttered by human beings in distress. Old +Surley thought so too. He kept running about the deck in a state of +great agitation, and then stretched out his neck, and howled in reply to +the cry which reached his ears. We kept slowly gliding on under all +sail, keeping as close to the wind as we could, so as to beat up in the +direction of the sound. It had been arranged that we were to go about +every quarter of an hour, so that Mr Brand would know our whereabouts +and on what tack he was likely to find us on his return. Our ears were +kept open to catch any fresh sound, and our eyes were looking about us +in all directions, in case a break in the mist should reveal any object +to us; but an hour passed away, and no other cry was heard. There was a +little more wind, and it had shifted a point or so to the westward, and +perhaps that prevented sounds reaching us, we thought. Another hour +crept by, but still Mr Brand did not return. We began to be anxious +about him. We constantly went to the binnacle lamp to look at our +watches. It wanted but a short time to daylight. The doctor, I saw by +his manner, was seriously alarmed about the party, though he said +nothing to us. We fancied that we heard a hail, and then a shout and a +cry; but we could not quite agree about it. We kept pacing the deck +anxiously, tacking as we had been directed by Mr Brand; and thus the +night wore on, and dawn once more broke over the world of waters. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +CAPTURED BY PIRATES. + +Daylight increased; and as the sun, like a vast ball of fire, rose +slowly above the horizon, the mist lifted as if it had been a curtain +from off the surface of the water, rolling away in huge wreaths of +vapour before the breeze. The wind had once more hauled round to the +southward, and then away to the westward, when, beneath an arch of +clouds, we saw two vessels alongside each other. One was a schooner, a +fine, rakish-looking craft; the other a large brig. The latter had her +royals and top-gallant-sails flying loose, her topsails were on the +caps, her courses were hauled up, her yards were braced here and there; +indeed, she presented a picture of most complete confusion. Her +appearance would too plainly have told us that something wrong had taken +place, even had we not heard the cries in the night. In vain we looked +round on every side for the dinghy; she was nowhere to be seen. We +examined the vessels through a spy-glass we had with us. She was not +visible alongside either of them. Again and again we swept the horizon, +but not a speck could we discover that might be her. "What is to be +done?" exclaimed Jerry in a tone of deep grief. I too felt very sorry +for fear harm had happened to Cousin Silas; nor did I forget Ben and the +Sandwich islander. "Hallo! hallo! Look there! what is happening now?" +Jerry added. We looked. The schooner had parted a little distance from +the brig, and the latter vessel, after rolling once or twice to +starboard and port, seemed to dip her bows into the sea. We gazed +earnestly with a sickening feeling. Her bowsprit did not rise again. +Down, down she went, slowly and calmly, as if making a voluntary plunge +to the depths of the ocean. The water closed over her decks, her lower +masts disappeared, her topmasts followed, and the loose sails for a +moment floated above the spot where she had been, and then sank also, +drawn down by the halliards beneath the waters. + +We felt almost stupified with horror. Combining the shrieks we had +heard and the occurrence we had just witnessed, we could have no doubt +that the schooner we saw before us was a pirate, and that her crew had, +after murdering those on board the brig, sunk her, to destroy, as they +might hope, all traces of their guilt. They had had in us, however, +witnesses of the atrocity they had committed, when they thought no human +being could be cognisant of the fact. What, however, had become of Mr +Brand, and Ben, and the native? Had they been on board, we should +probably have acted wisely in endeavouring to get away from the pirates, +as they would undoubtedly, if they could catch us, and thought that we +suspected what had occurred, treat us much in the same way that they had +treated the crew of the brig. Still, how could we think for a moment of +running away and deserting our friends--such a man, too, as Cousin +Silas, who, we felt sure, would never have deserted us while the +slightest hope remained of our being alive? + +For some time after the brig had sunk, the schooner appeared to take no +notice whatever of us, while we continued to draw nearer and nearer to +her. We had an Englishman, Mr Stone, who acted as master of the +_Dove_, and two other natives. Stone was a simple-minded, honest man. +His principle was, if he received an order from a superior, to obey it. +Therefore, as Mr Brand had directed him to continue beating up to +windward till he returned on board, it never occurred to him to propose +running away from our suspiciously dangerous neighbour. The natives +held their tongues, but did not look happy. Mr McRitchie was the most +agitated. He kept walking our little deck with hurried steps. We were +drawing nearer and nearer to the big schooner. Suddenly he stopped and +looked at us, the tears starting into his eyes. "My dear lads," said +he, "it is very, very sad to think of, but there can be no doubt, I +greatly fear, that our friend and his followers have been murdered by +yonder piratical villains. If they are still alive, (and what chance is +there of it?) they will certainly not be allowed to return to us. We +are, therefore, only sacrificing our own lives by allowing ourselves to +fall into the power of the villains. While there is time, let us +escape. Captain Stone, don't you agree with me?" + +"Well, sir, I cannot but say I do," answered the captain. "If you order +me, as I consider that the craft is under your charge, we'll keep away +at once, and make all sail to the northward. I feel that we ought to +have done it as soon as we made out what that craft there was." + +The doctor hesitated still--a violent struggle was going on in his mind. +He passed his hand across his brow. "Yes, it must be done. Keep her +away, and make all sail," he exclaimed. + +Scarcely was the helm put up, and a large square-sail of light canvas +the little schooner carried hoisted, when the stranger seemed to observe +our presence. We had not run on for ten minutes when her head came +slowly round towards us, her square-topsails were hoisted up, her +foresail was rigged out, a square-sail was set, and after us she came +like a greyhound in chase of a hare. + +"What chance have we, do you think, of getting away from her, Mr +Stone?" said Jerry, pointing to the big schooner, which was coming up +hand over hand after us. + +Stone, who was at the helm, looked over his shoulder at the stranger. +"Why, none whatever, Mr Frankland," he answered, after a minute's +deliberation. + +"Then I do not see much use in running away," observed Jerry. "If we +are to be killed, let us be killed at once, and have it over." + +"No, sir; as Mr Callard says, it's our duty to strive as long as we +can. Our lives are in the hand of God. He may find means to enable us +to escape, though we do not in our blindness see them. Perhaps it may +fall a dead calm, and we may make use of our sweeps; or a squall may +spring up and carry away the stranger's masts; or another vessel may +heave in sight, and she may think it wise to slip out of the way." + +"I see that you are right, Mr Stone," answered Jerry. "But I wonder, +if they do catch us, what they will do to us all?" + +"Cut the throats of every mother's son of us," he answered, quite +calmly. "I've often thought of death, and I am prepared to die, for I +trust in One who is mighty to save my soul alive. Have you the same +hope, young gentleman? I trust you have. It's my duty as a fellow man +to urge you to lay hold of it. There's nothing else will save us, +depend on that. From what I heard your officer, Mr Brand, say, I know +on what he trusted, and I hope he has not failed to speak to you about +the same matter." + +"Ay, he spoke to us in a way we ought never to have forgotten, once when +we were drifting out to sea on the bottom of a boat, and we had little +chance of being saved; and then he swam off, at the still greater risk +of his own life, to save ours," answered Jerry. + +"I knew that he was just the man to do that sort of thing. He was a +Christian man, too, I am certain of it. Well, it's a great comfort to +feel that of a man who you believe has just been taken out of the +world," observed the master. "I hope your man, Yool, was a trusting +believer. I know our man was, poor fellow." + +Mr McRitchie had been listening, and seemed much affected at what had +been said. The master spoke so confidently of Mr Brand's death, and of +the others, that we began ourselves to realise the melancholy fact. +What, however, was likely to be our own fate? we had several times asked +ourselves. What could we expect but to be instantly murdered? We +anxiously scanned the horizon on every side. There was not a sign of a +sail of any description. The wind remained steady. There was no +prospect of a storm or a calm. The stranger was coming up after us with +fearful speed. We were within range of her guns, but she did not fire-- +so we concluded that she had none on board. It was useless for us to +attempt to do anything by fighting. Jerry and I talked about it, but we +gave it up as a hopeless case. The stranger could quickly have settled +the matter by running us down. + +Mr Stone showed us that he did not boast in vain. He was calm and +unmoved in spite of the dreadful danger which threatened us. Still +holding the tiller in his hand, and keeping his eye on the sails, he +knelt down and offered up an earnest prayer for our safety. We followed +his example, as did the natives; and when we arose from our knees, I, +for my part, felt that I was much better prepared than before to meet +with resignation whatever might befall us; so, I have no doubt, did my +companions. + +The stranger had now got within musket-range, but still she did not +fire. Those on board, of course, expected that in a few minutes more +they would be up with us, and perhaps did not think us worth their +powder. + +"What chance have we now, Mr Stone?" asked the doctor, eyeing our big +pursuer with a look of horror. + +"None, sir, that I see," was the answer; "but then, as I said, there may +be means prepared which I don't see, so we'll hold on, if you please." + +After a minute or two the patience of the pirates appeared to have been +exhausted. There was a report, and a musket-ball came whistling through +our sails. Jerry and I bobbed our heads, for it felt so terribly near +our ears. Jerry looked up indignantly. "I have a great mind to have a +crack at them in return," he exclaimed; and before any one saw what he +was about, he had seized his rifle from the cabin, and sent a shot back +at them in return. + +"Oh, sir, there was no use doing that; you will only the more anger +those wicked men," said Captain Stone, quite calmly. + +"No, no; let's die game," answered Jerry. "We may kill some of our +enemies before they kill us." + +"We may kill some of our friends as likely," replied the captain. "If +we could prevent them injuring us, we might kill them; but as we cannot, +we must patiently wait the result." + +The doctor seemed to agree with the captain, so Jerry refrained from +again loading his rifle. The effect, however, of his single shot was +most disastrous, for the pirates, supposing that we were about to show +fight, brought several muskets forward, and opened a hot fire on us. As +the bullets came rattling about our ears, I thought not one of us would +escape. The two poor Sandwich islanders were brought to the deck, one +directly after the other, desperately wounded. The matter was becoming +very serious. I thought that we ought to lower our sails; so did the +doctor, but Captain Stone begged us to keep all standing. "We can't +tell still, sir, but what we may escape. Hold on, hold on," he cried +out. "There is One who watches over us. If it is his will that we are +to be destroyed, his will be done." Scarcely had he uttered these words +of true piety than he suddenly lifted up his arm, letting go the tiller, +and fell to the deck. Jerry ran to the helm. I tried to lift him up, +while the doctor knelt down by his side. "Hold on, hold on, I counsel +you," he whispered, raising his head. "They have done for me. Doctor, +you cannot help me, I feel. It's all right; we were doing our duty. We +know in whom we trust. He is mighty to save our souls alive." With +these words he fell back, giving one look at our pursuer, and urging us +by a sign to hold on our course. The doctor took his hand. After +holding it for a minute, he shook his head. "He's gone," he remarked; +"as brave a man as I ever met, and as true a Christian." + +Jerry meantime stood undauntedly at the helm. No sooner, however, had +the captain fallen than the pirates, seeing what had occurred, ceased +firing. They had now got so near, that, had they chosen, they might +have picked every one of us off without difficulty. At last they came +up almost abreast of us. + +"Heave to, you young jackanapes, or we will sink you," sung out a man +from forward. The doctor was attending to one of the wounded natives, +so they did not observe him, perhaps. Although the command was issued +in a very uncomplimentary style, Jerry and I agreed that it would be +useless to disobey it; so going about, while he stood at the helm, I ran +forward and let fly the jib-sheet, while the foresail remained to +windward. + +"Send your boat aboard us," shouted the same voice. + +"We haven't got one," answered Jerry. "You know that well enough, I +should think," he added in a lower voice. + +"Oh, we'll send one, then," replied the speaker. + +During this time the big schooner was hove-to quite close to us. +Presently some of the crew went aft, and a long gig was lowered from the +schooner's quarter, and a set of as ugly-looking ruffians as I ever cast +eyes on got into her, and pulled towards us. From the specimen we had +witnessed of their conduct, we could only expect to be cut down and +thrown overboard as soon as they stepped on deck. The least +unattractive was a man, apparently an officer, who sat in the +stern-sheets. As he got near I could not help examining his +countenance. He was a mulatto, with handsome, regular features. I felt +certain that I had seen him before, and not long ago. He had on his +head a large broad-brimmed straw hat, a gaily-coloured handkerchief, and +a waistcoat of red silk, while his jacket was of the finest material. +He wore a sash round his waist, and a dagger and a brace of +silver-mounted pistols stuck into it. When he came alongside, he sprang +lightly on to the deck of the schooner, and looked about him. + +"Now, my lads, be prepared; show no fear," said the doctor. "Remember +that the worst they can do is to kill us, and they'll gain nothing by +that; so perhaps they will let us live." + +As we made not the slightest attempt at resistance, which would have +been madness, even the pirates had no excuse for injuring us. All we +did was to stand quietly at the after-part of the deck waiting what was +next going to happen. + +One of the other pirates soon proceeded without ceremony into the cabin, +and the rest went forward down the fore-hatch. + +The officer looked at me, and I looked at him. Old Surley, who at first +had been very much inclined to fly at the strangers, growling fiercely, +went up to him and quietly licked his hand. In spite of his +clean-shaven face, his gay clothes, and well filled-out cheeks, I +immediately recognised him as Manuel Silva, as he called himself--the +man whom we had with so much risk saved from the wreck of the Spanish +brig. "Yes, I remember you," he whispered in his broken English; "but +don't let others know that. I'm not a man to forget kindness, that's +all." + +"Do you know anything of Mr Brand and the other men?" I asked eagerly. +He made no reply; and immediately afterwards, assuming an air of +authority, he ordered the doctor, Jerry, and me, to get into the boat. + +The doctor entreated that he might be left to attend the two wounded +Sandwich islanders. The men, when they came on deck, laughed at his +request. "We have got wounded too, and shall want you to attend on +them," they answered; "if you are a doctor, you are welcome." Still the +doctor pleaded so hard for the poor men that at last they consented to +take one of them; the other, indeed, was already beyond all hopes of +recovery. We turned a last look at the body of poor Captain Stone. + +"What is to be done with him?" asked Jerry. + +"Never mind him, youngster," answered one of the men; "we'll soon +dispose of him." + +Silva, leaving three men on board, ordered us to get into his boat to +return with him to the big schooner. As we were shoving off, old +Surley, who had been smelling about after the other men, gave a loud +bark, as much as to say, "Don't leave me behind," and leaped in after +us. Truly glad were we to have him, poor fellow. He might prove to us +a friend in need. + +We stepped on deck; the crew, we thought, eyed us with very sinister +looks, but no one spoke to us till a man we took to be the captain +stepped up to the gangway. "Who are you, and where do you come from, +who go about prying into other people's affairs?" he exclaimed in a +gruff voice. He stamped with his feet as lift spoke, as if lashing +himself up into a rage. He was a pale, long-faced man, with a large +beard, and a very evil expression in his eye. + +"We have no wish to pry into anybody's affairs," answered the doctor +quietly. "We missed a boat with some of the people belonging to this +schooner, and we thought they might be aboard your vessel." + +"I know nothing of the people you talk of; but as you have seen more +than you ought, I suspect you'll remain with us. We happen to want just +such a schooner as yours, so say no more about it. You may think +yourselves fortunate in not losing your lives. There's no disguise +about us, you see." + +Had we before felt any doubts on the subject, these remarks would have +revealed to us too clearly the character of the people among whom we had +fallen. I was thankful, indeed, that we were not immediately murdered. +Why the desperadoes allowed us to live was a mystery. The doctor, they +thought, would be useful to them; and perhaps, as Jerry remarked, they +did not think us worth killing. The doctor, he, and I, stood together +near the gangway, with Surley at our feet, waiting what was next to +happen. Meantime the poor wounded Sandwich islander had been handed up, +and placed on the deck forward. + +The vessel on board which we found ourselves was a large, handsome +craft, of fully a hundred and eighty tons; and, from her great beam, her +taunt, raking masts, the broad white ribbon outside, and the peculiar +paint and fittings on her deck, she was evidently American. There were +a good many white men among her crew; but there were also many blacks +and mulattoes, of every shade of brown and hue of olive or copper. +Never had I seen people of so many nations and tribes brought together, +while every one of them to my eyes appeared most villainous cut-throats. + +We saw the boat go back to the _Dove_ and deposit a couple of more hands +aboard her, and then both vessels hauled their wind and stood away to +the south-west. Just then some of the crew hailed the doctor:--"Here; +your patient seems to be about to slip his cable. You'd better come and +see what's the matter." We accompanied the doctor, and knelt down by +the side of the wounded man, who was evidently dying. He took the +doctor's hand. "You kind to us, but you no help me now," he whispered, +with his failing breath. "If you once more see Mr Callard--my love to +him--I die happy. I trust in Him he taught me to cling to. Once I was +poor savage. He made me rich." These were the poor Kanaka's last +words. A few years ago, and how differently would one of his countrymen +have died! The doctor closed the eyes and arranged the limbs of the +dead man, and threw a handkerchief which he took from his neck over his +face. "There," he said, "he'll not give you any more trouble." The men +said not a word, but walked about as composedly as if nothing had +happened, while we went back to our place near the gangway. Shortly +afterwards, a man, who seemed to be an officer, went forward. "Heave +that corpse overboard," he exclaimed; "why do you let it remain there +cumbering the deck?" The men looked at each other, and then, lifting up +the body of the poor Kanaka, threw it, without form or ceremony, into +the water. We looked astern. There it floated, with the arms spread +out, and the face turned towards us, for the handkerchief had fallen off +the head. Its lips seemed to move. I thought it was uttering a +well-merited curse on the hateful craft we were on board. It seemed to +be about to spring out of the water. I could not help crying out. I +shrieked, I believe. Many of the pirates looked with horror. "Is he +following us?" I cried. No. Down sunk the body from sight, as if +dragged by some force from below. "Ah, a shark has got him!" said +Silva, who had been looking on with the rest. Many of the ruffians +shuddered, for they knew full well that such might any day be their own +fate. + +While this scene was enacting, a similar one was taking place on board +the _Dove_. Her captors, having time to look about them, had taken up +the bodies of poor Captain Stone and the other Kanaka, and, without +shroud or a shot to their feet, had hove them overboard. They also were +immediately attacked by the sharks. Jerry and I shuddered, as well we +might. The doctor looked on with more composure. "It matters little +whether sharks or animalculae first devour a body," he observed. "One +or other will inevitably swallow it before long, only the sharks make +greater speed with the process. Happily there is an essence which +neither one nor the other can destroy, which survives triumphant over +death; so, lads, when you mourn the loss of a friend, think of him as +living in that essence, not in the mortal frame you see torn to pieces +or mouldering in decay." A new light seemed to burst on me as the +doctor said this. The idea aided me to get over the horror I had felt +at seeing the fate of the missionary captain, and enabled me better to +bear the first remark which the pirate leader deigned to make us: "Well, +youngsters, if you don't behave yourselves, you'll come to that very +quickly, let me tell you." + +"We have no wish to do otherwise than behave ourselves, sir," answered +Jerry in his politest way. "Perhaps you will tell us what you wish to +have done?" + +"To hold your tongue and be hanged," answered the ruffian, turning +aside; for Jerry's coolness puzzled and enraged him. + +The doctor was now summoned down below to look after some sick men, the +mate, who called him, said; but, as Jerry whispered, he suspected they +were sick from having swallowed more bullets than they liked. We two, +in the meantime, sat ourselves down on a gun, with Surley at our feet. +He put his nose between us, and looked anxiously up into our faces, as +if to learn what it all meant. We were there allowed to remain +unmolested, while the pirates went past us attending to the duty of the +ship. On seeing the guns, we wondered that the schooner had not fired +at us; but we concluded that they had coveted the _Dove_ for their own +objects, and had not wished to injure her. It was evidently from no +compassion to us that they had not knocked her to pieces. No one +interrupting us, Jerry and I began quietly to talk to each other. + +"What can have become of Mr Brand, and Ben Yool, and the Kanaka?" said +I. "Is it possible that they are aboard here all this time, do you +think?" + +"I am afraid not," answered Jerry, shaking his head sorrowfully. "I +think it's much more likely that a shot was hove into the dinghy if they +went alongside, and that they were sent to the bottom. My only hope is, +that they missed their way and never came near this craft. If so, they +may have been picked up by some vessel, or may find their way back to +Owhyhee." + +"That last idea never occurred to me before. Oh, I hope it may be so! +I wonder what the doctor thinks?" said I. + +The doctor was absent for a long time. When he came back to us, he said +that he could not give an opinion on the subject. He was very silent, +and we thought that he looked more sad and thoughtful even than at +first. + +The day wore on. A black cook brought us some soup and a bowl of +farinha, which, as we were very hungry, we were glad enough to eat; and +at night, Silva told us that we three might occupy the small deck cabin +which was vacant. We were glad enough to creep in there, and to forget +our sorrows in sleep. For some time we slept as soundly as people who +have undergone a great deal of mental excitement generally sleep, though +the realities of the past mixed strangely with the visions of the night. +The most prominent was the picture of the sinking ship which we had +seen go down; but in addition I beheld the agonised countenances of the +murdered crew--some imploring mercy, others battling for life, and +others yielding hopelessly to their fate. Among them, to my greater +horror, I thought I saw Mr Brand and Ben Yool. They were bravely +struggling in the hands of the ruffians, as I am sure they would have +done. Now one was up, now the other. The pirates tried to force them +overboard, but they always again clambered up the side of the vessel. +Their boat was sunk beneath them; still they fought on, clutching hold +of ropes and the chain-plates--never for a moment losing heart. "That +is the way to fight the battle of life against all enemies, spiritual +and carnal," said a voice. It was Cousin Silas who spoke. Then the +pirates made another desperate attack on him and Ben, and they were +forced back into the deep ocean. + +I awoke with a loud cry. "What's the matter? where are we?" asked +Jerry, stretching out his arms. "O Harry, what dreadful dreams I have +had! What is going to happen? Now I know. Oh dear! Oh dear! My poor +father, how miserable he will be when he fancies I am lost!" When we +told each other our dreams, we found that they had been very much of the +same nature. + +Our talking awoke the doctor. He was, I daresay, not less unhappy than +we were, but he told us not to give way to unmanly fears, and scolded us +for talking about our dreams. "It is a foolish and bad practice silly +people are apt to indulge in. It makes them nervous, promotes +superstition, and, worse than all, frequently causes them to doubt God's +superintending care and watchfulness. Your dreams have just been made +up of what has occurred, and of what your imagination has conjured up. +Just set to work and think and talk of how we may escape from our +present position, and perhaps you may think and talk to good effect." +As soon as we got up, we took our place as we had done the previous day, +as much out of the way of the rest of the people as possible. + +We took the doctor's advice, and did little else for some time than talk +of how we might escape. The most feasible plan which occurred to us was +to watch for an opportunity of deserting the ship whenever she might +touch at any place for water. We agreed that it would be well to try +and lull the suspicions of our captors, by pretending to be perfectly +contented with our lot, and by making ourselves as much at home as +possible. + +"We'll not seem to care about going on shore ourselves," observed Jerry; +"but after a time we'll talk about old Surley not being accustomed to +remain on board so long, and we'll ask leave to take him a run on the +beach; then he'll run on, and we will run after him, till we get out of +sight of the vessel, and then won't we put our best legs foremost-- +that's all. Surley will like the fun, and we will whistle him on; and +if any of the pirates meet us, we can say we are running after him; and +so we shall be, you know. We can hide away in some tree, or in a +cavern, or somewhere or other till the ship sails, and then we must +trust to what may turn up to get away from the place, wherever it may +be." + +"The chances are that it may be a desert island, and one rarely or never +visited by ships. If so, perhaps we may have to live on it for years +without being able to escape from it," I observed. + +"Well, no matter if that is the case," he answered; "anything is better +than living among these cut-throats." + +"I agree with you," said I; "but what is to become of the doctor? We +must not leave him behind." + +"Certainly not," said Jerry; "we will tell him what we propose, and I +daresay he will find means to follow us. If he cannot, perhaps he will +propose some plan which will be better than ours." + +We talked till we talked ourselves very hungry, and were not sorry when +the black cook brought us a bowl of farinha for our breakfast. We +should not have objected to a slice of cold beef or a piece of fish, but +we agreed that it would be wiser to take what was offered to us, and +appear thankful. The doctor was asked in to breakfast with the captain. +He certainly would rather not have gone, but as nothing could be gained +by refusing, and something might by accepting the invitation, he went. +Tom Congo, the cook, did not forget old Surley, but, when the officers +were below at breakfast, brought him a mess, which he gobbled up with no +little satisfaction. + +Silva appeared to take no notice of us; yet we could not but believe +that it was owing to his intercession our lives had been spared, and +that we were not ill-treated. It will be remembered that, after the +story we heard of the escape of the convicts from Juan Fernandez, +serious suspicions had been entertained of his character. We had now, +from finding him associated with pirates, every reason to believe that +our suspicions were correct. Still, pirate as he was, all the right +feelings of our nature had not been blunted in him. While on board the +_Triton_ he had always behaved well, and he now showed us that he was +grateful for the kindness he had received. Such was the opinion Jerry +and I formed of him. + +For three or four days things went on much in the same way as at first. +We had our food brought us regularly by our friend the black cook, and +were allowed to walk the deck as long as we liked, and to creep into our +cabin at night. Nobody interfered with us. The people who acted as +officers passed us by without notice, and the seamen did not take the +trouble to exchange a word with us. At last Jerry and I agreed that it +was time to try and make ourselves more at home, or we should not be +able to carry into execution the plan we had proposed. Surley, too, +seemed to think it very dull work sitting all day long with his nose +resting on our knees. How to set about ingratiating ourselves with the +fellows, was the difficulty. We generally talked over our plans when +the doctor was away, as he was for a considerable time every day +attending to the sick. We determined first to try and win over old Tom +Congo, the black cook, as he seemed disposed to be friendly with us. + +"I say, cook," exclaimed Jerry, "you give us very good food to eat, but +couldn't you add a bit of meat now and then? Surley gets some, and we, +who have been accustomed all our lives to it, would like to have it +now." + +"Oh, oh, you hab some of Surley's den," answered Tom Congo, with a grin. + +"You are too kind to wish to make us eat scraps and bits," said Jerry; +"we should just like a piece of beef or pork." + +Congo looked pleased; and though he would not promise to bring us any +meat, we saw that he would. Now, we did not care so much about the +meat, but we thought that, by asking him a favour which he could easily +grant, we might gain his interest. It was a compliment to him, and made +him feel as if he were our superior, for the time being at all events. +The next day, at dinner time, he brought us a very nice piece of boiled +beef and some potatoes. We consulted what we could give him in return. +Our knives were too valuable to part with, but Jerry had a silver +pencil-case, which he offered to him. Old Tom asked what it was for, +and when told to write with, he grinned from ear to ear, observing that, +as he could not write even his own name, it would be of no manner of use +to him; but that he thanked us all the same. + +The feeling that there were two people on board who were disposed to be +friendly with us raised our spirits. We got up and began to chase +Surley about the deck, making him run after a ball of spun-yarn till we +got tired of the game. Then we walked up and down the deck till we got +right aft, where we could catch a glance at the compass. We were +steering about south-west and by south. + +"Where are we going to, my friend?" said Jerry, addressing the man at +the helm. + +"Ask the captain; he's likely to tell you, youngster." + +"Oh, no matter," answered Jerry, carelessly, "I only asked for +curiosity. If it's to China, or round Cape Horn, or to California, it's +all the same to me." + +"You're an independent little chap, at all events," answered the man; +"if you were one of us, you'd do well, I doubt not." + +"Oh, I've no objection to do well," said Jerry; "just show me the way, +and I'm your man." + +"I like your spirit, and I'll say a word in your favour with the crew. +I daresay you know something about navigation, which is more than most +of the officers do; so, if you join us, it won't be long before you are +made an officer." + +"Thank you for your good opinion of me," said Jerry; "but I'm not +ambitious. I just want to do what I like, and if nobody interferes with +me, I'm content." + +"You're a merry little chap, at all events," observed the pirate. "I +like to see a fellow with some spirit in him, and I'll keep you out of +harm if I can." + +"Thank you," said Jerry, making a dash after Surley's tail; "I thought +you looked as if you were a kind chap, and that made me speak to you." + +Thus by degrees we made ourselves at home among the crew. Before the +evening we were chasing each other about the rigging. The men forward +had a monkey, and we got hold of him, and made him ride upon Surley's +back. Neither animal liked it at first, but by coaxing them we managed +to reconcile them to each other. Jacko would every now and then take it +into his head to give old Surley a sly pinch on the ear or tail, and +then the dog would turn round and endeavour to bite the monkey's leg; +but the latter was always too quick for him, and would either jump off, +or leap up on his back as if he were going to dance there, or would +catch hold of a rope overhead and swing himself up out of his way. It +really was great fun, and often we almost forgot where we were and our +sad fate. It made the pirates also think us light-hearted, merry +fellows, and they gave themselves no further concern about watching us. +Now, of course, it sounds very romantic and interesting to be on board a +pirate vessel, among desperate cut-throats, to be going one does not +know where; but the reality is very painful and trying, and, in spite of +all we did in the day to keep up our spirits, Jerry and I often lay +awake half the night, almost crying, and wondering what would become of +us. It was not till we remembered what we had heard at home, and what +Captain Frankland and Mr Brand had told us often--that in all +difficulties and troubles we should put our trust in God--that we found +any comfort. How much we now wished for a Bible, that we might read it +to each other! We now saw more clearly than we had ever before done its +inestimable value. There were several on board the _Dove_, but we were +not likely to be able to get them. + +The poor doctor was more to be pitied than we were. He grew thinner and +thinner every day. Evidently he felt his captivity very much. His +prospect of escaping was much smaller than ours, because he was of far +greater use to the pirates than we were. We might have been of some +service to them as navigators, but without our books and instruments we +could do very little for them even in that respect. + +Several more days went by in this way. The pirates now began to grow +fidgety, and they were constantly going to the mast-head, and spent the +day in looking out on every side round the horizon, in search of land or +a vessel, we could not tell which. At last, one forenoon, one of the +look-outs shouted from aloft, "A sail! a sail!" + +"Where away?" asked the captain, who till that moment seemed to have +been half asleep on deck. He sprang to his feet, and he, with every one +on board, in an instant was full of life and animation. + +"On the lee bow," answered the man. "She is a large ship, standing to +the southward." The wind was from the westward. + +Several of the officers and men hurried aloft to have a look at the +stranger. When they came down they seemed highly satisfied. + +"She's a merchantman from California," observed one. "She'll have +plenty of gold dust on board." + +"She's the craft to suit us, then," observed a second. + +"She's a heavy vessel, and the fellows aboard will fight for their +gold," remarked a third. + +"Who cares? a little fighting will make the prize of more value," cried +another. "We'll show them what they'll get by resistance." + +The word was now passed along to clear the decks for action, and, with +the men at their guns, we bore down on the stranger. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +VOYAGE IN THE PIRATE VESSEL. + +The stranger saw our approach, and from the eager way in which we +carried on sail, those on board must have had some suspicion of the +character of the schooner. She was a fine large ship, and was evidently +a fast craft, but still the schooner managed to overhaul her. As we had +hitherto stood on under easy sail, the _Dove_ was able to keep up with +us, but now we left her far astern. Before we parted company, however, +the captain signalised her where to meet him. I forgot to say that for +some time we did not know the name of the pirate chief, but at last we +heard him called Captain Bruno. Though this name had a foreign sound, +he was, as I have before said, either an Englishman or an American. The +schooner was called the _Hawk_, and she was not ill named. + +As we drew near the ship we ran up English colours, while in return, up +went at her peak the stars and stripes of the United States. On we +stood. The ship, so Jerry and I concluded, did not suspect the +character of the schooner, for she made no attempt to escape us, but +appeared as if those on board expected a friendly greeting. I observed +Captain Bruno very frequently turn his telescope towards the stranger, +and examine her narrowly. The officers, too, began to talk to each +other, and look suspiciously at her. I asked Mr McRitchie, who was +near us, whether he thought the pirates would attack the ship and murder +the crew, as we believed they had done that of the brig. + +"I dread something terrible, but I have very little apprehension for the +fate of the people on board the ship," he answered, in a low tone. "In +my opinion, the pirates will find that they have caught a tartar. Mark +me--yonder craft is no merchantman, but a ship of war, either American +or English, or perhaps Chilian. I should not be surprised to find that +she is on the watch for our friends here. Scarcely do I know what to +wish. If they fight at all, they will fight desperately, and we shall +run as great a chance of being killed as they will--though, if they are +captured, we may regain our liberty. If, on the other hand, they +escape, our captivity will be prolonged." + +"But if yonder ship prove to be what you suppose, and the schooner is +captured, perhaps we may be hung as pirates," said Jerry. "How can we +prove that we are honest people?" + +"There will be but little difficulty about that," answered Mr +McRitchie. "The pirates themselves will acknowledge that we have been +brought on board against our will, and the account we can give of +ourselves is too circumstantial not to gain credit. At all events, we +must hope for the best. But see, Captain Bruno at last suspects that +something is wrong." + +We had by this time got almost within the ordinary range of a ship's +guns. Suddenly the captain sprang to the helm. "Haul aft the main and +foresheets!" he sung out in a voice of thunder. "Brace up the yards! +Down with the helm! Keep her as close as she'll go!" The crew flew to +obey these orders. They knew full well that their lives depended on +their promptness. Already the schooner had approached too near the +stranger. That she was a man-of-war, she no longer left us in doubt. +Before the orders issued by Captain Bruno were executed, a line of ports +were thrown open, and eight long guns were run out, threatening to send +us to the bottom if we showed a disposition to quarrel, and aft at her +peak flew the stars and stripes of the United States. + +The pirates saw that they were caught through their own folly and +greediness, but the captain showed himself to be a man of undaunted +courage, and full of resources. "Hold on!" he sung out, before a sheet +was hauled in. "We may lose our sticks if we attempt to run. I'll try +if I cannot deceive these clever fellows, and put them on a wrong +scent." The pirates seemed mightily pleased at the thought of playing +their enemy a trick, and highly applauded the proposal of their captain. +The schooner, therefore, stood steadily on, till she ran close down to +the corvette. Then she hove-to, well to windward of the ship, however. +A boat was lowered, and Captain Bruno, with four of the most +quiet-looking of the crew, got into her, and pulled away for the ship. +When we hove-to, the corvette did the same, an eighth of a mile to +leeward of us. We watched the proceedings of the pirate with no little +anxiety. + +"If that fellow succeed in deceiving the captain of that ship, I shall +acknowledge that impudence will sometimes carry the day," observed Mr +McRitchie. + +"Couldn't we contrive to make a signal to let the people of the +man-of-war know that we are kept here in durance vile?" observed Jerry. + +While he was speaking, I looked round, and saw two of the most ruffianly +of the crew standing close to us, with pistols cocked in their hands, +held quietly down by their sides. I hoped that our captors had not +overheard what Jerry had said. I touched him as if by chance on the +shoulder, and after his eye had glanced at the pistols he said nothing +more about making signals to the corvette. Our position was every +instant growing more and more critical. If the pirate captain was +seized on board the man-of-war, it was impossible to say how his +followers might wreak their vengeance on our heads. We watched him with +no little interest, till he ascended with perfect coolness the side of +the ship. Our anxiety still further increased, after he reached the +deck and disappeared below. Minute after minute slowly passed by, still +he did not return. The pirates with their pistols got up closer to us, +and one, a most hideous black fellow, kept looking at us and then at his +weapon, and grinning from ear to ear, as if he was mightily eager to put +it to our heads and pull the trigger. We tried to look as unconcerned +as possible, but I must own that I could not help every now and then +turning round, to ascertain in what direction the muzzle of the pistol +was pointed. The black and his companion looked so malicious, that I +feared, whatever occurred, we should be the sufferers. If Captain Bruno +escaped, we should still remain in captivity; or should he be suspected +and detained, probably the pirates would revenge themselves on us. I +was afraid of speaking, and almost of moving, lest, even should I lift +an arm, it might be construed into the act of making a signal, and I +might get a bullet sent through my head. The American corvette, with +her spread of white canvas, looked very elegant and graceful as she lay +hove-to, a short distance from us. I wished very much that I was out of +the pirate, and safe on board her, even though the former might get free +away without the punishment she deserved. But all such hopes, it +appeared, were likely to prove vain. After the lapse of another ten +minutes Captain Bruno himself appeared on deck. As he stood at the +gangway, he shook hands cordially with some of the officers. He seemed +to be exchanging some good joke with them, for he and they laughed +heartily when he went down the side, and stepped into the boat. As he +pulled back to the schooner, he waved his hand, and took off his hat +with the most becoming courtesy. "Well," thought I to myself, +"certainly impudence will sometimes carry the day." + +He was soon again on board. "Make sail," he said with a calm smile; +"the corvette and we are going in search of a rascally pirate, which has +committed all sorts of atrocities. I wonder whether we shall find her." +The joke seemed to tickle the fancies of all on deck, for a quiet +chuckle was heard on every side. "Keep the rest of the people below," +he said to Silva; "it might surprise the crew of the man-of-war to see +so many ugly fellows on board a quiet trader." The order was strictly +obeyed. A few only of the crew appeared on deck, and they were soon +seen employed in the usual occupations of a merchantman. The wind was +light, so the schooner began leisurely to set sail after sail, till +every stitch of canvas she could carry was spread. The corvette did the +same, and both vessels were soon going along under a cloud of canvas. +The schooner, we saw, had the advantage. Gradually we were increasing +our distance from the man-of-war. Captain Bruno chuckled audibly. +Still, at times, he cast an anxious look astern. + +Jerry and I were allowed to walk about the deck, and to observe what was +going on. We remarked the captain watching the corvette. "Depend on +it," said Jerry, "he has been leaving some forged paper with the +Americans, or playing them some trick which he is afraid will be found +out." I thought at first this must be Jerry's fancy. We had no +opportunity of asking Mr McRitchie's opinion without being overheard. +Away we glided over the smooth ocean. More and more we increased our +distance from the corvette. The further ahead we got, the more Captain +Bruno seemed pleased; and as I watched his countenance, I became +convinced that Jerry's surmises were correct. As we walked the deck and +watched the captain, we agreed that if he dared he would like to wet the +sails to make them hold more wind. An hour or so passed away, when +suddenly the corvette yawed a little, a puff of white smoke appeared, +with a sharp report, and a shot came flying over the water close to us. +"Ah! have you found me out, my friends?" exclaimed Captain Bruno, +leaping down from the taffrail. "All hands on deck! Swing up the long +guns! We must try to wing this fellow before he contrives to clip our +feathers." In an instant everybody was alert: tackles were rove, and, +in a short time, two long and very heavy guns, with their carriages, +were hoisted up from the hold. The guns were quickly mounted and run +out, and a brisk fire kept up at the corvette. She also continued to +fire, but as to do so with effect she had to yaw each time, the +schooner, which could fire her stern guns as fast as she could load +them, had a considerable advantage. It was a game at long bowls, for +the two vessels were already so far apart that it required very good +gunnery to send a shot with anything like a correct aim. Silva seemed +to be one of the best marksmen on board. Several times, when he fired, +the shot went through the sails of the ship of war. The great object of +the pirates was to cripple her, as was that of the Americans to bring +down some of the schooner's spars. Had the latter found out the trick +sooner which had been played them by the pirate, the probabilities are +that some of our rigging would have been cut through, and we should have +been overtaken; now there appeared every chance that we should effect +our escape. Still, several of the shot which came from the corvette +struck us, or went through our sails; but the damage was instantly +repaired. The crew had got up from below a store of spare ropes, and +sails, and spars, so that even should we receive any severe injury, it +could, we saw, be speedily put to rights. As I before said, our +prospects of getting our throats cut, or our brains blown or knocked +out, were pretty well balanced against those of our being made free, +should the corvette come up with us; so we scarcely knew what to wish +for. Every time a shot came near the vessel, the pirates cast such +angry glances at us, as if we had had something to do with the matter, +that we half expected some of them would let fly their pistols and put +an end to our lives. + +Hour after hour thus passed away. A stern chase is a long chase, as +everybody knows, and so the Americans must have thought it. The wind +continued much as at first for some time. This was all in favour of the +schooner, which sailed in a light wind proportionably better than the +corvette. Towards evening, however, clouds began to gather in the +eastern horizon. The bank rose higher and higher in the sky. Now one +mass darted forward--now another--and light bodies flew rapidly across +the blue expanse overhead. First the surface of the ocean was crisped +over with a sparkling ripple, and then wavelets appeared, and soon they +increased to waves with frothy crests; and the schooner sprung forward, +the canvas swelling, the braces tautening, and the masts and spars +cracking with the additional strain put on them. For some time, though +she still continued to fire, scarcely a shot from the man-of-war had +come up to us, as we had still further increased our distance from her. +She, however, now felt the advantage of the stronger breeze, and our +pace became more equal. Still the breeze increased. The captain stood +aft, his eye apparently watching earnestly every spar and rope aloft, to +see how they stood the increasing strain. Away we now flew, the water +hissing under our bows, and the spray leaping up on either side, and +streaming over us in thick showers. The white canvas bulged, and +tugged, and tugged, till I thought it would carry the masts away, and +fly out of the bolt-ropes. Captain Bruno, however, gave no orders to +take it in. He looked astern; the corvette was going along as fast as +we were--perhaps faster. This was not an occasion for shortening sail. +The crew seemed to have the same opinion. They were fighting with +halters round their necks, every one full well knew; and though this +consciousness may make men desperate when brought to bay, it will +assuredly make them run away like arrant cowards if they have a +possibility of escape. + +The sea by this time had got up considerably, and the schooner began to +pitch into it as she ran before the wind. The corvette at first came on +rather more steadily, but she likewise soon began to feel the effects of +the troubled water; and away we both went, plunging our bows into the +sea as we dashed rapidly onward. I could not help feeling that the +movements of both vessels showed that serious work was going on. The +corvette, with her wide fields of canvas spread aloft, every sail +bulging out to its utmost extent, looked as if intent on the pursuit; +while the eager, hurried way in which the schooner struggled on amid the +foaming waves, made it appear as if she were indued with consciousness, +and was aware that her existence depended on her escaping her pursuer. + +It was now blowing a perfect gale. Every instant, as I kept looking +aloft, I expected to hear some dreadful crash, and to see the topmasts +come tumbling down over our heads; but though the top-gallant-masts bent +and writhed like fishing-rods with a heavy fish at the end of the line, +they were too well set up by the rigging to yield, even with the +enormous pressure put on them. + +Captain Bruno called Silva to him again. They held a consultation for +some minutes. They looked at the corvette, and then at their own sails. +The result was, that some of the people were summoned aft, and once +more the long guns were run out, and, watching their opportunity, as the +stern of the vessel lifted, they opened fire on their pursuer. "If we +could but knock away their fore-topmast with all that spread of canvas +on it, we should very soon run her out of sight," observed Silva, +stooping down to take aim. He fired. The canvas stood as before; but, +as far as we could judge, the shot had reached the man-of-war, and hands +were seen going aloft to repair some damage which it had caused. + +The pirates cheered when they saw that the shot had taken effect, +"Hurrah! hurrah! Fire away again, Silva; fire away!" they shouted. +Thus encouraged, he continued firing as fast as the guns could be +loaded. Shot after shot was discharged. Still the pursuer came on as +proudly and gallantly as before. Now and then a shot was fired from her +bow chasers; but the difficulty of taking anything like an aim in such a +sea was very great, and they generally flew excessively wide of their +mark. Silva, indeed, after the first shot, had but little to boast of +as a marksman. His anger seemed to rise. He looked with a fierce +glance at our pursuer. Both the guns were loaded. He stooped down to +one and fired; then, scarcely looking up to watch the result, he went to +the other. The schooner was sinking into a sea; as she rose to the +summit of the next, a shot left the muzzle of the gun. Away it winged +its flight above the foaming ocean. Now the pirates cheered more +lustily than ever. Good cause had they. As if by magic, the wide cloud +of canvas which had lately towered above the deck of the corvette seemed +dissolved in air. The race is not always to the swift, nor does Fortune +always favour the best cause. The pirate's shot had cut the corvette's +fore-topmast completely in two, and we could see it with its tangled +mass of spars, and sails, and rigging hanging over the bows, and still +further stopping the ship's way. + +"Now we may shorten sail," sang out Captain Bruno. "Aloft, my lads; +quick about it." The men needed not to be told of the importance of +haste. They flew aloft, and soon handed the top-gallant-sails, and took +two reefs in the topsails. Relieved of the vast weight which had been +pressing on her, and almost driving her over, the schooner now flew much +more easily over the seas, and with scarcely diminished speed. + +We kept watching the corvette. She, of course, could carry sail on her +main-mast, but it took some time to clear away the wreck of the +fore-topmast, and to set up the fore-stay, which had been carried away. +This it was necessary to do before sail could be set on the +main-topmast. All this work occupied some time, and enabled the +schooner to get far ahead. Night, too, was coming on. The weather +promised to be very thick. The pirate's chance of escape was very +considerable. Our hearts sank within us as we saw the prospect of our +prolonged captivity. Proportionably the pirates were elated as they +felt sure of escaping. On we flew; the sails of the corvette grew +darker and darker, till a thin small pyramid alone was seen rising +against the sky in the far horizon. Mr McRitchie, who had joined us on +deck, heaved a deep sigh. To him captivity was even more galling than +to us. Darkness came on, and the corvette was lost to sight. + +It was a terrific night. The wind increased, and the sea got up more +than ever--the thunder roared, and the lightning flashed; and as the +schooner went plunging away through the foaming ocean, often I thought +that she was about to sink down and never to rise again. The dark, +stern features of the pirates were lighted up now and again, as they +stood at their posts, by the lightning as it played around us; but, +strange to say, they appear to have far more dreaded the anger of their +fellow-men than they did the fury of the elements. Now and then, +perhaps, conscience whispered in the ears of some one not totally deaf +to its influence, that his last hour was approaching and that he must +soon stand in the presence of an offended God, whose laws he had long +systematically outraged; but, generally speaking, the consciences of +that reckless crew had long since been put to sleep, never to awake till +summoned, when hope should have fled, at the sound of the last trump. +On every side those countenances--bold, fierce, God-defying--broke forth +on me out of the darkness as the bright lightning gleamed across them. +Each individual face of the dreadful picture is indelibly impressed on +my memory. At length the doctor went to his berth, and Jerry and I +followed him to the cabin and crept into ours--wet, hungry, and +sorrowful. We slept--we had been so excited all day that we could not +help that from very weariness; but my dreams, I know, were strangely +troubled. + +At last I awoke, and found that it was daylight. I sprang up, calling +Jerry, and we went on deck to learn what had become of the corvette. +She was nowhere to be seen. The wind had gone down very much, but it +was still blowing fresh, and a heavy sea was running. The sky, however, +was blue and clear, and the waters sparkled brightly as the beams of the +rising sun glanced over them. The schooner had escaped all damage in +the gale. Our spirits rose somewhat with the pure fresh air of morning, +and very well pleased were we to devour a good breakfast, when our +friend the black cook placed it before us on deck, in a couple of large +basins, with heavy silver spoons to feed ourselves. + +All day we were looking out in expectation of seeing the corvette again. +Hour after hour passed, but she did not appear. + +"She will not find us again, Jerry," said I. "I wonder what the pirates +will do with us?" + +"Turn us into pirates somehow or other, I am afraid," answered Jerry. +"If we don't pretend to be satisfied with our lot, perhaps they will get +tired of us and will cut our throats, or throw us overboard, just to be +rid of us." + +"That cannot, perhaps, he helped," I replied. "But Jerry, I say, do not +for a moment ever think of turning pirate, even if it were to save your +life. Do right, whatever comes of it, is what Cousin Silas has often +said to us--remember." + +"I was not quite serious," answered Jerry. "But still, it we did, we +should have a better chance of getting away." + +"That is the very thing that we should not do," I replied. "Never do +what is wrong that good may come of it. The pirates are not likely to +ask us to join them; but if they do, all we have to say is that we would +rather not. We need not go into the heroics about it, and show a vast +amount of virtuous indignation, but just quietly and civilly refuse, and +stick to it. Don't fancy that we shall get away faster by doing what is +wrong. As I said, let us do what is right, and trust all the rest to +Providence." + +"I see of course you are right, Harry. I'll try and heartily agree with +you; but just now I was considering how we might deceive the pirates by +pretending to join them, and I thought that I had got a first-rate plan +in my head. But, Harry, from what you have been saying, I now +understand that I was wrong." + +We took two or three turns on deck. + +"I say, Harry," exclaimed Jerry, suddenly, "I wonder what has become of +the _Dove_?" So interested had we been with what concerned ourselves +especially, that we had not till that moment thought about her. + +"If she did not go to the bottom during the gale yesterday, perhaps the +corvette got hold of her," said I. "If the corvette did catch her, the +people in charge of her are very likely to get their heads into a noose, +for they will be puzzled to explain in a satisfactory way how she came +into their possession." + +Captain Bruno seemed to care very little for the loss of the people in +the little schooner. He swore and grumbled somewhat under the idea that +she might have fallen into the power of the corvette, and seemed rather +to wish that she might have gone to the bottom. However, as she was a +capital sea-boat, it was possible she might have weathered the gale, in +which case Jerry and I concluded that she would find her way to some +rendezvous or other with the pirate. We hoped she might, for vague +ideas ran through our minds that she might by some means or other enable +us to make our escape from our captors. We could not tell how, but we +thought that perhaps we might some night get on board her in some +harbour, when the large schooner was refitting, and run off with her. +Very slender hopes serve to buoy up people in circumstances like ours. + +Three or four days passed away, and the pirates became pretty confident +that the man-of-war was not likely again to fall in with them. As Jerry +and I passed the compass, we carelessly cast a glance at it, and found +that we were still steering a course to the southward. The pirates were +now constantly on the alert. It was evident that they were on the watch +for some vessel or some island. We considered that they were looking +for a vessel, from the various directions in which they were looking +out--north, south, east, and west; and sometimes we lay hove-to for +hours together. + +"I say, Harry, would it not be a joke if they were to fall in with the +corvette again?" observed Jerry, when no one was near. "The Americans +would not let us escape quite so easily as before." + +"The pirates will be too wary for that," I answered. "But look! there +is something in sight from the mast-head. There is `up helm.' Away we +go in chase of her, whatever she may be." + +There was a strong breeze from the north-west. Our course was about +south-east. Mr McRitchie joined us in our walk on deck. He looked +more grave and sad even than before. He had heard, we concluded, that +the pirates were about to commit some fresh act of atrocity. They +expected some fighting, at all events, we soon discovered; for the +magazine was opened, powder and shot were got up, and all hands were +busily employed in overhauling their arms, giving them an additional +cleaning, and loading their pistols. + +We did not venture aloft, but we looked out eagerly ahead to discover +the vessel of which it was clear the pirates were in chase. First +royals, then top-gallant-sails, and topsails slowly rose above the +horizon. At last her courses appeared, and we could see the whole of +her hull. She was a large barque, and there could be little doubt that +the pirates were right in supposing her to be a merchantman. We had +just done breakfast when she was first seen; it was almost sunset by the +time her hull was completely seen. + +Our appearance did not seem to have created any alarm on board, for she +stood on steadily in her course to the southward. We followed like a +blood-hound chasing its prey. The pirates were in high glee; they +recognised the vessel as one which had been unloading in San Francisco +when they had been there, and they seemed to have no doubt, from the +number of people who appeared to be on board, seen through their +glasses, that her passengers were gold-diggers, returning to their +distant homes with their hard-earned gains--some obtained, undoubtedly, +by honest, laborious industry--others, perhaps, by the many lawless +means to which people will resort when excited by the lust of getting +money. + +As darkness settled down on the ocean, we could just see the vessel +ahead. We kept on in her wake. As we much outsailed her, we quickly +stole up after her, till we could make out the dark figures of her crew, +as they stood on her deck, wondering, probably, what we could be. Not a +shot was fired--no words were exchanged between the two vessels. +"Perhaps the large vessel is prepared for the strife," I thought to +myself. "If so, the pirates may again find that they have caught a +tartar; still, it is strange that no one on board takes notice of us." +We were still following in the wake of the stranger, but rapidly +overhauling her. Jerry and I remained on deck to see what would happen. +We had got close up on her quarter. Our helm was put to port, and this +placed us on a line which enabled us to run up alongside. Not till our +bows were almost up to the stranger's quarter did any one hail us. + +"What are you? what do you want?" asked some one, in a tone of surprise. + +"We'll show you," replied Captain Bruno. + +"Oh! is that your game?" exclaimed a person on board the stranger. "We +thought so;--fire!" + +The order was obeyed, and several shot came crashing into the bows of +the schooner. The pirates were not slow in returning the compliment. +Their fury was speedily worked up to the highest pitch. They laboured +away at the guns, shouting and uttering terrific oaths, more like demons +than men. We quickly ranged up alongside, keeping a little further off +than we probably should otherwise have done, in the hope of crippling +our opponent before attempting to board. The stranger had evidently +many more people on board than the pirates had expected. They fought +their guns well, and bravely too; but the further off we got the less +effect had they, showing that they were handled by men without practice; +while the pirates, on the other hand, seldom missed their aim. Thus +fiercely engaged--the roar of the guns and the shrieks and cries of the +combatants breaking the silence of night, while the flashes lighted up +the darkness and revealed the hideous scene--we ran on in the same +course as at first. The effect of the pirates' practice with their guns +soon began to tell on the stranger; spar after spar was shot away, and +her lofty canvas came dropping down in torn shreds on deck. The pirates +shouted with satisfaction and triumph as each fresh shot told on their +opponent. We consequently had to shorten sail to keep abreast of her. +Still, her shot sometimes searched out a pirate as he laboured at his +gun, and several lay writhing in agony on the deck, while the voices of +others were silenced for ever. At last down came the fore-mast of the +barque, followed by her main-topmast. She was completely in the power +of the pirates, for the schooner could sail round and round her, while +her crew were unable to fight their guns, overwhelmed as they were with +the wreck of the masts. The pirates cheered ferociously, and, keeping +away, crossed the bows of the barque and fired a broadside right into +them. Shrieks and cries arose from the deck of the stranger, but still +no signal was made that she had given in. On the contrary, as soon as +she could get the guns on the port-side to bear, she began firing away +again on us. We tacked, and once more stood towards her, so as to rake +her as we passed under her stern. For a minute there was an entire +cessation of firing; none of her guns could be brought to bear on us, +and the pirates were reserving their fire to pour it into her with more +deadly effect. Dim and indistinct, we could just make out her hull and +shattered rigging amid the gloom; and the pirates, believing that she +would quickly be in their power, were calculating on the rich booty +which would soon be theirs, when bright flames darted up from the midst +of her--a roar like the loudest thunder deafened our ears--up, up flew +spars, and rigging, and human forms, and pieces of burning plank-- +illuminating the dark ocean far and wide around; while the fire, which +burned brightly, lighted up the countenances of the pirates as they +stood watching the catastrophe they had caused. Some gleamed with +anger, others with disappointed avarice; some few looked horrified, and +a few were pale with terror, lest the same fate were about to be theirs. +No attempt was made to save any of those who, escaping from the burning +wreck, might be struggling in the waves. Jerry and I fancied that we +could hear some shrieks and cries for help, but they were soon silenced, +as the waters closed over the heads of those who were struggling, but +struggling in vain. Uttering a fierce oath, Captain Bruno stamped on +the deck, to give vent to his disappointment, and then ordering the helm +once more to be put up, stood away on his course to the southward. Such +are pirates, such they have always been, in spite of the veil of romance +which has been thrown over their misdeeds. + +For some days the schooner stood on, happily meeting with no other +vessel to plunder and destroy. We all the time were kept in anxious +doubt as to what was to be our fate. We had another cause of anxiety, +in observing that the crew were inclined to quarrel with each other. +The cause of this we could not understand, but the fact was very +evident. A party seemed to be formed against the captain, and it +appeared to us that Silva was at the head of it. Of course this was +only conjecture. He was certainly not on such good terms with the +captain as he had been at first. He was not a man of a quarrelsome or +ambitious disposition, and probably some of the rest of the crew put him +forward as their chief, knowing that he would be the principal sufferer +if their plans failed, and believing that they could easily get rid of +him if at any time they found it convenient so to do. Now and then +disputes arose to a high pitch. Knives would be drawn and pistols +flashed. More than once matters were brought to extremities; wounds +were given and received, and blood was spilt. It had the effect of +cooling their tempers for a moment, but at the slightest provocation +they again broke out. + +One day two men were talking together, apparently on very good terms. +One of them we saw pull a dice-box out of his pocket, with several gold +and silver coins; the other likewise produced his money. They began to +play--at first laughing in a friendly way at the various turns of their +fortunes. Then the laughter ceased, and they grew more earnest and +intent on the game. One looked very triumphant, as the gold lately +owned by his antagonist began to swell his heap. At last the other had +no money left. He produced a watch, a clasp-knife and several jewels, a +golden crucifix (which he kissed before parting with), and a +silver-mounted pistol. His teeth were firm set; his eyes began to roll. +He played on. Again he lost; but he had nothing wherewith to pay. He +turned his pockets inside out. The winner seemed still to be insisting +on payment. A deadly pallor came over the countenance of the loser. He +sprang to his feet; a sailor was passing, with a long knife stuck in his +red sash; he snatched it from the man, and uttering an exclamation +equivalent to "Have at you, then! take all I have to give!" plunged it +up to the hilt in the body of the winner, who fell to the deck without a +groan. The action brought all those on deck around him. "He insulted +me," he exclaimed; "he won all I had, and then asked for more." The +bystanders seemed to acquiesce in the justness and rightfulness of the +action. They did not attempt to touch the murderer, but they lifted up +the body of the man he had wounded. He was already quite dead. None of +the officers attempted to interfere. The murderer searched in the +pockets of his victim for the money and jewels, and counting out the +coin, took possession of what had been his own. Again with blasphemous +mockery he kissed the cross, evidently believing that he was doing a +righteous action, and then sat down on a gun with folded arms, as if he +had been an unconcerned spectator of the scene which was enacting. The +rest of the dead man's property the pirates distributed among +themselves, and then lifting the body to the side of the vessel, without +an expression of regret threw it into the sea. + +The tragedy was over, but the countenance of the murdered man haunted +us, while his murderer continued walking with an unconcerned look about +the deck, as if his hands were perfectly innocent of blood. + +"Jerry," said I, "the sooner we are out of this, though even on a desert +island, the better." + +"Oh yes, Harry; it is not safe to live with such wretches," was the +answer. + +It would be better if men remembered at all times that it is not good to +dwell with sinners. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +OUR PERILOUS VOYAGE. + +As we emerged from our cabin one morning, we found that the schooner was +standing toward what appeared to be a fleet of vessels at anchor. + +"Why, we shall soon be among a whole squadron of buccaneers!" exclaimed +Jerry, in a tone of despair. "We shall be separated, Harry--turned into +cabin boys, and never have a chance of escape. O dear! O dear! My +poor father!--what will he do?" + +"Why, Jerry, I am not quite so certain that those are vessels," I +remarked; "just observe them attentively. Hillo! they have disappeared! +Stay, we shall soon rise to the top of the swell again. There they +are! They are as steady as church steeples. Those are not the masts of +vessels. They are cocoa-nut and palm-trees, depend on that. They are +growing on one of those coral islands which abound in these latitudes. +Watch again. On we go." (Here I caught sight of the glittering, white, +sandy beach.) "How the surf breaks on the reef outside it! How bright +and clear it appears, rising out of the deep ocean! How green the +ground looks under those tall trees, and how intensely blue the lagoon +in the centre! It is a lovely-looking spot--quite a fairy land. I hope +that we shall be put on shore there, though I would rather have a few +hills and valleys to diversify the scene, if we are to remain there +long." + +While we were talking we were rapidly approaching the coral island. The +doctor joined us, and was watching it also. The schooner stood on, and +we thought she was going to pass it. The doctor, though not less +anxious to leave the vessel than we were, did not appear to agree with +our wish to be set on shore there. "It is dreadfully hot there, without +shelter from sun or wind. There is also but little variety of food; and +green as the ground looks from hence, we should find nothing to be +compared to a green lawn when once we set foot on it," he remarked. +Still Jerry and I were ready enough to run the risk, hoping that, at all +events, we might soon find the means of getting away. When, however, we +had abandoned all hopes of landing there, the schooner was once more +hauled up close to the wind. We found that she had stood on to clear a +reef. She stood in under the lee of the land, and hove-to close to +where an opening appeared in the reef. + +Our hearts beat quick, for now we felt certain that something or other +was going to happen, though nobody had said anything to us. It seemed +strange that we could have lived so long surrounded by our +fellow-creatures, and yet so entirely alone. A boat was lowered. A +cask of bread, and another of salted meat, and some hatchets, and a few +old sails, and, indeed, more things than I can here enumerate, were put +into her. The doctor was summoned into the captain's cabin. He +remained a short time, and when he re-appeared he looked happier than he +had done for many days. Jerry and I were then ordered into the boat; +the doctor, to our great satisfaction, followed. Old Surley, as may be +supposed, would not consent willingly to be left behind, and, watching +his opportunity, he sprang in after us, and, as if he thought he might +be carried back again if perceived, immediately hid himself under the +seats between our legs. We were delighted to have the old fellow, and +trembled lest the pirates, among some of whom he was a favourite, might +insist on keeping him. It was with great satisfaction, therefore, that +we found the boat shoved off from the schooner's side. + +Four of the pirates formed the crew of the boat, and taking the oars, +they pulled towards the shore. We did not leave the pirate ship with +any regret, though few people would desire to be landed on a desert +island in the middle of the Pacific. Tom Congo, the black cook, was the +only person who wished us good-bye. He was evidently sorry to lose us. +We had no means of showing our gratitude to him, except by a few hurried +words. We saw his good-natured black visage grinning at us over the +bulwarks, as we left the vessel's side. Suddenly he started back. +There was some violent disturbance on deck. Shouts, and cries, and +pistol-shots were heard. The outbreak we had anticipated was taking +place. There was a mutiny. Some of the crew had risen against the +captain; there could be no doubt about that. Some of the men in the +boat wanted to go back to join in the fray, but an old man among them +shook his head and said, "No! Let the fools fight it out. When we go +back we shall know which side to join." The rest saw the worldly wisdom +of the advice, and calming down their eagerness, they pulled on to the +shore. + +We quickly passed through the reef, and the boat grounded on the beach, +which we found was composed of broken corals and shells, and rose some +ten feet out of the water. Had it not been for the disturbance on +board, the boat would probably have returned as soon as the stores +intended for our use had been landed; but, as an excuse for remaining, +the crew offered to carry them up to any place we might select under the +trees where to pitch a tent. We selected one to leeward of a heap of +coral, where, several trees also growing close together, some shelter +might be obtained. Near it was a pure spring of water bubbling up +through the hard rock, and flowing into a basin some five feet in +diameter, but of its depth we could not judge. The water was so clear +that, as we looked into it, it appeared but a shallow pool. Jerry, +being very thirsty, stooped down to drink from it, and, baring his arm, +intended to rest his hand at the bottom to support himself while he +stooped over. Down he went on his knees, but he got more water than he +had bargained for. Suddenly over head and heels he went, and was +floundering about in the pool, which must have been nearly three feet +deep. Sad as was our condition, the doctor and I could not help +laughing heartily at his surprised countenance as he popped his head up +again after his summerset, and we assisted to haul him out. Even the +saturnine pirates joined in the laugh. As the sun was very hot, his +clothes quickly again dried, and he was in no way the worse for his +ducking. + +Surley had not mended matters by jumping into the pool and swimming +about in its cool waters. As soon as he was out, off he set scampering +about the island, scaring the wild-fowl, whisking his tail, and barking +with delight at finding himself free after his long imprisonment on +board ship. I felt very much inclined to follow his example, and to run +about after him shouting at the top of my voice. I restrained myself, +however, as the state of affairs was too serious to allow me to indulge +in any such exuberance of spirits. + +We thanked the pirates, with as good a grace as we could command, for +helping us to carry up the stores. "Oh, no need of thanks, mates," was +the answer. "You won't find it very pleasant here, perhaps; but there's +many an honest fellow worse off than you are, and there are not many who +come aboard us who get away as well as you have done." + +We had too much reason to believe this assertion true to hazard a reply. +Perhaps Jerry's tumble into the water had put them in good-humour; but +whatever was the cause, they seemed inclined to help us, and volunteered +to assist in cutting down some trees to build our hut, which the canvas +would make tolerably comfortable. While so employed, however, they kept +looking up constantly towards the schooner. + +"I say, Tom, don't you think that there is a chance of her making sail, +and leaving us here?" observed one of them to the old pirate Tom +Roguish. + +"No fear of that, mate," answered old Tom, shaking his head. "They know +our value too well to do that. I've watched what has been going on for +some time, and it's my belief Silva's party will find that they have +made a mistake. The captain has been too wide awake to be taken by +surprise, depend on that." + +"Hillo! what are they about now?" exclaimed another of the men. The +schooner, which had stood still closer in towards the shore, had lowered +another boat, at the same time firing a gun as a signal to recall the +one which had brought us. We all ran down as fast as we could to the +spot nearest to her, and we could see that several persons were being +lowered into the boat. + +"Well, good-bye, mates; a pleasant residence to you," exclaimed old Tom, +insisting on shaking hands with us; and then he and his companions +stepped into the boat and shoved off from the shore. We were not sorry, +however, to see their no very pleasant visages grow less and less +distinct, till they were lost in the distance. They stopped rowing as +they passed the other boat, and exchanging a few words, again pulled on. +We anxiously watched the approach of the other boat, to ascertain what +it contained. One of the chief mates was steering. Silva, also, to our +surprise, was in the boat. His head was bent down, and, from his +attitude, it appeared as if his hands were lashed behind him. But there +were two other people. We looked, and looked again. "Why," exclaimed +Jerry, in a joyful tone, "it's Mr Brand, and no other than Ben Yool! +How fortunate! Now we shall go all right." I at the same time, with no +less surprise and satisfaction, recognised my kind cousin and old Ben. +Mr McRitchie did not appear to be as surprised as we were. He all the +time, we found, had known that they were on board, but had been directed +not to mention it to us. He told us that, as far as he could make out, +Silva had been the means of saving the lives of Cousin Silas and Ben, as +he had saved ours, but that the pirates had kept them below, that they +might not discover whereabout they were landed; and, for the same +reason, had prevented them communicating with us. Silva had another +reason also for consenting to this arrangement, for he was afraid that +their appearance might excite the anger of the pirates, and that they +might perhaps throw us all overboard together. Indeed, it was owing to +a happy combination of circumstances that our lives had been spared by +that gang of bloodthirsty and cruel desperadoes. Even now, we were not +quite certain that they might not take it into their heads to shoot us +all, and we longed to see them making sail and clear away. The +provisions, however, they had left with us, showed that the intentions +of some of them had been kinder than the conduct of the crew in general +would have led us to expect. + +The second boat now reached the beach. Silva was assisted out, +apparently suffering much pain, and then Cousin Silas and Ben followed +with their limbs at liberty. We ran forward to welcome them, which we +did most warmly, while they seemed very well pleased to meet us. Poor +Silva was left, wounded as he was, standing on the beach. Some more +casks and several other things were landed from the boat, and then the +crew, without addressing a word to any of us, shoved off as fast as they +could, and pulled back to the schooner. + +As soon as the pirates were gone, we went up to Silva and asked him what +had occurred. His rage and indignation, added to the pain he was +suffering, almost prevented him from speaking. "Partly because I did +not like to see so much blood shed, and partly because the captain was +jealous of me, he had, I discovered, resolved to get rid of me," he +replied, stamping on the ground. "I, however, was always on my guard. +Many of the people liked me and trusted me, and I got information of all +he intended to do. He, however, it seems, had his spies, who got into +the confidence of some of my people, and the captain saw that we were +very likely to become the strongest party. Some of his allies took the +occasion of your being put on shore to accuse me of having favoured you +for my own ends. Words quickly led to blows. My friends rallied round +me, but some of those I could best trust were sent away in the boat with +you. The captain's party made a rush forward, and, wounded and +bleeding, I was seized. They would have killed me at once, but my +friends declared that if I was hurt they would blow up the vessel and +all hands together. I doubt if they would have kept their word. +However, the captain agreed to spare my life, and to put me on shore +with you, if they would not create any further disturbance. This they +very quickly agreed to, the cowards, and so, here am I, lately as free +and independent as any of them, left to share the fate of those whose +lives they considered it a great favour to have spared." + +"Well, Silva, we will try and make you as comfortable as we can," said +Cousin Silas, taking his arm. "We have a doctor to tend you, which you +would not have had on board; and as we feel fully that through your +influence our lives have been preserved, we will do our best to show our +gratitude." Cousin Silas said this as we were showing the path up to +the spot where we had commenced our hut. + +In one corner we quickly made a bed of leaves and dry grass. Over this +we spread a piece of canvas, and thus constructed a very good bed, on +which we placed Silva. Dr McRitchie having examined his wounds, washed +them and bound them up; but he observed that he considered his case +somewhat serious. As soon as this was done, we set to work to cut down +some more trees, so as to increase the dimensions of our habitation. We +were employed for two entire days in building our hut, for we agreed +that, as we might have to remain a considerable time on the island, and +as probably heavy gales might at times prevail, it would be wise to +construct a habitation which could not easily be blown down. To do +this, to every upright post we put another at a considerable angle, and +then secured our canvas tightly down to it. We also beat heavy lumps of +coral tight down round the thick ends of the posts, so that it was +scarcely possible for the wind to drag them out of their holes. We had +been considerately supplied by Silva with a saw, and hammer, and nails, +and other carpenter's tools; and he now most unexpectedly benefited by +his kindness to us, as we were able to put a comfortable shelter over +his head much more rapidly than we could otherwise have done. I need +scarcely say that Cousin Silas took the lead in everything. Indeed, I +suspect, without him we should have managed but badly. Whenever our +spirits flagged, he restored them by his resignation and cheerfulness; +and he reminded us that although we might think our fate a hard one, we +should be most thankful that we had escaped with our lives from the +hands of such bloodthirsty miscreants as Bruno and his associates. + +So busy were we at first, that it was some time before we had an +opportunity of inquiring how it was that the pirates had not murdered +him and Ben, when they pulled alongside the schooner. "I believe that +they were so astonished at seeing two strangers on their deck, not +knowing where we had come from, that it did not occur to them to heave +us overboard again. This gave time to Silva, who at once recognised us, +to form a scheme for saving our lives. Going up to us, he welcomed us +as old comrades, hinting that we had some mysterious powers which +enabled us to go about over the ocean wherever we liked, seated on our +cloaks, or in cocoa-nut shells for aught I know. The pirates on hearing +this, received us in a very friendly way, and all of them swore that no +harm should happen to us. However, when we were required to take the +oaths of the fraternity, and steadily refused, some of them began to +suspect that Silva had been deceiving them. Our punt alongside showed +that at all events we had not come on board on our cloaks. However, as +they had sworn no harm should come to us, they kept their word, with the +intention of landing us, as they have done, on this or some other +uninhabited island. After Silva had lost his authority, I suspect that +our treatment would have been very different to what we found it at +first." + +"Well, Mr Brand, we are so very glad that you and Ben have escaped. +What should we have done without you?" exclaimed Jerry. + +I could do no more than take his hand and wring it warmly. + +"Now, tell us, what do you think we ought to do next?" added Jerry. + +"Make ourselves as happy as we can, and collect everything which will +serve us as food, in case we have to make a long sojourn here, which it +is, I think, very probable we shall have to do," replied Mr Brand. "A +ship may come off here in a few days or weeks, but we must remember that +perhaps months or years may pass before one is seen. I cannot say +whereabouts we are, but I suspect that the pirates would not have left +us in the usual track of vessels coming north round Cape Horn, or going +east or west. The next thing we have to do is to strip the branches off +the tallest palm on the island, and make it serve as a flag-staff. +We'll then make as large a flag as we can of our handkerchiefs and +shirts, and any stuff which will be light enough to fly well." + +We very soon carried out this project, and all of us working away to +join our handkerchiefs, we had by the next afternoon a big flag flying +from what we called our mast-head. + +"Why, we shall turn into regular Robinson Crusoes, if we stay here as +long as you were saying we might have to do, Mr Brand," observed Jerry, +as we were working away at our flag-staff. "I cannot say, however, that +I like the look of this island as much as I did that of Juan Fernandez. +If we had our choice, we would rather be there, I should think." + +"Very likely; but as you see, Jerry, we have not our choice, we must +make up our minds to be content where we are," answered Mr Brand +cheerfully. "Probably, if we were at Juan Fernandez, supposing it still +uninhabited, we should be wishing to be on the mainland. Let us strive, +therefore, wherever we are, or whatever happens to us, to be content. +Depend on it, we were not placed here by our merciful and all-loving +Maker without an object, though we may never discover it. I do not for +a moment mean to say that we are to sit down idly and not to endeavour +to improve our condition. We are sent into this world to struggle--that +we may in a variety of ways be tried--that all our trials may tend to +our improvement. What I wish to impress on you, my lads, is, that we +should be contented in every condition in which we are placed; we should +be thankful for every step we gain, while our chief aim in life is our +religious and moral improvement. But remember, above all things, that +we must always look beyond this world. This is not our abiding-place-- +this is not even our resting-place--there is no rest here. If we only +strive for something in this world--however noble, however great the +position--we shall altogether fall short, very short of the aim, the +object of life." + +Mr Brand warmed with his subject, and much more he said of a similar +nature, which I will not now repeat. Jerry and I listened very +attentively, and old Ben Yool tried also to take in what he was saying. +I think he succeeded, and, certainly, on all occasions after that he +bore without a grumble all the hardships to which we were exposed. Poor +Silva lay on his bed all this time, suffering much from his wounds, +while Mr McRitchie, when he could leave his side, went off with his gun +to explore the island, and to search for specimens of its natural +history. There was, however, a good deal to be done before we could +accompany him. First, we had to finish our house, and then to store +within it all the provisions and articles which the pirates had left +with us. The doctor had kept his gun, and we had ours, which had been +brought from the _Dove_, given to us as we left the schooner. These +fire-arms would have been of no use to us, had not Silva given us a keg +of powder and a bag of shot. These treasures we resolved to husband +with great care, as we knew that we might be placed in positions in +which our very existence would depend on our having the means of killing +game, or of defending ourselves against enemies. + +"Before we do anything else, we should take an inventory of all we +have," answered Mr Brand. "We must calculate how long our provisions +will hold out, in the first place, and not imitate the example of many +savages, who eat up all they have got, and then starve." + +This advice was followed. We found that we had provisions for four or +five months; but we hoped to make them last a much longer time, if +necessary, by eating the birds which swarmed on the island. There were +cocoa-nuts and some other fruits, and we hoped also to catch an +abundance of fish, which are generally to be found about the reefs +surrounding coral islands in the Pacific. Our labours being concluded, +we all sat down together on the beach below our habitation, to talk over +our prospects. Happy, indeed, was it for us all, that we had a man like +Cousin Silas among us, to give us his advice, and to set an example of +patience and hope, and faith in God's merciful providence, and a +cheerfulness which nothing could overcloud. Really, after talking with +him for some time, I often felt that our lot was rather to be envied +than dreaded, and that we were only doomed to undergo a somewhat +prolonged picnic. This example and conversation had ultimately a great +influence with the doctor, who had been inclined to repine and to become +morose, looking with gloomy apprehension as to the future. + +A week passed by, and we found ourselves perfectly settled in our new +home. Silva was gaining strength and his wounds were healing, and we +were all in excellent health. The doctor also had almost recovered his +spirits. We began now to take a more extended survey of our island. We +calculated that it was from ten to fifteen miles from one end to the +other, or rather right across; and as it was nearly circular, with a +large lagoon in the centre, we had to walk from thirty to forty miles to +go round it. It was about a mile across in most places. The beach was +formed of broken coral and shells, while the upper portion of the land +consisted of the _debris_ of coral, the dung of birds, and vegetable +earth. Out of this composition grew tall cocoa-nut trees, and palms, +and pandanus trees, besides a variety of shrubs. + +The birds had been partially driven away from the spot where we landed +and had been working, but we found them in prodigious numbers a little +way on. Cousin Silas insisted on our tying up old Surley, to prevent +the unnecessary destruction which he dealt among them. Before +committing any great slaughter among them, Cousin Silas advised us to +kill only a few of each description, to ascertain which were the most +palatable for present consumption, and which were likely to preserve +best for future store. Sitting on nests roughly constructed of sticks +among the shrubs, were a number of frigate birds (the _Tachypetes +Aquila_). He is a magnificent fellow, allied in some respect to the +cormorant, but with shorter legs, and having a forked tail. His plumage +is a rich empurpled black, and the beak, both mandibles of which are +curved at the tips, is red. His wings are of immense length, and his +power of flight is wonderful. He can fish perfectly well for himself, +but he is a most irreclaimable pirate, and likes to watch till other +birds have seized their prey, and then he drops down upon them and +carries it away. Sailors also call them men-of-war birds, but I think +they ought to be called pirates. We looked into their nests, and found +only one egg in each. + +While sitting down taking our luncheon, we observed a snake crawling +along out of the grass, and wriggling his way towards the sea. For what +he went there I do not know. He had better have kept away. Just as he +got below high-water mark, out darted from the crevice of a rock a huge +crab, and seized him by the nape of the neck. The snake wriggled, and +twisted, and tried to free himself in vain. Mr Crab held tight hold of +him, and seemed resolved to eat him up. Poor Snakie tried to get his +tail round a bit of rock, to keep himself out of the water; but Crabie +pulled and hauled, and, in spite of all resistance, got him down to the +very edge of the water, knowing that when once under it his struggles +would very soon cease. Crabs have, however, to learn the lesson that +there is many a slip between the catch and the feast. A frigate bird +had from afar espied the combat, and, flying like a flash of lightning, +downward he darted and seized the snake by the back. The voracious crab +held on, not liking to lose his prey, till he found himself borne +upwards from the ground, and in unpleasant propinquity to the frigate +bird's sharp beak. He must have felt that if he did not let go at once, +he would be dashed to pieces; still, as a miser clutches his bags of +gold, did Mr Crab the snake. Fortunately for him, the frigate bird had +flown seaward, so that when he did let go, he fell into the water, and, +probably, however his temper might have suffered, he was not much the +worse for the ducking. Had he fallen on the rock, he would inevitably +have had his shell broken, and would himself have become the prey of the +pirate. + +There were also sooty terns and gannets. It was interesting to watch +the careful way in which the latter guarded their eggs, placed in holes +on the ground. Wishing to make their offspring hardy, they do not build +nests for them, I suppose; or, perhaps, the warmth of the rock assists +the process of incubation. + +There were probably a greater number of tropic birds than of any others. +They would not got out of our way as we walked along, allowing us to +shove them over rather than move. We literally also took their eggs +from under them, without their attempting to make any defence. This +apathy, as we called it, we thought arose from stupidity, but the doctor +examined one of them, and showed us how weak its legs were, while its +feet were adapted only for swimming. Its wings, however, were very long +and powerful. Therefore, had it been up in the air, or skimming along +over the summit of the waves, it would probably have acted in a very +different way. "Never judge of people till you know the sphere of life +in which they have been accustomed to move," remarked the doctor. "A +really sensible, clever man, may appear very stupid and dull, just as +these poor birds do, simply because he is out of his element." + +The tropic bird is a species of gull, about the size of a partridge. It +has a red bill and legs. The feathers are white, tipped with black, and +the back is variegated with curved lines of black. The tail consists of +two long, straight, narrow feathers, almost of equal breadth during +their whole length. Their flight is most graceful--they glide along +with scarcely any perceptible motion of the wing. They return every +night to roost on land. They live entirely on fish. The natives of the +South Sea Islands ornament their persons with their feathers. We saw a +number of snakes, but none of them attempted to bite us; and the doctor +said from their appearance that he did not believe them to be of a +venomous character. Whenever we went near the water among the rocks, we +saw large fish darting about, of every colour and shape; huge, long eels +gliding in and out between the rocks, and fierce, voracious sharks +pursuing their prey. + +There were a great variety of molluscs; indeed, the whole shore was +composed of shells. We naturally thought that the shells were empty; +but as we watched them, thousands of them began to move, each tenanted +by a soldier-crab, and a whole army of them slowly advanced out of the +sea and marched across the land, devouring all the insects they +encountered in their progress. Now and then two of them would stop and +have a fight over a beetle or a spider, when perhaps a third would step +up and carry off the cause of dispute. We found the spiders' webs +stretching in every direction between the bushes. The spiders +themselves were great, ugly, black fellows, very disagreeable to look +at, and still more unpleasant when we found them crawling over our +faces. + +I wish that I could describe the variety of shrubs we found on the +island. Many were evergreens. One, which the doctor called the +suriana, emitted a peculiarly strong, though not unpleasant odour. We +used to be very glad, when the rays of the sun came down fiercely on our +heads, to take shelter under these trees, and to rest during our long +journeys from one end of our dominion to the other. + +We in a short time were acquainted with nearly every portion of the +island. Our habitation was about ten miles from the entrance to the +lagoon, so that in one direction we were able to travel twenty miles, +when we arrived at the termination of that part of the circle; and by +going the other way, ten miles brought us to the end of the other. The +passage into the lagoon was probably the eighth of a mile broad. + +One day Jerry and I set off, he taking the shorter distance and I the +long way, that we might have the pleasure of looking at each other +across the passage. I do not know that we had any better reason. +Accompanied by old Surley, I set off by daybreak, as over such rough +ground it was difficult to make good more than two miles an hour. It +was therefore the evening when I got there. I looked eagerly across the +channel. There stood Jerry, shouting and beckoning to me. I shouted to +him, and made all sorts of signals expressive of my delight at seeing +him. + +After we had played these sorts of antics for some time, I began to +consider that it would be rather tiresome to have to walk all the way +back by myself, and that either I must go across to Jerry, or get him to +come over to me. I was the best swimmer, so I resolved to go over to +him. I made signs that I would do so, and he signified that he was very +glad to hear it. Old Surley seemed as pleased as I was at seeing Jerry, +and leaped and bounded about, barking every now and then, after his own +fashion, to show his satisfaction. Two or three times he ran down to +the water, as if he intended to plunge in and to swim across; and each +time he came back whining and looking up in my face, as if he had +thought it would be wiser not to venture in. I had good reason +afterwards to admire the instinct which prompted him to refrain from +doing what he evidently wished to do. + +I had my gun with me, as well as some provisions, which, of course, I +did not wish to wet; and so I had to consider how I could get them over +dry. A raft was the only means, but I reflected that it might prove +somewhat difficult to tow. Still, I did not like to be beat, so I made +signs to Jerry what I was going to do. With a hatchet which I carried +in my belt, and with which I had provided myself to make an arbour for +the night, I soon cut down wood enough to form a raft which would carry +all my things, including my clothes; and I had a line in my pocket +strong enough to tow it along. + +All was ready; I launched my raft, and was loading it with my property, +when my eye caught sight of a shoal of fish darting up through the +passage, followed by a black, triangular fin, which I quickly recognised +as that of a huge shark. I saw the horrid monster overtake and gobble +up some of the fugitives, and then quietly come back, as it appeared, to +swim sentry at the entrance of the lagoon. Perhaps he knew that the +fish would make an attempt to get out again the same way. Be that as it +may, I felt no inclination to encounter the gentleman. + +When Jerry at length discovered the cause of my hesitation, he made +signs entreating me to go back rather than to endeavour to cross, as I +proposed. Still, I did not like to be driven back, even by a shark. I +made signs that I would make a raft for myself. There were plenty of +materials, the work would not take long, and it would be a triumph to +have overcome a difficulty. I thought the idea a very bright one; so I +at once set to work to build a raft large enough to carry me across the +channel. Jerry tried to make me understand something or other; but I +was so absorbed with my own idea and the work on which I was engaged, +that I could not make out the meaning he wished to convey. While I was +working, old Surley looked on very attentively, as if he wanted to help +me, and fully understood what I was about. + +I had built the raft close down to the water; but even so, I had +considerable difficulty in getting it afloat. I succeeded, however, in +so doing at last, by means of a long piece of wood, which served me as a +handspike. Just as I was going to step on it, I fortunately saw the +branch of a tree floating by out to sea, at a rate which showed me that +I might very possibly be carried away by the current before I could get +across. I therefore converted my neckcloth and pocket-handkerchief into +a tow-rope, and towed the raft inside the lagoon. I had made myself two +strong paddles--one to serve in case the other should break. At last I +reached a point where I thought I might embark with safety. Surley, who +had before hesitated, now came and placed himself by me. I had put on +my shirt again, but the rest of my things were on the small raft. I +gave my raft a desperate shove, and away I went, paddling as hard as I +could up the lagoon. + +I thought that I had gone far enough, and was in a hurry to get across, +so I began to direct my course athwart the current. At first I made +great progress, and laughed and shouted at the idea of thus easily +accomplishing my undertaking. When, however, I turned my head over my +shoulder, I found to my dismay that I had not got so far from the shore +whence I started as I had fancied, while I was still a long way from +that on which Jerry stood, eager to welcome me. I plied my paddle with +all my might; but I appeared to make very little progress, and the +current was evidently carrying me rapidly down the passage. I looked +seaward: I had ample cause for anxiety, if not for dismay. A long line +of huge breakers was rolling in on an outer reef, while the passage +between them was so narrow that I scarcely hoped that the raft could be +carried through it; and if it was, where was I to go? Out to sea, to be +starved to death! If, on the other hand, I was thrown among the +breakers, I felt certain that I should soon become the prey of the +hungry shark I had just seen swimming after the shoal of fish. These +reflections gave strength to my arm, and made me paddle away even faster +than before. + +Jerry full well understood my clanger, and I saw him wringing his hands +in his anxiety; yet he saw that he could do nothing to help me. I felt +that I had been very foolish; and the poignancy of my regret was +heightened when I remembered that I had placed myself in my present +predicament without any necessity or an adequate object. I had little +time, I own, to indulge in such reflections, for all my thoughts and +feelings were soon engrossed with the danger which immediately +threatened me. Jerry ran along the shore as I was carried by, in vain +stretching out his arms as if he would help me. Old Surley sat still, +only now and then uttering a low whine, as if well aware of our peril, +but feeling that he was unable to render me aid. Now and then he looked +into the water, as if he would like to swim ashore, which he might +possibly have done; but then, perhaps, he remembered the shark he had +seen, or he was unwilling to desert me. I truly believe that it was the +latter cause made him remain so quiet by my side. I am certain, from +the expression of his countenance and the turn of his head, that he was +fully aware of our danger. + +I paddled and paddled away with all my might, all the time facing the +shore, and getting nearer to it, but at the same time gliding down +seaward. I was about a hundred yards from the shore. I looked towards +the angry breakers, and was not more than twice that distance from the +mouth of the channel. In a small boat there would have been no danger, +but I found my raft a very heavy thing to move. I put still greater +force into my strokes. My paddle snapped in two. Jerry uttered a cry +of despair, for he thought I must now inevitably be lost. I seized the +spare paddle, and flourishing it above my head, began to ply it as I had +done the first. I made some progress, but not sufficient, I feared, to +attain my object. I was approaching the last point. Jerry ran out to +the end of it, and rushed into the water up to his arm-pits, hoping to +stop the raft. I shouted to him to go back; for at that moment I saw +close to me the fin of a monster shark. The savage fish darted on +towards him, and he was barely in time to escape his ravenous jaws by +springing into shallow water. Had he caught hold of the raft, I saw +that he would be lifted off his legs, and carried away with me. Still I +hoped to get within his reach where he stood. But vain was the wish: I +drifted past the point. What hope had I now of being preserved? I felt +inclined to throw away my paddle, and to give myself up to despair. But +I aroused myself. I bethought me how Cousin Silas would have behaved +under similar circumstances. I prayed for strength and courage to Him +who is alone able to give them to those in deep distress. He heard me, +or I should not be alive to tell my tale. Again I seized my paddle, and +plied it with all my might. Still I drifted towards the roaring +breakers. I vividly pictured the horrid fate which awaited me. I +scarcely dared look seaward. I kept my eye on the shore, paddling +without intermission. Suddenly I felt the raft arrested in its progress +towards the breakers. It was partly whirled round, and I found it +gliding parallel with the shore. This encouraged me; hope once more +revived. I directed the raft towards the shore. I saw Jerry waving his +hands with joy; he was answered by a cheerful bark from Surley. I got +nearer and nearer. Oh, how thankful I felt when I found the blade of my +paddle grasped by Jerry, and was towed by him safely to the shore! Old +Surley sprang off on to dry ground, and began leaping up and licking +Jerry's cheeks and hands, to show his gratitude. Jerry and I hauled up +the raft, with its little tender, and landed my things; and then, +overcome with fatigue and the revulsion of feeling which I experienced, +I fainted. I very soon, however, recovered, and kneeling down, joined +by Jerry, I returned my heartfelt thanks to Him whose arm I knew most +certainly had saved me. Afterwards I dressed; and sitting down, we made +a supper from some of the provisions we had brought with us. + +We had lost so much time that it was impossible to get back to our +companions that night; so we set to work to prepare a hut and bed for +ourselves before we were overtaken by the darkness, which comes on so +rapidly in those latitudes. We were not long in constructing a bower +and in raising a platform, under and on which we might sleep secure from +the attacks of the snakes and other crawling things which abounded; but +night came down on us before our work was quite completed. However, +free from all fear of savages or wild beasts, we lay down, and were soon +asleep. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +OUR RESIDENCE ON THE ISLAND. + +Our journey back appeared very long, for I was weak and tired, and from +the exertion I had undergone, every muscle in my body ached. We met +Cousin Silas coming to look for us; for he had become anxious at not +seeing Jerry return at all events, and feared something might have +happened to us. Ben Yool had set off in the other direction to search +for me. Therefore, instead of gaining a great deal of credit, as we +expected, by the feat we had accomplished, we found that we had caused +our friends no little trouble and anxiety. It was a lesson to me ever +afterwards not to attempt to perform any useless undertaking simply +because it might be difficult or dangerous. Many people have lost their +lives by such folly. + +Silva had by this time completely recovered his health, but his spirits +were very uncertain. Sometimes he would sit for hours brooding over his +past life, and the treatment he had received from his companions; then +he would start up and walk about the beach, waving his arms, and calling +down imprecations on their heads. At other times he was very quiet and +sociable, and would talk rationally on any subject under discussion. + +The lagoon swarmed with fish; but though very beautiful in appearance, +our difficulty was to catch them. We could manage to make some coarse +lines out of some rope-yarns which had been thrown into the boat with +the canvas; we could cut rods from the younger trees which grew around; +and there were plenty of projecting masses of rock on which we might sit +and angle; but a very important portion of our gear was wanting--we had +no fishing-hooks. + +"Has any one a file?" asked Silva. We all examined our knives. I had +one in my knife-handle, but it was broken, and I had neglected to get +the blacksmith to put a new one in its place. We hunted eagerly in our +box of tools. Nothing like a file could we discover. + +"What is this?" exclaimed Jerry, pulling out a bag of nails from the +bottom of a cask. "Here is something larger than a nail inside." It +proved to be part of a file. + +"There is enough here to file through an iron bar, if properly used," +said Silva, examining it. "Hand me the nails; I will see what I can +do." Seating himself under the shade of a cocoa-nut tree near the hut, +he began working away most assiduously. With a pair of pincers he +twisted the nail into the shape of a hook, and very soon filed, out a +barb, and some notches in the shank with which to secure the line. In +the course of two or three hours he had produced a dozen capital hooks. +"Now we may go fishing," said he. "We may catch as many fish as we can +want, but we should be the better of a canoe." + +"Or a raft, eh, Harry? Should you like to try another cruise on one?" +asked Jerry. + +I shuddered at the thought of the danger from which I had been +preserved. However, as we all felt that our health would benefit by +some fish diet, we soon had our gear fitted, and all hands, including +the doctor, might be seen perched, like so many cormorants, at the end +of all the projecting points in the neighbourhood. Jerry and I were +near each other; the rest of the party were pulling in fish pretty +quickly; and we had caught several very beautiful-looking fellows--a +species of rock-fish--when Jerry sang out that he had got a bite of some +big fish, and called to me to help him. Leaving my own rod, I ran round +towards him. + +"Quick, quick, Harry!" he sung out, holding on by his rod with all his +might. "I shall be in! I shall be in!" + +Still he would not let go his stick. I sprang forward, and was just in +time to seize him by the leg, when over he went splash into the sea. At +the same instant I caught sight of the malign countenance of a huge +shark, which had undoubtedly caught the fish he had at first hooked. I +exerted all my strength to haul him in; for the monster, instead of +being intimidated by the splash, made a dash forward for the purpose of +grabbing him. I almost shrieked with horror as I beheld the savage +fish; but Jerry had just time, as I drew him up by the legs, to put his +hand on a point of coral, and to throw back his head, though the shark's +snout almost touched his nose as he did so. + +"Not a pleasant fellow to get a kiss from," exclaimed Jerry, as he +scrambled up the rock and shook off the water from his clothes. Then he +added, in a more serious tone, "Oh, Harry, what an ungrateful wretch I +am to be joking at such a moment, before I have expressed my gratitude +to God who has preserved me, or thanked you for coming to my +assistance." + +While on the island we had had more time than usual for reflection, and +had profited also by the example and exhortations of Cousin Silas, so +that we were both happily becoming much more serious and thoughtful than +heretofore. Indeed, I have learned that what we consider misfortunes, +if seen in their proper light, may become the cause of the greatest +blessings. + +Ben Yool had seen the accident from a distance, and now came hurrying up +to us. He was inclined to scold Jerry for the fright he had given him. +I believe truly that the old man loved us as much as if we had been his +own sons, and would have been miserable had any accident happened to +either of us. + +On examining the fish we had caught, we found that, although very +beautiful in appearance, few of them were likely to prove palatable to +the taste. Some, Silva thought, were altogether poisonous; and those we +cooked had very little flavour. + +"If we had but a canoe we might go off into deeper water, and then we +might catch a greater variety, and many fish very fit for food," he +remarked, eyeing as he spoke several trees which, he said, would make +good canoes. One or more canoes we accordingly resolved to have; so at +once we set to work to cut down a couple of trees. That operation our +axes quickly accomplished. It did not take us long to fashion the +outside. To scoop out the inside was more difficult. Our axes did the +rougher portion, and then we heated stones and bits of iron, and burned +out the remainder, scraping off the black part with our knives. In +about a week we had a couple of small canoes completed, with seats +across, and with three paddles in each. Silva took charge of one, +Cousin Silas of the other. The doctor and I went with him, while Ben +and Jerry accompanied Silva. + +With no little satisfaction we launched our fleet into the lagoon. Both +canoes swam very well, and off we paddled with great delight across the +lagoon. How bright and clear were its waters! It was almost impossible +to estimate their depth, we could so completely see down to the bottom. +After pulling some time, we rested on our oars. As we looked over the +side, how beautiful was the sight which met our view! It was like a +fairy land. Coral rocks of the most fantastic shapes sprung up around. +Caverns, and arches, and columns, and pinnacles appeared. Gorgeous and +varied were the hues. There were white, and blue, and yellow +corallines. Among them grew marine vegetables of every description. +Here the delicate sea-green stem of the fucas twisted round a rock; and +near it the ocean fan expanded its broad leaves. Every point was +occupied by some feathery tuft of lovely tints, while from each cleft +projected the feelers of some sea-anemone or zoophyte. Among the +heights of the submarine landscape moved thousands of living beings, to +which the doctor gave some learned names which I do not pretend to +remember. Some he called chetodons. They were flat and of an oval +form, of a rich silvery hue, and had blue stripes downwards. They swam +in a perpendicular position, with one long, slender fin from the back +curving upwards, and another from the opposite side curving downwards. +Several came and looked at us, as if to inquire why we had visited their +domains. Others of still more curious forms and tints were darting in +and out among the rocks; and there were huge lobsters, and crabs, and +crayfish, of various sorts, poking their long antenna? out of gloomy +caverns; and sea-urchins, and star-fish, and the beche-de-mer, lay +scattered about; while huge clams opened wide their broad valves to +catch their unwary prey. + +While we were all looking over the side, what had hitherto appeared to +be a huge piece of rock began to move, and the piercing, savage eyes, +and cruel jaws of a vast shark approached the canoe. I felt a shudder +run through my frame as I saw the monster darting out of his ambush. +"Give way!" cried Cousin Silas; "he means mischief." The doctor and I +plied our paddles. The brute made a dash at mine, and almost bit it in +two. Away we went as fast as we could towards the shore, pursued by +him. We shouted as loud as we could and splashed our oars about, to +frighten him away; but he seemed in no way disposed to be alarmed. +Silva, hearing our shouts, now came paddling toward us. Jack Shark, +however, seemed resolved to play us a trick if he could. Swimming off +to a short distance, he darted back, clearly with the intention of +upsetting the canoe. Cousin Silas turned her away from him just in +time, and giving the gentleman a smart blow over the snout, made him +think better of his intention. Silva coming up at the same moment, so +distracted his attention that we reached the shore without his +succeeding in doing us any material damage. + +Sharks are generally quickly frightened by splashing and a noise, and I +had never seen any so bold and ferocious as those we met with about this +island. In a little time we got accustomed to them, and often have I +seen them gliding in and out among our lines, far down in the depths of +the lagoon, though they did not prevent us from catching as many fish as +we required. Sometimes, however, as we were hauling up a fish, a shark +would catch hold of it and deprive us of our prize. We never went out +without catching a large quantity, so we had always a good supply of +fresh fish--the rest we preserved. We had two ways of doing this. Some +we cut open and dried in the sun; others we salted. We made some +salt-pans by blocking up the outlets in the rocks when the water ran off +at high tide, and by scraping others in the sand. We thus had a supply +of salt for all our wants. Mr McRitchie also found in his chest some +papers containing a variety of vegetable seed. We accordingly scraped a +spot clear for a vegetable garden, and it was surprising how quickly +many of them sprang up and became fit for food. Thus I may say that we +were furnished with many of the necessaries of life. + +We were somewhat scantily supplied with kitchen utensils; our saucepan, +or boiling-pot, especially, had seen much service. Silva showed us how +we might boil our fish without it. He collected a quantity of very fine +grass, and set to work to plait a large basket. So neatly did he put it +together, that, after he had soaked it in water, he filled it up to the +brim and not a drop ran out. Then he put the fish in; and lighting a +fire, heated a number of large stones. These, as soon as they were hot, +he kept putting into the basket. As soon as he supposed that all their +caloric had left them, he hooked them out with a forked stick. In this +way, by keeping the water boiling by a constant supply of hot stones, he +thoroughly cooked the fish. I should think anything which does not +require much boiling might be cooked in the same way. + +Thanks to the example set us by Mr Brand, we were never idle. Of +course a good deal of our time was occupied in procuring provisions, as +is generally the case with those living in a savage state. We had not +made any excursion to a distance for some time, when one day Jerry, Ben, +and I, set out to take a long walk. After proceeding for about two +hours, we saw before us a bay, with a wide sandy beach. Ben put his +hand on our shoulders and pointed eagerly at the bay. The shore was +covered with a number of black spots. + +"What are those?" I asked. + +"Turtle," he answered; "won't we have a fine feast of, them!" + +We approached the bay carefully, following Ben's footsteps. There must +have been a hundred fine, large, green turtle, basking in the sun before +us--enough to make the mouth of an alderman water. Ben crept up to the +nearest, a fine fat fellow, and catching him by the flapper turned him +over on his back, where he lay helplessly kicking, but unable to stir. +Jerry and I, watching how he did it, turned over several more, though +our united strength only enabled us to do it. We had got over a dozen +or more when we came to a big fellow who was too heavy for us. We had +got him almost over, when down he came again on his belly, and, very +naturally, not appreciating the honour of being turned into turtle-soup, +began scuttling away as hard as he could towards the sea. As may have +been discovered, neither Jerry nor I were fellows who ever liked to give +in; so we held on to the turtle with all our might, every now and then +lifting up one side in the hope of getting him over, when, in spite of +his strength, we should have made him ours. We shouted to Ben to come +and help us; but he was busily employed in turning the other turtles, +which, disturbed by our noise, were moving away towards the sea. Our +friend had got actually into the sea, and we still clung on though we +were up to our middles in water. We thought that by sticking to him we +might now more easily get him over. We did succeed in lifting him up a +little way, but he dealt us such severe blows with his flapper that over +we both went, getting our mouths full of sand and water, and, of course, +wet to the skin. Ben now saw that it was time to come to our aid, lest +the turtle should actually swim away with us. He rushed into the water; +but just then our friend struck out with both his paddles, and darting +away, we fell back head over heels, nor were sorry when Ben helped us to +regain _terra firma_, with our arms and legs not a little bruised with +the blows we had received. + +We had no time to think of our hurts. "Come along," shouted Ben, "we +must turn a few more before they all go away." We had succeeded, we +found, in capturing nearly thirty. Leaving the poor brutes on their +backs--and very uncomfortable they must have found themselves--we +hurried back to get the canoes, that we might convey some of them +without delay to our home. We found that each canoe could only carry +three at a time, so that we had to make five or six trips to get them up +to the house. We inclosed a place in the shade, where we put them, and +kept them well supplied with wet sea-weed, so that we had hopes they +would be preserved in good condition for a long time. + +Each time we visited the bay, we found it crowded with turtle. We +discovered that they assembled there to deposit their eggs. This they +do in holes which they dig out with their flappers in the sand. They +cover them up again with the same instruments, and leave them to be +hatched by the sun. We had not thought about this, when one day, as we +were pulling across the bay in our canoe, we remarked the great number +of sharks, and dog-fish, and sting-rays swimming about. Presently, as +we got close in with the shore, we saw a number of young turtle crawling +out of the sand and making their way to the sea, expecting, of course, +to enjoy a pleasant swim; instead of which, a very large number of the +poor little innocents must have been gobbled up by the voracious +monsters. It would seem as if none could escape, but I suppose that +some manage to run the gauntlet and to get clear off into deep water. + +We had now a supply of turtle sufficient to last us till the return of +their brethren the next year, should we be kept on the island so long. +We thought that very probably we might have to remain even longer than a +year. Even four or five years might pass without a ship coming near us. + +We had made steps up to the top of our flag-staff, and one of us never +failed to climb up there every morning, noon, and evening, to take a +look round to see if any sail was in sight. Sometimes we talked of +building a canoe in which we might cross to some other island, or +perhaps even reach the mainland of South America. This was Silva's +proposal. He had seen, he asserted, birds flying in that direction. +Some did not even stop on our island; and this circumstance convinced +him, he said, that land could not be far-off. Mr Brand did not approve +of this proposal. He said that, without a compass, and without knowing +the direction in which land was to be found, the experiment was too +hazardous, in so frail a bark as we had it in our power to construct. +Still Silva constantly harped on this subject, and seemed quite angry +when nobody seemed inclined to make the attempt. + +Weeks and months rolled on. Silva used to listen to what Mr Brand said +to him, and he always behaved very well. Indeed, we had ceased to +remember that he had been a pirate, and had joined in the most atrocious +murders; still, I do not know that he was a changed man--I am afraid +not; that is to say, I am afraid had a piratical vessel come off the +island, he would not have refused to join her. One very hot day Jerry +and I had accompanied him in an excursion along the shore, when suddenly +he said that he should like to bathe. We walked on a little further, +leaving him to undress, and then we agreed that the water looked very +tempting, and that we would bathe also. We were by this time at some +little distance from him. We were partly undressed when we saw that the +tide was rising, so we carried our things higher up the beach. + +"If it were not for those horrid sharks, I should like to have a good +long swim," exclaimed Jerry. + +"But those sharks are quite sufficient reason why we should not attempt +anything of the sort," I remarked. "Here, I think, we are pretty safe; +but we must keep our eyes about us, depend on that." We were inside a +reef where sharks were unable to come. + +While we were speaking, we observed Silva walk slowly into the water, +and we thought he was going to stoop down and swim off. First, he put a +foot forward, then he placed the other near it, and seemed to be trying +to lift them up; and then he put an arm down, and then another. We, not +thinking of danger, ran into the water and swam about for some time, +enjoying ourselves excessively. When we came out we looked for Silva; +he was nowhere to be seen. What had become of him? We dressed as fast +as we could, and ran along the beach to the spot where he had been. +There were his clothes, but there was no other trace of him. We +shouted, but we shouted in vain. Much alarmed, we ran back to the +settlement, as we called our hut, to get Cousin Silas or Ben to +accompany us in our search for him. Mr Brand had gone in an opposite +direction, but, after waiting some time, Ben Yool came in. After he had +heard our account he launched the canoe, and all three of us set off +along the coast to the spot where Silva had last been seen. As we got +near it we saw the doctor, and hailing him, told him what had occurred. +Silva's clothes showed us exactly where to look for him, though, +believing that a shark had carried him off, we had little hopes of +finding his body. As we were pulling in quite close to the shore, Ben +exclaimed, "Why, there he is, poor fellow, moored head and stern! What +can have got hold of him?" We called the doctor to come and see; and +Jerry jumping on shore, gave up his place to him in the canoe. When the +doctor, got over the spot, after a short examination he exclaimed, "Why, +it is a monster cephalopod--a squid, a horrid polypus has got hold of +him. Poor fellow, what a dreadful death to die! There can be no doubt +how it happened. He must have stepped on the squid, which caught hold +of him with its long and powerful tentaculas, and gradually infolding +him in its dreadful embrace, dragged him under the water. What strength +the creature must have! for Silva was a very strong man, and would not +easily have given in." Thus the doctor went on lecturing on the polypus +over the dead body of our late companion--his love of natural history +making him for the moment almost forget the horrors of the scene. How +to rescue the body from the grasp of the monster was our next +consideration. Returning on shore, we cut some long sticks, intending +to attack him with them. Again we launched the canoe, but when we +reached the spot the squid and the body of the pirate had disappeared. + +This dreadful catastrophe had a great effect on me. Mr Brand also was +very much grieved when we got back and told him of what had occurred. +When one out of a small number, cut off as we were from the rest of our +fellow-creatures, is taken away, the loss must always be much felt. It +was many days before we recovered our spirits. When I thought of the +sharks, and the dog-fish, and these still more horrid polypi, I could +not help feeling as if we were on an enchanted island, surrounded by +terrific monsters to prevent our escape. + +As time wore on, even Mr Brand began to talk of the possibility of +building a canoe in which we might endeavour to get away. One great +difficulty seemed to be that of carrying a sufficient quantity of water +and fuel with which to cook our food. Of provisions we had an ample +supply. Jerry proposed filling all the cocoa-nuts we could collect with +water. The idea did not seem a bad one; but the first thing to be done +was to get our canoe built. + +We all the time kept a constant look-out from our flag-staff head. One +forenoon I was up there as usual, when I thought I saw a speck on the +water. It grew larger and larger. I watched it eagerly, till I saw +that it was a canoe with a large sail. It was approaching the island at +a point a mile or so from the house. I hailed to say what I had seen, +and advised my friends to get our arms ready, that we might be able to +defend ourselves should the strangers come as enemies. Mr Brand told +me to come down. He then went up, and, after watching the craft for +some time, pronounced her to be a large double canoe, and probably full +of people. On his coming down, a council of war was held. As we could +not tell what sort of savages those on board the canoe might be, we +agreed that it would be wise to be prepared, if necessary, to meet them +as enemies. Accordingly, we put ourselves under Mr Brand's orders. He +took the musket, and Jerry and I were armed with our fowling-pieces--Ben +and the doctor providing themselves with hatchets and knives and long +pointed sticks. Thus prepared, we hastily advanced towards the spot for +which the canoe was making. That we might not be seen, we kept +ourselves under cover of the trees and shrubs, or ran along a path on +the lagoon side of the island. + +We reached a good place for concealment behind some rocks and thick +bushes before the canoe came to land, so that we had plenty of time to +examine her. She was, as Mr Brand had before discovered, a large +double canoe--that is to say, there were two canoes secured side to +side, and sharp at both ends. I afterwards had an opportunity of +measuring her. Each canoe was upwards of thirty feet long, and of fully +three feet beam; and as they were about two feet apart, with a platform +between them, the whole structure was about nine feet across. Each was +also between three and four feet deep, so that she had considerable hold +in the water, and was able to carry a large supply of provisions. Each +end was fitted for a rudder, so that she could sail either way without +tacking. The canoes were completely decked over, thus affording a cabin +to their crews, and the means of preserving their cargo from damage. +This also enabled the craft to go through very heavy seas without +foundering. This canoe, however, was only half the size of the large +double canoes of the Fejee and Tonga islanders, which are often a +hundred feet long, and proportionably deep and wide. + +Meantime we were watching with deep interest the approach of the +strangers, expecting any moment we might be called on to engage in +deadly conflict with them, should they discover us and be inclined for +war. Cousin Silas had, however, charged us on no account to commence +hostilities till it was evident that they would not allow us to retain +peaceable possession of our island. As they drew near they lowered +their large mat sail, and took to their paddles. We held our breath +with anxiety, for we could count nearly forty people on board the canoe. +Besides the men, there were both women and children. The men were +tall, fine-looking fellows; some had on turbans and cloaks, and all had +wide kilts of native cloth, and the women were decently habited in +petticoats. We observed among them spears, and bows and arrows, and two +or three muskets, which they held up conspicuously above their heads. +As they approached the shore they looked about, apparently to discover +any signs of inhabitants. Perhaps their quick sight had shown them our +hut and flag-staff. On they came. They passed the passage through the +reef, and running the canoe on to the smooth sand, both men and women +leaped out, and began to haul her up on the beach. Now was the time to +appear before them, and to attack them if they gave signs of hostility; +but just as we were going to rush out to take them by surprise, they had +hauled up their canoe sufficiently high to prevent the possibility of +her drifting away, and then one and all, climbing up the beach, fell +down on their knees, lifting up their hands and bursting forth into a +hymn of praise. There could be no doubt about it; the words were +strange to our ears, but the tune was one well-known to us all. Then +one--the eldest of the party--uttered a prayer in a deep and solemn +voice, all the rest joining afterwards in a response. About that, also, +there could be no doubt. + +Savages though they might seem, they were evidently Christians, and +though we might not be able to understand each other's language, they +would receive us in the bond of brotherhood. We all, I doubt not, felt +ashamed of our previous suspicions; though, to be sure, the precautions +we had taken were very right and just. At a sign from Cousin Silas, we +advanced slowly from our ambush, and, kneeling down at a little distance +from them, joined them in the tune of the last hymn they sang. They +looked surprised, but no one moved till the hymn was over; and then they +got up, and, advancing fearlessly towards us, we shook hands cordially +all round. + +On a nearer inspection, we saw by their emaciated looks and the battered +condition of their canoe that they must have undergone much hardship. +Perhaps they thought us rather a rough set for Englishmen, for our +clothes were somewhat tattered, and Mr Brand's and the doctor's, and +Ben's beards, whiskers, and moustaches were of considerable length, and +not a little tangled. + +After some experiments, we found that one of the men could speak a +little English, but we failed to get out of him an account of their +history. We were, however, able to explain to them that, if they would +accompany us, we would supply them with food, water, and shelter, of +which they evidently stood much in need. We first assisted them in +hauling their canoe still further up the beach, so that she could not +drift off again at the top of high-water; and then we all commenced our +journey to our house. Many of the poor creatures were very weak and +ill; and it was interesting to see Ben carrying a baby in each arm, and +helping along the mothers at the same time. We all did the same, but +his way was more remarkable. He would talk to the poor women, and +encourage him by his tone, if not by his words; and then he would kiss +the children, and dance them, and sing, and whistle, and chirp to them, +greatly to the delight of the little creatures, and, I have no doubt, to +that of their mothers also. + +When we reached our settlement, we made up beds for the most +sickly-looking, and the doctor, examining them, administered some +restoratives. While he was doing so, we got fires lighted, and putting +all our pots, and pans, and cooking-baskets into requisition, we soon +had fish frying and boiling, and turtle stewing, and bread-fruit and +various roots baking; indeed, the eyes of the poor creatures glistened-- +as well they might--with the anticipated feast. The doctor, seeing +their eagerness, warned us to take care that they did not eat too much +at a time; and, to prevent their doing so, assisted in serving out a +small share only to each. To the invalids and children he only gave at +first a few spoonfuls of turtle-soup; but that had a great effect in +reviving them. The people seemed to comprehend clearly the reason why +we gave them only a small quantity. Hungry as they were, before any one +would touch the food, one of the elders stood up and, spreading out his +hands, uttered a grace over it, in which the rest joined, evidently with +pious sincerity. I could not help thinking to myself, How differently +do these poor Christian savages, as they may be called, act to what +would be the case with many civilised Christians under similar +circumstances! The prayers of these poor people are undoubtedly +acceptable to the all-loving God, who bestows his bounteous gifts with +so lavish a hand on us his unworthy creatures; but what can we say of +the hurried, scarcely muttered ejaculations to which the master of many +a house in civilised England gives vent, as if afraid, in the presence +of his polished guests--miserable worms like himself--of uttering a word +of thanksgiving to the great Dispenser of all the blessings bestowed on +him? Should a bishop, or some high dignitary of the church, be present, +then perhaps, in an ostentatious tone, he is requested to ask a blessing +on the banquet; and grace for once is uttered in an audible voice. Far +be it from me to say that this is always the case, but who can deny that +it is too often so? My young friends, I have learned many things in my +voyage round the world, and this matter among others from those +missionary, taught savages. Grace being said, they quietly partook of +the provisions set before them, and though the eyes of some of the +younger ones wandered towards the pots and the fire, no one even asked +for more than we gave them. + +When they had eaten, we made signs for them to lie down and rest. This +they did with the most perfect confidence, as if not the shade of any +suspicion of treachery crossed their minds. Some were suffering from +sores and ulcers, brought on by constant exposure and wet, and to these +the doctor at once attended with evident solicitude; which, it was +clear, completely won their hearts. We watched over them carefully +while they slept, driving away the flies and insects which seemed +disposed to settle on them; indeed, in every way, to the best of our +power, we treated them as men should men, and not as so-called +Christians too often treat their fellow-creatures. What we might have +done had not Cousin Silas set us the example, I cannot say; I only know +that we were, happily, much influenced by his conduct and exhortations. +My long stay in that lone island had, I feel, a very beneficial effect +with me. I had time to meditate, to reflect, to look into myself, to +examine my own heart and feelings, which I might never have done had I +been mixing with the bustling, thoughtless world. Again and again I +must urge my young friends to examine themselves--to reflect constantly. +Do not say that there is no time--make time. It is one of the most +important works of your life. Do not let trivialities put it off. +Nothing you can possibly gain by the neglect can recompense you, however +important you may for the time think the work in which you are engaged. + +The first thing the strangers did on waking was to sit up and sing a +hymn, and then several of them pulled out of the pockets secured to +their waists books, which we had no doubt were Bibles; others had +hymn-books, or devotional books of some sort. + +The next day two or three of the strongest made signs that they would +like to go and look at their canoe; but the others seemed content to +remain where they were--indeed, many of them could not have moved even +had they wished it. Jerry and I accompanied our new friends to the +canoe. They seemed satisfied when they saw that she was safe; and +having procured a few articles from her, and among them several cooking +utensils, they returned with us to the settlement. They made signs, as +they examined the canoe, that she would require much repair before she +was again fit to put to sea. She was, to our eyes, a wonderful +structure. There was not a nail in her; all her planks were sewed +together, and secured in the same way to the ribs. This made her very +strong and elastic, and accounted for her being able to endure the rough +seas to which she must have been exposed. + +Several days passed away, and our guests showed that they were +recovering from the effects of their voyage. All this time we could not +tell from whence they had come, or where they were going. They tried to +explain, but we could not understand them. They were coming from some +Christian island, and they were probably going to one; or, perhaps, they +were native missionaries anxious to carry the gospel of salvation to +their benighted fellow-beings among the inhabitants of Polynesia. We +soon came to the conclusion that some were missionaries, who had their +wives and children with them. One was a chief, who was escorting them, +and the rest were the seamen of the canoe. Mr Brand arrived at this +conclusion. + +"But, sir," said Jerry, "I thought missionaries always wore black coats +and white ties!" + +"John the Baptist was a missionary, but his raiment was of camel's hair, +and his food locusts and wild honey," was the answer. "A man may be a +first-rate missionary who dresses in a fustian jacket and leather +gaiters, or whose costume is not more elaborate than that of these poor +people. A friend of mine told me that he has often, sitting hammer in +hand on the roof of a cottage nailing on shingles, preached the gospel +to a congregation who were as attentive as if he were in a high pulpit, +and were habited in lawn sleeves." + +There was something in the manner and the grave and thoughtful +countenances of the missionaries which enabled us to distinguish them +from the rest, and the one who already spoke a few words in English +quickly acquired more by which to explain himself. + +When they grew strong enough to move about, they made signs that they +would not longer consume our store of provisions, but would, if we would +let them have our canoes go and fish for themselves. To this, of +course, we gladly consented; and they never came back without offering +us a portion of what they had caught. We saw that they were preparing +to remain some time on the island. They built themselves huts near +their big canoe, and also three small canoes for fishing. Whatever fish +they caught which they did not wish to consume, they carefully cut in +two and dried in the sun. They also discovered a plantation of gourds, +some of which they dried to serve as jars for holding water. We also +went on with our preparations for a voyage. When they discovered what +we were about, they seemed much satisfied, and intimated that they hoped +we would accompany them. We, in reply, assured them that we would be +very glad to do so. They then took us to the big canoe, and showed us +how carefully they were at work repairing her. Whenever any of the +lacing which kept her together was in any way worn or chafed, they put +in fresh with the greatest neatness, covering all the seams up with a +sort of gum which they collected in the woods. In this we could not +help them, but we assisted in curing a large supply of fish and birds, +and in collecting roots, and filling the cocoa-nuts and gourds with +water. When they saw that we had still a number of turtle alive, they +seemed highly pleased, and signified that they would prove a very +valuable and wholesome provision for the voyage. + +Everything was at last ready. The canoe was brought round into the +lagoon to load. We all assembled. One of the native missionaries +offered up in his own tongue some earnest prayers for our safety, and +thanksgiving for mercies bestowed. Mr Brand followed his example in +English. Then all went on board--the women and children first; the +missionaries went next, followed by the chief and the sailors; and we +five Englishmen, with Surley, brought up the rear. Another hymn was +sung, the canoe was cast loose, the seamen seized their paddles, and +slowly, to the music of a hymn sung by all the natives, we paddled out +of the lagoon. The sea was smooth, though there was a fresh breeze; the +sail was hoisted, and away we glided at a rapid rate to the eastward. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +A VOYAGE IN A SOUTH SEA CANOE. + +Once more we were on the boundless ocean, out of sight of land, the +stars only as our guides, and the sagacity of the Polynesian chief and +his followers to depend on. What made us feel most strange was our +utter ignorance where we were going. From the quantity of provisions +and water the natives had thought it necessary to provide, it was +evident that we had a long voyage before us--perhaps many weeks might be +occupied in performing it. We could scarcely hope not to experience a +gale of wind even in the Pacific during that time, and how could we hope +to weather it out in so frail a craft, especially deeply laden as we +were? + +When Jerry and I expressed our apprehensions, after we had been some +days on board, and were beginning to get very tired of being cramped up, +the answer of Cousin Silas rebuked us,--"Trust in Providence, my lads-- +on the arm of Him who has already preserved us from so many dangers. He +would not have sent this canoe full of Christian men to us, unless for +some good object." Jerry and I felt that Cousin Silas spoke the truth, +and we made no further complaints. + +It was surprising how delicate and attentive the islanders were to us--I +will not call them savages. They devoted the end of one of the canoes +for our accommodation, and raised over it an awning with mats, that we +might be shaded from the heat of the sun, which was at times excessive. +They selected the most delicate and the best-dressed food for us, and +always served us first. Their habits were cleanly, and they were always +kind and courteous towards each other, as they were especially to us. +Now, as all this was so different to what I had fancied the natural +character of the inhabitants of the islands in this part of the Pacific, +I could not but suppose that their Christianity had produced the change. +Had I known that the immediate ancestors of these very people, and, +indeed, some of the men on board, had been cannibals and savages of the +worst description, I might have been still more astonished. Oh, it is a +glorious thing to know what a mighty change pure, simple Christianity +will work in the heart of man, vile and deformed as sin has made it! +Cousin Silas often used to remark, that the world was a very useful +book, if we could but read it aright; and, thanks to him, I learned many +important lessons from it. No lesson was more important than that which +taught me the great change which the doctrines of Christianity, under +the influence of the Holy Spirit, produce on men of the most savage +natures. It confirmed and strengthened my faith in the power of the +gospel; and I wish that all my young friends would read the accounts +which they may find of the labours of missionaries in those and other +hitherto benighted regions, and they will, if I mistake not, find the +same result produced on their hearts which I experienced in mine. +However, I must continue my narrative. + +We had brought with us our fishing-hooks and lines, and whenever the +breeze was moderate, we used to throw them out, and seldom passed an +hour without catching some fish. This afforded a pleasant and wholesome +change to our diet, and economised our provisions. Our progress was +slow, and we were unable to ascertain how long the voyage was likely to +last. Hitherto we had enjoyed only the finest weather; the wind had +always been favourable, and even the strongest breeze which had wafted +us along had only covered the ocean with a brisk ripple. + +I mentioned that one of the missionaries spoke a few words of English. +So great was his desire to acquire a further knowledge of the language, +that all day long he was engaged in learning it from one or other of us. +He first obtained a large vocabulary of substantives. These he noted +down in a pocket-book which he cherished with great care, and then he +began upon verbs. These are more difficult to obtain, when neither +master nor pupil understands the other's language. However, by dint of +various signs, he obtained a good number, of which he began very soon to +make use. We got on talking by degrees, till we really did understand +each other very fairly. By degrees we gleaned from him the following +narrative:-- + +He and his companions belonged to an island in the neighbourhood of +Otaheite, all the inhabitants of which, from the teaching of some +missionaries, had embraced with joy the Christian faith. From living in +a state of constant warfare, no one for a moment knowing if his life was +safe from the assaults of his fellow-islanders, they had all become +peaceable and contented, life and property being as secure as in any +part of the world. The missionaries had taught them many useful arts, +and had introduced into the island many vegetables, and a variety of +fruits, with some few animals; so that they had now a constant and ample +supply of all the necessaries of life. + +Highly valuing all the blessings they enjoyed, they heard that there +were some islands lying far away to the west, the inhabitants of which +were still ignorant savages. Some of their people had occasionally +visited them in trading-vessels, and some of their canoes had, it was +said, formerly gone there occasionally. At all events, they believed +that the inhabitants understood their language. If, then, some of their +people had ventured so far for the sake of gain, much more did it behove +them to go there for an object inestimably more important--the salvation +of the souls of a number of their fellow-creatures. A daring chief +undertook to head an expedition, and six native preachers volunteered to +go and settle with their wives and families among the heathen islanders, +and to convey to them faithfully the gospel of salvation. + +Two large canoes were fitted out, strengthened for the voyage, and +stored and provisioned. The whole population of the island assembled on +the beach to bid their countrymen farewell, and to offer up their +prayers for their safety. They knew somewhat of the dangers they must +encounter, perhaps not all of them, but they had counted the cost, and +had they been greater than those of which they did know, they would not +have been deterred from the attempt. With a fair breeze the two canoes +set sail, and glided on over the smooth sea, towards the far-distant +group of islands. Day after day they sailed on; no land greeted their +sight, but they believed that they were on the right course, and +fearlessly committed themselves to the care of a merciful Providence. +They knew that however they might be directed, it would be for the best. + +For many days the two canoes kept together, and the crews encouraged +each other; their voices raised in hymns of praise being wafted afar +across the waters, as they joined in chorus, and sang alternately with +each other. At length dark clouds were seen gathering in the horizon, +light scud flew across the sky, the sea began to rise--the canoes +laboured much--soon they were pitching violently into the quick-coming +seas: still they were skilfully managed, and the wind allowed them to +keep their course. Gradually, however, they drifted further and further +apart. Night came on, but the tempest did not abate. Several of the +people were kept continually bailing, for, in spite of all their care, +the sea constantly broke over them, and from the straining of the canoe +many a leak was formed. No one who endured them, could ever forget the +horrors of that night. "Had we been as we once were," continued the +missionary, "we should have resigned ourselves to our fate, and +perished; but we knew that it is the duty of Christians to strive to the +last, trusting in the arm of Him who is all-powerful to save, and while +prepared for death, never abandoning hope. The morning at length came. +The other canoe was nowhere to be seen. In vain we stood up and +strained our eyes on every side, as we rose to the top of a sea; not a +sign of her could we perceive. Still we trusted that our friends might +have been preserved. That day the gale blew as furiously as before; but +in the evening it moderated, though the sky was covered with clouds, and +we knew not whither we were drifting. For several days we drifted on, +ignorant of our position. Every morning, when daylight returned, we +looked out eagerly for our friends, but we never saw them again. We +live in hope that they may have been preserved. All is for the best. + +"We thought that when the gale abated, and the sea grew calm, and the +sun came out, our sufferings would have an end; but they only then +began. Our stock of water was becoming less and less. Many of our +provisions had been so damaged by the sea, that they quickly decayed. +The sea became calm as the lagoon inside a coral isle; the sun burst +forth with intense heat; our thirst grew excessive. Our island was +plentifully supplied with water, and we had always been accustomed to an +abundance; yet now we dared not drink more than the shell of a small nut +could hold at a time. Carefully we husbanded the precious fluid; we had +learned to know its value. At last the time came when not a drop +remained. Every calabash was examined over and over again--the last +drop was drained out. We sat down, and looked mournfully at each other. +Our thirst increased. We dipped our heads in salt water--we +continually sprinkled each other over with it; but that did not convey +coolness to our parched tongues. `We must die,' exclaimed some one. +`No, no,' answered one of our missionary brethren; `we will pray without +ceasing--we will trust in God. He will send us relief when we least +expect it.' That very evening a flight of sea-fowl flew close to the +canoe. We were able to knock over several. Their blood assisted to +quench our thirst; their flesh, too, revived our strength. The next day +several fish were caught; but it was not food we wanted. `Water! water! +water!' was the cry from old and young alike. Still a day passed away-- +there was no sign of land--no sign of rain. The next day came; +intolerable was the thirst we endured by noon. In vain we strained our +eyes through the hot, quivering atmosphere; the sky was blue and pure as +ever; not a speck could we discern in the horizon. We had hoped that we +might reach the group of islands to which we had been bound; we +accordingly kept, as we believed, a direct course for it. Another +morning broke. During the night, our sufferings had been intense. +Could we survive through another day? We stood up to glance round the +horizon. Directly before us arose, as if sprouting out of the water, a +line of palm and cocoa-nut trees! How eagerly we plied our oars to +reach the island on which they grew! How thankfully our voices sang the +morning hymn, and uttered our accustomed prayers! We rapidly neared the +spot. We might have run close by it in the night without seeing it. We +paddled round to find a spot on which to land. Tantalising indeed was +it to see the ground where we might hope to gain life and strength, and +yet not be able to place our feet on it. At last an opening appeared in +the surrounding reef, we ran in, and, hauling up our canoe, hurried off +in search of water. No water could we find, but the strongest climbed +some of the cocoa-nut trees, and quickly threw down a supply of their +refreshing fruit. Oh, how delicious and cool was the milk which they +afforded us! Still, pure water was what we most wanted; but though we +searched in every direction, and dug down as deep as we could with our +rough wooden tools, not a drop could we find. + +"We remained here a week hoping for rain, but it came not. The juice +from the cocoa-nuts restored our strength. We collected all we could +gather for our voyage. Once more we resolved to trust ourselves to the +sea. We embarked, and hoisting sail, stood away on our former course. +No land appeared in sight. Many days passed away. Our supply of +cocoa-nuts was almost exhausted. Again death by thirst stared us in the +face. Oh, how carefully we husbanded the few precious nuts which +remained! They at last were exhausted. The hot sun again arose, and we +had no liquid with which to quench our thirst. The burning rays of the +bright luminary struck down on our heads with intense force. `Water! +water! water!' we repeated as before. Some almost gave way to despair. +`We have before been preserved, why give up all hope now?' said others. +In the evening a small cloud was seen to rise out of the sea. It spread +wider and wider. There was no wind. It advanced toward us. Fast from +it fell a thick shower of pure, sweet water. On it came, we opened wide +our mouths, we spread out our hands. Oh, how gratefully it moistened +our parched lips! We stretched out our sail and all our garments, and +let the precious streams we thus gathered run into our gourds and pots. +All that evening the rain came down in a continuous fall, and every +moment we were occupied in collecting it, till all our receptacles were +full to the brim,--not a shell did we allow to remain empty: and then we +poured it down our throats in a full, refreshing stream. Scarcely were +we satisfied when the rain ceased--the dark cloud blew onward--the stars +shone forth brightly from the clear sky, and we pursued our course. + +"The next island we came to was barren--no water, and no nuts; we must +have perished had we been cast on it. Then we reached another with some +inhabitants on it. We understood, in part, their language. Their +ancestors had, they believed, been cast on it wandering as we were +across the ocean. Their canoe had been destroyed, and they had remained +there without wishing to depart. They had been driven forth from their +native isles by cruel wars, in which the greater number of their kindred +had been destroyed. They received us in a friendly manner, and invited +us to remain with them. They had heard nothing of the Truth. The +gospel-message had never reached their ears. From consulting with them +we were convinced that we had been driven so far out of our course that +we should never reach the islands of which we were in search. Here, +however, was work for us to do, pointed out clearly by the finger of +God. We told the islanders, to their joy, that we would remain with +them; and by degrees we opened to their wondering ears the glorious +tidings we had brought. Astonished, they heard, but did not refuse to +listen. Some speedily believed. The news we brought was of a nature +their hearts had long yearned for; it spoke of rest from toil--rest from +suffering--rest from sin. Others, in time, accepted the truth with +thankfulness. Every day we preached, and every day some one +acknowledged himself a sinner, and sought redemption through Him alone +who can give it. At length our glorious work was accomplished. We gave +them books; we taught them to read. We told them that we must depart to +try and reach our own homes. They entreated that one of our number +would remain with them. It was resolved that one should remain to guide +them aright. We drew lots. He on whom the lot fell, without a murmur, +with his wife and family, joyfully remained--though he well knew that he +could never hope again to see the land of his birth, and many dear to +him there. But I am making my story longer than I intended. + +"Once more we set sail to return to our homes. Numerous were the +hardships we endured, though no one murmured. Several islands were +visited. At some, food was procured; at others we were afraid to stay, +on account of the fierce character and the cannibal propensities of the +inhabitants. We had been ten days out of sight of land when we reached +your island, and truly did we rejoice to find not only whites, but +Christian men to receive us." + +With these words the native missionary finished his narrative. I was +particularly struck with the artless simplicity of his account, and the +faith and perseverance he and his companions had exhibited, so worthy of +imitation. I felt ashamed as he spoke of white men, when I recollected +how many act in a way so totally at variance with their character as +Christian and civilised men, and how bad an example they set to those +whom they despise as heathens and savages. I have very frequently met +young men who fancy when they are abroad that they may throw off all +restraints of religion and morals, under the miserable excuse that +people should do at Rome as the Romans do,--in other words, act as +wickedly as those among whom they have gone to live. What would have +become of Lot had he followed the example of those among whom he took up +his abode? Now, my young friends, I daresay that you will think I am +very young to lecture you; but remember that I have been round the +world, and I should have been very dull and stupid had I not reaped some +advantage from the voyage. What I want to impress upon you is, when you +leave your homes and go abroad, to be if anything more strict, more +watchful over yourselves even than you have before been. Society will, +too probably, afford less moral restraint, the temptations to evil will +be greater; but pray against them faithfully--strive against them +manfully, and they will not overcome you. + +Our voyage, as I was saying, had hitherto been prosperous; but a gale +came on, and we were exposed to the very dangers the missionary had so +well described to me. We could do nothing except help to bail out the +canoe, for the natives understood how to manage her much better than we +did; and, with all our civilisation and nautical knowledge, we had to +confess that in that respect they were our superiors. The canoe +laboured fearfully, and often I thought that she must founder. How +anxiously we looked out for some sign that the gale was abating, but in +vain. Had we been in our own ship, we should certainly have thought +very little of the gale; but in this frail canoe we had ample reason to +dread its consequences. At length the wind shifted, and drove us on in +what the islanders considered our proper course. We ran on for some +days without seeing land, and then the gale blew over and left us +becalmed under a burning sun. We had carefully from the first husbanded +our water, having the advantage of the previous experience of our +companions. As it was, we had barely sufficient to quench the constant +thirst produced by the heat. Every day, too, seemed to increase our +thirst and to diminish our stock of the precious fluid. Our hope had +been to fall in with some vessel which might either supply us or give us +a course to the nearest island where we might obtain it. One forenoon, +when we had been suffering even more than usual, the chief declared that +he saw a vessel on our weather bow, and that she would cross our course. +With intense eagerness and hope we all looked out for her. As her +sails rose out of the water, we saw that she was a schooner. If we +could but get on board her, we thought that we might again in time +rejoin the _Triton_. We were very certain that Captain Frankland would +not cease to look for us while a chance remained of our being +discovered. Gradually we neared the schooner. I saw Cousin Silas and +Ben Yool looking at her with great earnestness. + +"What is she, Ben, do you think?" asked Cousin Silas. + +"Why, Mr Brand, as you know, sir, I've been boxing about the world for +the best part of the last forty years, and I think I ought to know one +craft from another, and to my mind that vessel is no other than the +piratical craft we were so long aboard. I say, if you ask me, sir, that +we ought to stand clear of her. She'll bring us no good." + +"Exactly my idea," answered Cousin Silas; "the wretches might very +likely send us to the bottom, or carry us off again as prisoners." + +We were, however, too near the schooner to hope to escape from her; but +we agreed that we might lie concealed while the canoe sailed quietly by +her, and that, probably, no questions would be asked. We had some +little difficulty in explaining the character of the vessel to our +friends. When they did understand it, they seemed to be much horrified, +and undertook carefully to conceal us. As we drew near the schooner, +the rest of our party went below; but I wrapped myself up in a piece of +matting, leaving a small aperture through which I could see what was +going forward. The schooner stood close up to us. I was very certain +that she was the pirate. Several faces I recognised. Among them was +Captain Bruno. At first I thought that they were going to run us down; +then I dreaded that they were going to make us come alongside. Hauling +their foresail to windward, they hailed two or three times, but in a +language was not understood. At last an answer was given from the +canoe. What it was I could not tell. It seemed to satisfy them. To my +great joy they once more let draw their foresail, and stood away from +us. This was not the last time we were to see that ill-omened craft. + +As soon as she had got to some distance off, my friends came out of +their hiding-place, and I disengaged myself from the folds of the mat. +Truly thankful were we that we had escaped her. The missionary told us +that the pirates had stated that we were about three hundred miles to +the westward of Otaheite, and that we should pass several islands to get +there. Once at Otaheite the chief knew the direct course to his own +island, and believed that he should have no difficulty in finding it. +Our escape from the pirate made us, for a time, almost forget our raging +thirst; we could not, however, but admire the fidelity and resolution of +the natives, who, rather than run the risk of betraying us, had +refrained from asking for water from the pirate. + +All that day our sufferings were very great. As we were running on +during the night, our ears were assailed by the sound of breakers. We +listened; they were on our weather bow. If we ran on we might miss the +island; so we hauled down our sail, and paddled slowly on towards the +spot whence the sound proceeded. All night we remained within sound of +the surf. How anxiously we waited for daylight to ascertain that there +was an island, and not merely a coral reef over which the sea was +breaking! That night was one of the most anxious we had yet passed. +Slowly the hours dragged along. It was wonderful to observe the calm +and resigned manner of the islanders. The missionaries and the chief +never gave the slightest sign of distress; even the women did not +complain. "It must be near daybreak," said Mr Brand, waking up out of +a sleep into which he had at last fallen. "Look out." We strained our +eyes in the direction in which we believed the island to exist. A few +pale streaks appeared in the east; and then, oh! our hearts leaped with +joy as we saw tall, thin lines appear against the sky; and, as the light +increased, the stems and tops of trees were revealed to view. But our +joy was somewhat damped when we discovered that a long line of heavy +breakers rolled between us and them. At sight of the island the +natives, with one accord, raised a hymn of praise and thanksgiving which +put our doubts to shame; and the chief, pointing to the surf, made signs +that we must go round on the other side, where we should find a place to +land. The sail was forthwith hoisted, and we quickly ran round to the +lee side, where a wide opening in the surf presented itself. We paddled +through it into the inner bay or lagoon, and reaching the shore, the +canoe was secured. + +The natives did not forget their prayers and hymn of thanksgiving, in +which we all heartily joined them. They then looked cautiously about, +to ascertain that there were no people on the island who might treat us +as enemies. This necessary precaution being taken, we hurried about in +every direction in search of water. Jerry and I kept together. Our +tongues were parched with thirst. Some of the natives were climbing the +cocoa-nut trees, in case any might still retain milk; but the season for +the fruit was now passing. Indeed, we wanted water, pure simple water. +We felt that we should value it far more than the richest wine from the +vineyards of Burgundy or the Rhine. At last we observed a little +moisture on the ground near a large tree. We followed up its trace, and +soon, shaded by shrubs, we came to a basin of bright, cool water. We +eagerly stooped down and lapped up some of the delicious fluid, and then +shouted loudly to our friends to come and enjoy the valued luxury with +us. In a very short time the pool was surrounded with men, women, and +children, ladling up the water with their calabashes and bowls, the +mothers pouring it into the mouths of their children before they would +themselves touch a drop, while the men knelt down and lapped it up as we +had done. As I watched the scene, I bethought me that it was a subject +fit for the exercise of the painter's highest art. + +We spent a week on the island, repairing the canoe, catching fish, and +filling our water jars with water. This may appear an unnecessarily +long time to have waited on our voyage, but, after being cramped up for +so many weeks, it was necessary to recruit our strength and to stretch +our limbs. Much refreshed, we continued our voyage. I forgot to state +that at every island where we touched we engraved our names on the +trunks of trees, in the most conspicuous situation, and stated the +direction in which we were going. We had done this also on our own +island, as we called it, that should any vessel visit the spot she might +perhaps convey intelligence to Captain Frankland that we were alive, and +give him some clue as to where to look for us. Our friends understood +our object, and now added some sentences in their own language to the +same effect. The fine weather continued, and confident in the guidance +and protection of Him who had hitherto preserved us from so many and +great dangers, we launched forth again into the deep. + +We passed several small islands; some had but a few stunted trees +growing on them; others again had scarcely soil sufficient to nourish a +few blades of long wiry grass; while others were barren rocks without +verdure of any description, their heads but lately risen from beneath +the waves. I believe that it was at one time supposed that these coral +formations rose from immense depths in the ocean, and that those +wonderful and persevering polypi worked upwards till they had formed +submarine mountains with their honey-combed structures; but it is now +ascertained that they cannot exist below at the utmost fifty feet of the +surface, and that they establish the foundation of their structures on +submarine mountains and table-lands, while they do not work above +low-water mark. How comes it then, it will be asked, that they form +islands which rise several feet above the sea? Although the polypi are +the cause of the island being formed, they do not actually form it. +They begin by building their nests on some foundation which instinct +points out to them. First they work upwards, so as to form a wall, the +perpendicular side of which is exposed to the point whence the strongest +winds blow and the heaviest sea comes rolling in. Then they continue to +work along the ground and upwards on the lee side of the wall, sheltered +by their original structure from the heavy seas. They also work at each +end of their wall in a curve with the convex side exposed to the sea. +Thus, at length, beneath the ocean a huge circular wall of considerable +breadth is formed. Storms now arise, and the waves, dashing against the +outer part of the walls, detach huge masses of the coral, six feet +square or more, and cast them up on the top of it, where they remain +fixed among the rough peaks of coral; and gradually other portions are +thrown up, till a mass is formed above high-water mark. Other bits, +ground by the waves into sand, now form a beach, united with shells and +various marine productions. Birds come and settle, and leave seeds +which spring up; and trees grow, and attract moisture; and fresh springs +are formed, and the spot becomes fit for the abode of man. Some islands +have had a rock, or, perhaps, the plateau of some marine mountain for +their commencement, and the polypi have simply enlarged it, and formed a +reef around it. ["The Coral Island," by R.M. Ballantyne, Esquire, +Nelson and Sons.] However, this interesting subject has been so often +well explained in other works that I will not further enlarge on it, +though I could not pass it by in the description of my voyage without +some notice. + +Another week we had been out of sight of land. We were longing to find +some spot on which we might stretch our legs, if only for a few hours, +and, what was more important, obtain a fresh supply of water, when +towards the evening the treetops of a large island appeared before us +stretching away on either side to the north and south. We approached +near enough to be seen from the shore, if there were inhabitants on it, +of which there could be little doubt; but we could discover no place +where it would be safe to attempt a landing. Judging that the shortest +way to get round to the other side would be to go to the south, we +paddled in that direction during the night. The roar of the surf +prevented any sounds from the shore from reaching our ears; but we +observed several fires lighted on the beach, which assured us that the +island was populated. The question, of course, was--Would the +inhabitants appear as friends or foes? We paddled but very slowly +during the night, just sufficiently to keep the canoe away from the +breakers, and to get round to the place where it was believed a passage +would be found. At daylight we perceived the looked-for spot, and stood +towards it. We observed a number of people on the beach. They had +scarcely any clothing; their skins were dark, their hair was long and +straggly, and the men had spears or clubs in their hands. Our chief +stood up and examined them narrowly. No green boughs were waved as a +sign of amity; on the contrary, their gestures appeared somewhat of a +threatening character. We had just got to the mouth of the passage when +his quick eye detected a number of canoes collected inside the reef, and +full of men, armed with darts and bows and arrows. He made a hasty sign +to his followers to back their paddles, and away we shot out of the +trap. + +As soon as our flight was discovered the canoes gave chase. They were +small, each carrying not more than six or eight men; but from their +numbers they were formidable. The men in them were also armed with a +variety of weapons, and we thought it very likely that the arrows and +darts might be poisoned. In a long line they darted out of the passage +through the breakers, like hornets out of their nest, to the attack. +"There they come, the black scoundrels!" exclaimed Ben Yool. "Ten, +fifteen, twenty,--there are thirty of them altogether. They'll give us +no little trouble if they once get alongside. However, they think that +they've only got their own countrymen, so to speak, to deal with. +They'll find themselves out in their reckoning, I hope." + +As we got away from the land we felt the force of the wind, and the +chief ordering the sail to be set, we shot rapidly ahead. Still the +small canoes made very rapid way through the water. The chief looked at +us, as much as to ask, "What will you do, friends?" Mr Brand +understood him, and answered by producing our fire-arms. Fortunately we +had had very little necessity to expend our cask of powder and our shot, +and we had a good supply. The missionaries, when they saw the +fire-arms, put their hands to their heads as if in sorrow that it would +be necessary to shed blood, but some words spoken by their chief +reassured them. We could have told them that the sin lies with those +who make the attack, provided the other party has employed all evident +means to avoid hostilities. + +By the orders of their chief our people got their own bows and spears +ready, and then they set to work with their paddles again, and plied +them most lustily, much increasing the speed of the canoe. This, +however, had only the effect of making our enemies redouble their +efforts to overtake us. + +Mr Brand and Jerry and I were the best shots; the doctor was not a good +one, and Ben knew better how to manage a big gun than a musket. + +"You will fire over their heads, will you not?" said the doctor. + +"I think not," answered Mr Brand. "It will be mercy to make them feel +the effects of our power. If each of us can knock over one of their +people they may be so terrified that they will turn back at once; but if +they once come on and attack us, we know not where the slaughter may +end, even should we prove victorious." + +It was agreed, therefore, that as soon as the savages got near enough to +distinguish us, we were to jump up, and taking steady aim, to pick off +those who appeared to be chiefs in the headmost boats. We explained our +plan to our chief, and he much approved of it. + +The wind freshening we made good way, but still the flotilla of canoes +was fast overtaking us. The voices of the savages, as they shouted and +shrieked at us, were wafted across the water; but they had not the +effect of intimidating our friends. "Ah, my boys, you'll shout to a +different tune, I suspect, before long," exclaimed Ben, as he eyed them +angrily. At length, in spite of all the efforts of our friends, the +savages got close up to us; and two men in the leading canoe, lifting +their bows, were about to draw their arrows, when Cousin Silas +exclaimed, "Now is the time, my lads; give it them." We all fired. The +two savages dropped instantly, and one man in each of the next canoes +went head foremost overboard. The people in the following canoes +hesitated for a minute what to do. The delay gave us time to reload. +Again we fired, while our people jumping up sent a flight of arrows +among our enemies. Shrieks, and cries, and groans, arose from the +canoes, which all crowded thickly together like a flock of sheep, their +people astonished and terrified at what had occurred. Then they turned +round, and all paddled back in evident confusion. We shouted, and gave +them a parting volley; but this time it was over their heads to hasten +their movements. We were preserved,--not one of us had received the +slightest injury. Away we glided, as fast as the wind and our paddles +would carry us from the inhospitable island. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +VOYAGE IN A WHALER--FURTHER ADVENTURES. + +Wearily our voyage had continued for many weeks, yet we felt that having +been preserved from so many dangers, it would be sinful to complain. No +one was actually sick, not a life had been lost, and by great economy +our provisions and water had hitherto been sufficient for our +necessities. A flight of birds had passed over our heads, directing +their course to the north-east. We saw our chief watching them, and he +at once ordered the canoe to be steered in the same direction. All day +we stood on. Just as the sun was setting, we thought we saw a faint +blue peak rising out of the water, but even the most practised eye could +not determine whether it was land or a light cloud. We continued the +same course during the night. For several hours I watched, then, +overcome by fatigue, I fell asleep. "See! see!" I heard Jerry exclaim. +I jumped up. There appeared before us the lofty and rugged peaks of a +line of mountains. Of great height they seemed, after the low land to +which our eyes had been so long accustomed. Their sides were clothed +with verdure, pleasant and refreshing to the sight; and at their bases +were groves, and fields, and sparkling streams, with heat pretty-looking +cottages scattered about. There was a slight swell. When the canoe +rose to the top of it, we could see a yellow beach, with a circle of +bright, blue, calm water around it, and outside a line of white foaming +breakers, the guardians of the shore. "Otaheite! Otaheite!" exclaimed +the chief and his followers; and we thus knew that we were on the coast +of the dominion of the ill-treated Queen Pomare; but we also knew that +there were civilised men on shore, and that we should probably be +received there with kindness and hospitality. + +Soon discovering a passage through the reef, we ran in, and were at once +surrounded by canoes full of people, wondering who we were and whence we +had come. Our friends quickly gave an outline of our and their +adventures, to satisfy curiosity. They found there several people from +their own island, one a chief who had become a wealthy man. He took +them to his own house, and had their canoe hauled up to be repaired. I +need not say that she was visited by all the foreign residents, curious +to examine a craft of so frail a structure which had performed so long a +voyage. Our consul was very civil to us, and we were received into the +house of an English gentleman, who treated us with the greatest +kindness. As we met with no very interesting adventures during our stay +here, I will content myself with giving a brief account of the island. + +Otaheite was discovered in 1767, by Captain Wallis, who called it King +George's Island; but it is better known by the name of Tahiti. It is of +volcanic formation, and consists of two peninsulas joined by a neck of +low land, about two miles across. The whole island is about thirty +miles in circumference. The smaller portion, called Tairaboo, is the +most fertile; but as Tahiti proper has the best harbour, it is the most +frequented, and is the seat of government. + +We know very little of the history of the island. Soon after its +discovery, a chief, who assumed the title of Pomare the First, made +himself king. His son, and then his grandson, succeeded him, and the +present queen is his granddaughter; her name is Aimata, but she has +taken the title of Pomare the Fourth. She has established a +constitution, and seven chiefs act as her ministers. For many years +both the chiefs and people have professed Christianity, having been +converted to a knowledge of the truth by Protestant missionaries. These +missionaries were undoubtedly earnest, pious men, but they have been +unable altogether to check the vices which the lawless rovers, outcasts +of every civilised nation in the world, have introduced among them. +Notwithstanding the counteracting influences I have mentioned, +civilisation was making progress in the island, under the teaching of +the Protestant missionaries, when the peace was disturbed by the arrival +of two French Roman Catholic priests. They travelled about the country +endeavouring to teach their doctrines, but in no place did they find +willing hearers. A few chiefs who were in opposition to the Government +for political motives, gave them some countenance, and they were +entertained at the house of the American consul. The people, however, +resolved that they should not remain to attempt the corruption of the +faith in which they had been instructed, and rising in a body, compelled +them to go on board a small vessel, which carried them to Wallis Island, +two thousand miles off. The French who had long desired the possession +of some island in the Pacific inhabited by partly civilised people, were +too glad to found a pretext on this circumstance for interfering in the +affairs of Tahiti. A frigate, the _Venus_, commanded by Monsieur Du +Petit Thouars, entered the harbour of Papieti. The French, captain, +bringing his guns to bear on the town, demanded satisfaction for the +outrage committed on his countrymen. The queen was inclined to resist, +but the foreign inhabitants, knowing that they should be the chief +sufferers, collected the amount demanded, which was at least four times +as much as any pecuniary loss the priests had incurred. He also forced +a treaty on the queen, by which Frenchmen were allowed to visit the +island at pleasure, to erect churches, and to practise their religion. +This was the commencement of the complete subjugation of the Tahitians +to the French. So much for the history of the island. + +The valleys, and a plain which extends from the sea-shore to the spurs +of the mountains, are very fertile, and produce in great abundance all +tropical plants. The climate is warm, but not enervating; the scenery +is in many parts very beautiful. Thus the natives are tempted to lead +an easy and idle life, exerting but little their physical and mental +powers. It is, indeed, to their credit that they do not altogether +abandon themselves to indolence. They are by nature constituted to +enjoy the beautiful scenes by which they are surrounded. Consequently, +they delight in building their cottages in the most retired and lovely +spots they can find. Their habitations are surrounded with fences, +inside which they cultivate the taro, and sweet potatoes, the banana, +the bread-fruit, the vi-apple, groves of orange and cocoa-nut trees, and +at times the sugar-cane. Their habitations are of an oval shape, often +fifty or sixty feet long, and twenty wide. They are formed of bamboos, +planted about an inch apart in the ground. At the top of each wall thus +formed, a piece of the hibiscus, a strong and light wood, is lashed with +plaited rope. From the top of the four walls the rafters rise and meet +in a ridge, those from the ends sloping like those from the sides. The +rafters, which touch each other, are covered with small mats of the +pandanus leaf, which, closely fitted together and lapping over each +other, forms a durable roof, impervious to the rain. The earth, beaten +hard, forms the floor. There are no regular partitions, but mats serve +the purpose when required. Their bedsteads are made of a framework of +cane raised two feet from the ground, and covered with mats, the most +luxurious using pillows stuffed with aromatic herbs. They have neither +tables nor chairs. Their style of cooking is very simple: they bake +their food in extemporised ovens filled with hot stones. Since my +return I have often intended to propose having a picnic, and to cook all +our food in Tahitian fashion. The dress of the people is undergoing a +rapid and considerable change. Formerly a native cloak and kilt was all +that was thought necessary; now every sort of European clothing is in +vogue. We had an example of this at a feast our English friend gave to +a number of chiefs and their relations. Some of the gentlemen had on +uniform coats, with nankeen trousers too short for them, and coloured +slippers. Others had top-boots, red shirts, black breeches, sailors' +round jackets, and cocked hats. Some had high shoes and buckles, and +others had no shoes at all; but all had shirts and trousers, or +breeches. Some, indeed, were in complete costume: shoes, stockings, +trousers, waistcoat, coat, shirt, with a huge neck-tie--every garment of +a different colour, and often too large or too small--while a little +straw hat was worn on the top of the head. Indeed, it was very evident +that their clothes had been collected from all parts of the world, many +garments probably having passed a probation in pawnbrokers' shops, or in +those of old clothes-men in London or Liverpool. I was particularly +struck by the total want of perception of congruity as to dress +exhibited both by men and women after they had abandoned their native +costume, which, if somewhat scanty, was graceful and adapted to the +climate. The women we saw were dressed in straw bonnets of huge +proportions and ugly shape, and loose gowns of gay colours reaching from +the throat to the ankles, with silk handkerchiefs tied round their +necks. A few wore wreaths of flowers round their heads, which formed a +picturesque part of their ancient costume. The people are said to be +very honest, and always seemed in good-humour, happy and cheerful, while +we never saw them quarrelling or disputing with each other, far less +coming to blows. Many of them are scrupulous in their attendance on +religious worship; the Sabbath is strictly kept by all, not even a boat +being launched, while those who are seen abroad are decently clothed, +going to or coming from church. What change French civilisation may +have worked in this state of things it is painful to reflect. We +visited several schools, and except that their skins were darker, the +appearance of the children differed little from that of the same class +in any part of Europe, while they appeared in no way wanting in +intelligence. In fact, from all we saw and heard, we came to the +conclusion that the inhabitants of the islands of Polynesia are +generally as capable of a high state of education and civilisation as +the people of any other race, while their minds are peculiarly +susceptible of religious instruction. Our fellow-voyagers afforded us a +good example of this. We much regretted that we could not converse +familiarly with them. Our missionary friend had especially won our +regard and esteem. + +They were now anxious to return to their own island, the season of the +year being favourable for the voyage. It was with much regret that we +heard of their intended departure. With a large concourse of natives +and several English missionaries, we accompanied them down to the beach +to see them off. Prayers were offered up by all present for their +safety during their voyage. It was an impressive and affecting scene. +Many wept as the fine old chief and his friends stepped on board. He +could scarcely refrain from tears, nor could we. The frail canoe was +launched forth into the deep, the sail was hoisted, and away they went +on a voyage of three hundred miles, with full faith that the God who had +hitherto preserved them would watch over them still. + +We did not at the moment believe that our departure was so near. The +next day the _Matchless_, a Liverpool whaler, arrived in the harbour of +Papieti. We met her master, Captain Brown, who told us that he was +bound for the coast of Japan, and that he should touch at the Bonin +Islands, and probably fish off there some time. At this latter place we +knew that Captain Frankland fully intended to call. How much his plans +might be changed by our supposed loss we could not tell, but at all +events we could not hope for a better opportunity of falling in again +with the _Triton_. Captain Brown had lost several of his people,--some +by sickness, others in a gale, and others by desertion. Hearing this, +Mr Brand offered his own and our services as far as the Bonin Islands, +or for a longer period, should we gain no account of our own ship. They +were without hesitation accepted. The _Matchless_ remained but a few +days, having called in merely to obtain water and a supply of fresh +provisions. Our kind English friend, not content with having supported +us all the time we remained at Tahiti, insisted on supplying us with as +good an outfit as he could procure in the country. When we expressed +our gratitude and unwillingness to be so great a burden on him, he +smiled. "What is the use of property, unless to do good with it?" he +remarked. "Do not say a word about the matter. When you reach home, +should the obligation weigh too heavily on your conscience, you can send +me back the value; but I then shall be the loser, as it will show me +that you will not believe in the friendship which induces me to bestow +these trifles as a gift." After this very kind speech we could do no +more than sincerely and cordially thank him. The day before we +embarked, he told us that he had been making inquiries about Captain +Brown. "I would rather that you had another man to sail with," he +observed. "He is a person with two countenances, I am afraid. On shore +he is mild, and obliging, and well-behaved; but afloat he is, I am told, +tyrannical and passionate, and often addicted to intemperance. You +will, accordingly, be on your guard. You will probably remain only a +few weeks with him, or I should advise you to give up the voyage, and +wait for another opportunity of going westward." This was not pleasant +news, but we resolved on no account to delay our departure, and, +thanking our friend for his warning, as well as for all the kindness we +had received at his hands, we the next day went on board the +_Matchless_. + +She was a fine vessel, and well-found with boats and gear. How great a +contrast did she offer to the frail canoe in which we had lately made so +long a voyage! How strongly built and rigged! How well calculated to +stand the buffeting of the winds and waves! How impossible did it seem +that any harm could come to her! I felt this, I own, as I walked her +deck. She had already taken twenty whales, or fish, as sailors wrongly +call them. For some time Captain Brown was very civil and good-natured, +and we began to hope that our friend had received a wrong account of +him. + +Although we did not expect to meet with whales, men were always kept at +the mast-heads on the look-out. I shall not forget the excitement of +the scene when, after we had been a week at sea, the cry was uttered +from aloft, "There she spouts! there she spouts!" In an instant +everybody was alert. "Where away? where away?" was asked. The point +where the whale had appeared was indicated. The boats were lowered; the +crews leaped into them. The master went in one, two mates in others. +Off they pulled in hot chase. The whale sounded; the men lay on their +oars. In half an hour she rose again, throwing up a jet of sparkling +foam into the air. Again the boats dashed on. The master's headed the +rest. His harpoon struck the monster. One of the other boats got fast +directly after. Then off went the whale at a terrific speed, dragging +the boats after her directly away from the ship. Now she sounded, and +all their lines were run out; but just as they would have to cut, up she +came again. We followed under all sail. + +The day was drawing to a close when another whale was seen floating idly +close to us. The possibility of obtaining another rich prize was not to +be lost. Mr Brand had served for three years in a whaler, and was now +doing duty as mate. He ordered a boat to be manned. Jerry and I +entreated that we might accompany him. "One only can go," he answered; +"I am very sorry." The lot fell upon me. Jerry was never jealous. +"Old Surley and I will take care of each other," he answered. Away we +went. A long, low island was in sight from the mast-head. The other +boats could nowhere be seen. We got up to the whale before she sounded. +I fancy she was asleep. The harpoon Mr Brand shot into her awakened +her up. Off she went in the direction of the land, at a great rate. I +wished Jerry had been with us. It was so pleasant to be dragged along +at so furious a rate, the foam flying over the bows of the boat. +Formerly harpoons were always darted by the hand. Now fire-arms are +used. The butt of the harpoon is placed in the barrel, and the rope is +attached to it by a chain. Less skill and strength is required to +strike the whale, but just as much skill and experience is requisite to +avoid being struck in return and smashed to atoms by the wounded animal. +Whenever the whale slackened her speed, we hauled up in the hope of +getting another harpoon into her, but she was soon off again; then she +sounded, and we were nearly losing our line. Again she rose; a second +harpoon was run into her. Off she was again. At length blood mingled +with the foam from her spouts. With fury she lashed the water around. +"Back! back for your lives!" shouted Mr Brand. Well it was that we got +out of her way in time. One blow from those tremendous flukes would +have destroyed us. + +Loudly we shouted as the monster lay an inanimate mass on the surface of +the deep. Then we looked about us. We had approached close to the +island, but darkness was settling down over the face of the waters. The +ship was not to be seen. Clouds were gathering thickly in the sky. A +gale, we feared, was brewing. Our safest plan was to lie by all night +under the lee of the whale. The wind came from the very direction where +we believed the ship to be. We should never be able to pull against it. +We had got out our harpoons from the dead whale, and were putting our +gear in order, when, just as we were going to make fast to it, the huge +mass sunk from our sight! We looked at each other with blank +disappointment. It was gone--there can be no doubt about it, and was +utterly irrecoverable. "Don't grumble, my lads. We should have been +worse off had we been fast to it with a gale blowing, and unable to cut +ourselves adrift," exclaimed Mr Brand. "Let us thank the Almighty that +we have escaped so great a danger. We'll run under the lee of that +island for the night, and try and find the ship in the morning." +Accordingly we bore away, and were in a short time in comparatively +smooth water. Still the weather looked very threatening. We pulled in +close to the breakers. "Harry," said Cousin Silas, "I think we should +know that island. I see an opening in the breakers, and a clump of +trees on it which seems familiar to my eyes. We shall be better off on +shore than here. I will take the boat in." The men were somewhat +astonished when they received the order to pull in for the land. We +exactly hit the passage, and soon had the boat hauled up on the beach. +"We will have a roof over our heads to-night, lads," said Cousin Silas, +leading the way, and in a quarter of an hour we were seated under the +shelter of the hut where we had lived for so many months! It was +strange that we had so unexpectedly fallen in with our own island again. + +We lit a blazing fire, and caught some wild-fowl, and knocked down some +cocoa-nuts, which were now in season, and picked some bread-fruit, and, +with the provisions we had in the boat, enjoyed a capital meal, which +somewhat restored our spirits after the loss of our whale. As far as we +could discover, no one had been there since we left the spot,--even our +beds were ready for us. All hands rested soundly, and by the next +morning the short-lived summer gale had blown itself out. I mounted to +the top of our flag-staff, and to my no small satisfaction saw our ship +lying-to five or six miles off to the westward. I was hurrying with the +rest down to the boat, for I had no wish to be left again on the spot +though I felt an affection for it, when Cousin Silas stopped me. "We +have an important work to perform," said he. "Before we go we will +obliterate our former directions and write fresh ones, saying where we +are now going." I saw the wisdom of this precaution in case the +_Triton_ might visit the place; and, accordingly, with our knives we +carved in a few brief words a notice that we were well and bound for the +Bonins. This done, we embarked and ran out towards the ship. + +On getting on board we found the captain in a desperately bad humour at +having been compelled by the gale to abandon the whales he had caught; +and our account of our loss did not improve his temper. He swore and +cursed most terribly at his ill luck, as he chose to call it; and, to +console himself, opened his spirit case and drank tumbler after tumbler +of rum and water. The result was soon apparent: he issued contradictory +orders--quarrelled with the mates--struck and abused the men, and +finally turned into his cot with his clothes on, where he remained for +several days, calling loudly for the spirit bottle whenever he awoke. +From this period he became an altered man from what he had at first +appeared, and lost all control over himself. + +I will not dwell on the scenes which ensued on board the whaler. They +were disgraceful to civilised beings, and to men calling themselves +Christians. Cousin Silas, and the doctor, and Ben, did all they could +to counteract the evil,--the latter by exercising his influence forward, +and the others in endeavouring to check the officers, who seemed +inclined to imitate the example of the master. Cousin Silas had charge +of one watch, and he got Jerry and me placed in another, and he told us +instantly to call him should we see anything going wrong. Thus three or +four weeks passed away. We managed during the time to kill two whales, +and to get them stowed safely on board; and this put the captain into +rather better humour. However, the ship was often steered very +carelessly, and a bad look-out was kept. + +We were running under all sail one day when, as I was forward, I saw a +line of white water ahead, which I suspected must be caused by a coral +reef. I reported the circumstance. Fortunately there was but little +wind. I looked out anxiously on either hand to discover an opening. To +the southward the line of foam terminated. The helm was put down, and +the yards braced sharp up; but in five minutes a grating noise was heard +and the ship struck heavily. The seamen rushed from below,--they full +well knew the meaning of that ominous sound, and they believed that the +ship was hopelessly lost. The captain at the time was unconscious of +everything. Cousin Silas hurried on deck, and, taking a glance round, +ordered the helm to be put up again, the yards to be squared, and the +courses which had been clewed up to be let fall. It was our only +chance. The ship's head swung round; once more she moved--grating on, +and, the doctor said, tearing away the work of myriads of polypi. +"Hurrah! hurrah!" a shout arose from all forward. We were free. Away +we flew. + +This narrow escape ought to have been a warning to all on board. +Unhappily it was not. The same system was pursued as before. The other +mates grow jealous of Cousin Silas, and did their utmost to counteract +his efforts. One night Jerry and I were on deck, actively moving about, +followed by Old Surley, looking out in every direction; for it was very +dark, and the officers had been having a carouse. For some reason or +other I was more than usually uneasy. So was Jerry. + +"I should not wonder," said he, "that something will happen before +long." + +"I hope not, if it is something bad," said I; "but I'm not altogether +happy. I think that I will go and call Mr Brand." + +"What shall we say to him, though? There will be no use rousing him up +till we have something to tell him." I agreed with Jerry, so we +continued talking as before. + +"What are you youngsters about there?" shouted the first mate, who, +although it was his watch, was half tipsy. "Go below, and turn in; I'll +not have chattering monkeys like you disturbing the discipline of the +ship." Jerry and I hesitated about obeying, and Jerry whispered to me +that he would go and call Mr Brand. But the mate sung out, "Mutiny! +mutiny! Go to your own kennels, you young hounds!" and ordered some of +the watch on deck to carry out his commands. We could not help +ourselves, so we went below, and turning into our berths very soon fell +asleep. + +How long we had been asleep I do not know. I was awoke by a terrific +crash and loud cries and shrieks. Jerry and I sprung up, so indeed did +everybody below, and rushed on deck. It was very dark; but from the way +the ship heaved and lurched, and the sheets of foam which flew over her, +we knew that she was among the breakers, and striking hard on a reef. +The fore-mast and main-mast had gone by the board. The mizzen-mast +alone stood. That fell soon after we got on deck, crushing several +people beneath it. Anxiously we hunted about shouting for Cousin Silas, +followed by Old Surley, who, since we came on board, scarcely ever left +our heels. We naturally sought him for advice. It was, indeed, a +relief to us to find him unhurt. In a short time we discovered the +doctor and Ben. We clustered together, holding on by the bulwarks; for +every now and then a sea came and washed over the decks, and we ran +great risk of being carried away. Nothing could we see on either side +beyond the white roaring breakers. Cousin Silas said that he was +certain we must have been driven some way on the reef, or the sea would +have broken more completely over us, and no one could have hoped to +escape. Several people had already been washed overboard, and had been +lost or killed by the falling masts; but who they were we could not +tell. What, also, had become of the captain we did not know. He had +not, that we could discover, come on deck. Perhaps, all the time he was +below, unconscious of what had occurred. All we could do was to cling +on where we were, till with daylight we should be able to tell our +position. Every now and then we felt the ship lifting, and it appeared +as if she was driving gradually over the reef. Another danger, however, +now presented itself--we might drive over the reef altogether, and sink +on the other side! We strained our eyes through the darkness; but, +surrounded as we were with spray, it was impossible to distinguish the +shore, even though it might be near at hand. If there was no land, our +lot would indeed be sad; for, wherever we were, it was clear that the +ship would be totally lost, and, as far as we could discover, all our +boats were destroyed. After two or three hours passed in dreadful +suspense, though it appeared as if the whole night must have elapsed, +the ship became more steady, and the sea broke over her less violently. +"We must get a raft made," exclaimed Cousin Silas. The men seemed to +look instinctively to him for orders, and willingly obeyed him. All +hands set to work, some to collect the spars which had not been washed +overboard, others to cut away the bulwarks and to get off the hatches-- +indeed, to bring together everything that would serve to form a raft. +Dark as it was they worked away; for they knew that when the tide again +rose the ship might be washed over the reef and sink, or go to pieces +where she lay. How eagerly we watched for daylight to complete our +work! The dawn at length came; and as the mists of night rolled off, we +saw before us a range of lofty mountains, of picturesque shapes, rising +out of a plain, the shore of which was not more than a quarter of a mile +off. As the sun rose a rich landscape was revealed to us, of cocoa-nut +groves, and taro plantations, and sparkling streams, and huts sprinkled +about in the distance. + +"At all events we have got to a beautiful country," observed Jerry, as +he looked towards it. + +"One from which we shall be thankful to escape, and where our lives will +be of little value unless we can defend ourselves from the inhabitants, +who are, I suspect, among the most bloodthirsty of any of the natives of +Polynesia," answered Cousin Silas. "However, the sooner we can get on +shore, and establish ourselves in some good position for defence, the +better." + +The raft, which had been constructed with the idea that we might require +it for a long voyage, was a very large one, and having launched it, we +found that it could not only carry all the ship's company, but a number +of other things. We found an ample supply of arms and ammunition--most +valuable articles under our present circumstances. We got them all up, +as well as our clothes and everything valuable in the ship which could +at once be laid hands on; we also took a supply of provisions, that we +might for a time be independent of the natives. One thing more was +brought up--that was, the still senseless body of the captain. There he +lay, totally unconscious of the destruction his carelessness had brought +on the ship intrusted to his care. In silence and sadness we shoved off +from the ship which had borne us thus far across the ocean. Many of our +number were missing; two of the mates and six seamen had been killed by +the falling of the masts, or washed overboard. + +We paddled across the smooth water inside the reef as fast as we could, +hoping to land before any of the natives had collected to oppose us. +All our people had muskets, and some had cutlasses, so that we were able +to show a bold front to any one daring to attack us. As we neared the +shore we saw in the distance a number of people with bows, and arrows, +and clubs, hurrying towards our party. We soon ran the raft aground, +and, leaping on shore, were led by Cousin Silas to the summit of a rocky +hill close to where we were. + +The savages advanced with threatening gestures. None of them had +fire-arms. We thus felt sure that, if they ventured to attack us, we +should make a good fight of it. Cousin Silas called four of the men to +the front, and ordered them to fire over the heads of the savages, to +show them the power we possessed. The savages halted at the sound, and +looked about to see what had become of the balls they heard whistling +above them. While they hesitated, Cousin Silas, cutting down a green +bough, went to the brow of the hill and waved it over his head--a token +of a friendly disposition, understood in all those regions. To our +great satisfaction, we saw the savages tearing down boughs, which they +waved in the same manner. Among the whaler's crew was a Sandwich +Islander who spoke the language of many of the people in those regions. +He was told to try and see if he could make them understand him. Waving +a bough he went forward to meet them, while the rest of us stood ready +to fire should any treachery be practised. They did not seem, however, +to have meditated any, and met him in a perfectly friendly manner. +After talking to them for some time, he came back and said he had +arranged everything. He told them that we were voyaging to our own +country, and that we had landed here to await the arrival of another +ship. If we were treated well, our friends would return the compliment; +but that if otherwise, they would certainly avenge us. This, +undoubtedly, was far from strictly true; but I have no doubt that it had +the effect of making the savages disposed to treat us hospitably. The +savages on this put down their arms and advanced towards us with +friendly gestures. Mr Brand, consequently, went to meet them, ordering +us, at the same time, to keep our arms ready in case of treachery. The +savages were very dark. Some of them, whom, we took to be chiefs, wore +turbans over their frizzled-out hair, and mantles and kilts of native +cloth. They shook hands with Mr Brand in a very friendly way, and +invited us all to their houses; but he replied that he preferred +building a house where we had landed, though he would be obliged to them +for a supply of food. The natives replied very politely that the food +we should have, and that they hoped we should change our minds regarding +the place where we proposed building a house. + +After some further conversation the chiefs and their followers retired, +and Mr Brand advised all hands to set to work to fortify the hill where +we were posted, and to bring up the greater part of the raft, and +everything on it, to our fort. When this was done, we made a small raft +on which we could go off to the wreck, hoping to bring away everything +of value before she went to pieces. The natives watched our proceedings +from a distance, but our fire-arms evidently kept them in awe, and +prevented them from coming nearer. As soon as they had completed the +raft, three of the whaler's crew were eager to go off to the wreck; but +Mr Brand advised them to wait till just before daylight the following +morning, when they might hope to perform the trip without being +perceived. He warned them that the savages were especially treacherous, +and could in no way be depended on. Five or six of them, I think it +was, laughed at him, and asking why they should fear a set of black +savages, expressed their intention of going on board at once. +Accordingly, carrying only a couple of muskets with them, they shoved +off from the shore, and without much difficulty got up to the wreck. It +was then low-water, but the tide was rising. We watched them on board, +and then they disappeared below. We waited anxiously to see them +commence their return, but they did not appear. "They have broken into +the spirit-room, I fear," remarked Cousin Silas. "If so, I fear that +they will be little able to find their way back." An hour passed away. +We began to fear some disaster had befallen them. While watching the +wreck, we saw from behind a wooded point to the right a large canoe make +its appearance, then another, and another, till a dozen were collected. +It was too probable that some treachery was intended. We fired three +muskets in quick succession, in hopes of calling the attention of the +seamen. No sooner did the savages hear the sound of the fire-arms than +they paddled away towards the wreck. They had got nearly up to it, when +the seamen came on deck, and stared wildly around them, making all sorts +of frantic gestures. Seeing the canoes, they fired their muskets at +them, but hit no one; and then, throwing down their weapons on the deck, +they doubled their fists, and with shouts of laughter struck out at +their approaching enemies. The savages hesitated a moment at the +discharge of the muskets, but finding that they were not again fired at, +they paddled on at a rapid rate, and getting alongside the vessel, +swarmed in numbers on board. We saw that the tipsy seamen who made a +show of fighting were speedily knocked down, but what afterwards became +of them we could not tell. The savages were evidently eagerly engaged +in plundering the ship, and hurriedly loaded their canoes with the +things they collected. They, of course, knew that the tide was rising, +and that their operations might be speedily stopped. Some of the +canoes, deeply laden, had already shoved off, when we saw the remainder +of the savages make a rush to the side of the vessel; bright flames +burst forth from every hatchway; several loud reports were heard; then +one louder than the rest, and the ill-fated ship, and all who remained +on board, were blown into the air! + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +OUR ESCAPE FROM THE ISLAND. + +After the catastrophe I have described, the ship continued to burn +furiously--the oil in her hold helping to feed the conflagration. The +savages who were already in their canoes paddled rapidly away; many must +have lost their lives, as several canoes appear to have been destroyed. +Numbers of the unfortunate wretches, wounded by the explosion, were +swimming about, trying to get hold of their canoes or of pieces of the +wreck; while others, who had escaped injury, were making for the shore. +But they had watchful enemies in the sea looking for them; the water +swarmed with sharks, and several, unable to defend themselves, were +caught by the voracious monsters. What became of our poor countrymen-- +whether they were blown up with the ship or carried off by the savages-- +we could not tell. + +By this accident our numbers were sadly diminished, as was our hope of +obtaining what we might require from the wreck. Cousin Silas took +occasion to urge upon the remainder of the men the importance of keeping +together for mutual support; but, from the way the whaler's crew took +his advice, I saw that they were in no way inclined to follow it. It +was with difficulty even that he could persuade them to keep watch at +night. That was a trying period with us. Cousin Silas and I, with two +of the crew kept our watch; and Ben, and the doctor, and Jerry, with two +others, watched the rest of the night. We kept our ears and eyes wide +open, and fancied that we could see under the shadow of the trees the +savages prowling about us, and could hear their suppressed whispers; but +if such was the case, when they found that we were on the alert, they +refrained from attacking us. + +That first night the captain awoke from his stupor, and, sitting up, +inquired what had occurred. When he was told, somewhat abruptly, by one +of his crew that the ship was cast away, that the mates and several of +the men were lost, and that we were surrounded by savages ready to +destroy us, the account had so great an effect on him that it seemed to +drive him out of his mind. He shrieked out, "It is false! it is false-- +mutiny! mutiny!" and continued to rave in the most outrageous and +dreadful manner. Thus he continued for many hours. The doctor said he +was attacked with delirium tremens, brought on by his intemperate +habits; and thus he continued, without being allowed a moment of +consciousness to be aware of his awful state, till he was summoned hence +to stand before the Almighty Judge, whose laws, to the last moment of +his earthly probation, he had systematically outraged. We buried him +just outside our fort, at night, that the savages might not observe that +our number was still further reduced. + +Three or four days passed away. Both night and day we were equally on +the alert, but the stock of provisions we had brought with us from the +wreck was growing very low, and it was necessary to devise some plan for +obtaining more. The savages, on the other hand, finding that they could +not easily surprise us, changed their tactics, and once more came +towards us in friendly guise, bringing fruits and vegetables, and pigs +and poultry. Had they been aware of our starving condition, they could +not have hit upon a better plan to win our confidence. Still, however, +Cousin Silas did not trust to them. + +"They may really be friendly," he remarked, "and let us behave towards +them as if they were; but never let us for a moment be off our guard." +When, however, the natives began to spread out their banquet before the +very eyes of the famished sailors, and invited them to come down and +partake of it, very few could resist the temptation. One after another +went down, till only the doctor and Ben, Jerry and I, with Cousin Silas, +remained on the hill. Even old Surley thought he might as well join the +party, but after he had gobbled up a good supply of pork, which some of +the sailors gave him, he hurried back to us. We watched anxiously what +would next happen. In a short time Jerry exclaimed that he thought it +was a pity we should not benefit by the feast, and before Cousin Silas +could stop him he had run down the hill and was among the savages. At +that moment, what was our horror to see the natives start up, each +dealing the white man nearest him a terrific blow on the head. No +second one was needed. Every one of our late companions lay killed upon +the ground. Jerry started back, and endeavoured to run to us, but a +savage caught him by the shoulder, and (how my blood ran cold!) I +thought would brain him on the spot. Jerry looked up in his face with +an imploring glance. Something he said or did, or the way he looked, +seemed to arrest the savage's arm. Perhaps he may have reminded him of +a son he had lost. He lifted up his club, but this time it was to +defend his young prisoner from the attack of another savage. He then +took him by the hand, and led him to a distance from the rest. Jerry +looked back earnestly at us, but he saw that if he attempted to escape +from his protector he should probably be killed by one of the others, so +he accompanied him without resistance. The rest of the savages, +collecting the dead bodies, fastened ropes to their legs, and dragged +them away, with loud shouts and songs of triumph. To our surprise, they +did not molest us. They saw that we retained the fire-arms, and +probably thought that they might take us at an advantage another time +without risk to themselves. We had still a good supply of powder and +balls, so, loading all the muskets, we prepared for an attack. +Horrified as I had been at the slaughter of our late shipmates, my great +anxiety was about Jerry. I hoped that his life might be safe, but it +was a sad fate to be kept in captivity by such treacherous and +bloodthirsty savages as these had showed themselves to be. I asked Mr +Brand where he thought we were. He replied that he had no doubt, from +the appearance and conduct of the savages, that we had been wrecked on +one of the outlying Fiji Islands. He told me that the inhabitants, a +few years back, had all been the very worst cannibals in the Pacific, +but that of late years Protestant missionaries had gone among them, and +that in some of the islands, of which there were eighty or ninety +inhabited, the whole population had, he understood, become Christians. +Still, however, a large number, among whom the light of truth had not +been introduced, retained their old habits and customs; and among some +of these we had unfortunately fallen. Of course, also, we could not but +be excessively anxious about our own fate. How could we hope to hold +out without food, should the savages attack us? The night passed away, +however, in silence. Our enemies were evidently abiding their time. + +It was just daybreak when Ben Yool started up. "I can't stand it any +longer," he exclaimed. "I'll just go and see if those savages left any +of their provisions behind them." Without waking Mr Brand to know what +he would say, off he went down the hill. How anxiously I waited his +return! I was afraid that some of the savages might be lying in wait, +and might catch him. My ear watched for the sound of his footsteps. +Five--ten minutes--a quarter of an hour passed away. At last I thought +I heard the breathing of a person toiling up a hill. It might be a +savage, though. I kept my rifle ready, in case it should prove an +enemy. To my great satisfaction it proved to be Ben. He came loaded +with bread-fruits and cocoa-nuts, and what was undoubtedly the hind +quarters of a pig, while a calabash full of water hung round his neck. +"I was afraid that I should have to come back without anything for my +trouble," said he. "Just then, under a tree, I stumbled over these +provisions. How they came there I don't know, but there they are and +let us be thankful." + +We roused up Mr Brand and the doctor. They carefully examined the +provisions, and agreed that they were very good of their sort, so we set +to, and made a very hearty breakfast. From the place where Ben found +the food, Mr Brand was of opinion that it had been left there expressly +for us, but whether by a friend or by our enemies, for the purpose of +entrapping us, it was difficult to say. + +The day, as it advanced, threatened to be very stormy. The clouds came +driving across the sky, and a gale began to blow, such as is rarely seen +in those latitudes. It gave us rest, however, for the natives are not +fond of venturing out in such weather, and we had less fear of being +attacked. During the night we were aroused by hearing a gun fired. We +peered out seaward through the darkness; another gun was heard, and a +flash was seen. It was evidently from a vessel in distress. It was +just before daybreak. The dawn came and revealed to us a schooner, with +all her canvas gone, drifting towards the breakers, which rolled in with +terrific power, a quarter of a mile from the shore. We gazed at the +vessel; we all knew her at a glance, even through the gloom. She was +the pirate schooner. On she drove. In another instant she was among +the foaming breakers. Her time had come at last. We could hear the +shrieks and despairing cries of the wretched men on board. She struck +very near the spot where the whaler had been lost. Over the reef she +drove. We could see the people one after the other washed overboard, +and engulfed by the foaming waters. To help them would have been +impossible, even had we not had to consider our own safety. At last one +man appeared in the clear water inside the breakers. He seemed to be +swimming, though he advanced but slowly, and we saw that he was lashed +to a piece of timber. At last he drifted on shore. + +"I cannot see the poor wretch die without help, pirate though he may +be," exclaimed Cousin Silas, running down to the beach. I followed him. +The log of timber and its freight reached the shore at the moment we +got down to it. There was no look of recognition. We ran into the +water, and cast loose the body; but our undertaking had been useless. A +corpse lay before us; and though the features were distorted, we +recognised them as those of Captain Bruno. We had just time to hurry +back to our fort, when we saw a body of savages coming round a point at +a little distance off. + +The schooner had, in the meantime, beaten over the reef, and was +drifting across the channel, when, as she got within a hundred yards of +the beach, she went down, leaving a dozen or more of her crew floating +on the surface. Most of them struck out boldly for the shore; but no +sooner did they reach it, believing themselves safe, than the clubs of +the savages put an end to their existence. In a short time not one +remained alive of the whole pirate crew. It seemed strange that the +savages had allowed so long a time to elapse without attacking us, nor +could we in any way account for their conduct, unless under the +supposition that they were afraid of our fire-arms. To show them that +our weapons were in good order, and that we were likely to use them +effectually, we every now and then, when we saw any of the natives near, +fired a volley in the air. + +When we had gone down on the beach, on the occasion of the wreck of the +schooner, we observed a canoe thrown upon the shore. She was evidently +one of those deserted by the savages when the whaler blew up. We agreed +that, if we could get her repaired, she might prove the means of our +escape. The first thing was to cut some paddles. This we had no great +difficulty in doing, from the trees growing around us. Watching their +opportunity, when no savages were near, Mr Brand and Ben went down to +examine her. On their return they reported that she was perfectly +sound, and required little or nothing done to her. It was a question +with us, however, whether we should commit ourselves to the deep at +once, and endeavour to reach some more hospitable island, or wait for +the possibility of a ship passing that way, and going off to her. + +We had scarcely consumed our provisions, when at daybreak one morning we +observed a basket under the very tree where Ben had before discovered +what he brought us. He again went down, and returned with a similar +supply. We considered this matter, and could not believe that any +treachery was intended, but, on the contrary, we began to hope that we +had some secret friend among the savages. Who he was, and how he came +to take an interest in us, was the question. Several days more passed +away. Each alternate night provisions were left for us. At length I +resolved to endeavour to discover our friend. My great object was that +I might be able by this means to gain tidings of Jerry, and perhaps to +rescue him from the hands of his captors, for I continued to hope that +he had not been put to death. I explained my plan to Mr Brand. After +some hesitation, he consented to allow me to adopt it. "I feel with +you, Harry, that I could never bring myself to leave the island without +Jerry," he answered; "and probably the savages, should they catch you, +would be less likely to injure you than any of us." + +That night, soon after it was dark, I crept down to the tree, and +concealing myself among some bushes which grew near, waited the result. +I felt very sleepy, and could at times scarcely keep myself awake. At +last I heard footsteps, as if a person were cautiously approaching the +tree. A man dressed, as far as I could distinguish, like a chief, with +a turban on his head, deposited a basket in the usual spot. I sprang +out and seized his hand. At first he seemed much surprised, if not +alarmed; but, recognising me, he patted me on the head, and uttered some +words in a low voice, which I could not understand, but their tone was +mild and kind. Then he put out his hand, and I distinctly felt him make +the sign of the cross on my brow, and then he made it on his own. I no +longer had any doubt that he was a Christian. I longed to ask him about +Jerry, but I found that he did not understand a word of English. It was +so dark, also, that he could scarcely see my gestures. I tried every +expedient to make him comprehend my meaning. I ran on, and then seized +an imaginary person, and conducted him back to the fort. I raised my +hands in a supplicating attitude. I shook his hands warmly, to show how +grateful I should be if he granted my request. At last I began to hope +that he understood me. He shook my hands and nodded, and then, +assisting me to carry the basket close up to the fort, hurriedly left +me. + +This circumstance considerably raised the spirits of all the party, for +we felt that we had a friend where we least expected to find one. If, +however, we could but get back Jerry, we resolved to embark. Perhaps +the Christian chief might help us. Had we been able to speak the +language, our difficulties would have been much lessened. Here, again, +we had another example of the beneficial results of missionary labours. +How the chief had been brought to a knowledge of the truth we could not +tell, but that his savage nature had been changed was evident. Perhaps +there might be others like him on the island. How it was that we had +remained so long unmolested was another puzzle. Perhaps it was owing to +some superstitious custom of the natives, Mr Brand observed. Perhaps +we were tabooed; or, as we had, as they might suppose, existed so long +without food, they might look upon us as beings of a superior order, and +be afraid to injure us. Our patience, meantime, was sorely tried. We +were afraid also that the natives might discover our canoe, and carry it +off. + +As may be supposed, our eyes took many an anxious glance seaward, in +hopes of being greeted by the sight of a vessel. Nor were they +disappointed. A large ship was discovered one forenoon standing in for +the land. How the sight made our hearts beat! The time had arrived for +us to endeavour to make our escape--but could we go and leave Jerry? + +"Yes; we may induce the captain to come and look for him," said Cousin +Silas. + +"But suppose he will not," observed the doctor. + +"Then I, for one, will come back in the canoe, and not rest till I find +him," exclaimed Ben Yool. "They can only kill and eat me at the worst, +and they'll find I'm a precious tough morsel." + +"I'll keep you company, Ben," said I, taking his hand. + +So it was agreed that we were to embark at once. Taking our rifles and +muskets, the paddles in our hands, and some provisions in our pockets, +we hurried down to the beach. We had got the canoe in the water, when a +shout attracted our attention. Old Surley gave a bark of delight, and +ran off. "That is Jerry's voice," I exclaimed, hurrying to meet him. +At a distance were several men and boys in hot pursuit. Jerry was +somewhat out of breath, so I took his hand and helped him along, without +asking questions. He, Surley, and I, leaped into the canoe together; +Mr Brand, Ben, and the doctor seized the paddles, and shoving her off +into deep water, away we steered towards the passage through the reef. +Scarcely had we got a couple of hundred yards off before the savages +reached the shore. They instantly fitted their arrows to their bows; +but I, seizing my rifle, made signs that if they let fly I would fire in +return. They understood the hint, and ran off along the beach to a spot +where a number of their canoes were hauled up. The leading one, with +only three men in her, came dashing close after us through the surf. +One held his bow ready to shoot, the rest had placed their weapons at +the bottom. The other canoes contained more savages, and followed close +after their leader. This made us redouble our efforts to escape. We +darted through the passage just as a dozen canoes or more left the +shore. We had a terribly short start of them, and they paddled nearly +twice as fast as we could. + +"Shall I fire and give notice to the ship?" I asked Mr Brand. I was +sitting in the bow of the canoe facing forward. + +"Yes, yes, Harry, fire," he answered. "They will hear us on board by +this time." I took one of the muskets and fired in the air. Directly +after, we saw the ship crowding more sail, and standing directly for us. + +"I thought so all along, and now I'm certain of it," exclaimed Ben, +almost jumping up in his seat. "I know that starboard topmast +studden-sail, and no mistake. She's the _Triton_! Hurrah! hurrah!" + +"You're right, Ben," said Mr Brand. "I felt sure also that she was the +_Triton_, but still was afraid my hopes might have in some way have +deceived me. But give way, give way, or the savages will be up to us +before we are alongside her." The caution was not unnecessary, for the +canoes of the savages had already got within range of our rifles. + +"Couldn't you bring down a few of the niggers, sir?" asked Ben. "It +will only serve them right, and mayhap will stop their way a little." + +"No, no; never shed blood as long as it can be avoided," answered Cousin +Silas. "These very savages who are now seeking our lives may ere long +be shown the light of truth, and be converted and live. See, I believe +they have already made us out on board the _Triton_. They are firing to +frighten off the savages." + +As he spoke, three guns were fired in quick succession from the +_Triton_. The noise and smoke, to which the savages were evidently +unaccustomed, made them desist paddling. We redoubled our efforts, and +shot ahead. After a little hesitation, the savages once more pressed on +after us, but happily at that moment the ship again fired. Mr Brand at +the same time seized the muskets and discharged them one after the other +over the heads of our pursuers. Again they wavered, some even turned +their canoes about, two or three only advanced slowly, the rest ceased +paddling altogether. This gave us a great advantage, and without +waiting to let Mr Brand reload the muskets, we paddled away with our +hopes of escape much increased. Some minutes elapsed, when the courage +of the savages returned, and fearing that we might altogether escape +them, they all united in the pursuit. The breeze, however, freshened, +the ship rapidly clove the waters, and before the canoes had regained +the distance they had lost, we were alongside. Loud shouts of welcome +broke from every quarter of the _Triton_ as we clambered up her side. + +I will not attempt to describe the meeting of Jerry and his father. +Captain Frankland, indeed, received us all most kindly and heartily. +For a long time he had given us up as lost, but still he had continued +the search for us. The _Dove_ had been captured by the American +corvette, and soon afterwards he had fallen in with her. From the +pirates on board the little schooner he discovered that we were on board +the large one. He had pursued her for several months, till at length, +passing our island, he had observed our flag-staff and our hut still +standing. This was, fortunately, after our second visit, when we had +altered the inscriptions on the trees. The gale which had wrecked the +pirate had driven the _Triton_ somewhat to the southward of her course +for the Bonins, whither she was bound to look for us; and thus, by a +wonderful coincidence, she appeared at the very moment her coming was of +most importance to rescue us from slavery, if not, more probably, from a +horrible death. + +The savages, when they saw that we were safe on board the ship, finally +ceased from the pursuit. Captain Frankland kept the ship steadily on +her course, ordering five or six guns to be fired without shot over +their heads, as a sign of the white man's displeasure. After the first +gun, the savages turned round their canoes, and, in terror and dismay, +made the best of their way to the shore. The _Triton_ was then steered +for the coast of Japan. + +It was not till some days afterwards that Jerry gave me an account of +what had befallen him among the savages. "I was in a horrible fright +when the savage dragged me off," he said. "I thought that he was +keeping me to kill at his leisure, just as a housewife does a pig or a +turkey, when he wanted to eat me. I cannot even now describe the +dreadful scenes I witnessed when the cannibal monsters cooked and +devoured the poor fellows they had so treacherously slaughtered. What +was my dismay, also, when a few days afterwards some more bodies of +white men were brought in! I thought that they had killed you all; and +it was only when I found that there were ten instead of five bodies, +that I hoped I might have been mistaken. + +"The man who had captured me treated me kindly, and fed me well. At +first I thought he might have had his reasons (and very unsatisfactory +they would have been to me) for doing the latter; but this idea I +banished (as it was not a pleasant fine, and took away my appetite) when +I found that he did not partake of the horrible banquets with his +countrymen. He was constantly visited also in the evening by a chief, +who evidently looked on them with disgust, and always looked at me most +kindly, and spoke to me in the kindest tones, though I could not +understand what he said. One evening, after he and my master had been +talking some time, he got up and made the sign of the cross on my brow, +and then on his own, and then on that of my master. Then I guessed that +I must have fallen among Christians, and that this was the reason I was +treated so kindly. I understood also by the signs he made that you all +were well, and that he would do his best to protect you. + +"One day he came and told me to follow him into the woods. My master's +hut was some way from the other habitations, so that we could go out +without of necessity being observed. It was, however, necessary to be +cautious. What was my delight when he took me to a height, and showing +me a vessel in the distance, pointed to the fort, and signed to me to +run and join you as fast as I could! You know all the rest." + +Jerry at different times afterwards gave me very interesting accounts of +various things he had observed among the savages of the Fijis, but I +have not now space to repeat them. + +How delightful it was to find ourselves once more on board the fine +steady old ship, with a well-disciplined crew, and kind, considerate +officers! Our sufferings and trials had taught us to appreciate these +advantages: and I believe both Jerry and I were grateful for our +preservation, and for the blessings we now enjoyed. + +We had a very quick and fine run till we were in the latitude of +Loo-Choo. A gale then sprung up--rather unusual, I believe, at that +season of the year. It lasted two days. When the weather cleared, we +saw a huge, lumbering thing tumbling about at the distance of three or +four miles from us. It looked, as Fleming the gunner remarked, "like a +Martello tower adrift." + +"If you'd said she was one of those outlandish Chinese junk affairs, +you'd have been nearer the truth," observed Mr Pincott the carpenter, +who, as of old, never lost an opportunity of taking up his friend. "By +the way she rolls, I don't think she'll remain above water much longer." + +Captain Frankland thought the same, and making sail we stood towards +her. By that time she was evidently settling down. The ship was +hove-to, the boats were lowered, and, in spite of a good deal of sea +which then was on, we ran alongside. A number of strange-looking +figures in coloured silks and cottons, dressed more like women than men, +crowded the side. Some leaped into the water in their fright; others we +received into the boats, and conveyed them to the ship. Two trips had +been made, when Mr Pincott, who was in the boat with me, said he did +not think she would float till we came back. At that moment a person +appeared at the stern of the vessel handsomely dressed. He was a +fine-looking old gentleman. He must have seen his danger, and he seemed +to be bidding his countrymen farewell. I could not bear the thought of +leaving him; so I begged Mr Pincott to pull back, and signing him to +descend by one of the rope-ladders hanging over the stern, we received +him safely into the boat. Scarcely had we done so, when the junk gave a +heavy lurch. "There she goes, poor thing!" exclaimed Pincott. "Well, +she didn't look as if she was made to swim. But pull away, my lads-- +pull away. We may be back in time to pick up some of the poor fellows." +It was heartrending to see the poor wretches struggling in the water, +and holding out their hands imploringly to us, and yet not be able to +help them. Many very soon sunk; others got hold of gratings and bits of +wreck, and endeavoured to keep themselves afloat, but some of those +monsters of the deep--the sharks--got in among them, and very soon +committed horrible havoc among the survivors. The moment we were able +to get the people we had in the boat up the ship's side we returned to +the scene of the catastrophe. We pulled about as rapidly as we could, +hauling in all we could get hold of still swimming about, but some were +drawn down even before our very eyes, and altogether a good many must +have been lost. + +The old gentleman I had been the means of saving proved to be the chief +person on board. We made out that the junk was from Loo-Choo, but that +he himself belonged to some town in Japan. This we discovered by +showing him a map, and from the very significant signs he made. While +we were making all sorts of pantomimic gestures, Mr Renshaw suggested +that a lad we had on board, supposed to be a Chinese, might perhaps be +able to talk with him. Chin Chi had been picked up from a wreck at sea +on a former voyage of the _Triton_, and had now made some progress in +his knowledge of English. Chin Chi was brought aft with some +reluctance. What, however, was our astonishment to see the old +gentleman gaze at him earnestly for some minutes; they exchanged a few +words; then they proved that Japanese nature was very like English +nature, for, rushing forward, they threw themselves into each other's +arms--the father had found a long-lost son! + +The son had been seized, like many of his countrymen, with a desire to +see the civilised world, of which, in spite of the exclusive system of +his government, he had heard, and had stolen off, and got on board a +ship which was afterwards wrecked, he being the only survivor. Poor +fellow, he had seen but a very rugged part of the world during his visit +to England, in the Liverpool docks and similar localities. He told his +father, however, how well he had been treated on board the _Triton_; and +the old gentleman, on hearing this, endeavoured to express his gratitude +by every means in his power. + +Two days after this we found ourselves anchored off the harbour of +Napha, in Great Loo-Choo. In a short time a boat came off from the +shore bearing two venerable old gentlemen with long beards and flowing +robes of blue and yellow, gathered in at the waist with sashes, and +almost hiding their white sandalled feet. On their heads they wore +yellow caps, something like the Turkish fez in shape, and fastened under +their chins with strings, like a baby's nightcap. Bowing with their +noses to the planks as they reached the deck, they presented red +visiting cards, three feet in length, and inquired what circumstance had +brought the ship to their island. Great was their astonishment when our +old friend Hatchie Katsie presented himself, and said that we had come +to land him and his son, who had been shipwrecked. He had come to give +notice of the loss of the junk, but that he purposed proceeding on in +the ship to Japan. + +His first care was to send on shore for proper clothes for Chin Chi, who +looked a very different person when dressed in bright-coloured robes and +a gay cap. He had got a similar dress for Jerry and me. He told +Captain Frankland that he could not venture to invite him on shore, but +that, as we were mere boys, he might take us under his escort. + +Highly delighted, we accordingly pulled on shore. We found conveyances +waiting for us, kagos they were called. They were the funniest little +machines I ever saw--a sort of litter; suppose a box open in front and +the sides, with a low seat inside, and the lid shut down. Even Jerry +and I, though not very big, had great difficulty in coiling ourselves +away in ours; and how our portly old friend contrived it, was indeed a +puzzle. We had to sit cross-legged, with our arms folded and our backs +bent double, and were borne jogging along by two native porters, our +heads every now and then bumping up against the roof, till we couldn't +help laughing and shouting out to each other to ascertain if our skulls +were cracked. I suppose the natives have a mode of glueing themselves +down to the seats. + +We passed over several well-made bridges, and along a paved causeway, +having on either side a succession of beautiful gardens and fertile +rice-fields, while before us rose a hill covered with trees, out of +which peeped a number of very pretty-looking villas. When we reached +the top of the hill we had a fine view over a large portion of the +island--several towns and numerous villages were seen, with +country-houses and farms scattered about. Altogether, we formed a very +favourable opinion of the island and the advanced state of civilisation +among the people of Loo-Choo. + +The house to which our friend took us was built of wood, and covered +with earthen tiles. It had bamboo verandas, and a court-yard in front +surrounded by a wall of coral. The interior was plain and neat,--the +rafters appearing overhead were painted red, and the floor was covered +with matting. The owner of the house, an old gentleman very like +Hatchie Katsie, received us very courteously, and after we had sat some +time, ordered food to be brought in. Some long-robed attendants +prepared a table in the chief hall, on which they placed a number of +dishes, containing red slices of eggs and cucumber, boiled fish and +mustard, fried beef, bits of hog's liver, and a variety of other similar +dainties, at which we picked away without much consideration, but which +might have been bits of dogs, cats, or rats, for aught I knew to the +contrary. The people of Loo-Choo must be very abstemious if we judge +from the size of their drinking cups--no larger than thimbles! The +liquor they drank, called sakee, is distilled from rice. + +We only spent two days on shore, so that I cannot pretend to know much +of the country. From its elevation, and being constantly exposed to the +sea-breezes, it must be very healthy. It is also very fertile. All the +agricultural instruments we saw were rude. The plough was of the old +Roman model, with an iron point. One of the chief productions of the +island is rice, and as for it a constant supply of water is required, +there is a very extensive system of irrigation. To prepare it for +cultivation, the land is first overflowed, and the labourer hoes, and +ploughs, and harrows, while he stands knee deep in mud and water. It is +first grown in plots and then transplanted. The banyan-tree is very +abundant, and so is the bamboo, which supplies them with food, lodging, +and clothing, besides, from its stately growth, forming a delightful +shade to their villages. The sugar-cane is grown, and much sugar is +made from it. The islands are of coral formation, but, from some mighty +convulsion of nature, the rock on which the coral was placed has been +upheaved, and now in many places appears above it. The sketch I +introduce will afford a better notion of the country-scenery in Loo-Choo +than any mere verbal account which I could give. + +The people of Loo-Choo are well formed, and the men have full black +beards, and their hair being well oiled is gathered to the back of the +head, and fastened with a gold, silver, or brass pin, according to the +rank of the wearer. Their dress is a loose robe with wide sleeves, +gathered round the waist with a girdle, in which they carry their +tobacco pouch and pipe. The upper classes wear a white stocking, and +when they go out they put on a straw sandal secured to the foot by a +band passing between the great toe and the next to it, as worn by the +Romans. The peasants go bareheaded and barefooted, and wear only a +coarse cotton shirt. Their cottages also are generally thatched with +rice straw, and surrounded by a palisade of bamboos. The furniture is +of the simplest description. It consists of a thick mat spread on the +plank floor, on which the people sit cross-legged; a table, a few +stools, and a teapot, with some cups, and a few mugs and saucers. Their +food is chiefly rice and sweet potatoes, animal food being only used by +the upper classes. The upper ranks use a variety of soups, sweetmeats, +and cooked and raw vegetables. They are a hard-working people, though +they have their festivals and days of relaxation, when, in open spaces +between the trees, they indulge in their favourite foot-ball and other +athletic sports. + +I think what I have given is about the full amount of the information I +obtained. One thing I must observe, that although they are now sunk in +a senseless idolatry, from the mildness of their dispositions, and their +intelligent and inquiring minds, I believe that if Christianity were +presented to them in its rightfully attractive form, they would speedily +and gladly embrace the truth. + +As our friend Hatchie Katsie was anxious to return to Japan, Captain +Frankland very gladly undertook to convey him there. He and Chin Chi, +accordingly, once more embarked with us on board the _Triton_. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +OUR VOYAGE TO JAPAN. + +Our friend Hatchie Katsie belonged to the commercial town of Hakodadi, +situated in the Straits of Saugar, on the south end of the Japanese +island of Yesso, and before it we found ourselves one bright morning +brought up. The harbour was full of junks of all sizes, coming and +going, proving that a brisk trade must be carried on there. The town +seemed of considerable extent, stretching along the sea-shore for a mile +or more, while many of the streets ran up the sides of a lofty +promontory, at the base of which it stands. The mountains rise directly +behind to an elevation of a thousand feet, their bare summits often +being covered with snow. The slopes are clothed with underwood, while +on the plain below wide-spreading cypresses, maples, plum and peach +trees grow in rich profusion. Altogether the scene is a very +picturesque and beautiful one. From numerous stone quarries the +Japanese have supplied themselves with an abundance of building +materials. The appearance of the town, with its well-constructed sea +walls, bridges, and dikes, showed us that the Japanese must be a very +industrious people, and that they have made considerable advance in +civilisation. + +One of the first things which struck us was a Japanese boat which came +alongside, both from her model and the neat way in which she was put +together. Her bows were very sharp, she had great beam, and she tapered +slightly towards the stern. She was built of pine wood, and varnished +without any paint. Her crew, almost naked, stood aft, and sculled her +along instead of rowing, at a very great rate. The official personages +she brought off sat in the fore-part; one of them, armed with two +swords, a mark of rank, stood in the bows, and made a very good +figure-head. We should probably have had to take our departure without +holding any communication with the shore, so anxious were the Japanese +government to prevent any communication of the people with foreigners, +when Hatchie Katsie made his appearance on deck. The account he gave +his countrymen soon changed the aspect of affairs, and we were told that +the governor of the place would no doubt make an exception in our +favour. + +Our friend having procured Japanese clothes for us, as he had done at +Loo-Choo, told us that he might venture to take us on shore and show us +something of the mode of life among his countrymen. I have no doubt +that Chin Chi considered it far superior to that of the English, as far +as he was able to judge of them. The Japanese gentlemen were, +generally, finer men than those of Loo-Choo. Their dress also was +different. One of the chief people in the place, if he was not the +governor, wore a gaily-coloured robe of rich silk, with the back, +sleeves, and breast, covered with armorial bearings. He wore a very +short pair of trousers, with black socks and straw slippers. His hat, +something like a reversed bowl, shone with lacquer and ornaments of +gold. I must say, however, that Europeans have no right to quiz the +head covering of any nation in the world, as ours far surpass all others +in ugliness, and in the want of adaptation of means to an end. + +Our friend could not take us publicly into the town, so he had us +conveyed to his country-house in kagos, such as were used at Loo-Choo. +On every side, as we passed along, the people were busily employed; some +were lading their packhorses with bags of meal, others with heavy +mallets were pounding grain into flour, while others were hoeing in the +rice grounds up to their knees in water. There was no sign of poverty, +and even the lowest people were well and comfortably clad in coarse +garments, shorter than those of the more wealthy classes. All wear the +hair drawn up and fastened at the top in a knot. In rainy weather they +wear cloaks made of straw, so that a person looks like a thatched roof. +The same sort of garments, I hear, are used by the Portuguese peasantry. +The upper classes cover their robes with a waterproof cloak of +oiled-paper. All, like the Chinese, use the umbrella as a guard from +the sun and rain. + +The streets are thoroughly drained, for not only are there surface +gutters, but deep drains which carry all the filth into the sea. Here, +again, they are in advance of many civilised people. Some of the best +houses are built of stone, but they are usually constructed of a +framework of bamboo and laths, which is covered with plaster painted +black and white in diagonal lines. The roofs are composed of black and +white tiles; the eaves extending low down to protect the interior from +the sun, and the oiled-paper windows from the rain. They are, +generally, of but one story. Some of the residences stand back from the +street with a court-yard before them, and have gardens behind. The +fronts of the shops have movable shutters, and behind these are sliding +panels of oiled-paper or lattices of bamboo, to secure privacy when +required. In the interior of the houses is a framework raised two feet +from the ground, divided by sliding panels into several compartments, +and spread with stuffed mats; it is the guest, dining, and sleeping-room +of private houses, and the usual workshop of handicraftsmen--a house +within a house. When a nobleman travelling stops at a lodging-house, +his banner is conspicuously displayed outside, while the names of +inferior guests are fastened to the door-posts. The doctor made a +capital sketch of a scene we saw when looking into the interior of a +Japanese house--a servant apparently feeding two children. + +A Japanese has only one wife, consequently women stand far higher in the +social scale than among other Eastern people. They have evening +parties, when tea is handed round; and the guests amuse themselves with +music and cards. Japanese ladies have an ugly custom of dyeing their +teeth black, by a process which at the same time destroys the gums. The +more wealthy people have suburban villas, the gardens of which are +surrounded by a wall, and laid out in the Chinese style, with +fish-ponds, containing gold and silver fish, bridges, pagoda-shaped +summer-houses and chapels, beds of gay-coloured flowers, and dwarf +fruit-trees. + +A large portion of the people profess the Buddhist religion. We visited +a large temple at Hakodadi, full sixty feet high. The tiled roof is +supported on an arrangement of girders, posts, and tie-beams, resting +upon large lacquered pillars. The ornaments in the interior, consisting +of dragons, phoenixes, cranes, tortoises, all connected with the worship +of Buddha, are elaborately carved and richly gilt. There are three +shrines, each containing an image, and the raised floor is thickly +covered with mats. We were shown a curious praying machine covered with +inscriptions. At about the height easily reached by a person was a +wheel with three spokes, and on each spoke a ring: turning the wheel +once round is considered equivalent to saying a prayer, and the jingle +of the ring is supposed to call the attention of the divinity to the +presence of the person paying his devotions. The Sintoo worship is +practised also among the Japanese, but its temples are less resorted to +than those of Buddha. + +We saw a number of junks building. In shape they were like the Chinese, +but none were more than a hundred tons burden. Canvas instead of bamboo +is used for sails. + +The Japanese are decidedly a literary people. All classes can read and +write; and works of light reading appear from their presses almost with +the same rapidity that they do with us. They print from wooden blocks, +and have wooden type. They have also long been accustomed to print in +colours. The paper they employ is manufactured from the bark of the +mulberry, but is so thin that only one side can be used. They have +sorts of games, some like our chess, and cards, and lotto, and we saw +the lads in the streets playing ball very much as boys do in an English +country village. + +As we did not go to the capital, I cannot describe it. We understood +that there are two emperors of Japan--one acts as the civil governor, +and the other as the head of all ecclesiastical affairs, a sort of pope +or patriarch. The laws are very strict, especially with regard to all +communication with foreigners. If a person of rank transgresses them +and he is discovered, notice is sent to him, and he instantly cuts +himself open with his sword, and thus prevents the confiscation of his +property. The people exhibit an extraordinary mixture of civilisation +and barbarism; the latter being the result of their gross superstitious +faith, and their seclusion from the rest of the world; the former shows +how acute and ingenious must be their minds to triumph over such +difficulties. + +Our friend Hatchie Katsie accompanied us to the shore when we embarked. +Chin Chi parted with us most unwillingly. He longed to see more of the +wonders of the world; but even had his father been ready to let him go, +we could not have ventured to carry him away publicly in opposition to +the laws of the country. + +Once more we were at sea. "Homeward! homeward!" was the cry; but we had +still a long way to sail and many places to visit before we could get +there. Steering south, we came to an anchor before the city of Manilla, +the capital of the Philippine Islands, the largest of which is Lujon. +They belong to Spain, having been taken possession of in 1565. They are +inhabited by a variety of savage tribes, most of whom have been +converted by their conquerors to the Roman Catholic faith. The capital +stands on a low plain near a large lake, which has numerous branches, +now converted into canals. Hills rise in the distance, and behind them +ranges of lofty mountains, clothed to their summits with luxuriant +vegetation. The number of Europeans is very small compared to that of +the half-castes and aborigines. There are said to be forty thousand of +those industrious people, the Chinese, who appear now to be finding +their way into every country on the shores of the Pacific where +employment can be procured. The largest manufactory at Manilla is that +of cigars. The city appeared to be in a somewhat dilapidated condition, +the churches and public buildings, especially, were fast falling into +decay. + +We, as usual, were fortunate, and got a trip, through the kindness of an +English merchant, up the lake and a good way into the interior, when we +could not help wondering at the magnificent display of tropical +vegetation which we beheld. We also saw three of the most ferocious +animals of the country. Scarcely had we landed when, as with our friend +and several Indian attendants we were proceeding along the hanks of the +stream, our friend wished to send a message to a cottage on the opposite +side to desire the attendance of the master as a guide. There was a +ford near, but the Indian who was told to go said he would swim his +horse across. + +"Take care of the cayman," was the warning given by all. + +"Oh, I care not for caymans; I would fight with a dozen of them!" was +the answer given, we were told. + +The lake and rivers running into it abound with these savage monsters, a +species of alligator or crocodile. The man forced his horse into the +stream and swam on some way. Suddenly we were startled with the cry of +"A cayman! a cayman! Take care, man!" The Indian threw himself from +his horse and swam boldly to the bank, leaving his poor steed to become +the prey of the monster. The cayman made directly for the horse, and +seized him with his huge jaws by the body. The poor steed's shriek of +agony sounded in our ears, but fortunately for him the saddle-girth gave +way, and he struggled free, leaving the tough leather alone in the +brute's mouth, and swam off to shore. The cayman, not liking the +morsel, looked about for something more to his taste. + +The Indian had reached the bank, but instead of getting out of the +water, he stood in a shallow place behind a tree, and, drawing his +sword, declared that he was ready to fight the cayman. The monster +open-mouthed made at him; but the man in his folly struck at its head. +He might as well have tried to cut through a suit of ancient armour. +The next instant, to our horror, the cayman had him shrieking in his +jaws, and with his writhing body disappeared beneath the surface of the +stream! + +After this our journey was enlivened by all sorts of horrible accounts +of adventures with caymans, till we neared the spot where we expected to +find some buffaloes. As we rode along we heard an extraordinary cry. +"It is a wild boar," exclaimed our friend; "but I suspect a boa has got +hold of him--a great _bore_ for him, I suspect." We rode to the spot +whence the sound came. There, sure enough, suspended from the low +branch of a tree was a huge boa-constrictor, some twenty feet long, +perhaps, which had just enclosed a wild pig in its monstrous folds. +While we looked he descended, and lubricating the animal with the saliva +from his mouth, and placing himself before it, took the snout in his +jaws and began to suck it in. We had not time to wait, as our friend +told us it would take a couple of hours before he got the morsel into +his stomach. This process is performed by wonderful muscular action and +power of distension. + +In half an hour we reached a plain bordered by a forest. "Here we shall +find buffaloes in abundance," exclaimed our friend; "but, my lads, be +cautious; keep behind me, and watch my movements, or you may be +seriously injured, or lose your lives. Buffalo-hunting is no child's +play, remember." We had with us a number of Indians on horseback armed +with rifles, and a pack of dogs of high and low degree. Our chief +hunter was a remarkably fine-looking man, a half-caste. He was dressed +in something like a bull-fighter's costume. He dismounted and +approached the wood, rifle in hand. Two of the Indians threw off most +of their clothes, and kept only their swords by their sides. Thus +lightly clad, they were able to climb the trees to get out of harm's +way. The Indians beat the woods, and the dogs barked and yelped, till +at length a huge buffalo came out to ascertain what all the noise was +about. He stood pawing the ground and tossing up the grass with his +horns, as if working himself into a rage, looking round that he might +single out an object on which to vent his rage. Though we were at some +distance, we felt the scene excessively trying. His eye soon fell on +the bold huntsman, who stood rifle in hand ready to hit him on the head +as he approached. If his hand trembled, if his rifle missed fire, his +fate was sealed. The excitement, as I watched the result, was so great, +that I could scarcely breathe. The huntsman stood like a statue, so +calm and unmoved, with his eye fixed on the monstrous brute. The +buffalo got within a dozen paces of him. I almost shrieked out, for I +expected every moment to see the man tossed in the air, or trampled and +gored to death with those formidable horns. On came the buffalo--there +was a report--a cloud of smoke--and as it cleared away, he was seen with +his knees bent and his head as it were ploughing the ground; yet another +moment, and his huge body rolled over a lifeless mass; and the hunter +advancing, placed his foot proudly between his horns, as a sign that he +was the victor. Loud shouts rent the air from all the Indians, for the +feat their leader had performed was no easy one, and which few are +capable of accomplishing. In some parts of the island, buffaloes are +taken with the lasso, as we had seen it employed in Mexico. The animal +was cut up and transferred to a cart, to be carried down to the lake, by +which it was to be conveyed to Manilla. Tame buffaloes are used for +agricultural purposes. + +The vegetable productions of the Philippines are very numerous. Rice is +grown in great quantities. What is known as Manilla hemp is an article +of much value. It is obtained from the fibre of a species of plantain. +It, can only be exported from the port of Manilla. Indigo, coffee, +sugar, cotton, and tobacco, are grown in abundance; indeed, were the +resources of the islands fully developed, they would prove some of the +richest in the world. But it may truly be said, that where Spaniards +rule there a blight is sure to fall. + +On leaving the Philippines, we sighted the coast of Borneo, and looked +in at Sarawak, a province which the talent, the energy, the +perseverance, and the philanthropy of Sir James Brooke, have brought +from the depths of barbarism and disorder to a high state of +civilisation. Those who are incapable of appreciating his noble +qualities seem inclined to allow it to return to the same condition in +which he found it. I heard Captain Frankland speak very strongly on the +subject, and he said it would be a disgrace to England, and the most +shortsighted policy, if she withdraws her support from the province, and +refuses to recompense Sir James for the fortune which he has expended on +it. + +We next touched at Singapore, which was founded by a man of very similar +character and talents to Sir James Brooke. That man was Sir Stamford +Raffles, whose life is well worthy of attentive study. When, in 1819, +the English took possession of the island at the end of the Malay +peninsula, on which Singapore now stands, it contained but a few huts, +the remnants of an old city, once the capital of the Malayan kingdom, +and was then the resort of all the pirates who swarmed in the +neighbouring seas. It is now a free port, resorted to by ships of all +nations. It is the head-quarters of many wealthy mercantile houses, +whose managers live in handsome houses facing the bay, while its working +population is made up of Arabs, Malays, Chinese, and, indeed, by people +from all parts of the East. Singapore is another example of what the +talent and energy of one man can effect. + +The next harbour in which we found ourselves was that of Port Louis in +the Mauritius. The town stands at the head of the bay, and is enclosed +on the east, and north, and south, by mountains rising but a short +distance from the shore. The most lofty is the Pouce, which towers up +2800 feet immediately behind the town, and is a remarkable and +picturesque object. The Mauritius is one of the most flourishing of +England's dependencies, and the French inhabitants seem perfectly +contented with her rule, and appreciate the numerous advantages they +possess from being under it. Since the abolition of slavery, coolies +have been brought over to cultivate sugar, rice, tobacco, and to engage +in other labours, formerly performed by the negro slaves. Port Louis is +a well-built town, and has a bustling and gay appearance, from the +number of traders from all parts of the East, who appear in their +various and picturesque costumes. Our stay here was short. + +We were next bound to the coast of Madagascar, Captain Frankland having +instructions to endeavour to open up a trade with the people, and to +gain all the information he could collect regarding them. Madagascar is +larger than Great Britain and Ireland combined, and contains three +millions of inhabitants. In 1817, a treaty was entered into between the +governor of the Mauritius and Radama, who was king of part of the +country. The king consented to the abolition of the slave trade; and in +return, he was supplied with arms and ammunition, and military +instructors were sent to drill his army. The London Missionary Society +also sent over a body of highly intelligent men, some to instruct the +people in Christianity, and others more particularly in a variety of +useful arts. A considerable number of Malagasy youths were sent on +board English ships of war to be instructed in seamanship, while others +were carried to England to receive a more finished education. It is a +remarkable fact, that, although when the missionaries arrived in 1818 +letters were totally unknown, in ten years from 10,000 to 15,000 natives +had learned to read, many of them to write, and several had made some +progress in English. This speaks well for the zeal and excellence of +the system employed by the missionaries, and for the talent of the +natives. + +King Radama, after considerably extending his dominions, died in 1828, +when the policy of his successor towards the English considerably +changed. The Malagasy government having resolved to impose their own +laws on foreign residents at the port of Tamatave, an English and two +French ships of war went there to try and settle the questions at issue. +Failing to do so, they attacked the port, which, however, was so well +defended, that they were compelled to retire, leaving several of their +number behind, whose heads were stuck upon poles on the shore. In +consequence of this untoward event, all intercourse with the English +ceased for eight years. Before that time the government had commenced a +cruel persecution of the Christian natives, and numbers were put to +death. The effect, however, was very different from what was expected. +Attention was drawn to the subject of Christianity. Many of all ranks +began to study the Bible and to acknowledge the truth, and among them +was the queen's son, then only seventeen years old. The queen was +greatly averse to the new religion; and this, probably, was one of the +causes which made her break off all intercourse with strangers, while +she carried on the persecution against her own subjects who had become +converts. The patient way in which the Christians bore their sufferings +induced many others to inquire into the truth of their doctrines, and +ultimately to embrace them. At last a reaction took place; the queen +began to discover the ill effects of the restrictive system she had been +endeavouring to establish, and once more showed an inclination to renew +her intercourse with civilised nations. Friendly relations with the +British had again been established when we anchored before Tamatave. + +The roadstead before Tamatave offers a good anchorage, except when the +wind is from the north or east. Several species of pandanus and some +tall cocoa-nut trees gave a tropical character to the scenery. Soon +after anchoring, a large but rather clumsy canoe came alongside, with an +officer who spoke a little English, and said he was the harbour-master, +and a number of attendants. They wore neatly plaited straw hats, white +shirts bound round the loins with cloths, and large white scarfs thrown +gracefully over the shoulders like the Scotch plaid. The harbour-master +entered in a book the name of the ship and other particulars, and we +then accompanied him to his house on shore--that is, the captain, the +doctor, and Jerry and I. It was built of wood, nearly fifty feet long +and twenty-five high, a verandah running all round; a door in the +centre, and windows on either side; the floor of the veranda well +planked, so as to form an outer apartment. The whole was thatched with +the leaves of the traveller's-tree. The walls were covered with tofia, +or native cloth, and the floor with a large fine mat. A well-made +bedstead stood in one corner with sleeping mats on it, and in the centre +a table covered with a white cloth. In different parts of the room were +chairs and ottomans covered with mats; cooking utensils, arms, machines +for making mats, bags of rice, and other articles for consumption, were +arranged against the sides of the room. It was a fair specimen of a +native house, and in the essentials showed a considerable advancement in +civilisation and notions of comfort, as it was admirably adapted to the +climate. + +Captain Frankland's object in coming to Madagascar was to open up a +commercial intercourse with the people, and to advance this object he +had resolved to visit the capital. He had been supplied with several +letters of introduction to facilitate this object. This brought us in +contact with a number of people. One of our first visitors was a +fine-looking man, an officer of government. He wore a gold-lace cloth +cap, a shirt with an elaborately worked collar and cuffs, and over it a +lamba, the native scarf or plaid, the centre of which consisted of broad +stripes of yellow, pink, scarlet, and purple, with the border of open +work of yellow and scarlet lace. He had, however, neither shoes nor +stockings. He was accompanied by two men bearing swords, the badges of +his office. One of our visitors took snuff (a usual custom), by jerking +it from a richly ornamented tube of cane which his servant handed to +him, on to his tongue, when he swallowed it! + +Tamatave, where we landed, is a large village, but the houses, or rather +huts, have generally a dilapidated appearance. There are a few good +houses, belonging to foreigners and to the government officers. We were +amused by seeing slaves filling thick bamboos six or seven feet long +with water from a well. The water is pulled up in a cow horn instead of +a bucket, while the bamboo takes the place of a pitcher. We visited the +market. The vendors sat in the centre, or at the side of platforms made +of sand or mud, on which the articles were piled up. We found rice, +maize, millet, mandioc, plantains, oranges, pine-apples, and many other +fruits. All sorts of poultry were to be seen, and the butchers had +their meat arranged before them cut up into pieces on broad plantain +leaves. The women were dressed very much in articles of European +manufacture; their hair, which is jet black, was arranged frequently in +light curls or knots, which has a far from picturesque effect. + +Nothing is more wonderful in Madagascar than the great strides education +has made. Thirty years ago the language was unwritten. Only one +person, who had been educated in the Mauritius, could write, and that +was in a foreign language. Now, all the government officers can write, +and all the business is transacted by writing, while all classes are +greedy for instruction; indeed, we had great reason to believe that +there are few more intelligent people than the inhabitants of that +magnificent island. + +Before starting on our journey we were invited to a dinner by one of the +chiefs. Our surprise was great, when we approached the house, to find +two lines of soldiers drawn up, dressed in white kilts with white belts +across their naked shoulders, with a musket or spear. We were ushered +into a handsome hall full of officers in every variety of European +uniform, the chiefs having cocked hats, feathers, and gold epaulets. +The lady of the house and several other ladies were present, dressed in +English fashion; and the feast, which was abundant, was served much in +the English style. Several of the officers spoke English, and toasts +were drunk and speeches made, while a band played very well both when we +entered and after dinner. Some female slaves stood behind the ladies, +and two afterwards came in and made some very excellent coffee. We were +very much interested as well as surprised to find so much civilisation +among those whom we had supposed barbarians. + +I have spoken of slaves. Although the government has abolished the +exportation of slaves, slavery is still allowed in the country. The +slaves are generally people taken in war from among the inhabitants of +the northern provinces. People are also condemned to perpetual slavery +for crimes by the government. The Hovas, the name of the dominant +tribe, of whom Radama was chief, have made slaves of great numbers of +the tribes whom they have conquered. We heard, however, that they are +generally kindly treated. Many of the Christians were condemned to +slavery during the late persecutions; but the conditions made with those +who took charge of them was, that they were to be kept constantly at +hard labour. We heard much of the admirable conduct of the Christians +under all their persecutions. Their heathen masters declared that they +could be intrusted with any matter of importance, and were scrupulously +exact with regard to all property placed under their charge, while among +themselves they kept up the pure and simple doctrines which they had +learned from the Bible itself. + +We now got ready for our journey. We had a guide who had been in +England, and some years at the Cape of Good Hope, and spoke English +perfectly. Our palanquins were something like cots slung on a long +pole, with a roof of native cloth, which could be rolled up or let down +to keep off the rain or sun. The machine was borne by four bearers, two +before and two behind, while four others walked by the side ready to +relieve them. No wheeled carriages are used in Madagascar, so that the +only roads are the paths made by the unshod feet of the natives, or by +the bullocks' hoofs; and there is no water-carriage--all goods are +conveyed on men's shoulders from one part of the country to the other; +so that we had quite an army with us, what with our relays of bearers, +and those who carried our baggage and presents. Up and down hills we +travelled, through the wildest scenery we could imagine. It is +difficult to describe it. Sometimes we had to wind up and down over +rugged heights; then through forests, frequently turning aside to avoid +the huge trees which had fallen across our path; then across swamps and +plots of slippery mud; and often we had to force our way through dense +jungle, or through miles of primeval forests. + +We saw many interesting trees and plants. One of the most beautiful is +the bamboo. Some of the canes, nearly a foot in circumference at the +base, rise to the height of forty or fifty feet, their slight, +feathery-looking points, like huge plumes, waving with the slightest +breeze, and assisting to keep up a circulation of the air. They are +fringed at their joints with short branches of long, lance-shaped +leaves. We saw bamboos of all sizes, some with the cane as delicate as +a small quill, yet fully ten feet long; and these were also exceedingly +graceful. So also were the tree-ferns, which grew in great profusion +and beauty on the sides of the hills. But the most curious and valuable +tree we saw was the traveller's-tree. It has a thick succulent stem +like the plantain. From ten to thirty feet from the ground it sends out +from the stem, not all round, but on opposite sides, like a fan, ten or +a dozen huge bright green leaves; so that facing it, it has the +appearance of a vast fan. The stalk of the leaf is six or eight feet +long, and the leaf itself four or six more. In each head were four or +five branches of seed-pods, in appearance something like the fruit of +the plantain. When they burst each pod was found to contain thirty or +more seeds, in shape like a small bean, covered up with a very fine +fibre of a brilliant purple or blue colour. The most singular +arrangement, which gains this tree the name it bears, is the pure water +which it contains. This is found in the thick part of the stem of each +leaf, at the spot where it rises from the stem, where there is a cavity +formed by nature. The water is evidently collected by the broad leaf, +and carried down a groove in the stem to the bowl, which holds a quart +or more, perhaps, at a time. The traveller's-tree is of great use for +other purposes to the natives. With the leaves they thatch their +houses; the stems serve to portion off the rooms; and the hard outside +bark is beaten flat, and is used for flooring. The green leaves are +used to envelop packages, and sometimes a table is covered with them +instead of a tablecloth, while they are also folded into various shapes, +to be employed as plates, bowls, and even spoons. + +We had to cross a river said to be infested by crocodiles. The natives +walked close to us on either side, beating the water with long sticks to +keep them away. The natives look on them with great dread, and attempt +to propitiate them by charms or sacrifices, instead of endeavouring to +destroy them. They, however, take their eggs in great numbers, and dry +them for food. + +Locusts in great numbers infest some of the provinces; but the people do +not allow them to pass without paying a heavy tribute, and eat them as +one of their chief luxuries, dressed in fat. They fly about two or +three feet from the ground. As soon as they appear, men, women, and +children rush out--the men catch them in sheets, the women and children +pick them from the ground, and then shake them in sacks till the wings +and legs are knocked off. The lighter parts are then winnowed away, and +the bodies are dried in the sun and sold in the markets. + +The natives seem to have the same dread of serpents that they have of +crocodiles. The doctor found one, ten feet long, coiled away on the mat +where he had slept one morning, on going back to look for something he +had left there; but it escaped before it could be killed. + +We slept during our journey sometimes at the habitations of chiefs, +sometimes at peasants' huts, and sometimes at houses in villages +provided for our accommodation. The chiefs' houses were small, but +compactly built. We remarked that the water was kept in large earthen +jars--like those used in the Holy Land, I conclude. The sleeping-places +were neatly arranged round the rooms, and there was a general air of +comfort and respectability perceptible in most of them. Very different +was a peasant's hut when we entered. It was not more than twenty feet +square, divided into two compartments. In the outer were calves, lambs, +and fowls. In the inner, at one end was a bed, and at the foot of it a +fireplace, over which a man was cooking a pot of rice. His wife sat +before a loom, consisting of four upright sticks fixed in the ground, +with rods across. At the distance of seven feet were two short sticks +driven into the ground, connected by a bar, over which was stretched the +woof of silk to be woven. On this simple apparatus the most beautiful +and rich patterns are worked. Silk-worms abound in some of the +provinces, and a very large amount might be produced and form an +important article of trade. + +As we approached the capital we found the villages of the Hovas all +strongly fortified on the summits of hills or rocks. They have but one +narrow and difficult entrance, and are surrounded by one or more deep +ditches, every ridge at the side of the hill being cut through. Great +care, indeed, has been shown in their construction, showing that they +were a warlike and marauding people, and found it necessary to guard +against reprisals from the neighbours they have attacked. + +Antananarivo, the capital, at which we at length arrived, after a +journey of three hundred miles, is a very curious place. It is built on +an oval hill, nearly two miles in length, rising four or five hundred +feet above the surrounding country, and is seven thousand feet higher +than the level of the sea. On the highest part of the hill, and forming +a conspicuous object, is the palace of the queen. It is sixty feet +high, with a lofty and steep roof, with attic windows, and is surrounded +by balconies, one above, the other. The top is surmounted by a huge +golden eagle, with outspread wings, which looks as if able to have a +tough fight with the one which overshadowed the articles from the United +States at, the Great Exhibition. + +The palace of the prince, which is smaller, is on one side, and has also +a golden eagle over it. The dwellings of other members of the royal +family and chief nobility are on either side, while the rest of the +houses, which are only of one story, clothe the sides of the hill, +standing generally on small terraces, wherever the ground has allowed +their formation. The houses are of plain unpainted wood, which gives +them a somewhat sombre and dilapidated appearance. The interiors are, +however, very comfortable, and admirably suited to the climate. + +Captain Frankland had the honour of an audience with the queen, who +received him very graciously, and seemed much pleased with the object of +his visit to the country. Still more interested were we with the prince +royal and the princess Rabodo, his wife, who had for some time become +consistent Christians. We were much struck with the kind and courteous +way in which the prince invariably treated his wife whenever they +appeared in public. We always saw him dressed in a handsome uniform, +and she always appeared in the costume of an English lady. All the +officers of the court were well dressed, either in European uniforms, or +in full native costume, which is very becoming. + +We had a very comfortable house appropriated to us. We found the +climate at this elevation far pleasanter than near the coast, the +thermometer, in the morning, not being higher than 56 degrees to 58 +degrees. A number of the chiefs visited Captain Frankland, to talk +about the productions of the country and the best methods for improving +its resources. Jerry and I meantime made several excursions into the +surrounding country with the doctor, accompanied by a young chief, who +spoke English very well. We one day passed a body of troops, and he +told us that there were forty thousand men forming an army round the +capital besides artillery. Among other places we visited was the +country palace of Radama, called Isoaierana. The top of a hill had been +removed to clear a space for the edifice. It is a wonderful building, +considering the means at the disposal of the architect, but it wants +height to give it grandeur. It is composed entirely of wood, the timber +having been brought from a forest fifty miles off. Rows of balconies +run round it. One hall we entered was a hundred feet long and forty +wide; but that also wanted height to make it appear to advantage. + +From the very slight description I have given of the country, it will be +seen that considerable advances have of late years been made in +civilisation. The prince royal is a most excellently disposed young +man, but his education is defective. Should his life be spared, there +can be no doubt that he will exert himself to carry on the improvements +commenced under the auspices of Radama. Unhappily, his mother and most +of the chief nobility still are heathens, while the severe edicts +against the Christians yet remain in force. However, all must believe +that Christianity will ultimately triumph, and a happy future be in +store for that interesting country. + +We were very sorry when, the captain having concluded his business, we +had once more to get into our palanquins, and to commence our return +journey to the coast. We met with no adventure worthy of being noted, +though we saw a number of curious and interesting plants and shrubs. At +length once more we trod the deck of the _Triton_. The anchor was hove +up, the topsails hoisted, and with a fair breeze we stood to the +southward. We touched at Cape Town, but I will not describe it or the +Table Mountain, of which every one has heard over and over again. One +day we were all on deck, when the Captain and mates and Jerry and I were +taking observations. "I thought so," exclaimed Captain Frankland; "we +have just put a girdle round the world; and now, lads, you will have +spare time enough to tie the knot." In a few weeks after this we +reached the shores of Old England in safety, and though we had heartily +enjoyed our voyage, right glad and thankful too were we to see once more +its snow-white cliffs. + +I spent three days with Captain Frankland's family, and then Jerry and +old Surley, who must not be forgotten, accompanied me to my own home. +All were there for the Christmas holidays, and what between my dear +father and mother's embraces, and my sisters pulling me here and there +to get another and another kiss at my well-browned cheeks, and my +brother's reiterated and hearty thumps on the back, I was almost in as +much danger of being pulled to pieces as I had during any time of the +voyage, and had not Jerry been there to draw off the attention of some +of the party, I do not know what would have been the result. Cousin +Silas soon afterwards joined us, and remained while the ship was +refitting. We spent a very merry Christmas, and no one seemed tired of +hearing us recount our adventures. Old Surley used to sit at our feet, +and he nodded his head and winked his eyes, as much as to say "It is all +true, and if I could but speak I would tell you the same story." I hope +that my readers will receive it in as favourable a way as did my family. +We had learned many lessons during our trip. We had been taught to +respect other people, their manners, and even their prejudices, and to +reflect what we ourselves should have been had we laboured under similar +disadvantages, while at the same time we had seen every reason to love +Old England more and more, and to be deeply grateful for the numberless +inestimable blessings she enjoys. We had been taught, too, to observe +the finger of the Almighty in his wondrous works, and to remark how he +has scattered his precious gifts far and wide over the face of the globe +for the benefit of his creatures. Our midnight watches have not been +unprofitable. Often and often in the calm night we have gazed upward at +the starlit sky and thought upon God. We have had time for reflection. +We have felt our own unworthiness. We have asked ourselves the serious +question, Do we make a good and complete use of the advantages we +possess--of the instruction afforded us--of the great examples set +before us--of the Word of God laid freely open for us? But I might go +on for ever asking similar questions. Happy are those who can make +satisfactory answers. I must conclude by expressing a hope that those +who have gone through these pages will have found some of the amusement +and instruction which Jerry and I obtained in our-- + +Voyage round the World. + +THE END. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's A Voyage round the World, by W.H.G. Kingston + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD *** + +***** This file should be named 23074.txt or 23074.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/3/0/7/23074/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |